IIAS Newsletter 21 by International Institute for Asian Studies

V I S I T

O U R

W O R L D

W I D E

W E B

H O M E P A G E :

H J T P : / / W W W , I I A S .

THE

e, R u 4

2 0 0 0 ° stitute

for A s*

P. O. B O X 9 5 I S , 2 3 0 0 RA L E I D E N , T H E N ET H E R L A N D S , T E L E P H O N E : + 3 1 - 7 1 - 5 2 7

Institutional

Publication 7 7 7 7

NEWS

Some Reflections on the formation o f the Buddha image - an abstract o f the keynote speech by Professor M a u riz io T addei at the South Asian Archaeology conference in Leiden. - (p. 3}

THEME SOUTH S IA N LITERATURE

CENTRAL

ASIA

[JLZ SOUTH

7 O

* - V li

IMDOEAH

I êêÜI Doris jedamski explores what it is that accounts for the appeal o f European examples o f adventure and crime fiction to audiences o f entirely different historical and cultural backgrounds. A research project on the role o f p o p u la r lite ra tu re in the process o f cultural adaptation and transference in Indonesia, -(p. 25)

In this special b oo k section reviewers and academic publishers present and discuss new publications in Asian Studies. Mark T urin appraises a long-awaited Nepali language course and Peter Kloos introduces a Sri Lanka Studies Series in the Humanities and Social Sciences. Much more on pages

34 0 ASIAN

21 0 EAST

ASIA

‘Little has been said o f the In d o n e sia n view o f th e East T im o r A ffa ir. This has impaired the interaction between the actors involved: rhe Western press, governments, and public opinion were out o f sync w ith Indonesia’s officials, m ilitary, and politicians, and vice versa.’ An article by Francois Raillon. -(p. 21)

r\ I

NT ƒ

The F ifth A n n u a l C H IM E Conference, w hich took place in September 1999 at the Academy o f Music in Prague, focused on musical contrasts between villages and cities in China and East Asia. - fp. 30;

NEWS

News from the HAS, including the Asia Update and interviews w ith Professor Barend Jan Terwiel, holder o f an HAS Extraordinary Chair and Professor Vincent Shen, former holder o f the European Chair o f Chinese Studies.

CLARA

NEWS

News from t he research programme ‘Changing Labour Relations in Asia’: conference reports and a vacancy for a visiting fellowship.

54 ESF A S I A COMMITTEE News from the ESF Asia Committee and a report o f the workshop 'Chinese Transnational Enterprises and Entrepreneurship’.

56 I N S T I T U T E S IN THE L I M E L I G H T The EU-China Academic Network The Seminar on Languages and Cultures o f Central Asia The N orth American Taiwan Studies Association The Institute o f International Relations

ASIA ‘• A

MAS

ART

Pink Pcyes

ASIA

SOUTHEAST

29 O

N E W P U B L I C AT 10 IN A S I A N S T UDI ES

The largest collection o f Asian Portuguese Creole folk verse, the Sri Lanka P ortuguese C reole M a n u s c rip t, forms a part o f the Hugh N evill Collection in the British Library. An introduction by Shihan de Silva Jayasuriya. - (p. 19)

16 O

A t m id nig ht on 19 December 1999, the old Portuguese-Chinese city o f M acau has reverted to Chinese sovereignty. There was little or no public debate in the media about the implications o f this change over. J. Abbink wonders how Macau has prepared for the return to China, and what w ill be its legacy and future as a specific urban culture? - (p. 31)

‘Obscured by all the clamour over globalization is the continuing expectancy that social science scholars from the South are s till expected to focus on the South, while scholars from the N orth may research either South or N orth.’ Anthropologist Rajni Palriwala (India) reports on her experiences c o n d u c tin g fie ld w o rk in th e N e th e rla n d s. - (p. 17) The lite ra tu re s o f S outh Asia span an enormous array o f languages, regions, and local cultures, together form ing a unique and virtually inexhaustible record o f the intellectual history o f the Indian subcontinent during the last two centuries. This section, edited by Thomas de Bruijn, presents an overview o f various new developments in research in the modern literatures ofSouth Asia.

For the first time an academic conference on co n te m p o ra ry Burm ese p o litic s was held in Australia. The interest and enthusiasm was such that it grew into a major event. Emily Rudland reports. - (p. 22)

The Samantabhadra Archives: T he N y in g m a Tantras Project. This contribution by David Germano and Robert Mayer is the first in a series o f introductions to Tibetological collections and archives. - (p. 14)

14 O

Short Mews

BBS PI

H* Lv

GENERAL

22 27, T E L E F A X : + 3 1 - 7 1 - 5 2 7 41 62, E - M A I L : 11 A S N E WS @ R U L L ET. Le i d e n U n i v. N L

M alaysian a rc h ite c t Ken Yeang was awarded the 1999 Prince Claus Award for his environmentally responsive work. ‘The ecological imperative has made his structures lively not dull, muscular instead o f flat-chested, and w ith an inviting, gregarious face rather than the blank stare o f a Mafioso behind dark glasses.’ An article by Charles Jencks. - (p. 45)

59 I N D E X I I ASN 21 48 CONF E RE NCE A G E N D A

P R O D U C T S & SERVI CES 43 0

EDITORIAL

E ditorial ~ T t has often been said in these columns: Asia has clearly I

HAS N E W S L E T T E R N ?2 1

February zooo 64 pages ■ E D I T O R I A L OF F I C E

Visiting address: Nonnensteeg 1-3, Leiden Mailing address: HAS, P.O. 80x9515, 2300 RA Leiden, The Netherlands Telephone: +31-71-527 22 27 Telefax: +31-71-527 41 62 E-mail: iiasnews@rullet.leidenuniv.nl http://www.iias.nl ■ E D I T O R I A L STAFF

Editor - Elzeline van der Hoek Co-edttor South Asian Literature -Thom as de Btuiin Central Asia Editor - Ingrid Nooijens South Asia Editor - Netty Bonouvrié Insular Southwest Asia Editor - Sandra Evers Southeast Asia Editor - Dick vander Meij East Asia (China) Editor - Marieke te Booij East Asia (Japan) Editor - Margarita Winkel East Asia (Korea) Editor - Koen De Ceustet Asian Culture Editor - The GATE Foundation English Editor Editor - Rosemary Robson ■ CORRESPONDENTS

Ann Beard (AAS, Ann Arbor) Victor A. van Bijlert (Bengal Studies) Robert Cribb (Australia Correspondent) Leo Douw (Qiaoxiang Programme) Marieke te Bootj (ESF Asia Committee) Leo Schmit (EU, Brussels) Mario Rutten (CASA, Amsterdam) Ratna Saptari I (Changing Labour Relations in Asia, CLARA) Willem Vogelsang (Research School CNWS, Leiden) ■ CONTRIBUTORS

Jan Abbink, Kamran Asdar Ali, Noosgoi Aitantsetseg, Robert Ash, Denise Austin, Maarten Bavinck, Wolfgang Behr, Victor A. van Bijlert, Stuart Blackburn, Henk Blezer, Marieke te Booij, Vladimir I. Braginsky, Thomas de Bruijn, Freek Colombijn, Stephane Corcuff, Heidi Dahles, Vasudha Dalmia, Theo Damsceegt, Alfred Daniels, Olga Deshpande, Nelly van Doorn-Haraer, Leo Douw, Jan Elliott, Christine Everaert, Janie Fung, David Germano, Martin Grofiheim, Michel Hockx, Rik Hoekstra, Vincent Houben, Gustaaf Houtman, Cen Huang, Juha Janhunen, Doris Jedamski, Charles Jencks, Janet Kamphorst, Nico J.G. Kaptein, KarpChon Kim, John Kleinen, Peter Kloos, Karel R. van Kooij, Frank Kouwenhoven, V.V. Krishna, Ku Pi ling, Sabine Kuypers, J. Thomas Lindblad, Marcel van der Linden, Pauline Lunsingh Scheurleer, Erik de Maaker, Robert Mayer, Dick van der Meij, Mark Meulenbeld, P.P. Mishra, Liga Mitenberga, Gerbrand Muller, Shing Müller, Pal Nylri, Lucia Obi, Christina Oestetheld, Rajni Paltiwala, Nathan Porath, Jana Raendchen, Francois Raillon, Martin Ramstedt, Tim Riedel, Laura Rivkin, Lucy Rosenstein, Emily Rudland, Roland Rutgers, Rama Saptari, Sagaree Sengupta, Shihan de Silva Jayasuriya, Elizabeth Sinn, Ivo Smits, Marc R. Spindler, Hein Steinhauer, Wim Stokhof, Andrea Straub, Maurizio Taddei, Gerda Teuns-De Boer, Harish Trivedi, Mark Turin, Caroline Turner, Cathelijne Veenkamp, Veronika Veit, Edward Wang, Uta Weigelt, Marianne L. Wiesebron, Jaushieh Joseph Wu, Robert J. Zydenbos ■ D E S I GN

De Kreeft, Amsterdam / Mark Peeters ■ PRI NTI NG

Dijkman Offset, Diemen ■ I I SN

0929-8738 ■ CI RCULATI ON

22,500 ■ N E X T I SSUE

Deadline: 15 April 2000 Release: 15June zooo Special theme: '400 Years Japan - The Netherlands’ ■ ADVE RT I S E ME NTS

Reservation: 1 May 2000 Submission: 10 May 2000 See also page 64 THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR FACTS AND O PIN IO N S EXPRESSED IN THIS PUBLICATION RESTS EXCLUSIVELY W ITH THE AUTHORS AND THEIR INTERPRETATIONS DO NOT NECESSARILY REFLECT THE VIEWS OP THE IN STITUTE OR ITS SUPPORTERS, THE IM S NEWSLETTER (lIASN) IS PUBLISHED BY HAS AND IS AVAILABLE FREE OF CHARGE.

become an important global partner for Europe. In the A. new world order, existing expertise on Asia in Europe m ust be co-ordinated, improved, and optimized. This can be achieved through, amongst other techniques, making full use o f information technology. In numerous institutes and libraries all over Europe are kept valuable materials which are of great relevance to gaining a better insight into all things Asian - not only materials dating from the colonial era which are still of great importance for understanding contemporary issues, but also a host o f more recent documentation. Millions upon millions of pages filled with all sorts of data, ranging from highly technical information on soil deposits to visual material such as photographs of van ished temple treasures, are waiting to be studied by re searchers from Asia as well as those from the Atlantic area or further afield. However, information about these collec tions is not always easy to come by. Unfortunately many institutions still lack the necessary know-how and means to make their treasures more accessible. Quite apart from this lack of expertise, there is a clear dearth of co-ordination demonstrable between libraries and institutions at national levels, let alone at a European level. Add to this reality the fact that almost every institu tion cherishes its own idiosyncracies in cataloguing, stor ing, and lending regulations, as well as in the degree of ac cessibility o f their materials and (when available) o f their database, and it will be obvious that finding the right manuscripts, photographs, books, and so on, can be a timeconsuming undertaking. Every so often this zealous dig ging may surprise us with unexpected discoveries, but for young, inexperienced researchers and older, busy acade mics alike, the effort o f trawling through poorly accessible data often seems frustrating and unattractive. I believe that the time has come for the major holders of Asian collections in Europe to join forces so as to form a Eu ropean Platform of Asian Collections under the umbrella of the European Science Foundation and/or the European Commission to improve the quality and accessibility of li brary (including digital) collections relevant to Asian Stud ies. The gigantic collections of data pertaining to Asia are part ofa shared Asia-Europe cultural heritage. They should be well preserved and be made accessible to Atlantic as well as Asian scholars in a co-ordinated, coherent way. Scattered all over Europe these collections are of great value in their own right, but their worth can be increased exponentially if they are made accessible online, nationally, regionally, and worldwide. The IIAS plans to invite European libraries

CO-EDITOR

PAGE

and other institutions with important Asia collections to commence discussions about the creation of a European Internet Service for Asian Studies (EISAS). EISAS could comprise an Internet-based infrastructure into which bibliographical and other data sources will be integrated. A vital reinforcement to classic library services, the EISAS site will be made available to scholars and all other interested parties. General information on Asian Studies and scientific sources that are available at various institutes in Europe will be presented in a uniform fashion and heterogeneous databases of various origins will be linked so as to be searchable with ju st one single search ac tion. In this way, the Internet may be used to approach the scientific apparatus in an unprecedented manner by creat ing innovative intersections, relations, and cut-outs. The source materials to be made available through EISAS could include: - bibliographical databases; - databases which describe visual material; - important, much used, but poorly accessible printed ref erence works; - unique sources which belong to the national heritage of European member states. The importance of such a service to Asian Studies in Eu rope is evident in various fields: 1) scientific research: elec tronic documentation of primary sources facilitates the feasibility of innovative research; 2) academic education: the service provides the use o f original sources for the MA phase of university study and in PhD research at various re search schools; 3) cultural education: the service will create the possibility for a public beyond the confines of the acad emic world to gain access to an important corpus in the na tional heritage; 4) facilitation: the service will enable other parties to link up with a variety of information relevant to Asian Studies; 5) visibility: the EISAS will contribute to the more extensive profiling of the important position enjoyed by Asian Studies in Europe. Needless to say, setting up such an Internet service on the basis of European co-operation in library resources on Asia will not be easy: costs, standardization, and data-form atting are only some of the issues to be solved. Given the great importance, however, that some national govern ments and the European Commission seem to attach to the improvement of research infrastructures, it may be a good idea indeed to organize a workshop and to prepare a work ing paper. This draft could play a role at national and European meetings at which the objectives for the sixth frame pro gramme will be established. Reactions are invited. Happy millennium. ■

FOR T H I S

WI M S T O K H O F

Director o f the IIAS

ISSUE'S

THEME

' S O U T H A S I A N LI TERATURE'

T H O M A S DE B R U I J N In his PhD ‘The Ruby Hidden in the Dust’, Thomas de Bruijn ex plored the language employed by Sufi poets in northern India in the Middle Ages. Currently he has shifted his focus to contem porary India. For the period June 1998 to June zooo he was grant ed a post-doctoral fellowship by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research (NWO). During this time he has been working at the International Institute for Asian Studies as an af filiated research fellow. His project is entitled ‘Nayi Kahani: New stories and new positions in the literary field o f Hindi literature after 1947’. Thomas de Bruijn calls for closer co-operation be tween sociology and the study o f literature. ■ By ELZELI NE VAN DER HOEK

It appears as tltoiyhyou made a major shift inyour work afteryour PhD. Initially I had planned to continue my Sufi research, until I was given the chance to take part in the NWO re search programme ‘The Impact of In stitutions in the Literary Field’. There is a continuity in the sense that the medieval period is much more directly the forerunner of pre-modern and

2 • IIAS n e w s l e t t e r 14521 • February zooo

contemporary India, than is the classi cal India of the Vedas. Issues like the relationship between Hindus and Muslims originated in the medieval period and are still highly problemat ic Asociological problem. It may seem as though Indologists merely read texts, but it is in these that one finds the ideas and the cul tural products of an age. There is still

MA S The International Institute for Asian Studies is a post-doctoral institute jointly established in 1993 by the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences (KNAW), the Vrije Universiteit van Amsterdam (VUA), the Universiteit van Amsterdam (UvA) and Universiteit Leiden (UL). It is mainly financed by the Ministry of Education, Culture and Sciences. The main objective of the HAS is to encourage Asian Studies in the Humanities and Social Sciences (the alpha and gamma sciences: ranging from linguistics and anthropology to political science, law, environmental and developmental studies) and to promote national and international scientific co-operation in these fields. One of the tasks undertaken by the IIAS is to play an active role in the gathering, co-ordination and dissemination of information on Asian Studies.The institute plays a facilitating role by bringing (inter-) national parties together. Situated in a small country of which the political influence is rather limited, the Institute has opted for the flexible role of intermediator on an international level. Furthermore, in keeping with the tradition in the Netherlands of transferring goods and ideas, the IIAS serves as a clearinghouse for knowledge and information. This entails activities such as providing information services; constructing an international network; setting up international co-operative projects and research programmes; and providing facilities for Dutch and foreign scholars to conduct research at the IIAS (and/or at corresponding institutes in the Netherlands and abroad).Through its so-called ‘Schiphol function' the IIAS establishes contacts between Asianists from all over the world. Research fellows at a post-PhD level are temporarily employed by or affiliated to the Institute, either within the rramewwU of a collaborative research programme, or on an individual basis. The IIAS organizes seminars, workshops, and conferences, publishes a newsletter (circulation approximately 20,000 copies) and has established a database which contains information about researchers and current research in the field of Asian Studies within Europe and world-wide. A Guide to Asian Studies In Europe, a printed version of parts of this database was published in l998.The Institute also has its own server and a Web site on the Internet to which a growing number of institutes related to Asian Studies are linked. Since 1994 the IIAS has been appointed to run the secretariat of the European Science Foundation Asia Committee (Strasbourg).Together with this Committee the IIAS shares the objective of improving the international co operation in the field of Asian Studies (additional information can be acquired at the HAS). In 1997 the Strategic Alliance was established: an international co-operation between the Nordic Institute of Asian Studies (NIAS), Copenhagen, and the IIAS. The Institut fur Asienkunde (Hamburg) joined the Alliance in 1998.The Strategic Alliance was set up to enhance research on (contemporary) Asia and to create networks in Asia and Europe with academic and non-academic institutions and actors.

An interview an enormous gap between sociology, the ‘study of real life’, and the study of texts, but I believe a combination of the two is absolutely possible. The modern literature contains a rich Continued on pa,ge7 ^

Upon the initiative of the HAS, and in close co-operation with NIAS, the Programme for Europe-Asia Research Linkages (PEARL) was established in Seoul in October 1998 during a meeting of 35 researchers from ASEM (Asia-Europe Meetings) member countries, representing leading Asian and European Studies departments and institutions for research funding. PEARL seeks to enhance AsiaEurope research co-operation and a top level Asian/European presence in the ASEM process.The IIAS provides the Secretariat for PEARL.

GENERAL

N E WS

Some Reflections on the Formation of the Buddha Image The process o f formation o f the anthropomorphic image o f the Buddha eventually led to a model capable o f imposing itself throughout the whole Buddhist world. The choices made dur ing this process were not shared by all the geographical areas involved - it is now clear that the so-called ‘kapardin’ type was opposed for some time to the Gandharan type. - An abstract o f the keynote speech by Professor Maurizio Taddei at the South Asian Archeaology Conference, Lei den, July 5, 1999 . M By MAURI ZI O TADDEI

'The sexuality o f male figures in Indian art is consistently underemiphasized’

he well-known gold token from Tilya— tepe (50 BC-AD 50) is a clear synthesis of the iconographical problems the Buddhists had to face in the years which saw the ap pearance of the anthropomorphic image of the Buddha - i.e., the prince ly vs. the spiritual aspect. Such con trapositions cannot be explained in merely doctrinal terms. Professor Hartel (1985, 1996) wrote that the socalled kapardin Buddha / Bodhisattva images from Mathura embody the Master, in clear contrast to the medi tative Gandharan Buddha, as a royal figure, Le, as a vision of the Mahapurusa, in which dwell the essential powers of a Cakravartin as well as those of a Buddha. It appears that the kapardin Buddha is an attempt to con nect the ruler to the Buddha closely. Nothing really new in itself, though the magnitude of this ideological set ting is evidenced by various concomi tant circumstances, underscored by Hartel himself Quite recently, Vishakha Desai (1997) observed that the sexuality of male figures in Indian art 'is consis tently underemphasized, or not mentioned at all’ in art-historical es says, due to the traditional male dominance of scholarship. In partic ular she says that ‘the increased focus on the physicality of divine and semi-divine beings and on the explicit depiction of their genitalia’ in Mathura Kushan iconography, in cluding the Buddha, ‘may suggest theological [...] significances that should not be overlooked’. I think we can agree with Desai when she says that these representations of the male divinity ‘are directly linked with the characteristic features of a chakravartin mahapurusha, an ide alised superman or ruler’. Thus the fact that the Buddha / Bodhisattva figures in Kushan Mathura show very well-articulated male genitalia, is another proof that they actually were representations of the Buddha as a king. Even recent contributions take as a starting point the not so penetrat ing reflections Alfred Foucher devel oped on the subject at the beginning of the twentieth century. Foucher (1912.) believed that the Gandharan Buddha was a real iconographical failure because he does not show the tonsure which is the characteristic of a monk, etc. What is crucial here is to under score the fact that some of Foucher’s premises are wrong. Actually it is

■or new publications in Asian Studies, p lease refer to pp. 3 4 - 4 2

not true that there is a contradiction between the literary lives of the Bud dha and iconography - no literary text ever stated that Siddhartha shaved his hair; they only say that he cut away his hair along with his tur ban (e.g., Buddhacarita, Johnston (ed.) 193d, pp. 88-89): dccheda citram tnukutam sakesam, ‘he cut off his deco rated headdress with the hair en closed in it’. The artists were thus perfectly within their rights to rep resent the Buddha with a tuft of hair, though not with the long knot ted hair which was the characteristic of the young males of high caste. The ciida-chedana is well documented in later art but it appears to be rare in Gandharan art: a new specimen is made known here. Let us now revert to the chignon which characterizes the Buddha’s head. It is only too well known that the term tisnïsa designates both the turban and the cranial protuberance which is one of the Buddha’s main laksanas. It is the present trend in the study of Buddhist iconography to take for certain that the usnïsa is a hair-knot which was later interpret ed as a cranial protuberance, as it was suggested seventy years ago by A.K. Coomaraswamy and J.N. Banerjea. In recent years, other scholars (Spagnoli, 1995; Krishan 1996) accept ed this old view without any further discussion. This interpretation may be true when we deal with the Mathura kapardin Buddhas - it is not true in Gandhara. My point is that there are some Gandharan Buddhas which unmistakably show that their hair conceals a cranial protuberance. I believe that what was suggested by Stella Kramrisch in the thirties should still be kept in mind and meditated upon (Kramrisch 1935). One could refer to many examples. I prefer to limit myself to a few fairly early ones whose interpretation is beyond any possible doubt: from Butkara I (Swat), Taxila, etc. I would also include in the list, the head of the fasting Siddhartha in Lahore Museum. This induces me to sug gest that the presence of the usnïsa as a protuberance in Gandharan art as opposed to the elsewhere predomi nant kaparda type is a confirmation of the fact that Gandhara looked at the Buddha as to an accomplished yo^m , much more than a cakravartin (cf Klimburg-Salter & Taddei 1991). A few words should be added con cerning the alleged Greek derivation of the Gandharan Buddha. In a re cent article, M. Spagnoli (1995) has resumed the line of reasoning of

Foucher concerning this problem and tried to connect Apollo’s hair-do with the iconography of the Gand haran Buddha. Needless to say, she could not really point to any corre spondence between Apollo’s topknot and the Buddha’s usnïsa, rather she suggested that there may be some connection between Apollo’s hair-do and Maitreya’s loop-shaped top-knot. But Maitreya, from the viewpoint of iconography, is not the Buddha. It thus appears that Mathura first depicted the Lord in a princely as pect, as a ‘Bodhisattva’: at the same time Gandhara was developing an other type of icon, the meditative monk-like Buddha. Mathura ap pears to have laid stress on the Bod hisattva as a symbol of dominance, Gandhara on the Buddha as a model for mankind. We might say that Mathura re mained faithful to the old gods and fashioned the Tathagata keeping them in mind, though Kushan Mathura introduced a significant novelty, namely the depiction of the male genitalia, which were not visi ble in most of the pre-Kushan divine images; on the other hand, Gand hara felt free to put more emphasis on the meditative aspect of the Lord. The displayed male sex of the Mathura icons could not be accepted by a culture which saw in the Bud dha a recluse who had even over come any yogic accomplishment from a certain point of view he could be thought of as sexless. It will be enough to look at any ‘Gupta’ image of the Buddha from the Mathura re gion for understanding to what ex tent the ‘Gandharan’ conception eventually prevailed. What appears to he evident is that the great change in attitude towards the figure of the Tathagata is to be connected with Gandhara rather than with Mathara and apparently involved the Mathura region and the rest of Northern India by the late Kushan or the beginning of the Gupta period. The cultural environ ment which produced the Kushan Bodhisattvas from Mathura could not be the same which saw the com pilation of the lists of laksanas in cluding the ‘hidden sex' (a subject certainly to be discussed at length). In conclusion, I think we have to dismiss the old contrapositions (In dian vs. Greek) and try instead to focus on the original contributions of Gandhara itself. It would be very easy to explain the ostentation of the male sex in the Buddha / Bodhisattva images - if it were a characteristic of Gandhara - on the basis of the Hel lenistic tradition of divine and hero ic male nakedness. But ‘Hellenizing’ Gandhara chose the less ‘Hellenistic’ solution - and it was a successful choice. ■

References - Desai, V.N. Rejections on the History and

Historiography o f M ale Sexuality in Early Indian Art In: Representing the Body: Gender issues in Indian art, V. D ehejia (ed.), N ew D elhi, 1997, pp. 42-55. - Foucher, A.

L’origine grecque de Vintage du Bouddha In: Conferencesfaites au musée Guimet en 1912 (Annales d u M usée G u im et B ibliothèque de vulgarisation, XXXVIII), C halons-sur-Saone,

1912, pp. 231-272 - H artel, H. The Concept o f the Kapardin Buddha Type o f M athura In: South Asian Archaeology 1983, J. Schotsm ans & M. T addei (eds), N aples, 1985, pp. 653-678 - H artel, H. The Term Devaputra in the Inscriptions

o f Kapardin Buddha Images from M athura: An incidental observation In: FestschriftDieter Schlingloff zur Vollendung des 65. Lebensjahres, F. W ilhelm (ed.), Reinbek, 1996, pp. 99-108 K lim burg-Salter, D.E. & M. T addei The U snïsa and the Brahmarandhra: An aspect o f light sym bolism in Gandharan Buddha images In: Aksayanlvi Essays Presented to D rD ebala M itra in adm iration o f

her scholarly contributions, G. B hattacharya (ed.), D elhi: Sri S atguru, 1991, PP- 73-93 K ram risch, S.

Emblem s o f the Universal Being Im jo u m al o f the Indian Society o f Oriental Art, C alcutta, 1935, pp. 148-165, Repr. in Exploring In d ia 's

Secret Art, B. Stoler M iller (ed.), Philadelphia, 1983, pp. 130-140. K rishan, Y. The Buddhalmage: Its origin and development N ew D elhi, 1996 Spagnoli, M. Note sullagenesi jigurativa del Buddha gandharico In: Rivista degh Studi O nentali, LXiX 3-4, Rome, 1996, pp. 429-445 Taddei, M. Ancora sul Buddhagandharico: premesse ad una discussione In: Annali Istituto Universitario Oriëntale, 56/3, N apoli, 1998,

pp. 407-417

For a full report on South Asian Archaeology 1999 Conference, please refer to HAS Newsletter 20, page 20.

F ebruary 2000 •

h a s n e w s l e t t e r n ?21

•3

GENERAL 30

J U LY

1999

UNIVERSITY

QUEENSLAND,

AUSTRALIA

Asian Religion On Friday, 30th July, 1999, a workshop on Asian religion was held at the University o f Queensland, in memory o f the late Clayton Bredt. It was organized by Chi-kong Lai, Director o f the Asian Business History Centre and was jo in tly sponsored by the Departments o f Studies in Religion, History, Asian Lan guages and Studies; and by the Asian Studies Centre, Asian Business History Centre and the International Relations and Asian Studies Research U n it. The workshop revealed several im portant features o f Asian religions, including: their rela tionship w ith individuals and society; their historical origins and future direction; and their evolution and endurance. By D E N I S E A U S T I N

artin Stuart-Fox (Head, History, JL Y j l UQ} opened the 1 workshop by discussing the importance and diver sity o f religion in Asian culture and therefore the necessity for very broad coverage by the speak ers. John Moorhead (History, UQ} paid a moving tribute to Clayton Bredt, as a valuable member o f the History Department, from the early 1960s, particularly for his involve ment in the Asian Business History Centre, w ith Chi-Kong Lai. He noted that it was appropriate to hold a workshop on Asian religion in his honour because he was highly re spected in Quaker circles for the

5 >

JULY

BANDUNG,

depth o f his spiritual experience. In the keynote address, Sarva Daman Singh (History, UQ} discussed the relationship o f individuals and soci ety, w ith the three incarnational reli gions in India: Hinduism, Bud dhism, and Jainism. Hinduism pro fesses that everything arises out o f the universal self and must find its way back to the universal reality, through the individual’s life cycle o f study, household experience, income earning, retirement, and self-con centration. By contrast, Singh noted that Buddhism emphasizes the u ni versal experience o f sorrow, resulting from the impermanence o f life which individuals can escape only through the Noble Eightfold Path. The speak er described the ancient religion o f Jainism as a dualistic faith which

NEWS

holds that individual souls have to find their purity out o f the clutches o f matter, to rise to the highest level o f the cosmos. Jainism’s vow o f non violence has left an indelible effect on the pysche o f India. Regarding religion in relation to society, Singh pointed out that the caste system in India was a product o f historical circumstance - not H indu philosophy - and that reli gion led to the development o f the welfare state, in Indian government policy. W hilst weakened by Hindu assimilation, Islamic aggression and British imperialism, Buddhism has seen some resurgence in Indian soci ety. The individual and social ram ifi cations o f these three religions have shaped Indian culture, through a legacy o f spiritual salvation, freedom o f conscience, and philosophical d i versity. The first round table discussion contrasted the origins o f early Chi nese religion w ith future possibili ties. Rod Bucknell (Asian Studies and Religion, UQ} explained how com parisons between Pali and Chinese versions o f Buddhist texts can reveal a clearer picture o f early Buddhism. Choong Mun-Keat (Religion, UQ} compared original w ritings o f the Pali Vedana Samyutta and the Chi nese Shou Xiangying, finding signifi cant similarities. M artin Lu (Direc tor, Centre for East-West Cultural and Economic Studies, Bond Univer sity] bridged the past and present, by proposing a change in the original concept o f a Confucian sage because

technological advancements mean the expansion o f decision-making powers, the internalization o f the zen and the development o f noncontact religious relationships via the Internet.

‘Cultural Christians’ Denise Austin (History, UQ} pre sented Christianity in modern and contemporary China as a vibrant faith, centred on the love o f God. She held that missionary contributions were significant, particularly in the areas o f education and social reform. However, i t is the indigenous church which is a th riving social phenome non in China today, making Chris tianity a Chinese religion. Enoch Choy (Asian Studies, UQ} discussed the growing significance o f ‘Cultural Christians’ in China, whose cultural and theological visions merge to con struct a humanistic theology in flu enced by Document 19 which em phasizes scientific research in reli gious theory. Historical research, w ith technological adaptation and cultural indigenization makes for significant future possibilities in the religions o f Asia. Another round table discussion centred on the evolution and en durance o f religions in Japan, ancient China, and post-Mao China. John Weik (History, UQ} traced the devel opment o f religion in Japan from tra ditional Shrine Shinto worship o f na ture and ancestors, to Buddhist-in fluenced Imperial Shinto, finally to nationalistic, State Shinto as a reac

tion to Western invasion. Conrad Young (Asian Studies, UQ} revealed evidence o f divination, name taboos, and other forms o f ancestor worship from China’s Neolithic period and though declining during the West ern Chou dynasty, these endured to become central to Confucian patriar chal and patrilineal culture. C.L. Chiou (Government, UQ} proposed that, although Mao’s legacy is one o f social transformation - his shrines are venerated; his picture is carried for good luck; and his memorial stands at Tiananmen - the very ele ments o f Maoism hinder it from evolving into a religion. Mao pro mised no sagely example, heavenly paradise, human harmony, or spiri tual salvation - only violence and class struggle - and the Falun Gong affair has verified that religion is not welcome in Communist China. Nev ertheless, because o f the enduring nature o f Asian religions, further evolution cannot be excluded. This workshop on Asian religion revealed that religion plays a signifi cant role in affecting individuals and also society, as a whole. It has been an integral and enduring part o f Asian culture from ancient times to the present day. It is believed that the in troduction o f multim edia technolo gy w ill serve to promote further evo lutionary development o f religion throughout the world. ■

Denise Austin, Asian Business History Center, The University o f Queensland.

a tla s ASIA Inauguration Conference entrepreneurship & Education in Tourism

1999 INDONESIA

W/ / //.

m 9 6

Tilburg University ]

Entrepreneurship and Education in Tourism On 5-7 July 1999, the ATLAS Asia inaugural conference took place in Bandung, Indonesia. ATLAS Asia is a section o f the Eu ropean Association for Tourism and Leisure Education (ATLAS]. I t was initiated to provide a forum for the increasing number o f Asian institutions and professional bodies engaged in tourism and leisure education and research. By H E I D I D A H L E S

TLAS Asia aims to develop transna tional initiatives in 1 tourism and leisure eduI cation, particularly w ithin Asia and between educa tional institutions in Asia and Eu rope. At present ATLAS Asia member ship is largely concentrated in In donesia. In accordance w ith an obvi ous demand from Indonesian insti tutes o f higher education and sup ported by a special funding pro gramme o f the Dutch M in istryof Ed ucation and Culture, promotional ac tivities were largely focused on the archipelago. Since its inception, ATLAS Asia has booked considerable progress in recruiting members in other parts o f Asia. The association currently has about 60 members in 15 different Asian countries. The ATLAS Asia inaugural confer ence was prepared as a jo in t effort be tween Tilburg University, Vrije Uni4

•

h a s

n e w s l e t t e r

versiteit Amsterdam, ATLAS, the In ternational Institute for Asian Stud ies, and the Center for Research in Tourism at the In stitu t Teknologi Bandung. In order to address a theme that is central to the concern o f ATLAS Asia and its members, emphasis was laid on the relationship between the private tourism sector and issues o f education and training for tourism. The purpose o f the conference was to map the field o f tourism education, both academic and vocational, to compare different educational prac tices and experiences in Europe and the Asia-Pacific region, to explore the need for education and training among large and small private tourism enterprises, and to discuss tourism employment and industry growth. The conference was attended by 130 participants from Europe, the United States, Canada, and the AsiaPacific region. Keynote presentations were provid ed by Drs Acep Hidayat (Resources and Technology Development Agen-

W 2 1 • February 2000

cy, M inistry o f Tourism, Arts and Cul ture, Indonesia], Dr Geoffrey Wall (Waterloo University, Canada], Prof Ida I Dewa Gede Raka (ITB], Drs H. Kodyat (Institute for Indonesian Tourism Studies (Jakarta], Prof Kaye Chon (University o f Houston, U.SA], Prof F.M. Hartanto (ITB], Prof M. Callari Galli (University o f Bologna, Italy) and Dr John Swarbrooke, Sheffield Hallam University, Great Britain). A forum discussion, chaired by ATLAS Asia co-ordinator Heidi Dahles, addressed a number o f inter related issues. The first revolved around the nature-nurture debate as applied to entrepreneurship: can en trepreneurial skills be acquired through education and training or does a person have to be born an en trepreneur to be successful in busi ness? As most o f the forum members had a background in tourism educa tion, a consensus was reached that ed ucation and training considerably en hance entrepreneurial skills. The sec ond issue revolved around the ques tion as to whether tourism studies is a science requiring academic education or a profession requiring vocational training. The debate resulted in a compromise: while tourism employ ment in the industry requires a welltrained labour force, trainers, and pol

icy-makers need the feedback re quired by scholars w ith an academic background. About 25 papers were presented ad dressing topics like training in ecotourism, guiding and interpretation, local participation in tourism, innov ative approaches in tourism develop ment, small-scale tourism enterpris es, curriculum development, and cul tural tourism in new Asian destina tions. The organizers are preparing two publications resulting from the conference: the proceedings w ill be published by the Center for Research on Tourism o f ITB, while ATLAS Asia is compiling a volume o f selected pa pers. Immediately following the confer ence, ATLAS Asia and the ITB launched a very exciting venture: the first ATLAS Asia-sponsored summer course on ‘Challenges o f Tourism Management’ held at the Center for Research on Tourism o f the ITB. The course attracted 26 participants from Indonesia, Cambodia, and Malaysia. Most o f the participants had a back ground in provincial administration

(ten different Indonesian provinces sent officials entrusted w ith tourism policy issues to Bandung) or in acade mic and vocational tourism training. There were also a few participants from private companies, in particular the hotel sector and travel agencies. The lecturers - from the ITB, Sheffield Hallam University, University o f N orth London, Tilburg University, and Vrije Universiteit Amsterdam were recruited because o f their exper tise in tourism management and marketing and their long-standing interest in tourism education in Southeast Asia. Both the lecturers and the participants enjoyed the well-or ganized course because o f the interna tional atmosphere and the compara tive approach. A follow-up o f this course is planned to take place in Bali in June 2000 and in Hainan (China) in October 2000. ■ Dr H e id i D ah les is Assistant Professor at D epartment o f Culture, Organisation, and Management, Vrije Universiteit Amsterdam De Boelelaan 1081, 1081 HV Amsterdam The Netherlands, E-mail: h.dahles@scw.vu.nl

GENERAL 21 ► 2 4 S E P T E M B E R , 1 9 9 9 U N I V E R S I T E I T L E I DE N, THE

NE WS

NETHERLANDS

Evaluating Visual Ethnography The con feren ce ‘E valuatin g Visual E thnography: Research, Analysis, R epresen tation , and C u ltu re’ o p en ed at th e Faculty Club o f th e U n iv ersite it L eiden w ith sp eeches by Professor Reim ar Schefold, D r D irk J. N ijla n d (b o th o f Leiden), and Pro fessor Jean R ouch (M usée d e 1’H o m m e, Paris) ad d ressin g th e prim e issu es o n w h ich it was con centrated. T he conference m arked th e retirem en t o f D r N ijla n d , w h o has headed th e Lei d en V isual E th nograph y sectio n for a lm o st 30 years. By ERI K DE MAAKER

rofessor Schefold stressed that at the Anthropology De partm ent o f Universiteit Leiden, which hosted the conference, Visual Ethno graphy already has a history o f near ly five decades. During these years, many ethnographic films have been produced, generally based on exten sive anthropological research. Most notably Nijland and his predecessor, Professor Adrian A. Gerbrands (1917-

1997), have made significant contri butions to the development o f a the oretical perspective on the utiliza tion o f visual media in anthropolog ical research. Senior anthropologist and ethnographic filmmaker Rouch looked back to the year 1980, when an honorary doctorate was conferred on him by the Universiteit Leiden. On this occasion, his close col leagues, Joris Ivens and Henri Storck, were present and they were filmed by Rouch him self in the notorious Cinemafia - Rencontre I (1981). ‘Paying tribute to the ancestors’, Rouch se-

(Advertisement)

Whose Millennium? Asian Studies Association of Australia

13th Biennial C onferen ce 3 - 5 July 2000 The University of Melbourne Australia

Internet: www.asaa2000.unimelb.edu.au email: c.burnett@asialink.unimelb.edu.au

lected a fragment from this film, which was screened during the opening session to commemorate his friend Henri Storck, who had passed away five days earlier. Bringing Leiden scholars together with ten specialists of other major centres for Visual Ethnography in France, the UK, Germany, Japan, and the USA, the conference aimed at comparing distinct theoretical per spectives and practical approaches. Explicitly taking ethnographic films as a starting point for the debate, the conference attempted to proceed from ‘praxis’ to ‘theory’, that is, from the concrete to the more abstract. It was this focusing on an extensive evaluation o f films made by the par ticipants that determined its format. First, the films concerned were screened (‘evening screenings'). Next, generally the following day, one and half hour sessions were devoted to each film. The filmmaker would read a paper on the making of the film; then a discussant reflected on both the paper and the film. Each day was concluded by a round table led by the day’s chairman discussing the issues that had emerged during that day's presentations at a more abstract level. The conference was sponsored by: Research School of Asian, African, and Amerindian Studies (CNWS); Royal Netherlands Academy o f Arts and Sciences (KNAW); Nederlands Fonds voor de Film (Amsterdam); In ternational Institute for Asian Stud ies (Leiden-Amsterdam); Leids Universiteits Fonds (LUF); the Faculty of Social and Behavioural Sciences, and the Department o f Cultural and So cial Studies, Universiteit Leiden.

Evening screenings In the evening the first three films were screened: The Shadow o f the Sun (Dogon, Mali) by Dr Nadine Wanono (CNRS, Paris); Teyyam, the Annual Visit o f the God Vishnumurti (Kerala, India) by Erik de Maaker (Universiteit Lei den); and Seven Young Gods o f Fortune:

Fertility Rite o f Dosojtn (rural Japan) by Dr Yasuhiro Omori (National Muse um o f Ethnology, Osaka). Since the screenings had been widely adver tised, and thanks to the sponsors were accessible free o f charge to any one interested, that evening the au dience grew even larger than ju st the participants in the conference. This

'In anthropology a more prom inent role should be allotted to the ‘visual'

trend continued during the subse quent ‘Evening Screenings’, which were attended on average by some 50-70 people. The following day Professor Jos Platenkamp (University o f Münster) chaired the session ‘Research and Analysis Using Audio-Visual Media’. Starting out w ith a paper read by Paul Folmer (Universiteit Leiden) on his research on marriage rituals of the M anding o f Senegal, attention was directed not towards ethno graphic film as a document, but to the m anner in which the use o f video recordings can enhance the outcome of ethnographic research. Next, Wanono discussed her film, made in co-operation w ith Dr Philippe Lourdou (Université de Paris X), on the succession o f a priest among the

20 MARCH 2 0 0 0 LEI DEN, THE N E T H E R L A N D S

Towards the Millennium Round Asia, The European t

I 1 he collapse of the I Soviet Union has J L hastened integra tion processes in Europe, Latin America, and Asia. Political integration has received renewed emphasis in Europe, but for Asia and Latin America eco nomic integration is on the top of the agenda. Latin America has adopted some elements of European style eco nomic co-operation, but is also ex posed to U.S. led ‘globalization’. The ‘Asian crisis’ of 1997 has slowed down the co-operation within the APEC

Short News

framework, and damaged the eco nomic and political cohesion of ASEAN. The economic slowdown of the Chinese economy and tensions with the U.S. over Taiwan make agreement over the PRC’s accession to the WTO more difficult, and there are also questions concerning the posi tion of India towards global economic cooperation as represented by new proposals for the Millennium Round. In each of the three continents the main players - the core states of the EU, Japan, and the United States are concerned about the direction their

Dogon of Mali. The afternoon was devoted to Omori’s attem pts to re fine techniques for video elicitation when doing fieldwork in rural Japan. That evening Song o f the Hamar Herdsmen (Ethiopia) by Professor Ivo Strecker and Professor Jean Lydall, and Sacrifice o f Serpents: the Festival o f Indrayani; Kathmandu 1992/94 by N ij land, Bert van den Hoek (Univer siteit Leiden), and Bal Gopal Shrestha (Tribhuvan University, Kathmandu, Nepal/Universiteit Leiden) were screened. The third conference day was de voted to ‘The Visual Representation of Anthropological Research’, and chaired by Dr Jonathan Benthall (Royal Anthropological Institute, London). The first paper was read jointly by Van den Hoek, Shrestha, and Nijland, on the making of their film in Nepal. De Maaker (Univer siteit Leiden) discussed the making o f his film on the Indian Teyyam rit ual, and the manner in which the participants in the filmed ritual as sessed it. Strecker and Lydall talked about their thirty years o f research among the Hamar of Southern Ethiopia. Janine Prins (filmmaker, Leiden/Amsterdam), for years deeply engaged in ethnographic film mak ing, discussed their work. That evening the film O f M en and Mares (Zeeland, the Netherlands) by Metje Postma (Universiteit Leiden) and a first version of Boarded Up (Amster dam, The Netherlands) by Steef Meyknecht (Universiteit Leiden) was shown. The last day was devoted to ‘The Narrative in Ethnographic Film’. Postma read the day’s first paper, ex patiating on the process by which her film on Dutch draughthorses had come about. The last paper was read by Meyknecht, who talked about the making o f his film on the demolition and rebuilding of a nine teenth-century quarter in the city of Amsterdam. Dr Nijland concluded the confer ence with a farewell lecture. He paid attention to the emergence of Visual Ethnography as a sub-discipline, and specified the reasons why in his opinion the ‘visual’ plays a prime and even to a certain extent autonomous role in the hum an mind. As a conse quence, he argued, in anthropology, as the study o f cultured and social ized hum an behaviour, a more prom inent role should be allotted to the ‘visual’ in order for scholars to come to a truly holistic understand ing o f culture. During and after the conference the guests expressed their satisfac tion with the quality and ambiance o f the conference. The renowned vi sual anthropologist Karl G. Heider wrote: ‘It was the best organized con ference I have been to - by showing the films the night before and then spending plenty o f time discussing them the next day, we really were able to think out the various issues. (As opposed to the usual strategy of showing a dozen films a day w ith 20 minutes to discuss each)’. The con ference proceedings will be pub lished as an edited volume, including a Digital Video Disk with selected film fragments. ■

U nio,and. Latin America foreign (economic) policies in a period of rapid change. None of the three players is able to impose its own model of global co-operation without taking into account the other major players, but also factors such as China, the ASEAN, India, and MERCOSUL.

b. Concepts for global co-operation against the background of different models of regional integration (ASEAN, APEC, MERCOSUL, EU). ■

This symposium will focus on two issues: a. Practical policies and strategies of the EU, MERCOSUL, and Japan to wards the question o f global eco nomic cooperation (the M illenni um Round);

Faculty o f Arts

for more information: Dr M arianne L W iesebron Department Languages and Cultures o f Latin America P.O. Box 9515 2300 RA Leiden The Netherlands

Erik de M aaker (WOTROICNWS),

E-mail:Wiesebron@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

e-mail: maaker@rulfsw.leidenuniv.nl February 2 0 0 0 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r n ? 2 1 • 5

GENERAL

Between Culture and Religion Muslim w om en s rights This past sum m er, I made a research trip to Indonesia to hold interviews for a book I am preparing about M uslim W omen Leaders in Indonesia. Funding for this trip came from grants from Valparaiso University and from the International Insti tute for Asian Studies in Leiden, the N etherlands. I also was invited to an international m eetin g about strategies in advo cating M uslim w om en’s rights. Here are som e im pressions o f this unique event that was entitled ‘Between Culture and Reli g io n ’: D iscussing M uslim w om en’s rights. By NELLY VAN DO ORN-HARDER

t the end of July, around sixty reli gious leaders, so cial activists, and scholars (both women and men) from different countries in Asia and the Middle East gathered in Yogyakarta for a meeting sponsored by the Ford Foundation. Their goal was to discuss whether or not organizations that advocate women’s rights actually succeed in safeguarding those rights. The meeting was held in Indonesia be cause its Muslim women’s organiza tions have been instrumental in pro moting the position of women since 1917. Furthermore, during this past decade, in Indonesia, programmes have been developed concerning the re-interpretation of Islamic religious sources. These programmes are unique because the conclusions and new ideas they generate are not confined to acad emic circles, but are disseminated to a wider audience via Qur’an schools, workshops, and publications. The participants at the meeting studied issues such as women’s educa tion, women’s roles in the public/political sector, domestic violence, repro ductive health rights, and how women participate in the re-interpretation of the Islamic religious sources. Also, there were highly technical and indepth discussions about the re-interpretation of the Islamic Jurisprudence (Fiqh) concerning woman’s position. The participants represented organi zations that ranged from Aisyiyah, the women’s branch of the Indonesian Re

formist Muhammadiyah organization that has existed since 1917, to Middle Eastern scholars of gender studies. The Ratu Hemas, the wife of the Sul tan of Yogyakarta, used her opening speech to state that the Qu’ran does not demean women, but societies do by considering women as weak and less important and by ignoring the special gifts that women contribute to the fabric of life. In spite o f women re ceiving higher levels of education than ever before, women still find them selves ‘trapped between culture and religion,’ she stated. Nuriyah Rahman, the wife of the former chairman of the Nahdatul Ulama, Abdurahman Wahid, currently the president of Indonesia, called for local re-interpretations o f the Qur’an in order to eradicate gender discrimi nation originating from biased re gional religious stances. Participants agreed that discrimination against girls often starts at home to be con firmed by the surrounding society and culture, and that the deeply engrained idea that ‘woman is created for and from man’ seems to be translatable into almost every culture.

M ale bias During the debate about women’s participation in public and political life, it was stressed that women not only have less access to political power because men control sectors such as the judiciary and the media, they also face significant male bias. Mona Fayad from Lebanon mentioned that when teaching classes in political science, her male students question her ability

NE WS

to analyse political views correctly. I Farida Bennani from Morocco, one of the few female specialists on fiqh, added that women’s religious position in Islam is complicated, because dur ing the course o f history, women themselves relinquished their role in the religious discourse and allowed male interpreters to impose male-bi ased views. As she explained, religious interpretations about the position of women gradually changed in tone from ‘this is my opinion, may God for give me,’ to the indisputable ‘Islam [ says.’ As a result of this, female ac tivists in most of the Muslim counj tries feel unprepared to react to male religious leaders quoting traditions about women as if they came directly I from God. To them, the source of au thority these words come from is sim| ply too high and overwhelming. Also activists fear to be branded as ‘anti-Islamic’ when questioning quotes from [ the holy sources. This situation is prevalent because most women ac| tivists have little training in the reli gious fields of study. An urgent recom mendation of the meeting was that specialists such as Farida Bennani cre ate short, intensive courses for women activists on religious matters. A wide variety of religious views were represented which at times led to intense debating. This was especially the case during the presentation of Masdar Mas'udi, an Indonesian legal scholar of Islam, who for many years has been active in the debate concern ing the re-interpretation of holy texts. Mas’udi’s ideas also are widely dissem inated in Indonesia and discussed in places such as the traditional boarding schools for Quranic studies. He teach es that the original Quranic teachings should be placed in the context of his tory and culture, while interpreters should distinguish between the ab solute or fundamental principles of Islam (such as individual freedom and equality before God) and the local, cul tural aspects of the texts. This method, for example, was tested during the heated debate concerning marital rape. The issue was brought up in the context of violence against women. While in essence marital rape is a new topic of discussion in Islamic discours es, Indonesian scholars such as Siti Ruhaini and Masdar Mas’udi have long studied it. They hold that most interpreters of Islam have misunder stood Quranic references to husbands’ domination over wives in sexual rela tionships. Especially issues like this have been interpreted in legal/formal ways while in fact they belong to the realm of Islamic ethical/moral princi ples. These principles, according to Masdar, must be obeyed, as they are ! unchangeable. Hence, marital rape is a violation of women’s basic human rights.

Circumcision

m 1 V rft

Ratu Kanjeng H emas, wife o f the Sultan o f Yogyakarta, conversing with Dr Fatima Khata^y (Egypt) and Dr Mona Fayad (Lebanon)

• h a s n e w s l e t t e r N ? 2 i • February 2000

In the end, all agreed that the cur rent strategies o f Muslim women’s or ganizations are not effective in advo cating women’s rights. Reasons for this vary from country to country. Women’s organizations in the Middle East have to battle accusations that they are Western inventions bent on promoting anti-Islamic values. Often they lack grass root support and do not have great affiliation with the mostly poor, illiterate women they are working with. The participants from Pakistan explained that in their coun

try women’s issues are still so sensi tive that organizations empowering women have to choose names that hide the true nature of their work. For Indonesia, which boasts extensive schooling for girls and large organiza tions for Muslim women, it was con cluded that the programmes of these organizations are limited to tradi tional efforts in improving women’s welfare such as traditional Qur’an study groups and mother and child care. Gender interests such as gender inequality, discrimination against women, and developing strategies to raise women’s awareness about their condition and empower them eco nomically have not become part of the agenda of the majority of the organi zations yet. At the close of the meeting, Hoda Elsadda (Egypt) remarked that it had been empowering to realize how often constraints against women are inter mingled with culture, politics, and identity. Awareness of differences be tween the many cultures of Muslim areas and comparative studies help women to rebut local opinions that ‘there is only one way we can do things.’ For example, female circumci sion in Egypt is presented as ‘Islamic’ while it is not practiced in many other Muslim countries. It was decided that this meeting should have a follow-up and that at the same time the network of women should be broadened to in clude non-Muslims as well, since stig

mas put on women are often more in fluenced by culture than just by reli gion. In spite of the obstacles many women activists face in their work, the spirit of the meeting was upbeat as many of those present felt that women will be major agents of change in this new millennium. Three weeks after the conference, the day before I returned to the US, I had a chance to interview Ratu Hemas for my book. She had been reflecting on our meeting and had come to the conclusion that the issues discussed were very relevant to her in her capaci ty as the Sultan’s wife who has to lead the wives of government officials in the so-called Dharma Wanita organi zation. In order to be equipped to start the transformation of Dharma Wanita that is considered to be a champion of bureaucracy, ineffectiveness, and fossilization, she will attend the second meeting to be held in Cairo, December 2000. Though most Indonesian femi nists have given up on Dharma Wani ta, this organization has the potential to reach millions of women and to cre ate strong networks that work from within and that comprise all layers of society, from the poorest of the poor all the way to the top, to the sultana. ■ Nelly van Doorn-Harder is assistent professor religious studies, Valparaiso, IN, USA. E-mail: Pieternella.HarderVandoorn@valpo.edu

TheAsia-Pacijic-Forum A l X

new Asian-European Internet-ProL X ject is in the process o f realization. In autum n 1997 and again in 1999 more than 150 economic and cultural events of Asian-European dialogue took place in Berlin as part of the bi-annual AsiaPadfic-Weeks. Encouraged by the rapid growth of the event, a network of commercial, public, and non-gov ernmental institutions within the framework of the Asia-Pacific-Weeks will open a new internet-site on Asian-European dialogue starting in May 2000.

participation on this site will be free o f charge for non-commercial and public organizations; 2. Several platforms for co operation, partner-search, and communication between enterprises, institutions, and individuals in Europe and Asia; 3. A num ber o f useful sites for information and entertainm ent like news, addresses, links, events, country details, publications, tourist information. ■ For more information on how to become a participant, content-partner, advertiser, or sponsor o f the site please contact:

Tim Riedel

This network features: 1. A platform o f presentation for European companies, scientific institutions, artists, and non governmental organizations who wish to multiply their activities toward Asia-Pacific. The

Asia-Pacific-Forum Berliner Rathaus, 10173 Berlin, Germany Tel.: +49-30-9026 2835 Fax: +49-30-9026 2845 E-mail: Tim.Riedel@Skzl.verwalt-berlin.de H ttpJlwww.berlin.delapw

Letter to the editor found the over antiAmerican tone o f the article by Dr Leo Schmit in the last issue of your paper [‘Reflections from the ASEM Bowl in China’, IIASN 20, p.4, ed.] highly in appropriate and alarming. Using the generic bogey of American enomomic imperialism instead o f looking for serous and specific objectives o f ex change between Asia and Europe drags the idea o f greater understand ing between academics o f the two continents to a tactical ploy and vin

le tte r to the Editor

dicates those in Asia who see the fu ture o f international relations in purely Machiavellian terms. It is short-sighted to believe th at belat edly borrowing the Chinese Com m unist Party’s united front dis course against American hegemony can be the basis of better AsianEuropean relations. ■ PAL N Y I R I Senior Research Fellow, University o f Oxford E-mail: nyirip@mail.matav.hu

T HE ME

South Asian Literature 5? ffL^ ft

Variations on Modernity The manyfaces o f South ksian literatures The recent success o f South Asian authors such as Salman Rushdie, Vikram Seth, Rohinton Mistry, and Arundhati Roy in the field o f English literature has attracted a wave o f attention and certainly benefited the perception o f South Asian culture in the West. The authors ‘wrote back’ in the language o f the former colonial ruler and presented Western readers with a colourful image o f life in modern South Asia and the complex identities o f South Asian immigrants abroad. The downside o f this success has been that a specific, Westernized, cosmopoli tan outlook on South Asia has usurped the narrow bandwidth o f attention available to this region in the Western media and literary criticism. The strong presence o f English post-colonial fiction has pushed other South Asian literatures into the back ground, creating an unduly negative impression o f their con tribution to the development o f South Asian culture. By T H O MA S DE BRUIJN

owever entertai ning and enlight ening the postcolonial English writing from South Asia is, it in creasingly represents a record of the loss of identity. Its au thors are rooted in and concerned with their cultural background but write about it almost as outsiders, describing to other outsiders a part of the world that was the land they grew up in and which they still cher ish. Both writer and reader share a detachment that allows them to think, read, and write about South Asian societies from a distance, refer ring to it as an ‘imaginary home land’: a land of wondrous tales, sweet memories of childhood, and a puz zling complex of social and cultural realities.

Continuedjrom pcye 3 CO- EDITOR FOR THIS ISSUE’S THEME THOMAS DE BRUIJN Elzeline van der Hoek

record of the past 150 to 200 years which is largely undocumented. What we need now is an understanding of the language of literature to unravel the various layers of expression. You have chosen toJocus on the literary movements after the War? After the War young writers sought j new ways of voicing their experiences of life in the young state of India. The I Partition, which had caused an esti mated two hundred thousand deaths in just a few months, has long been a

In the literatures that are written in the modern South Asian languages we are confronted with a conversation in which South Asian writers and readers describe, comment upon, ide alize, or criticize the world they actu ally live in, now and in the future. These literatures span an enormous array of languages, regions, and local cultures, together forming a unique and virtually inexhaustible record of the intellectual history of the Indian Subcontinent during the last two cen turies. The glossiness of post-colonial writing should not distract those who are studying modern South Asian so cieties from taking these vast re sources into account. This special section of the Newslet ter will therefore present an overview of various new developments in re search on the modern literatures of South Asia. Although the number of scholars is small in comparison with

taboo. There was no way to address the subject other than through litera ture. Nayi Kahani was the first move ment offering a clearly new style and the first to break with the past. Its as sociates are making a stand against the idealism, the nationalist opti mism, and social-realism that pre vailed in Hindi literature before the war. They apply a more realistic narra tive style to portray the disillusion ment and alienation that many of their contemporaries have experi enced. Interestingly, these innovators have become the new establishment over time. The world of periodicals, which constitutes their main channel of communication, is after all a commer cial one and the Nayi Kahani move ment has to live up to the expectations it has created.

other branches of South Asian Studies and in relation to the number of speakers of the languages involved, the field still produces a plethora of research initiatives. While the study of modern South Asian literature used to be primarily a tool for acquiring some practice in reading the lan guages, it has now developed into a discipline that increasingly enters into dialogue with sociological and historical research of the area. This multidisciplinary research into the rich resources that these literatures provide has given rise to a serious re definition of the aims, methods, and strategies for defining and describing modern South Asian literatures. Modern literature in South Asian languages is a product of the same cluster of social and cultural phenom ena that was involved in the making of new societies, communities, and nations in the region during the last two centuries. It is a child o f‘moder nity’ as it is intimately linked to de velopments such as the institution of a nation-state, the emergence of a printing and publishing industry, the formation of national and communal identities, the rise of a metropolitan middle-class culture and its audi ences, and a newly developing public sphere of political and cultural de bate. Being thus tied up with the cul tural construction ofa modern nation and community, and no longer being a product of patronage of cultural craftmanship or traditional folklore is what makes these literatures ‘mod ern’.

the unique expression of a specific so cial and cultural environment. Dur ing the development of modern styles of literary writing, the various influ ences have become completely ab sorbed and combined with the re gion’s own cultural idiom. Therefore, the ‘Indianness’ and 'national' charac ter of this literature remains an elu sive concept which is strenuously de bated in literary criticism. The mod ern literatures of South Asia show their modernity in being composite, not ‘pure’, and, at times, abstract and challenging. The various contributions to this section will show that the common social and historical background of nineteenth-century modernity has by no means led to a uniform develop ment of modern literatures across the Subcontinent. The models of Bengali and later Hindi literature have been influential in shaping the style of writing and the choice of genres, but recent research has increasingly brought to light how local influences and cultural environments have shaped modem writing in the many regional languages which is shown in the contributions by Robert Zydenbos and Stuart Blackburn. Harish

Composite literatures In many respects, Western litera ture has been a model for the develop ment of this literature. One should, however, not underestimate the in fluence of Russian writers and other examples that did not come with the power of symbols imposed by the British colonial regime. In the course of the development of modern writ ing in South Asian languages, a liter ary vocabulary and grammar devel oped which, like the languages of the region, was composite in nature but

The thematic issueyou compiled covers a broader span o f time. Most articles focus on the late nineteenth, early twentieth century, now a popular field of research. Dur ing that time modern society and the ‘imagined community’ began taking shape and people started to position their languages as parts of their identities. This issue presents various regions of South Asia. Literature developed along the same lines throughout the Subcontinent. People from far and near were concerned with nation and society building and the modern gen res, the novel and the short story, were introduced everywhere. Every region, however, has its unique char-

The dra w in g s represented in this section are ta ken fro m the literary m a g a zin e Ajakal.

Trivedi highlights the changes that Indian Independence brought to the position of Hindi literature and its re lation to many regional literatures. Lucy Rosenstein explores how Hindi poetry adapted to the new circum stances of an independent India. As a result of the revision of the lit erary history of modern South Asia, the focus of scholarly research has shifted towards subaltern traditions of writing which have been largely ig nored by the canon of'high’ literature (see articles by Dalmia and Blackburn, and Christina Oesterheld). Other con tributions show how divisions and categories that have been taken for granted have to be reformulated: Janet Kamphorst demonstrates how the modern can co-exist with histori cal genres and content, Christine Everaert investigates the thin lines di viding Hindi and Urdu, and Theo Damsteegt makes a case for the con tinuing presence of traditional Indian values in the modem writers’ quest for moral guidance. The two extremes in the development of modern litera ture in South Asia are represented by, on the one hand, the contributions of Victor van Bij lert and Sagaree Sengupta who outline important notions that lay at the base of the cultural de velopment that yielded modern liter ature, and this is contrasted with a look at the latest formation of a public sphere on the Internet in an article by | the present author. Representing the wealth of modern South Asian literature in this con fined space is an impossible task and this section is by no means complete as major literary traditions from South India, Gujarat Maharashtra, and many other areas are not repre sented. Despite these omissions it shows how research into this litera ture thrives and engages in a dialogue with the broader field of modern South Asian Studies. ■

Dr Thom as de Bruijn is an HAS affiliated fellow (NW O) at the HAS. E-mail: tbruijn@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

What arey our plansJor thefuture? In the future I would like to set up an interdisciplinary research school that links sociology to literary re search. I would like to combine teach ing and research, as I do not think it healthy to separate the two. More over, I would like to give the studies of the modern languages and of the Middle Ages a more prominent place than they occupy at present. In the short run I shall organize a conference together with Theo Dam steegt in March of this year: ‘The Indi an Character of Indian Literature’. We pose the following questions: is there such a thing as Indian literature and

if so, how can it be defined? Are criti cisms and value judgements concern ing literature useful in literary re search? We shall bring together acad emics, critics, and writers, like Krish na Baldev Vaid, to tackle these sub jects. Some time after the conference I plan to travel to India again, where I shall set out to meet some of the younger writers. I already met many of the older, prominent writers in the international arena of the World Hindi Conference, but there is also an important national circuit within India itself as well. ■

February 2000 •

has n e w s l e t t e r n ?21

•7

SOUTH

ASIAN

LITERATURE

New Literary Histories for Nineteenth Century India In charting the history o f the modem literatures o f India, liter ary scholars have tended to focus on the public literary sphere as it emerged in the urban centres o f mid-nineteenth century India. It was in these metropolitan centres, in the complexity o f the colonial context, that the modem literatures o f South Asia evolved, self-consciously and deliberately establishing links with traditions, both ‘classical’ and more recent, even while propelling themselves forward in the spirit o f the new. ■ By V A S U D H A DALMI A AND S T UA RT BLACKBURN

t was through these new literatures that nationalisms were imagined, that commu nities were newly consti tuted and that, as the family itself was newly defined, the domestic was sought to be cordoned off from the public. The literary sphere then, was a part of a larger cultural and political enterprise, and was constituted, as elsewhere, by lit erary journals, civic associations, ed ucational groups, reading and debat ing clubs, amateur theatrical associ ations, and religious and reform as sociations with their manifold pub lications and activities.

Research Project

Until recently, the histories of the modern literary languages of India documented the works of this early period conscientiously and meticu lously, but the grid by which they measured the literary production of the era was itself taken from the West. Scholars concerned themselves with the ‘realism’ of the novels, plays, and short stories (the last of the trio to emerge], the ‘credibility’ of the characters created, the dura bility, in fact, of the literary reputa tions established at the time. Such a textual approach has failed to appre ciate and to account for the complex milieu of social, political and intel lectual processes that influenced these newly emerging literatures. Existing literary histories of the pe riod also largely ignore the fact that

this literary culture was not restrict ed to the activity of the elites alone, whether new or old. Instead, literary production was crisscrossed by a va riety of discourses. Popular cultural and artistic activities, rural and urban, not only survived and prolif erated, they also interacted with the new to produce dynamic forms, such as the Parsi Theatre. In the wake of the ‘subaltern’ rewriting of colonial history, the lit erature of the period has began to be seen as participating in much larger discursive formations and therefore should be reappraised and relocated in a wider analytical framework than that provided by conventional literary histories. In the last two decades, some monographs have ap peared as have also a number of arti cles, scattered over journals and vol umes of conference proceedings. We feel that the time has now come for us to attempt a fresh analysis of the data from new perspectives. The task we have set ourselves then, is not only to recover works forgotten and faded, lost in the files of old libraries, private and public, but also to un-

derstand the cultural politics in which the ‘new’ emerged. What were the breaks and continuities in pat terns of patronage, of literary pro duction and literary modes? In addi tion to these discursive patterns, we shall also look at empirical studies of print technology, the operations of printing presses, publishing houses, and libraries. We start from the premise that the literary idiom from the West did not appear in a vacuum, but was acting upon rich narrative and performa tive traditions and sophisticated lit erary cultures. How did courtly po etry, the vast corpus of devotional poetry and hagiographical litera ture, the oral epics of remarkable magnitude and power, respond to and accommodate the new genres from the West? What new needs and sensibilities, brought about by changes in societal structures, by the introduction of radically new juridi cal, municipal, and educational in stitutions, contributed to the cre ation of new literary cultures? How did these in turn influence the selec tion of specific literary modes and features from the wide repertoire of

fered from the West? And when the new syntheses finally emerged, when the literary canons were recon stituted, what linkages did they es tablish with the past and what did they exclude? ■

quality and quantity as never before; (b] women writers, among whom Anupama Niranjana (1934-1991] and Vaidehi (1945-], have gained special prominence; (c] Bandaya (‘revolt’] and Dalita (‘downtrodden’] writers, who have paid special attention to depicting the evils of casteism in various ways; at present this may be considered the dominant trend in Kannada writing, and among the many authors in this category spe cial mention may be made of critic and fiction writer Baragura Ramachandrappa (1946-] and the inno vative prose stylist Devanura Mahadeva (1949-]. What unites all the post-Navya authors is that their demand for socio-cultural change stresses the importance of the individual rather than of the group - determined by caste, religion, or gender - into which the individual happens to have been born. This marks a clear break with traditional social think ing, in which collectivities were al ways emphasized at the expense of the individual. It is in this aspect of contemporary Kannada writing more than in any other that we see modernity make itself felt. Tradi tional categories which society im poses on people are questioned: women increasingly create new roles for themselves; persons from social groups that previously stood outside the literary process now make themselves heard. We may

presume that this trend will contin ue until there has been a significant change towards a society where one has greater scope to give one's own form to one’s own life - which can take quite some time in a society where the uncertainties of change chase the unconfident majority of people into the fortified structures of communal identities. ■

Vasudha Dalmia is professor o f Hindi and Urdu at the Department o f South and Southeast Asian Studies, University o f California, Berkeley, USA, fax: + 1-S I 0-642 4565. She has published on modern Hindi literature: Dalmia, Vasudha,'The Nationalization o f Hindu Traditions: Bharatendu Harishchandra and nineteenth-century Banaras', Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1 997. Dalmia, Vasudha and Theo Damsteegt (eds), 'Narrative Strategies, Essays on South Asian Literature and Film’, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1998. For Stuart Blackburn’s affiliation, please see his article on page 11.

'Modernity' in Kannada Literature Besides having the second oldest literature among the living j Karnatakan culture and society that languages o f South Asia, Kannada has received the most presti immediately affect the manner in gious all-India literary award, the Jnanpith Award, more times which individuals treat each other than any other language; but the rest o f the world is very slow in in concrete, everyday life. The Navya according Kannada and Karnataka the recognition they are in (‘modern’] movement (which pro creasingly receiving in India. Karnataka is home o f tradition yet duced numerous leading writers its capital, Bangalore, is the capital o f India’s booming informa like U.R. Anantha Murthy (1932-], tion technology industry. One can readily understand that Shantinath Desai (1929-1998], Yashwhile 20th-century Kannada authors continued writing in liter want Chittal (1928-] i.a.] derived a ary forms that are many centuries old, including verse epics, wealth of inspiration from Euro change had to make itself felt in this society, and that it could pean existentialist thought and pro duced stylistically beautiful works, not fail to provide material for thought and literary creativity. By ROBERT J. ZYDE NB OS

hen one surveys Kannada literature since 1947, one cannot fail to notice that the world beyond Kar nataka’s borders scarcely plays a concrete role (except of course in the travelogue, which is a highly productive form in Kannada literature]. Only a few authors who live elsewhere (e.g., novelists Yashwant Chittal and Vyasaraya Ballal in Mumbai] present narratives that are set outside Karnataka. India north of Karnataka tends to be mentioned with disdain or indifference, if it is mentioned at all, and the only northern personalities who figure in Kannada literature tend to be those who have acquired an almost myth ic, all-Indian aura, like Mahatma Gandhi, Vivekananda, and Aurobindo. Similarly, pan-Indian po litical developments receive hardly

Research Project

8 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

any attention, except for a dramatic interlude like Indira Gandhi’s ‘Emergency’, which drew some po etic protest. Modernity is thought of as ‘West ern’ and is seen as either a welcome source of social and cultural change or as a threat to ‘Indian culture’ (see, for a detailed discussion, Zydenbos 1996]). ‘Indianness’ is practically al ways implicitly negatively defined: ‘Westernness’, its supposed opposite caricature, is ‘modern’, hence what ever is ‘not modern’ is ‘Indian’, and this is always the socio-cultural background of the author in Kar nataka. As a result, Kannada authors re-evaluate their own backgrounds. The Tragatisila (‘progressive’] move ment of the 1940s and early 1950s (of which the leading, stylistically re fined exponent was Niranjana (19241992]) had a politically ideological (Marxist] background; but all later thinking on the subject of moderni ty focused on aspects of traditional

N?2i • February 2000

often of great psychological subtle ty, in which a probing investigation of the individual and the surround ing culture is given. At the same time there was the lone but remark ably popular voice of S.L. Bhyrappa (1934-], who aggressively asserted a modern religious-cum-nationalist ‘Hindu’ identity that is purely nega tive and reactionary in novels that inveigh against marriage outside one’s caste, glorify the RSS, and so forth. However, the Navya style of writ ing was found to be too individual istic and introspective for the vari ous authors who are collectively called Nayyottara or ‘post-modern’. Most of these authors show concern about some form of social discrimi nation or the other, the injustice which they depict in their writings. Three groups in particular deserve special mention: [a] Muslim authors (such as Boluwar Mahamad Kunhi (1952-] and Sara Aboobacker (1937-]] have taken to writing in Kannada in

Zydenbos, R.J. The Calf Became An O rphan - A study in contemporary Kannada/iction Pondicherry: In stitu t Frangais / École Frangaise d ’Extrême-Orient,

1996.

R obert J. Z ydenbos is researcher o f South Indian literature. He lives in Mysore, India.

SOUTH

ASI AN

LI TERATURE

'Balanced Action' in Modern Hindi Literature Reading zoth-century Hindi-literature, one is struck by its re peated references to the Bhagavadgita, a philosophical Sanskrit text which dates back to the first millennium o f the Christian era. Not only are literary characters often found to read the work, but also one o f its principal teachings especially seems to have inspired several texts. This is the theory o f disinterested action leading to a release from the cycle o f rebirths. In order to reach that goal, one should fulfil the duties which are inherent in one’s social position in daily life, while acting in a disinter ested and balanced way, that is, without pursuing egotistic goals and without being disturbed by emotions which tend to accompany action, such as pleasure or disappointment. By T H E O D A M S T E E G T

or example, this ideal of balanced action is found, whether implicitly or ex plicitly, in texts dealing with the violent or non violent struggle for independence, like Ajneya’s stories about revolu tionaries written in the 1930s, Vrndavanlal Varma’s novel Jhamsi ki rani laksmibai (1945), and Jainendra Kumar’s novel Sukhada (1955), all of which focus on the use of violence. But it is also present in texts dealing with ordinary, present-day life in In dian society. Several stories written by Giriraj Kishore (born 1937) could be cited as an example The Bha gavadgita is explicitly mentioned in his story ‘Bahar ek suhanapan tha’ (i.e. Outside it was pleasurable, in

Research Project

Shahar-dar-shahar, 1976), which deals with an ambitious staff member in an office. One day he tells the chief clerk: T have adopted the theory of the Gita in my life. I believe in acting, and have always been indifferent to wards the results (-). I have never let my desires grow rampant, because they become a jungle then and man gets entangled in them.(-) Now a chance has come, only because I have acted and patiently waited [that is, he has acted disinterestedly]. But even now that it has come, I am neither happy nor sad.’ The real feelings of the man, who tries to achieve a better position through manipulation are in sharp contrast to his words, and he fails to realize his wishes. Most perti nently the story shows the presentday relevance of the theory of the Bhagavadgita in the view of a mod ern Hindi writer.

In other stories by Kishore the in spiration remains implicit. His ‘Cimni’ (i.e. Chimney, in the same collection) has a former Sub-Super intendent of Police who has been fired from his job and has been be having in an anti-social way ever since as its main character. The story is narrated by a character-bound narrator (an T) who happens to meet the man on repeated occasions. The text mainly features external focalization by this narrator, that is, the reader is made acquainted with the perspective of the narrator-I at the moment he looks back and narrates, instead of the perspective he had as an actor at the moment the events took place, but this narratorial per spective does not seem to be very much different from the actorial. The actor-I tells another character in

the story that the former SSP is a ‘weak man (-). An employee must have strong nerves. He should not find too much difference between being kicked and being praised.’ He thus speaks of a balance which ex presses itself in not letting oneselfbe affected too much by outside influ ences, whether they be positive (‘being praised’) or negative (‘being kicked’). In another statement by the actor-I, the balance is said to consist of steering a middle course between being an ‘employer’ and an ‘employ ee’, terms which are here metaphors for assuming a position of power and dominance on the one hand, in which one feels totally independent from others, and one of absolute subservience on the other, in which one feels completely dependent on others, on their comments, their blame or praise. The story shows how the SSP’s ambitions, which imply a lack of disinterestedness and balance, have led to his downfall. One would expect that the actor-I in this story, who judges the former SSP’s behaviour in terms of balance, to act in a balanced way himself. A systematic analysis of the text, how-

Dr Theo D am steegt teaches Hindi at the Kern Institute o f Indology o f Leiden University, The Netherlands. His recent publications include ‘Giriraj Kishor’s Yatraem, A Hindi novel analysed’, Groningen: Egbert Forsten, 1997, and a volume he has edited with Vasudha Dalmia entitled ‘Narrative Strategies, Essays on South Asian Literature and Film’, Oxford University Press, 1998.

Modern Hindi Lan^ua^e, and popular culture

The present article is a preview o f a forthcoming long essay (c. 25,000 words), in which I seek to explore three related and complementary dimensions o f the vigorous renewal and pop ular nationalist self-assertion through which Hindi language and literature have effectively reinvented themselves over the twentieth century. By HAR I S H TRI VE DI

hrough the process initiated in 1893 with the founding of the Nagari Pracharini Sabha, Hindi fought to reverse the colonial dividiscrimination against itself sive and the preferential patronage given to Urdu by the British since 1835. With this battle rapidly won in 1900, Hindi not only gained the extensive ground from which Urdu now re treated in a virtual rout but also sought to ‘modernize’ itself through an internal dynamic by determined ly adopting the variety of Hindi that is know as khari bolt as the medium of both prose and verse to replace the bhakti-laden Braj and Avadhi. Next, with the founding of the Hindi Sahitya Sammelan in 1907, Hindi

Research Project

aligned itself closely with the Gandhian Congress nationalist mass movement and was soon adopted by it as the rasfitra-bfiosha, the national language, thus becoming not only the chosen vehicle of nationalism but indeed one ofits major planks. In literature, Hindi moved from a phase of revivalist cultural national ism (represented in the writings of Maithili Sharan Gupta etc.) in the 1910s to mainstream Gandhian na tionalism (Premchand etc.) in the 1920s and the early 1930s. Over the following two decades Hindi, while firmly rooted in native ground, opened up and responded to various international literary movements by going through phases of Romanti cism (Chhayavad; represented by the poets Nirala, Mahadevi Varma etc.), Progressivism (Prcyativad; Muktibodh, Yashpal etc.), and Modernism

ever, shows that this is not the case. Thus, both in this story and in ‘Bahar ek suhanapan tha’ even such characters who are consciously aware of the theory of balanced ac tion fail to put it into practice. And the same situation is found in stories by Kishore which deal with family life or politics (where the concept of seva ‘disinterested service’ discussed by A.C. Mayer appears to be based on the same Bhagavadgita ideal). It re veals a rather gloomy perspective of present-day Indian society on the author’s part, one in which charac ters are ruined because they fail to realize the ideal even though they are aware of it. Indeed, only a few among Kishore’s stories feature characters who manage to fulfil the ideal, among them ‘Tilism’ (i.e. Mag ical spell, 1967)- ■

[Trayogvad; Ajneya and the Tar Saptak poets). Through these greatly speeded up and therefore sometimes apparently contrary stages of devel opment, Hindi now came abreast of contemporary literary trends and movements sweeping the world. With the coming of Independence in 1947 and the framing of the Con stitution in 1950, Hindi, the popular national language, was installed as the controversial ‘official language’ of the partitioned state. Ironically, its anti-imperialist role in colonial times was now eclipsed by the charge o f ‘Hindi imperialism’ from several other Indian languages. Just as a nationalist agenda is believed to be exhausted upon the attainment of a nation-state and to give way in turn to some alternative (sub-)nationalist agenda, so Hindi was now forced to give way to the competing

political and cultural claims of the regional languages. Its nominal pro mulgation and artificial construc tion as the language of the state, in tended in time to replace colonial English, failed to persuade the pub lic at large until it has now been given up as a lost cause, especially in the face of the irresistible globaliza tion of English and the recent inter national success of Indian Writing in English. At the same time, at a wider common level of Indian society, the remarkable spread of Hindi, largely through the popular media of film and TV, has given it a pan-Indian reach perhaps unequalled by any other language in the history of India. Meanwhile, Hindi literature since Independence has performed a pecu liarly complex post-colonial, post nationalist function, by voicing its

increasing disillusionment (mohabhan^a) with the aspirations initially raised by the liberated nation (Shrilal Shukla, Raghuvir Sahay, Harishankar Parsai). While on the one hand it has sustained its exploration of the hybrid and the cosmopolitan (Mohan Rakesh, Nirmal Verma, Surendra Verma, and many dedicat ed translators of world literature), on the other hand it has continued to represent the grass-roots authentici ty of the local predicaments of the religious minorities (Rahi Masoom Raza, Manzoor Ehtesham, Asghar Wajahat) and the marginalized fig ures of the woman (Jainendra Ku mar, Krishna Sobti, Maitreyi Pushpa) and the subaltern (Renu, Nagarjuna, Vinod Kumar Shukla). Altogether, Hindi’s chequered progress through the last century of Indian nation building constitutes a major strand of our modern history, just as its lit erature of the period is an index of our social and cultural transforma tion. ■

Harish Trivedi, educated at the universities o f Allahabad and Wales, is Professor o f English at the University o f Delhi. He is the author of'Colonial Transactions: English Literature and India’ (Calcutta 1993; M anchester 1995), and has translated from Hindi:‘Premchand: His life and tim es’by Amrit Rai (Delhi I982;rpt. 1991) as well as works o f modern poetry and short fiction. He has also co-edited ‘Interrogating Postcolonialism:Text and context’ (Shimla 1996), and ‘Post-colonial Translation: Theory and practice’ (London 1999).

February 2000

■

has n e w s l e t t e r 19521

•

SOUTH

Hindi and Urdu Short Stories Exploring the borders between H indi and Urdu By C H R I S T I N E EVERAERT

Research Project

-r n the past few decades,

I there has been a wealth of discussion in and outside India about the linguistic rela tionship between Hindi and Urdu. The linguistic and termi nological histories of both languages are very closely related, to the extent that sometimes both linguistic com munities claim the same author as one o f ‘their’ authors, as happened with Kabir. Quite apart from this, there is a great deal of confusion about the terminology, which is changing all the time and has not been used consistently. At certain moments in the past it is difficult to grasp whether the terms ‘Hindus tani’, ‘Hindvi’, ‘Urdu’, ‘Hindi’, ‘Hindui’, ‘Dakhani’ etc. are referring to what we now consider as Hindi, Urdu, or something else.

The question of whether both lan guages are, and if so, have always been two separate languages, is often answered with political arguments rather than by linguistic studies.

The origin o f the research Two years ago I finished my disser tation on the Hindi short stories of Bhagavaticaran Varma, which were mainly written in the 1930s. I decided to work on the short story since it is a many-sided genre and besides that, a great deal of the existing research is on either poetry or novels. During my research I noticed that the language used in these short sto ries consisted of a highly fluctuating percentage of Perso-Arabic- or San skrit-based words, depending upon either the character speaking or the topic of the story. I became fascinated by this feature and started a small piece of linguistic research of my own by counting how many words used in the different stories (and in some sto

ASIAN

LITERATURE

ries I examined the speech of different characters) had a Perso-Arabic, San skrit, Turkish, or English origin. The percentage fluctuated tremen dously: in one story 66.7%of the nouns were Perso-Arabic in origin, where in another 85% of all the words were of Sanskrit origin. Still both stories, written by the same author, were identified as pure Hindi short stories. At this point, the question arose as to where precisely the line has been drawn between Hindi and Urdu.

Theoretical aspects The results of my dissertation are the foundation for the PhD disserta tion on which I am working on at pre sent. Often there are very heated dis cussions about whether or not Hindi and Urdu are two separate languages or only one. In the coming years I want to find an answer to a slightly different question: are Hindi and Urdu in their literary forms two sepa rate languages, and if they are, has it always been that way? To answer these (and several other) questions, I shall select short stories (or pieces of prose, if there is no other option) by several Hindi and Urdu au thors. The texts will date from the 17th century to 1999. Dakhani, the va riety of Urdu that started to evolve as a literary language during the 16^/17^ century in the Deccan, is the oldest Indian language which con sists of linguistic elements with ei ther a Perso-Arabic or a Sanskrit back ground. Therefore I consider it useful to go back in time to one of the earli est prose-texts written in this lan

Some Unexplored Areas in the History of Urdu Fiction When we look at the histories o f Urdu literature written in English which are commonly used as standard reference books and which form the main basis o f information for all those who do not read Urdu (see references), the history o f the Urdu novel in the nineteenth century is confined to four outstand ing names: Nazir Ahmad, Ratannath Sarshar, Abdul Halim Sharar, and Muhammad Hadi Ruswa. By C H R I S T I N A OE S T E R H E L D

ambabu Saksena mentions some of the other authors of original novels or adaptations of Bengali and English works (Sajjad Husain, Nawab Syèd Mohammad Azad, Jwala Prasad Barq, Hakim Muhammad Ali) in passing (Saksena 1996 (i927].'355-378). Shaista Bano Suhrawardy Ikramullah’s Critical Survey of the Development of the Urdu Novel and Short Stoty (1945) still in cluded the ‘minor’ writers later left out by Muhammad Sadiq (Sadiq 1964; 2nd ed. 1984). It seems that, in the process of canonizing the history of Urdu literature, a very rigid selec tion took place resulting in a land scape of a few peaks surrounded by a void, or a few islands in an otherwise

Research Project

empty sea. This picture is reflected in the curricula of Urdu courses at colleges and universities in India and Pakistan. The scene presented in studies of the Urdu novel written in Urdu is much more differentiated. The most detailed survey of the development of the Urdu novel available so far is Yusuf Sarmast’s Bisvin sadi men urdu naval (The Urdu novel in the Twenti eth century, 1973). In other works the so called ‘minor’ writers are often simply mentioned without going deeper into any of their works. Asif Farrukhi has recently seized upon this fact. His concern is to res cue such ‘minor’ authors and their works from oblivion and to provide fresh access to the history of the Urdu novel, one not obliterated by an outdated critical approach and by an over-emphasis on the influence of

I O • has n e w s l e t t e r N9 2 1 • February 2000

English literature and English edu cation (see Saughat 1993:84-89). Farrukhi’s article highlights one of the main deficiencies in the study of the Urdu novel. However, his ap proach, too, is centred on authors understood to have contributed in their own way to ‘high’ literature that is to a novel of literary merit. The time is certainly overdue to pay more attention to lesser known au thors and to analyse their ways of handling the new format of the novel and dealing with the ideologi cal issues figuring so prominently in the late nineteenth century. What remains outside the orbit of research on such authors is the vast and wide ly unexplored realm of the pulp nov els produced strictly with an eye to the commercial main chance. The two fields do of course overlap. There is a lot of formulaic writing in ‘seri ous’ reformist writers, and many of their works were also commercially successful. Within the framework of a larger project dealing with a new assessment of literary histories of nineteenth-century India, I have started to look into some of these lesser known novels.

guage (1635), because it is likely that this language is the origin of Urdu, Hindi, or maybe both. The entire collection of texts is written in places that take or have taken a prominent place in the lin guistic development of Hindi or Urdu (Delhi, Lucknow, Deccan, Pakistan). The authors are from different back grounds (e.g. Muslims writing in Hindi, Hindus in Urdu, Urdu authors living in important Hindu cities and vice versa). Moreover, the texts have been written at historically impor tant moments (e.g. the electoral suc cess of the BJP, a decade before and after the Partition, during the Parti tion). This large corpus of texts allows me to investigate various matters. First of all, it should show whether there have been general developments in the use of the language. Apart from this aspect, I shall be able to do re search on whether there has been a personal evolution in the language usage of any of the authors, who have lived through historically important changes (for instance somebody who was writing before, during and after the Partition). By comparing the texts it should also be possible to find out whether there have been regional dis tinctive changes.

texts will be given to different people from different regions and education al backgrounds, without telling them about the origin of the text. This should prove a good test of how much Hindi-speakers can understand of the Urdu texts and vice-versa. ■

References - D ittm er, Kerrin Die mdisdien Muslims und die HindiUrdu-Kontroverse in den United Provinces Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1972 - King, Christopher R. One Lan^ua^je, Two Scripts: The Hindi movement in nineteenth century North India Bombay, etc: Oxford University Press, 1994 - Rai.Amrit A House Divided Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1984 - Russell, R. The Pursuit o f Urdu Literature, A selected histoty London, 1992 - Sadiq, M. A histoiy o f Urdu literature Delhi, 1995 - Shackle & Snell Hindi and Urdu Since 1800: A common reader London: SOAS, 1991

The pragm atic side Because this research only tells us about the literary use of the lan guages, I shall eventually transpose some Urdu texts of the corpus into Devanagari script and some Hindi texts into Perso-Arabic script. These

A study of novels produced as com modities for mass consumption could focus on the following aspects: 1. the production process; 2. the sociology of readers; and 3. the structure of the works produced and the ideologies transmitted by them. The structure of the novels produced in both fields and the literary techniques, the leit motifs, and topoi used in them have to be analysed in the broader context of narrative traditions available to the Urdu writer of the time. So far, links have been drawn from longer prose romances (dastan) to the novel. Shorter narratives such as tales, fa bles, anecdotes, and witticisms have hardly ever been studied in the con text of the development of the novel, though they seem to have contri buted much more to the short popu lar novel than the dastan. Therefore, at present I am studying qissas (tales) and collections of short narratives, summarized in Urdu as lata’if and naqliyat, which were published in great numbers from the beginning of the nineteenth century to the early twentieth century and are still avail able on the market in cheap editions. This is also a case study of the process of marginalization of three genres: until the end of the nine teenth century, qissas, lata’if, and naqliyat appeared in costly, well-pro duced editions, and the latter consti tuted an integral part of standard works of Urdu literature such as Azad’s Ab-i hayat (The Water of Life, 1880) and Hali’s Yad^ar-i Ghalib (Memoirs of Ghalib, 1897). Today, however, short narratives of this type are to be found mainly in textbooks for schools and in chapbook editions for the barely literate. Both studies

Christine Everaert is assistant at the Department o f Languages and Cultures of South- and East-Asia o f Gent University, Belgium and teaches Hindi and Urdu, E-mail: Christine.Everaert@rug.ac.be.

will hopefully contribute to a fuller and more differentiated picture of Urdu fiction in the nineteenth centu ry-

References Saksena, Ram Babu A history o f Urdu literature London, 1927 Sadiq, M uham mad A histoty o f Urdu literature London: Oxford University Press, 1964 Schimmel, Annemarie Classical Urdu literaturefrom the beginning to Iqbal In: A history o f Indian Literature Vol. 8: Modern Indo-Aryan literatures, pt. 1; fasc. 3, Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1975

‘Hairatï haiyah a’ina: Urdu naval ki dastan’ (An Astonishing Mirror: The story o f the Urdu novel) In Saughat, 1993:84-89.

D r Christina O esterh eld

teaches Urdu at

the South Asia Institute, University o f Heidelberg, Germany. A recent publications from her hand includes: Oesterheld, Christina and Claus Peter Zoller (eds) 'Of Clowns and Gods, Brahmans and Babus: Humour in South Asian literatures’, New Delhi: Manohar, 1999. E-mail: n40@ix.urz.uni-heidelberg.de

SOUTH

ASI AN

LI TERATURE

Bengal's Modernity and Nationalism 1880-1910 x

m tm

Cover o f an issue o f the literary magazine Sarika, which was an im portant forum fo r the Nayi Kahani story-writers.

From regional cultural politics to international impact Nineteenth-century Bengal with Calcutta as the imperial me tropolis o f British India was the birthplace o f Indian moderni ty. During the nineteenth century this modernity, largely the product o f Hindu urban intellectuals, was disseminated in Bengali and English through the printing press. In order to communicate the paraphernalia o f modernity, the Bengali language had to be moulded into an appropriate vehicle. The Bengali printing industry began to produce magazines, news papers, and books for popular consumption. Bengali literature was read and appreciated especially in the women’s quarters o f the Bengali middle and upper-middle class homes. English was being used as the language o f contact with the British rul ing class and increasingly also as the language o f communica tion with the world outside Bengal. By V I C T O R A. V A N BI JLERT

engali/Indian mo dernity was a com posite phenomenon: European science, economy, and political theory were intricately mixed up with Indian thought and a forward-looking Hindu ethos. It was the latter, however, that led to Indian radical nationalism at the end of the nineteenth century and the beginning of the twentieth. In the first decades of the nineteenth century, Bengali modernity ex pressed itself almost exclusively in Hindu religious reform. Towards the middle of the nineteenth centu ry the Bengali language and its idiom were being adjusted to mod ern literary forms in accordance with the new tastes of the urban reading public. Western literary genres such as the novel and the sonnet were tried out in Bengali. Bengali belles-lettres gained wide public recognition in the latter half of the nineteenth century when form and content were thought to be able to compete with the best in European literature. Michael Madhusudan Dutta (1824-1873) in poet ry, Dinabandhu Mitra (1830-1873) in drama, and Bankim Chandra Chatterjee (1838-1894) in novels and es says had fundamentally changed the landscape of Bengali literature. All through the nineteenth centu ry Indians expected (and were often instructed to expect) that British rule was necessary and would last for a long time to come and that it was impossible even to imagine its end. All that was left to indigenous intel lectuals was to express themselves in cultural production. They were never expected to put forward hard political demands. From the middle of the nineteenth century onwards Bengali print capitalism acted as a leaven even for the other linguistic areas in the Indian empire. Looking at the example set by Bengal, they developed their own forms of print capitalism. Up to the beginning of the twentieth century, the national

Research Project

impact of Bengali modernity was primarily cultural and eminently literary. The first imaginings of Indian in dependence or resistance in the form of a war of liberation were not stim ulated so much by the study of his tory, political science, or sociology, as by literature. Bankim Chandra Chatterjee’s later writings, especially his novel Anandamath (t882), ac complished this feat. During his lifetime Bankim had been regarded only as a talented innovator of Bengali prose. Less than ten years after his death he began to be revered as the rishi, the ‘seer’ and prophet, of Indian national liberation. The last decade of the nineteenth century saw the meteoric international career of an other cultural hero of Bengal: Swami Vivekananda (1863-1902). He propa gated a highly modernized brand of Vedanta philosophy as an ideology of national empowerment in India and spiritual renewal for the rest of the world. Vivekananda’s contribution to Bengali literature is very small as his writings were published mainly in English. However, his influence on Bengali and Indian self-respect and national pride was tremendous. During the 1890s Rabindranath Tagore (1861-1941) rose to promi nence as the most prominent Ben gali poet, novelist and dramatist after Bankim. But as far as national ism was concerned, Bankim still reigned supreme.

National outrage When the Government of India implemented an administrative par tition of Bengal in 1905, it uninten tionally gave a major boost to Indian anticolonial nationalism. This parti tion provoked mass protest among the Bengalis who were joined in their indignation by nationalists in the other provinces. The size of the public outrage opened the eyes of In dian opinion to the possibility of allout resistance to British rule. Utiliz ing this wave of national outrage, the radical Bengali journalist and political thinker Aurobindo Ghose (1872-1950) revived and expanded

•2&5Tafer

Bankim’s nationalist symbolism and Vivekananda’s Vedantic empower ment into a consistent ideology of Indian nationalism based on the total overthrow of British rule. Between 1906 and 1908 Aurobindo poured out his radical Indian na tionalism in English in the newspa per Bande Mataram founded by Bipin Chandra Pal (1858-1932). Revolution was openly preached in the Yugantar, a Bengali paper with which Au robindo was secretly but deeply in volved. The highly seditious pieces that appeared in Yugantar were written by different authors, fore most among whom was Abinash Chandra Bhattacharya (1882-1962) whose articles were collected in two booklets which were considered seditious by the Government. In the same period, Rabindranath took the lead in the mass protests against the partition of Bengal and wrote nu merous patriotic songs celebrating Mother Bengal. He quickly distanced himself from the protest movement

when its violent revolutionary as pects began to come to the fore. Between 1905 and 1908 revolution ary underground propaganda by word in seditious magazines and pro paganda of the deed increased expo nentially, not only in Bengal proper, but it was also spreading in the Pun jab and the Bombay Presidency. One of the most notorious cases was the so-called Alipore bomb case (1909), in which Aurobindo and his younger brother, Barindra (1880-1959), were among the principal accused. In the British perception this case marked an important turning-point. The Government now regarded much of the Indian nationalist discourse dis seminated through the printing press with the utmost suspicion and it began seriously to prosecute those vernacular newspapers that it regard ed as preaching sedition. By 1910, armed revolution was not only being propagated in India itself, but also through Indian nationalist maga zines produced abroad such as the

Ghadr, ‘Mutiny’ published in Urdu from San Francisco by Har Dayal (1884-1939), who explicitly based him self on the Calcutta Yugantar; or the Bande Mataram published in English from Geneva by Madame Bhikhaiji Rustom Cama (1861-1936). Bengali po litical radicalism had begun to make its impact felt on a global scale and it had accomplished this almost solely through utilizing the potential of the printing press. Bengali modernity had successfully accomplished the transition from cultural theory to po litical practice. ■

Dr Victor A. van B ijlen is researcher o f Bengali literature and history and connected to Leiden University, The Netherlands. He is editor o f the Bengal Studies page in the HAS Newsletter, publishes on Bengali literature and the history o f Indian nationalism and has also translated works o f Rabindranath Tagore into Dutch.

The Role of Tamil Folkore in Modern Literature My current research on Tamil literary history focuses on the role o f folklore and print in the emergence o f a literary culture during the nineteenth century. My starting point is that, al though the study o f colonial India is replete with works on na tionalism, Hindu revivalism and so on, we know little about the place o f folklore in these movements. We recognize the central role o f folklore in constructing ‘authentic’ languages and literatures in Europe and, in turn, their role in European nationalisms. I believe that a case, similar yet different, can be made for folklore in India. By S T U A R T B L A C K B U R N

he project address es two core ques tions. First, what role did early printed books of folklore play in the development of a Tamil literary culture in the nine teenth century? Two thousand years ofTamil literary history underwent a series of major changes during the century: the advent of a printing in dustry; a public school system; a uni versity system; the rediscovery of an cient Tamil poetry. As a result, a lit erary culture emerged in which Tamils began to articulate new ideas about language and literature; liter ary biography began and literary his tory was written. The role of folklore in the emer gence of this literary culture is large

Research Project

ly determined by the transformation of oral traditions to print. By 1900 nearly a thousand Tamil books were published annually, but before 1850 most printed books were collections of folktales, proverbs and songs, which were continually reprinted. The impact of this printed oral litera ture on literary practices and linguis tic identity is an important area of my research. Secondly, what role did folklore play in the development of national ism and regional movements in south India? Once available in print, and sometimes in English transla tions, Tamil books of folklore entered into public debates about the ‘na tion’ and ‘Dravidian’ identity. A pre liminary study of the prefaces and re views of these books reveals that they were invoked as evidence of indige nous culture, as a cultural safe-haven

from the inroads of the colonial state, the English language, and Christian ity. By the end of the century, this printed oral literature was recog nized as a ‘national literature’. This research is informed by simi lar work in other modern Indian lan guages, which was presented at the European Association of Modern South Asian Studies at Prague in 1998 and at a conference at the University of California at Berkeley in 1999, or ganized by Prof V. Dalmia. A volume of essays, provisionally titled ‘New Literary Histories for Nineteenth Century India’, is forthcoming. ■

Dr S tu a n Blackburn teaches at the School o f Oriental and African Studies, London and specializes in Tamil folk-traditions and literature. E-mail: sb 12@ soas.ac.uk

His publicabons include: ‘Inside the Drama-House: Rama stories and shadow puppets in South India’, Berkeley: University o f California Press, 1996 ; 'Singing o f Birth and Death.Texts in performance’, Philadelphia: University o f Pennsylvania Press, 1988 ; Blackburn, Stuart H. et al feds) ‘Oral Epics in India’, Berkeley: University o f California Press,

1989.

February 2000 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

T4 8 2 L • 1 1

SOUTH

ASIAN

LITERATURE

Narrative Traditions of Rajasthan My analysis o f the form, content, and function o f medieval Dingal heroic poetry and contemporaiy oral epics o f the peoples o f the Great Indian Desert details the manner in which Rajasthan’s past is connected to its present. The bardic language, Dingal, and Virkavya’ (heroic poetiy) took shape in the context o f the medieval social and political formations in Rajasthan. For centuries, Caran bards, court poets, and chroniclers contributed to the tradition o f Dingal Virkavya’. Today, medieval virkavya as well as extant oral traditions continue to inspire Rajasthani prose and poetiy. Al though contemporaiy literature is only partially o f interest to my historical research, I would like to highlight some aspects o f yet another unwritten literary history o f South Asia. Here, I shall show how Rajasthani literature, like narrative genres world-wide, is shaped by the interplay between written and oral traditions. By J ANET KA MP HORS T

he development of written and oral Rajasthani narra tives can be illustrated by a study of the medieval and modern tradition of the adventures of Pabuji Dhandhal Rathaur, a fourteenth-century Rajput hero. Epic poems and panegyric cou plets dedicated to Pabuji were part of the Dingal manuscript tradition from the beginning of the sixteenth century onwards. Caran bards memorialized his self-sacrifice on the battlefield in verses like Pabuji ra duha, Pabuji rau chand, and Pabuji koyash vaman. The oral qualities of the bardic tradition were retained long after the verses be came part of the manuscript tradition of the area. In modern times, poets revitalized Dingal virkavya to air their anti-British sentiments. Hence Mahakavi Moraji Ashiya exalts Pabuji’s self-sacrifice in Pabu Prakash (1932), a Dingal poem ex uding patriotic pathos. After Indepen dence, the Rajput ideals of virkavya proved well suited to expressing a na tionalist love for the young nation. The self-sacrifice of Rajput warriors on rhe battlefield [tyagi), for instance, eas ily translated into a desire to dedicate one’s life to the motherland. Poets glo rified medieval Rajput heroes and con temporary freedom fighters employ ing Dingal versifications and bardic idiom. Rajput tyagi is likewise an ingredi ent of modem, regional definitions of Rajasthani identity. Last year, Pabuji’s story inspired Nirmohi Vyas (1934) to write a Rajasthani play titled The Hero Pabuji (Pranvir Pabuji 1999). The dra matic plot highlights Pabuji’s battle with his foe, Jindarav Khinci. It is un clear whether it is a coincidence that this play was published in the aftermath of Indo-Pakistani skirmishes in Kargill but, in his introduction to the play, Swami Sanvit Sonagiri suggests the contrary. He applauds the manner in which Pranvir Pabuji kindles ‘eternal values' like the sacrifice of individual lives for a ju st cause. Sonagiri’s subse quent remark is part of the ongoing project of regional identity building. He holds that ‘ethnic’ topics like the life of Pabuji are a more potent source of inspiration for Rajasthani writers than adopted and, by implication, in sipid Western literary themes. It is easy to see how, in Pranvir Pabu ji, oral narrative influences contempo rary Rajasthani writings. The play not only represents the written tradition about Pabuji, the influence of the ex tant oral epic of Pabuji is also clear. Al

Research Project

though the play is written in contem porary Rajasthani prose, it begins with a versified invocation sung by tradi tional Bhopo bards. The epic of Pabuji, as orally transmitted by the Bhopos, dates back to at least the sixteenth cen tury. This oral Bhopo tradition was first mentioned by Munhata Nainsi in his seventeenth-century chronicle of Rathaur history (Smith 1991:100).

Current evils Oral narratives are also a source of inspiration for Rajasthani prose writ ers like Vijay Dan Detha (1927). Detha is ranked among Rajasthani prqgatishil (pragativad) or progressive prose writ ers who express a modern political, often reformist awareness through their writings. Using contemporary literary genres (short stories and nov els), Detha rewrites folk narratives and experiments with oral narrative tech niques and vernacular idiom. In his collection of translated Rajasthani short stories, The Dilemma (1996), ani mal fables are modernized to create an

References Bhati, N.S. (ed.)

awareness of current evils like capital ist greed. And the age-old tale about the prince who kidnaps a princess is re-actualized in a story about the vil lage belle who abducts her female friend. The pair lives happily ever after. Detha has merged new folktales with modern motifs in his 1984 Rajasthani story Anek Hitler (Many Hitlers). It re lates the tale of five Vishnoi brothers who saved up together to buy a tractor and subsequently fall prey to feelings of deadly vengeance. The moral of the story is obvious: destructive feelings lie dormant in everyone’s heart. The writings of Vyas and Detha il lustrate how the content as well as the form of oral narratives affects contem porary literature. Likewise, oral recita tion remains central to present day Kavi Sammelans or gatherings of Ra jasthani poets. ‘Poets recite their poet ry on stage as it is the best way to reach

the vast audience of mainly illiterate Rajasthanis’, said C.P. Deval (1949), a poet of Nuttin Kavita (New Poetry), dur ing the Kavi Sammelan this year in Deshnok. Poets of Dingal verse, pro gressive poetry, and Nunin Kavita gath ered at Deshnok's Kami Mataji temple to recite their work in public. Deval, editor of the Rajasthani sec tion of Medieval Indian Literature, a vol ume to be published by the Sahitya Akade my this year [1999], is of the opin ion that Rajasthani literature will re tain its oral qualities as long as Ra jasthani is not recognized as a national language. Deval holds that Rajasthani Nunin Kavita (along the lines of Hindi Nai Kahani) has had relatively little fol lowing in Rajasthan for similar rea sons. ‘The small, literate class which speaks Rajasthani is only taught Hindi in school, while a major portion of Ra jasthan’s population remains illiterate

Pabu Prakas Mahakavi Moraji Ashiya knta

Jodhpur, 1983 Detha, Vijay Dan The Dilemma, Delhi, 1996 Aneka Hitler, Delhi, 1984 Sahitya Akademy Medieval Indian Literature Vol. Ill, forthcoming Smith, John D. The Epic ofPabuji, Astudy, transcription and translation Cambridge, 1991 Vyas, Nirmohi Pranvir Pabuji Bikaner, 1999 Janet K am phorst is a historian who is preparing a PhD dissertation on the historical context o f the development o f the written Dingal'virkavya’tradition and extant oral epics o f Rajasthan. She works at the CNWS, Leiden University. E-mail: jankam65@hotmail.com

Modernity in Hindi Poetry

f t CR ^1 HlS-l F TT 4vd"b

Poetry written in Modern Standard Hindi is a relatively new phenomenon. U ntil the 20th centuiy two Medieval Hindi d i alects, Braj Bhasha and Avadhi, were the recognized mediums o f poetry. Its main topics were religious devotion and courtly love. However, the advancement o f modernity in India - the germination o f national identity, the emergence o f a public sphere, the exposure to Western ideas, forms, and genres through English education - cast Hindi literature and, in par ticular, Hindi poetry in a very different mould. By LUCY ROS ENSTEI N

t the beginning of Research the twentieth cen Project tury the ideal worlds of the divine cou ple, Radha and Krishna, and of courtly heroes and heroines, were replaced by the imper fect world of hum an concerns. The poetry written in Modern Standard Hindi in the first two decades of the twentieth century was dedicated to public nationalism and social reform, and resembled eighteenth-century pre-Romantic English poetry in its matter-of-factness and descriptive ness. It was quickly replaced by the aesthetic, highly refined, and pro foundly subjective poetry of Chayavad, the Hindi incarnation of Ro manticism (1918-1938), which in its turn gave way to the political, often Marxist, verse of Prajjativad, Progressivism (1930s). The publication of Tar

1 2 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r TsE2 i • F e b ru a ry 2000

B§

The hero Pabuj i is the subject of afolk-epic in Rajasthan, North India.

to this date’, argues Deval. ‘And liter ary Rajasthani magazines and pub lishers are few. New ideas as expressed in Hindi prose and poetry have had only a moderate influence on the liter ary tradition of Rajasthan. It remains overwhelmingly oral in character’. The interrelated development of written and oral narratives is worth considering when drawing a new liter ary map of the Subcontinent This is an assertion that will hardly surprise anthropologists and other students of oral traditions. But, keeping in mind text-based and equally text-biased studies of the written traditions of South Asia, it is important to empha size how the content and the form of the texts we study are influenced by the interplay between written and oral traditions. ■

saptak, an anthology of the work of seven poets, in 1943 planted the first seedlings o f Nayi Kavita, New poetry, a movement nourished by Western modernism, particularly by the influ ence ofT.S. Eliot. Whereas Cftayavad has been reason ably well covered by Western Indology, very little research of substance has been done on the post-Indepen dence period of Hindi poetry. In order to fill this gap I have been working on a number of related projects. My main undertaking is an anthology of con temporary Hindi poetry which will focus on Nayi Kavita. It will include selections from the works of 10 poets associated with Tar Saptak, and its successors Dusra saptak and Tisra sap tak (The Second and Third Heptads). The poets will be introduced at some length - biographical notes will be supplemented with general observa tions on their oeuvre. The Hindi texts will be followed by annotated English

A poem by Dushyant Kumar Morning was about to break. Birds, awake, Fluttered wings in their nests, One by one flew off. Foreboding spread, creeping, creeping, Pain started throbbing; A tender hand began to grind Gram in the early morning. translations and accompanied by a se lected glossary. The introduction will not only locate Nayi Kavita on the general map of Hindi poetry, but will also chart the characteristics of mod ern Hindi poetry against the back ground of modern Hindi fiction and Western poetry, in an attem pt to ex amine the extent to which the all-per vasive concerns of the time have transgressed the boundaries of genre and even nation. Under the umbrella of ‘Modern Hindi poetry’ I have been working also on less ambitious, more specific projects. My paper “New Poetry’ in Hindi: a quest for modernity’ which is due to be published in the spring issue of South Asia Research, 2000, analyses Nayi Kavita's formula for modernity as its distinctive signature and its prerequisite for success. I have ju st completed “Shakespeare’s sister’ in India: in search of Hindi women

fiwl TIFT

d)HH FFT riFT

3FFTFF FHI

§F5FFI fFI 5FT IFÏÏ

poets’, an essay which looks at mod ern Hindi poetry through the lens of gender studies, and examines the rea sons for the scarcity of women poets in Hindi literature. Following this av enue of enquiry I also intend to focus on the work o f specific female poets, like Amrita Bharati. Because of the importance of orality in the Indian context, verse has been the dominant form; thus poetry can present a more complex model of modernity than prose - a model based on intricate dialectics with tradition rather than one inscribed on a. tabula rasa. It is therefore imperative to put an end to the neglect with which modem Hindi poetry has been treat ed by Western Indology. ■ Dr Lucy Rosenstein teaches Hindi at the School o f Oriental and African Studies, London, United Kingdom, E-mail: Ir I @soas.ac.uk

SOUTH

ASI AN

LI TERATURE

Hindi, Brajbhasa, and Bengali Poetry of the i5>th Century Indian poetry o f the nineteenth century is my major research interest. Far from being left behind by the rise o f print cul ture, this poetry reshaped itself in response to various notions o f social reform and artistic innovation. Often this meant at tempting to downplay the eroticism o f Indian lyrical tradi tions by stressing the martial, the classical, and the presum ably more idealistic romanticism o f the West. The different audiences which would encounter these works in print had to be accommodated, even while published poets continued to participate in the traditional oral cultivation o f poetry. ■

By S A G A R E E S E N G U P T A

y current re search on the Bengali poet Michael Madhusudan Datta [1829-1873) springs directly out of my work on the Hindi and Brajbhasha writer Bharatendu Hariscandra (1850-1885). Hariscandra knew of and was in spired by the conscious efforts Ben galis had made to identify a literary canon. This canon needed to suit de veloping ideas of national and re

Research Project

gional identity within the framework of British colonial domination. This meant that in addition to identifying classics from the past, works such as literary epics, auditorium dramas, and novels would have to be pro duced in order to fill gaps in the pro jected canon. Also of interest to me is the central role of the multifarious and prolific creative writer in the definition of re gional identity. Several such figures have been prominent in various South Asian regional literary canons, and they were in general self-con

The Internet A virtual public sphere The various contributions in this section it have shown how modem writing in South Asian languages has evolved with the formation o f new communities and public spheres. Literature has closely followed this development, as it appeared in media such as newspapers, journals, and magazines which also fea tured news and political essays. The printed periodicals have been very important for the rapid distribution o f new styles or genres o f writing. Books are expensive and have a notably smaller readership than the many literary journals and maga zines. In all the languages o f the Indian Subcontinent, maga zines have provided opportunities for the debut o f young writ ers, debates on literature and culture, and literary criticism.

scious about the roles they played within their own traditions. Michael Madhusudan Datta and Bharatendu Hariscandra are examples of this phe nomenon, and their pronouncements on their respective missions have, to an extent, become part of received lit erary lore. In my work I consider the importance sof both Michael Mad husudan Datta and Bharatendu Har iscandra as icons of renewal to their regional literary histories, and also how detailed examination o f their lives and works complicates their sta tus as national heroes. Hariscandra acknowledged his failure to make the variety of Hindi that is known as khari boli Hindi as poetically attractive as Brajbhasa. In addition, several gener ations of critics have pointed out Michael Madhusudan’s failure to maintain the heroic tone in his epic M eghnadbadh Kavya. These are illus trations of the conflict between the poets’ internalized tendencies and their stated intentions.

zines in South Asia. The contents of these periodicals consist of contribu tions of poetry and short stories by tiro authors, and literary reviews. Many of the magazines are based out side South Asia and seem to fulfil a double-sided role: for many South Asians in the USA, Canada, or else where, they are an outlet for literary creations and discussions on culture or literature and function in the same way as printed literary periodicals do in India. Yet, being based on writing in English, they are part of the cultur al life of the immigrant community outside South Asia and mainly reflect the culture clashes and other experi ences of this specific community, while still maintaining the link with South Asian culture.

Portals By T H O M A S DE B R U I JN

he format of these periodicals differs greatly: from small f A j l private publications aimn Sh I ed at a specific audience to large glossy publica tions with a nation-wide or interna tional readership. The tuning of the contents o f these publications to the wishes o f the audiences allowed for a certain ‘patronage’ by the readers, while advertisements provided an other significant source o f income. With the changes in middle-class culture and the rise o f a new form of ‘consumerism’, television, film, and international English magazines have taken over from the local peri odicals. Yet, a large num ber o f publi cations has survived and still plays an im portant role in the presenta tion o f new literary trends, new views on criticism, and in hosting political and cultural discussions.

The latest stage in the development of mass-media for public debate and literary publications is the emergence of magazines, newspapers, and jour nals on the Internet. Almost all o f the leading newspapers are also available on the Internet with digital issues, ranging from weekly digests to fullfledged news-services such as the site of the English newspaper The Hindu (www.hinduonline.com), modelled on the example of CNN.com and the BBC Online. The possibilities for small, low-cost publication enterpris es or even private initiatives on the In ternet are boundless. With a limited am ount of investment, even much less than the sum needed for a printed publication, a far greater number of potential readers can be reached, espe cially those South Asians who live and work abroad. It is an interesting phenomenon that the various smaller Internet magazines have used the format and outlook of the printed literary maga-

English writing is in most cases the common link for the readers and writers who use this new form of publication and communication, but there are also e-magazines which are based on writing in a South Asian lan guage. In this case, the Internet is a medium which can bring together members of a community with a more direct link with local cultures in South Asia. In this respect the Inter net publications reflect the practice of press and publishing which has shaped the outlook of modern South Asian literature and periodicals. For the development of post-colonial writing in English by South Asian au thors who have in most cases grown up outside the region, these media oc cupy a position that is similar to that of the earlier printed periodicals in South Asia. This similarity seems to provide a level of consecration that is essential to recognition and the at tainm ent of a position in the literary field. In Hindi literature, for instance,

Kabi-matrbhasa, orBangabhasa Bengali sonnet, by Michael Madhusudan Datta, i860 (Upon turning back to Bengali after attempting to be a poet in English) O Bengal! Such a crowd of gems in your treasury, Yet ignorant me, I neglected them all and travelled to foreign lands Drunk with the lure of the wealth of others I adopted a beggar’s ways at that evil hour And spent many days bereft of comfort and happiness. Sacrificing slumber and food, 1 dedicated body and soul. Fixed on a boon that could never be granted. I sank myself in fruitless austerity, I sported in slimy Weed-filled waters, forgetting my native lotus grove, Until forgiving Lakshmi, my ancestors’ goddess, spoke in a dream: ‘My child! Such a richness of gems in your mother’s Treasure-chest, and you in this beggar’s dress today! Go back, unknowing one, go back to your home!’ Happily, I obeyed her command, and in time Once more found my mother tongueThat precious mine laced with a bounty of gems.

While the growth of prose litera ture in the nineteenth century is of undeniable importance, poetic gen res which had wide currency at the time have often been overlooked. The separate projects I am pursuing are meant to contribute to compara tive literary study across the regions and languages of South Asia. The ac tive exchange which has long existed among literatures in different South

Asian languages has been neglected in favour of the critical emphasis on the relationship w ith Western litera ture. Turning the attention of schol ars towards literary connections among the South Asian regions themselves may help to dispell some of the myopia that has resulted from dependence on more accessible gen res and languages. ■

Sogaree Sengupta is Visiting Assistant Professor Languages and Cultures of Asia and teaches Hindi and Urdu at the Center for South Asia, University o f Wisconsin, Madison,Wisconsin, USA. E-mail: sagaree@uts.cc.utexas.edu

the scene of the magazines provided an important forum for innovation and development of a literary avantgarde in the years after Independence. The latest phenomenon on the In ternet is the ‘portal’. For users of the WorldWideWeb, it is convenient to have a start page which comes up when starting the browser. This page contains all sorts of links, news, infor mation, or advertisements. The por tals reflect a certain identity and have become favourite targets for enter prises which want to exploit the com mercial possibilities of the Internet. This has led to a large number of por tals, including those based on a specif ic ethnic or linguistic background. There is a certain overlap with digital magazines, but the portals are de signed to influence the ‘surfing’ be haviour of the users much more di rectly. Portals targeted at the South Asian web user, such as www.orientation.com, offer services like e-mail in Hindi and specific news of the region. A mix of an electronic magazine in the ‘traditional’ style and a portal is Chowk (www.chowk.com) with a greater emphasis on participation by writers, reviewers, and debaters. The Internet can be seen as the lat est stage in the development of a pub lic sphere where members of a com m unity formulate and exchange ideas or literary works and where identities are formed. All through the history of modern writing in South Asian lan guages exposure in the public sphere has been a central force in the devel opment of literature, essay writing, and other genres. With modernity came the diaspora of South Asians to all parts of the world, forced or volun tary. This process created a communi ty and a cultural identity in which home and origin took on new mean ings. Despite huge distances and diffi

cult circumstances, writing in the languages of South Asia provided a link with the region of origin as well as with fellow immigrants. The possi bilities for communication without a centre among a widely spread out ‘vir tual’ community on the Internet has given rise to a new form of publish ing. Departing from formats and con tent that are linked to the early histo ry of the field of modem South Asian literature, this initiative will explore the many possibilities of post-mod ern publishing. ■

A few links to digital publications http://www.monsoonmag.com http://www.chowk.com http://www.sulekha.com http://www.orientation.com http://www.zameen.com http://www.south-asianinitiative.org/sanam/ http://www.dawn.com http://members.xoom.com/southasia/ http://www.indiastar.com http://www.parabaas.com (Bengali) http://www.jaalmag.com http://www.himalmag.com http://www.mp.nic.in/panchayika/ http://www.rajasthanpatrika.com/ http:// www.indiatimes.com

February 2000 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

N °2 i •

1 3

REGI ONAL

N E WS

Central Asia

AFGHANISTAN KYRGYZSTAN TAJIKISTAN

• KAZAKHSTAN • MONGOLIA

• TIBET

TURKMENISTAN

• UZBEKISTAN

XINJIANG-UYGUR

The Samantabhadra Archives The

Nyingm a Tantras Research Project

’The Samantabhadra Archives’ is an electronic and collabora tive project designed to facilitate the reproduction, analysis, translation, and interpretation o f one o f the most important religious canons ofTibetan Buddhism, namely ‘The Collected Tantras o f the Ancients (rNying ma’i rgyud ‘bum]’. The project is technologically innovative in its basis on Standard General ized Markup Language [SGML] and Extensible Markup Lan guage (XML) to ensure ease o f access via the World Wide Web, enhanced search and analysis capability, and complete cross platform compatibility. In addition, we are working towards the use o f Unicode-compliant Tibetan language fonts as these become viable. Institutionally, it is based at the Institute for Advanced Technology in the Humanities at the University o f Virginia and the Centre for Social Anthropology and Comput ing at the University o f Kent at Canterbury, and is co-directed by David Germano and Robert Mayer.

Research Project

■ By D A V I D G E R M A N O A N D RO BER T M A Y E R

of the most crucial, but least studied, collec tions of pre-fifteenth cen tury translations and in digenous compositions in Tibetan Buddhism. This collection currently exists in at least six variant editions: the sDe dge,gTing skyes, mTshams brag, Waddell, sKyigrong (in two forms) and the Bai ro r^yud 'bum. We are actively seeking out other editions said to exist in Bhutan and Nepal, for exam ple: partial collections o f related or identical materials also exist in some bKa’ ‘g yur and bsTan ‘g yur editions, and elsewhere. Although there is a basic core set o f texts, there are con siderable variations from edition to edition, even with respect to their contents. All are based on the tripar tite classification scheme of Atiyoga, Anuyoga, and Mabyoga, with the ex ception of the Bai ro r^yud ‘bum, which is an exclusively Atiyoga-based collec tion. Moreover, individual texts may be found in other smaller collections or on their own. All together, The Col lected Tantras o f the Ancients contains more than a thousand unique texts that are not found in any other Ti betan scriptural collection. Many of the texts are translations into the Ti betan language, and are attributed to a wide variety of Chinese, Indian, and Central Asian authors; however, many of the texts appear likely to be indigenous Tibetan compositions. Until now, only one o f these edi tions, the Tingkyay [gting skyes), has even been indexed (in a Japanese publication by E. Kaneko); other edi tions remain unindexed, much less analysed. Moreover, until now only limited scholarship on these texts has emerged in contemporary acade mic circles, few critical editions of even the individual texts have been published, and the historical rela tionships between the various edi tions have yet to be adequately

wmm TIBETOLOGICAL COLLECTIONS & ARCHIVES SERIES The following article by David Germano and Robert Mayer describing The Samanta bhadra Archives: the Nyingma Tantras Research Project is the first in a series devoted to im portant projects on cataloguing,'computeri zation' (inputting and scanning), editing, and translation of important Tibetan language text-collections and archives. In the follow ing issues of the HAS Newsletter, various colleagues will briefly present their initia tives to a larger public, or, as the case may be, update the scholarly world on the progress of their already well-established projects. Some are high-profile projects, of which at least Tibetologists will generally be aware, yet some may also be less wellknown. Nevertheless, I trust that it will be useful to be informed or updated on all these initiatives and I also hope that the projects presented will profit from the ex posure and the response that this coverage will engender. If you are interested in any of the projects described, feel free to contact the author of the article. In case you would like to introduce your own (planned) work in the field, please contact the editor of the HAS Newsletter or the author of this intro duction. We should very much like to en courage our contributors to keep us in formed on the progress of their projects by regular updates. The next contribution in this series will be by Yasuhiko Nagano on his Bon project (based at the National Museum for Ethnolo gy in Osaka,Japan). ■ H E N K BLEZER

Research fellow HAS E-mail: Blezer@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

@EUJ 14 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

he Collected Tantras o f the Ancients is one

N?2i • February 2000

analysed. For these reasons, research into these texts represents an impor tan t and relatively underdeveloped field o f Tibetan and Buddhist stud ies. Although Canonical Studies has recently emerged as a central topic in Tibetan Studies, research to date has focused largely on analysis o f the two normative collections of translations of texts: the bKa ’ ‘g ynr, attributed to various Buddhas, and the bsTan ‘g ynr, attributed to miscellaneous Indian authors. Despite its crucial impor tance, however, The Collected Tantras o f the N yingm a has previously been largely overlooked w ithin this devel oping field of research.

Multimedia environm ent The Samantabhadra Archives is a sig nificant attem pt to redress this situa tion. The initial aim is to index com prehensively each individual edition of The Collected Tantras o f the Nyingma in SGML and XML, and create a mas ter cross-referenced index. The second major goal is to create digital images of the original manuscripts along with electronic editions that can then be searched and reformatted using Unicode Tibetan script fonts. The third aim is to utilize these different electronic editions systematically to facilitate the creation of critical edi tions. This will allow scholars to de termine the historical relationships between the various editions, and will yield valuable insight into their his torical development. The fourth aim is to solicit translations of each text, which will eventually result in the entire collection being translated into modern European languages. Our long-term plan is that each text will have associated with it a re search archive o f translations, digi tized images of the original m anu script, editions o f the original Ti betan, analytical summaries, text crit ical analysis, relevant iconographic images, and so on. All of these materi als will be interlinked via SGML/XML through the catalogues, so that a plu rality of editions, research, and con textualizing information can be ac cessed through the catalogues of the texts. To facilitate this, we plan to launch a refereed electronic journal that will provide an important acade mic forum for publication of relevant research. Our orientation is interdis ciplinary, and we will be actively so liciting participation by philologists, historians, historians of religion, an thropologists, art historians, literary specialists, and so forth. The use of Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML) and Exten sible Markup Language (XML) will

greatly enhance scholars’ ability to search and analyse a vast amount of textual material. In addition to en abling a wide range of sophisticated operations, it will create a m ultime dia environment for the display of in dexes, cross-references, texts, transla tions, and analyses that will be Unicode-compliant and Internet-accessi ble. In short, the use of SGML/XML in this project will maximize the func tionality of these materials as research aids and insure their continued use fulness well into the future. Another essential goal is to create a diverse but interlinked set of electronic controls and co-ordinating mechanisms for the networked management of such a complex collaborative project based at multiple centres. This will open the project to the wider scholarly com munity with automated procedures for handling the different types of data in ways that minimize adminis trative labour, automate record keep ing, and facilitate efficient exchange.

In this way scholars in any country will be able not only to access these materials, but also to contribute their own translations, analyses, etc., to the evolving database with no difficulty. By the beginning of 2000 we plan to have a public release of an initial ver sion of the Archives over the WWW (http://jefferson.village.virginia.edu/ tibet/), which will consist of a partial form of the mTshams bra^j edition’s cat alogue. Over the course of 2000, the site will be gradually updated with the goal of completion of the mTshams brag edition’s catalogue by June 1,2000. The catalogue for the Waddell edition is due in 2001. Preliminary work on the other editions has begun, but the time schedule for them is partially depen dent on pending funding requests. This initial public release will be ac companied by the launching of an in terdisciplinary electronic journal de voted to Tantric studies in Tibetan cul ture with a strong emphasis on the rNying ma and Bon po traditions. ■

David Germano, University ofVirginia, Dept of Religious Studies, E-mail: germano@virginia.edu: Robert Mayer, Gastprofessor Tebetologie Zentralasien Seminar, Von Humboldt Universitat, e-mail: r.mayer@ukc.ac.uk

A Voice for Tibet If there is anything that unites Chinese people o f all persua sions, it is the Chinese view on Tibet. Communist or nationalist, mainland or overseas, cadre or dissident, virtually all Chinese agree on that Tibet is an inalienable part o f the Chinese mother land. To promulgate this view the Chinese resort to legends, such as the tale o f the Tang princess, Wencheng, who married the Tibetan king, Songtsen Gambo, in the 8th century, thus al legedly sealing the union o f the two nations for all time to come. By J U H A J A N H U N E N

ee Feigon, a history professor from Maine, sets out to counter such myths and tries to convince his readers o f the opposite that Tibet is not a part o f China but a separate country th at was de facto independent until the Communist invasion in 15150, or even until the ‘democratic’ reforms and the exile o f the Dalai Lama in 15152. Even though it is true, large parts o f Tibet had ear lier already been absorbed into the Chinese provinces o f Gansu, Qinghai, and Sichuan. Considering the fact th at Feigon claims to be ‘demystifying’Tibet, his approach may be regarded as some what idealistic. The concept of Greater China, comprising Tibet, Mongolia, and Eastern Turkestan, is not an invention o f the communist government - it has far more ancient roots in history. Formally Tibet has

even been a part of China since it was annexed by the Manchus around 1720. In the first place the territorial identity o f modern China reflects that o f the Manchu state. For those who aspire to an inde pendent Tibet, Feigon’s book is a painful reminder of the vicissitudes o f history. So little would have been required to make the dream come true, if only the right decisions had been made at the right time. But one opportunity after another was lost, and in the end everyone can be blamed for indecision and inconsis tency: Britain, India, the US and Tibet itself whose 20th century rulers found the task of creating a modern nation beyond them. The only nation o f which Tibet policy has been both consistent and suc cessful is China. Even more painfully, however, Feigon is right in that the destruc tive developments in Tibet are accel erating at an alarm ing pace. While Tibet has had its share o f Chinese

For new p u b lic a tio n s in A s ia n S tudies, p lease re fe r to pp. 3 4 -4 2

CENTRAL

Political Reforms in Mongolia The disintegration o f the socialist system, which was one o f the remarkable events which took place at the end o f the 1980s and the beginning o f 1990s throughout the world, opened up possibilities o f making essential changes in the socio-econom ic life o f former socialist countries. Coincidentally, with the renewals going on in the Soviet Union and East European countries, the same process began to happen in Asian socialist countries, in Mongolia in particular. As in other socialist countries, Mongolia was ruled by a single-party political sys tem, Marxist-Leninist philosophy had to be worshipped dog matically, and every effort was made to implement this by any means whatsoever. ■ By N. A L T A N T S E T S E G

f a f he existing central| ized planned econJL omy was based on state ownership. Human rights, freedoms, and basic principles of demo cracy were violated to a great extent. So the climate in Mongolia was right for a strong movement to develop to overcome this situation, by changing the political and economic systems and developing the country in a de mocratic way. From its inception the democratic movement in Mongolia was characterized more by political features rather than economic ones. The late S. Zorig, General Co-ordina tor of the Mongolian Democratic Union, who was killed in dubious circumstances, once said the follow ing: ‘The goal and the guideline of Mongolian Democratic movement of

cultural influence over the cen turies, it was virtually free of Chi nese physical presence until the Cul tural Revolution. It has only been during the last two decades that eth nic Chinese have infiltrated Tibet on a massive scale. Ironically, much of this is due to the economic opening up and increasing prosperity of China. Since China’s prosperity is in every body’s interest, there is no hope of getting help from the international community. Tibet would also be wise to refrain from looking for sympathy from Taiwan - a government which has not even recognized Mongolia. Indeed, Tibet activists had better for get about independence altogether the crucial thing today is survival. The only viable option for Tibet would seem to be the Hong Kong model. But the real problem is that China has few reasons to make any concessions on the Tibet issue. ■ - Feigon, Lee

Demystifying Tibet: Histoty, culture, peoplefrom its seventh-century origins

to the present day London: Profile Books, 1996, ISBN 1-566-63089-4

Professor Juha Janhunen chairs the Department o f East Asian Languages and Cultures at the University o f HelsinkiJP 59, FI 0 0 0 14, Helsinki, Finland.

Mongolia is to transfer to a multipar ty system, adopt a law about political parties, to put an end to the predom inant rulership of one party, to change the People’s Great Khural into a permanently working Parlia ment, and the establishment of a commission on human rights’. New political organizations com menced their activities. Parties and or ganizations like the New Develop ment Union, the Democratic Socialist Movement, the Mongolian Green Par ty, the Mongolian Social Democratic Party, the Mongolian National Devel opment Party, and the Mongolian Free Labour Party were established. They have not only swelled in num bers, they have widened the frame work of their activities as well. As a re sult of the stalwart struggle and the persistent urging by Mongolian de mocratic forces, the Central Commit tee of the MPRP called an urgent meeting at which it made the decision that the Political Bureau and all party secretaries should be dismissed com pletely.

Pluralism This 1990 decision marked a democ ratic revolution won by peaceful means, forcing an authoritarian re gime to collapse, and it created the political and legal foundations for es tablishing a democratic political sys tem in Mongolia. It opened up possi bilities for eliminating the single party ideology and for establishing conditions for pluralism. It unlocked possibilities for the socialist central ized economy to transform into a market economy and for the creation of free competition among the eco nomic units in the country. It created the social and legal environment nec essary for the implementation of democracy, human rights, and free doms, for putting people at the centre of social life. The process of political renewal in Mongolia can be divided into the fol lowing stages: 1. The stage of transition from a oneparty system to a system with a per manently working parliament, be tween December 1990 and July 1992. The main features of this stage were: - The multi-party system was intro duced and any problems which arose were solved by the political powers on the basis of discussions and compromise. - The Administration of the Presi dent of Mongolia was established in order to solve problems by peace

ASI A

ful means. Without this, the con flict between the old system and the new could have ruptured the pristine state administrative mech anism. - At this time the State Baga Khural (Small Parliament) continued to conduct the matters of state until the new Constitution was adopted and the new permanent Parliament began its work. In the Baga Khural, the highest legislative body, the seats were divided as follows: the MPRP - 31, the Mongolian Develop ment Party, and the Mongolian So cial Democratic Party 3 each. - During the first democratic elec tions held in 1990, the number of deputies was increased from 370 to 430 and taking the proposals of the parties into consideration a new state Baga Khural was established. - It was decided to discuss the new constitution and present it to the Parliament to be ratified. - During the elections of 1990, the deputies to all the levels of the khurals were elected. Four hundred and thirty people were elected to the Baga Khural and about 13,000 deputies to the local khurals. - T h e former ruling party won 68 seats and the democratic forces 32 seats in the Baga Khural. This meant that the MPRP had a free hand to arrange its own cabinet, nevertheless it was composed in such way that D. Ganbold from the Mongolian National Development Party and Dorligjav from the Mon golian Democratic party were ap pointed as deputy-prime ministers. So 14 members or 87.5 per cent of the Cabinet were drawn from the MPRP, with the Mongolian Na tional Development Party and the Mongolian Democratic Party hav ing one person each giving them 12.5 per cent. This transitional system lasted till July 1992 and the working principles of the Great Khural and the Govern ment were described in the supple ment to the Constitution. The princi ples of the new democratic system were thoroughly worked out and, after it had been discussed by the pop ulation of the country, the New Con stitution of Mongolia was adopted on January 13,1992. The principles of the state activities and the composition of the state organizations were set out in it. The Constitution says that ‘the Great Khural of Mongolia is the high est state governing body and the leg islative rights belong to the Great Khural only. The Great Khural has one chamber and seventy-six mem bers, members of the Great Khural are elected by the citizens on the basis of free, direct elections’. ‘The President is the Head of the State person who symbolizes unity of the country.’ The Constitution states unequivocally: ‘The Government is the highest exec utive body.’

Peculiar The New Constitution declares Mongolia to be a parliamentary re public. It divides the power between the Great Khural as the legislative body, the executive bodies (President as the Head of the State and the Gov ernment), and the judicial body, the Court. But it is peculiar because it has some features of a presidential state. The president who is elected by the whole population has the right to

For more information on institutes of Central Asian Studies, p lease refer p. 60 of th e Pink Pages

veto the decisions on the laws adopted by the Parliament and the Parliament can reject the veto if two-thirds of its members vote to do so. The president appoints the judges, but the courts work independently. The supreme ex ecutive body must report its actions to the supreme legislative body. The constitution provides possibilities for all these bodies to work independent ly, but at the same time has built-in mechanisms for mutual control and balance. The democratic system creat ed the Constitutional Court which is the highest body to protea the ad ministration of justice and control the implementation of the constitu tion. 2. The stage of establishing a perma nently working Parliament, the pe riod after July 1992. The outstand ing features of this period have been: - The Parliament has been elected taking the programmes of the par ties and the real situation in the country into consideration. - Human rights have been declared to be the most precious item in the political sphere. - A mechanism was created which al lows the minority to put a check on the activities of the majority in the Parliament. Since 1992 when the new Constitu tion was adopted, two parliamentary and two presidential elections have taken place. In the 1992 elections to the Parliament, the Mongolian De mocratic Party, the National Develop ment Party and the Mongolian Unit ed Parties formed a union which con tested the eleaions as a single body. The Mongolian Social Democratic Party participated independently. At these elections the MPRP won 71 seats. The Union of the Mongolian Democratic Party, the National De velopment Party, and the Mongolian United Parties four and the Social De mocratic Party one seat. The MPRP gained beneficial experience in partic ipating in elections, and besides this, the participation of a number of dif ferent small parties influenced the re sults of elections. And at that time not much trust was evinced in the new young parties. - At the presidential elections, which were held not long after the parlia mentary ones, the Mongolian Na tional Demoaatic Party united it self with many small democratic parties and together with the Mon golian Social Demoaatic Party put forward the name of P. Ochirbat as presidential candidate. At the first presidential elections P. Ochirbat won by 57.8 per cent. - At the regular parliamentary elec tions in 1996, the National Democ ratic Party and the Social Democ ratic party organized the ‘Democ ratic Union Association’ to partici pate in the elections. The ‘Democ ratic Union Association’ won fifty seats, the MPRP won 25 and the Mongolian Traditional United Party 1 seat. At the first session of the newly elected parliament, which took place on July 18,1996, a member of the So cial Democratic Party R. Gonchigdorj was elected as speaker of the Parlia ment and a member of the Demoaat ic Party, Ts. Elbegdorj, as deputy speaker. The next day, the Association started to organize its cabinet headed by M. Enkhsaikhan. N. Bagabandi

worked as the leader of the MPRP group of the Parliament. The elections showed the faith of Mongolians in their espousal of the democratic way of development, the honouring of human rights, and the advantages of the market economy. People put a great deal of trust in the new state. This did not mark the end of the struggle in the Mongolian po litical arena. During this period of time the MPRP put a full stop behind its earlier activities and managed to revise its policy, which brought better results. For example, at the presiden tial elections of 1997, the candidate from the MPRP, N. Bagabandi, won the election gaining 60.8 per cent of the votes. The MPRP was also quite successful in the elections after 1993. The recent rise in the MPRP’s pres tige can be explained by the fact that, although the main guidelines of the policy of Demoaatic Union were right, it has made some mistakes dur ing their implementation. The Asso ciation has produced four new gov ernments in the 3 years since July 19, 1996. Now the fourth government has taken office. The frequent changes in government are connected with the difficulties of the transition period. During the process of privatization, many former state-owned enterprises were closed down as a result of which the number of unemployed rose. This caused a fall in the standard living of the population, which was the reason for the dismissal of the first demoaa tic government. The second govern ment failed to accomplish the over haul and development of the Mongo lian banking system. The third gov ernment was dismissed in connection with problem of the MongolianRussian joint combine ‘Erdenet’. Now the fourth government is ensconced. It is headed by the Prime Minister R. Amarjargal. From all which has been said above it is evident that there is conflict be tween the political system and the economic system arising from the transition to the market economy. Difficulties which have occurred dur ing this transition period have had an adverse influence on the minds of people. In other words, economic dif ficulties have influenced the political situation. Deterred by the mistakes made by the Democratic Union, peo ple have turned to the MPRP in in creasing numbers. It is clear that at the elections to be held in 2000 people will give their votes to those forces which they feel might be able to solve socio-economic problems which are being faced by the country. Nowadays the situation requires party and political forces which can improve the living conditions of peo ple and pull the country out of the economic crisis. Whatever happens Mongolia should not and will not turn away from the demoaatic way of development. We are confident that in the near fixture the country shall overcome its present economic diffi culties. ■

Dr N. Altantsetseg, an HAS visiting exchange fellow (Mongolian Academy of Science) can be reached at: E-mail: iiasguest8@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

F e b r u a r y 2000 • IIAS NEWS L ETT ER >4521 •

REGI ONAL

N E WS

South Asia South Asia Editor

BANGLADESH

• BHUTAN

I ND I A • NEPAL P A K I S T A N • SRI

AUTUMN

LANKA

1999

UNIVERSITY

WISCONSIN,

USA

N e tty B o n o u v rié T he M a d iso n S o u th Asia C o n feren ce 1515)5)

Netty Bonouvrié worked as a chemical analyst in a medical lab oratory until she decided to pursue her interest in cultural and linguistic studies. She took up Indology in Utrecht and specialized in the religions o f India. She is currently rounding off her PhD and works as an academic documentalist at the Documentatiecentrum Zuid-Azië, at the University o f Leiden. Since its inception Netty Bonouvrié has been South Asia Edi tor for the IIAS Newsletter. hat is the subject o f your doctoral research? My PhD is a literary study of the Bhakti tradition of northern India, in the turbulent period 1300 to 1550. During that time many religious movements were in contact with one another. Bhakti (literally: devotion) is a Hindu movement which spread from the south. We can distinguish two main types of North Indian Bhakti: one is Saguna, the branch that thinks of the gods personified in Krishna or Rama, the other is Nirguna, the type that ad vocates faith in an impersonal Being. A link between Nirguna Bhakti and Sufism has always been suspected, but no serious research had yet been conducted to establish this. I hope to present my results next year. Canyou describeyour work at the Documentatiecentrum Zuid-Azië? In my current job I keep track of the political, social, and economic devel opments in South Asia, more specifi cally India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, the Mal dives, and Tibet. I co-ordinate the ad ministration ofjournals. These, along with the books we acquire, are kept in the Kern Institute Library. Here, I maintain a collection of video tapes and grey literature. I am also setting up a database which will be made available on the Internet in the fu ture. The main task of the Documen tatiecentrum is to answer questions posed by governmental departments, schools, lawyers, the Hindu Broad casting Company, etc. To give one ex ample: a Sikh, when applying for a job in the Netherlands, once insisted on working in his complete traditional costume, including his sword. We were asked by his worried future em ployer whether this was to be consid ered a sign of aggression. In this case I could inform him about the customs of the various groups of Sikhs. At other times, I refer to specialists in the field, for example, in case of questions about the Kashmir dispute.

By MA A R T E N BAVI NCK

You are a lecturer on top o f that? Though I hold no official post as a lecturer, I teach parts of courses on Hinduism and on Contemporary South Asia. In the latter, Jos Gommans and I focus on a new subject each time and we encourage our stu dents to make use of newspapers, journals, and the Internet. This year’s topic will be The Identity Crisis in South Asia: Nationalism and funda mentalism in India and Pakistan’. . Doyou plan to continue these tasks injuture? As a matter of fact, I am getting more and more interested in Modem India and modem Hinduism myself One option after finishing my PhD would be to conduct further research on contemporary issues. I also plan to continue teaching and working at the Documentatiecentrum, and to start travelling to South Asia again, after a four-and-a-half year break during which my son was born. How doyou performj/our South Asia editorshipfo r the IIAS Newsletter? Through my work of course I re ceive a wealth of information. I keep track of conferences, and many arti cles are sent to the IIAS on people’s personal initiative. I think we present a reasonably balanced overview of the state of affairs in South Asian Studies, there are often contributions ranging from anthropology to classical Indol ogy. We could present more political and economic issues and we could certainly devote more attention to countries like Bhutan and Bang ladesh. It would also be interesting to hear more from such fields as health care, environmental studies, wildlife protection, etc. ■ (EvdH)

N e tty Bonouvrié can be reached at bonouvne@rullet.leidenuniv.nl. l

The Madison South Asia Conference, which is organized each autumn by the Centre for South Asia o f the University o f Wis consin, is arguably the most important academic event for so cial scientists interested in this particular geographical region. Gathering anthropologists, historians, textual students, politi cal scientists and others from all parts o f the United States and abroad, it provides for almost three days o f discussion on a wide variety o f subjects. In 1999, approximately 450 people attended the 28th annual conference. Regretfully, however, only a hand ful o f Europeans and residents o f South Asia were present.

• IIAS n e w s l e t t e r "N?2i • F ebruary zooo

ut why Madison of all places? This s pa c i ous l i t t l e Midwestern city, elected by Money magazine as the USA’s No. 1 place to live, is certainly pleasant, even when - as during this year’s event - its streets are thronged by men, women, and children dressed in the red and white garb of the local foot ball team (luckily, the home team won). But it is small, not especially easy to reach, and its South Asia de partment, although of good quality, is not renowned. Why then do schol ars, both those with well-earned rep utations as those just starting out, gather in this particular place? What explains the number of fascinating panels, the impressive papers, and the high level of discussions? In short, what makes this such a won derful conference to attend? The an swer to this question probably does not differ from the one of why suchand-such a place in South Asia has become a religious pilgrimage centre - chance, individual volitions, a par ticular chain of events. Seen in this light, Madison is the Madurai, the Benares, of South Asia scholarship at least for a few days a year. The 1999 South Asia Conference included no less than 75 panels, a video festival (with 16 films), four round tables, a book exhibit and a plenary session on human rights. The keynote address was delivered by Dr Ved Pratab Vaidik, journalist and chairman of the Council for In dian Foreign Policy, on the topic of Global terrorism: threat to world peace. What about the panels? These catered to a large range of scholarly interests, including religious studies (e.g. Controversies and contested is

sues in Buddhist Studies), textual studies (e.g. Yuganta: reading Mahabharata as another millennium winds down), history (e.g. Financing war, trade and industry: early mod ern social and economic history), gender studies (e.g. National identi ty and the women question), politi cal science (e.g. Perspectives of Indi an polity), economics (e.g. State-pri vate sector debate in India), and an thropology (e.g. Identity shifts across time, place, and language). However, this year’s conference also displayed some biases. Geographi cally, attention centred on North India, with other parts of South Asia receiving considerably less atten tion. To my European eyes, the low incidence of panels on topics of so cial anthropology and contemporary development issues was also surpris ing. Discussions tended to be elevat ed and culturally oriented, thereby overlooking many of the Subconti nental population’s daily concerns. But, of course, there were exceptions too, such as the interesting panel on Struggle for social justice and identi ty: issues of dalits and Buddhism in India.

Society in New York, it considered ways in which performances such as theatre, song, or dance are used to address political issues. The fact that all of the speakers are active per formers themselves gave added value to the panel. One of the ‘papers’ centred on two video fragments was shocking to a person accus tomed to Indian gender roles. By ex panding on and exaggerating a Hindi film dancer’s performance, it formed a lurid commentary on the position and expectations of Indian women. This brings me to another point. South Asia Studies in North America is fast becoming the domain of scholars who come from the region itself Many of them have been trained, and have then chosen to work, in the United States. Their in volvement has brought in new skills (such as language) and insights into the field. It also infuses many discus sions with the fervour of the quest for identity - with the questions these scholars have about them selves, their backgrounds, and their position in society. From the musings of armchair academics dis cussing ‘the Other’ in Indian society, conferences like this thus now also talk about ‘us’, the members of the diaspora. This makes them more than ju st academic events. And then, finally, my own panel, entitled India’s fisheries: social and ecological impact of globalization and economic development. Al though this panel was ‘ghosted’ to the end of the conference when al most everyone had already left, it provided a unique opportunity for meeting others and for comparing notes. Hopefully we shall be able to give this initiative a follow-up in next year’s South Asia Conference. For, let me be clear, that is an event I hope to attend. The 29th Annual Conference on South Asia will take place October 13 to 15, 2000. The deadline for the sub mission of proposals is May 15, 2000. Further information can be pro cured from www.wisc.edu/southasia/conf/ ■

Exaggeration Every participant in the confer ence will have his or her own list of highlights. For me, being a staunch lover of South India and the Tamil language, the panel on Literary metamorphoses, Tamil and other traditions, chaired by George Hart, was a special delight. This expert panel discussed various Old Tamil literary texts, placing them in the language contexts of their time. One of the conclusions was that one sim ply cannot study Indian languages in isolation. Another of my favourite panels was called Performing the political. Chaired by Sunita Mukhi of the Asia

M aarten Bavinck is attached to the University o f Amsterdam. Email: bavinck@isg.frw.uva.nl

For new publications in Asian Studies, p lease refer to pp. 34-42

SOUTH

An Indianfieldworker in the 'Netherlands

Reverse Anthropology? Anthropological or fieldwork-based studies o f the welfare state are few and studies o f Western Europe by anthropolo gists from Asia or the South are rare, making for a crucial point o f departure in this study. It has been undertaken within the framework o f collaborative research between Indian and Dutch scholars (IDPAD). It aims to address theoretical and policy debates centering on the interrelationships between state, society, and gender, through case studies o f vulnerable categories in the Netherlands. ■ By RAJ N I PALRIWALA

ver the last fifty 1 years an extensive welfare sys tem has been developed in the Netherlands. With a booming economy, cit izenship and economic indepen dence allowed individuals to bypass mediating social units and networks and deeply affected the material di mensions, intensity, and emotional content of personal relationships. In broad terms, this was a general pat tern in much of Western Europe. The Dutch system ranked very high in conferring state benefits by family unit rather than by individual. While social legislation transformed intergenerational responsibilities of fami ly members towards each other, poli cies assumed notions of gender / par enting responsibilities as seen in the concept of the male breadwinner and full-time mother. This led to an un equal division of benefits within families and earned the Dutch wel fare system the reputation of being simultaneously progressive and tra ditional. Bowing to the pressures of the eco nomic recession and the shift in the international balance of power, gov ernment spending and West Euro pean welfare systems have come under increasing pressure over the last decade. Moreover, it is of interest that even as cutbacks have become the benchmark in recent years, the Dutch system has again received ac colades. Among the terms in which the current retraction of the state welfare system and its future have been argued are the moral implica tions of ‘being on welfare’ and the need to strengthen ‘social connected ness’, revive ‘family values’ and re duce the presence of the state. Simul taneously, the process of individual ization is stressed as inevitable and desirable as is demonstrated in re cent proposals in the Netherlands re garding work-obligations of single parents with infants. In the first phases of the project, structural shifts in and the contem porary debates regarding the future of the Dutch welfare state and its gendered conjunctions have been ex amined by Maithreyi Krishna Raj, while Carla Risseeuw has analysed the literature on and historical I

trends in familial relationships in the Netherlands. The two fieldwork foci in the project are the age group of 65+ (Kamala Ganesh) and single parents (Rajni Palriwala), both in the Randstad and primarily within the Leiden municipality. The category of single parents includes divorced, never-married, and widowed parents - both mothers and fathers. Some of the specific issues which arise per tain to the gendered access to work, income, institutional support - state or community based, and social net works, the paucity of public child care, changing marriage arrange ments and inter-generational ties, child custody, financial responsibili ties and care arrangements, and con cepts of relatedness. Pervading the discussions and the organization of everyday life are strongly ideological notions of parenting (mothering) and upbringing. Despite the empha sis on the individual, the cohabiting couple appears as the core unit of so cial life.

Mystique Fieldwork is not complete and I think it is fruitful to look at some is sues and problems raised by the field work process itself, though considera tions of space force me to condense the discussion considerably. The rela tionship between the anthropolo gist/the researched-the field/the eth nography has been taken center stage in much of the recent critique of anthropological theory and ethnography. There has been an at tempt to dismantle the mystique that surrounded the creation of ethnography. However, there has been minimal change in anthropo logical and fieldwork practice in one direction in particular. Obscured by all the clamour over globalization is the continuing expectancy that so cial science scholars from the South are still expected to focus on the South, while scholars from the North may research either South or North. A number of presuppositions are thrown into disarray with the rever sal of Asian scholars studying the ‘West’. These include the interna tional scale of power and ‘progress’ that ranked the societies of the re searcher above those being re searched, in the mind of both the layperson and the scholar. As is well known, the international economic

For Photographic Prints a t th e Kern Institute Leiden, see p. 24

ASIA

and political order is reflected in and markedly skews the distribution of funds in favour of scholars from the USA and Western Europe. And they continue to predominate in studying themselves and others. It was puzzling for many people including some university colleagues and prospective interviewees - as to why an Indian should wish to study the Netherlands. The possible an swers others put to me were (x) to in form people in India about the Netherlands; (2) there is much a poor country like India has to learn from the Netherlands; or (3) that the aim of the research is a comparison of the welfare state and family in India and the Netherlands. However, given that India and the Netherlands were so vastly different in material wealth and values, the possible success of the second and third intentions were doubted. The desire to inform her/his own society of another, learn from the ‘Other’, and comparison are legiti mate motivations for research as is being undertaken here and were not absent from the founders’ and/or the researchers’ motivations. However, I think it is useful to set these answers

‘A number of presuppositions are thrown into disarray with the reversal of Asian scholars studying the 'West’

mentioned international economic and political order, little touched by globalization. One experience relevant to this issue and the fieldworker-field rela tionship is striking. About two-fifths of my single parent informants in this first round of fieldwork were self-selected. A large number of them came from ‘non-Dutch’, coloured backgrounds or had had partners from such a background. They chose to speak to an Indian researcher - a non-Dutch, coloured woman. And many had questions not just as to why an Asian was doing this re search, but about life and society in India. Among the people who were the most ready to accept the legitimacy of an Indian researcher with the aim of producing input in the Nether lands itself were some single parent informants, despite my expressions of personal scepticism regarding the extent of policy impact. Why was this so? A crucial factor was their vulnera ble position and their experiences of the ‘other side’ of the Netherlands. They needed to hope that things could change in their favour, but an other aspect was also at work. Many of them came to know me and of me through an interview in a Leiden newspaper section devoted to Mu nicipality information. I was with the University. I was not an Indian alone, but with and of institutions that are believed to make policy in puts. I could talk to civil servants about their and my work much more easily than their ‘clients’ could about their problems. Thus the unequal power relationship between the indi vidual researcher and the infor mants/ individuals researched has not been entirely reversed. This also highlights the immense symbolic power of education in Dutch society, an issue to be explored later.

‘Other’ against what would be the most common answers and pedagogical propositions, even today, as to why a scholar from the North sets off to study a development programme or the welfare state in the South. In the simplest terms, the scholar from the North is to bring her/his consider able non-partisan expertise to analyse what is going wrong in the South and how it can be set right. The scholar from the North is under taking the study to make policy input primarily in or about the South, not in the North. The scholar from the North has something to tell the members of the society she/he is studying which they do not already know or understand about them selves.

Reversal That the negation rather than the reversals of these propositions is de sirable is germane. Nevertheless, for the time being what is of interest is that the reversals have rarely oc curred to the range of people who asked why Indians were studying the Dutch welfare state. When they were articulated, it was as irony. The re versal of who studied who could not dislodge the pedagogical assump tions, variously voiced or left unsaid, which filter development and an thropological research. Perhaps it is because they are rooted in the above-

There is another sense in which the present study does not reverse the dominant trend in anthropology, although it has meant a shift for the present researcher. I am now study ing a society and culture viewed as very ‘Other’ from my own. Past field work has been in areas in my own country where my relationship with the field was one of sameness and difference, and where I often had to explain why I asked about things I should know about. What this also means is that I carry implicit com parisons not just with my own back ground, but with past fieldwork. An anthropology of the Dutch wel fare state and family has meant the necessity to innovate in the tradi tional modes of entry and introduc tion into the field, establishing con tact, rapport, and residence and the methods of fieldwork. Anthropologi cal fieldwork in urban settings is not new. However, rather than a com munity, institution, or organization which the researcher may enter to live and work in, as has been com monly the case, here the fieldwork is focused on a category of people dis tributed over a large and complex space: single parents of various class es, ages, marital status, and gender living in the city of Leiden. They do not form a community in terms of locality or residence, work, religious or social life. Therefore informants

had to be individually ‘found’. The proposed methods of entry were along well-tried anthropological lines - contacting influential institutions, organizations, and individuals, which would then snowball into a range of informants. On the face of it, the contact-introduction-snowball effect method has proved effective. But that is not strictly true. The anthropological method tends to assume a society and culture where social space and time is orga nized very differently from that to be found in contemporary Dutch cul ture and capitalist societies in gener al. It assumes that the fieldworker and informants will meet not only by appointment, but also informally and casually, of and on. However, so cial life in The Netherlands is by ap pointment. The casual visitor usually comes with a specific purpose, is re ceived politely, and leaves at the ear liest opportunity with little likeli hood of a good gossip session taking place! It assumes informants who are willing to and can have the fieldworker accompany them through their day. For most informants the work situation and ethos makes this unthinkable. It assumes that once rapport is established, informants will be happy to introduce the fieldworker into their families and social networks. However, the compartmentalization of life and processes of individualization meant that I met most informants as an individual alone in her/his house, a café, or my office. By and large each single parent informant was the end of the chain, except to other single parents who would tell their own stories, related to the first informant only themati cally and laterally. One factor was the social isolation and poverty of many single parent-mothers. The Dutch sense of self, time, and sociability are not easily compatible with the assumptions of participant observation, whether by an Indian or a Dutch, based as they are on non capitalist and Third World societies. On the other hand, undivided atten tion is expected and given when an appointment is made. Each ‘inter view-conversation’ session tended to be very intense and concentrated, with informants speaking with ap parent frankness. However, the an thropologist’s time could be the break here. In the immediacy the an thropologist cannot concentrate any further and must break the conversa tion. In the longer run the anthro pologist is not allowed/able to re main in the field as long as used to be the case. Despite the absence of an idiom, a fabric, through which we could easily cross the barrier between work meetings and personal, social and informal interaction, rapport de veloped as informants realized that there was a genuine interest in their stories. Here was somebody who was prepared to sit and listen to them for as long as they wished to talk. They wished to share their problems and sorrows, their accomplishments and views, despite difficulties in lan guage. ■

Dr Rajni Palriwala was an HAS affiliated fellow (IDPAD) I April - I November 1999 . She will join the HAS again I May 3 0 November 2000. E-mail: rajnip@hotmail.com

February 2000 •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r

N?2i • 1 7

SOUTH

ASI A

Tracing Thoughts through Things

Relics or Sacred Burials?

Seventh Gonda Lecture by ProfessorJanice

Professor Karel van Kooij o f the Kern Institute, University o f Leiden and Dr Janice Stargardt, Cambridge Project on Ancient Civilization in Southeast Asia, Department o f Geography, Uni versity o f Cambridge are running a Joint Project on ‘Relic Wor ship and Sacred Burials in Early Buddhism o f India and Burma.’

By GERBRAND MULLER

rofessor Stargardt is Senior Research Fellow in Archae. 1 ology and Historical GeI ography and Director of the Cambridge Project on Ancient Civilization inSouth East Asia, Department of Geography of the University of Cambridge. She is also Directeur d’Etudes étranger for life in South East Asian Archaeology at the Ecole Pratique des Hautes Etudes at the Sorbonne. In her lecture Janice Stargardt showed that only archaeological evi dence throws light on the economic and social conditions of the middle Ganges Valley in the period preceeding the development of Buddhism, Jainism and important new stages of Hindu thought there. Through the art and archaeology of the Northern Deccan and especially of Andhra, she demonstrated that a rich, continu ous and datable record of Buddhist thought is contained in the archaeo logical remains of North and South India. The Andhra region provides the background to the spread of Buddhist culture to Burma. In the second half of her lecture, she dwelt upon a relic chamber be longing to the 5th-6th century AD at Sri Ksetra in Central Burma. This contained the largest sacred treasure of gold and silver Buddhist objects so far known in India or South East

Asia, among them the oldest texts in pure Pali in the world, and some of the earliest Buddhist art found out side India. Tracing the ceremony of merit-making involved in the in scription of the Golden Pali Text of the Pyu, she pinpointed a major omission in one of the eight excerpts contained in this text, which made it a ritually imperfect object and thus not suitable to become the principal relic in the sacred deposit. She then presented the Great Sil ver Reliquary which was found at the centre of the same relic cham ber, and, by presenting a reading of the inscription around its lid rim, she showed that the last part of that inscription contained the very pas sage which had been omitted from the Golden Pali Text. Together these two objects formed a ritually perfect deposit. The fact that they are, at one and the same time, the oldest surviving samples of pure canonical Pali and represent two texts in which one corrects the other, makes them of quite excep tional importance. In tracing the thought behind this sacred deposit, she concluded, one needs both the things and the texts. ■

Drs Gerbrand Muller, Secretary for the

The Great Silver Reliquary

The present project is designed to study the growth o f urban centres covering a time span from the advent o f Afghans in Orissa in 1568 up to the beginning o f colonial rule in 1803.

Arts, Royal Netherlands Academy o f Arts and Sciences. E-mail: Gerbrand.Muller@knaw.nl

The Golden Pali Text.

has n e w s l e t t e r n s 2 1

• February 2000

excavations of ancient Buddhist sites in North and Central India. These data have been compared with and contrasted to the evidence from some of the earliest Buddhist sites outside India - the Pyu sites of Cen tral Burma, where excavations have revealed relics, burials in sacred places, and possibly sacred burials (Stargardt, 1990,1992a and 1992b], Both researchers are going on fieldwork early in the New Year. Pro fessor van Kooij to South India and Sri Lanka; Dr Stargardt to Thailand and Burma. They will collate and compare their research data by email during 2000, reinforced by the return visit to Cambridge by Profes sor van Kooij in the autumn of 2000. As this Project develops it is envis aged that its scope will be widened a little to include a small network of scholars with closely related research interests, so that intensive discus sions can be continued. ■ Professor K. van Kooij can be contacted (after March 2000) at: E-mail: krvankooij@rullet.leidenuniv.nl and Dr Janice Stargardt can be contacted (after March 2000) at: E-mail: JS119@cam.ac.uk

U rbanization in Medieval Orissa By P. P. MISHRA

he general ten dency among his torians dealing with post-fifteenth cen tury Orissa has been to project the period as one of urban decay and decline in com mercial activity. This argument is the product of two mistaken beliefs. Firstly that the advent of the Afghans marked the end o f‘Hindu’ kingdom of Orissa resulting in decline of com mercial activity. This argument jux taposes the efflorescence of Orissan society and economy under the Gangas (1035-1435 CE) and Gajapatis (1435-1537 CE) with the so-called Muslim rule. Secondly that, political developments should not be linked too closely with the process of urban ization. The contemporary Persian chronicles, accounts of foreign trav ellers, factory correspondence and diaries of the agents of European traders present a different scenario.

Research Project

18 •

he Project was launched in 19981999 with an ex change of visits support ed by the British Council and the NWO for the Netherlands. This exploratory stage established that both the research experience, interests, and research archives of the two scholars were complementary and together formed a basis for a detailed investigation of this subject. The second stage of the Project has now begun with a threemonth research visit by Dr Stargardt to The Netherlands, with financial support of the NWO and the British Academy, and with research facili ties provided by the International Institute of Asia Studies, who have made her an Affiliated Fellow during the course of her stay in Leiden. This stage of the project involves inten sive use of the research facilities of the magnificent library of the Kern Institute, including its Photographic Project. During this stage research discus sions have focused on redefining relics and sacred burials in a Bud dhist context, and re-examining a great deal of primary data from early

Research Project

On Friday 12 November 1999, Professor Janice Stargardt held the seventh Gonda lecture in the building o f the Royal Netherlands Academy o f Arts and Sciences, Kloveniersburgwal 2.9f Amsterdam, under the title ‘Tracing Thoughts through Things: Early Buddhist Archaeology in India and Burma.’

In medieval Orissa towns devel oped as centres of administration, pilgrimage, and trade. Places like Pithunda, Palura, Manikpatna, Khalkattapatna, Konarka, Puri, Kataka, etc. became important on the inter national map. After coming of the Mughals, there was a decline in the trade of the southern ports and the commercial activity shifted to northern region. Pipli, Balasore, Harishpur and Hariharpur rose to prominence as urban centres. But to wards the second half of the eigh teenth century, the rise of the Cal cutta fleet affected the fortunes of Orissan ports. The European compa nies and traders had already made inroads into the preserves of Indian merchants. There was decline of commercial activity and the British occupation of eastern Orissa in 1803 sounded the final death-knell. The problem of urbanization in Orissa will be studied in a theoreti cal context taking into account the advent of the Afghans, the Mughals

and of European traders. The basic hypotheses supporting the project are: a. There was neither urban decay nor a decline in trade and commerce in the period under review. b. The unique character of Orissan towns could be attributed to com mercial intercourse and in this way urbanization was result of de velopments happening on the high seas. Up to the seventeenth century, the Asian merchants had assumed a major share of mar itime trade but from the eigh teenth century onwards European shipping was in the ascendance. c. The urban centre was linked verti cally with the rural hinterland. There were horizontal linkages be tween different urban centres to facilitate the exchange of material goods. ■

Dr P.P. Mishra, Department o f History, Sambalpur University, Orissa, India. E-mail: ppmishra@dte.vsnl.net.in

SOUTH

ASI A

Among the Oriental collection of Hugh Nevill manuscripts lies an au thentic source of Portuguese Creole which also represents the largest col lection of Asian Portuguese Creole folk verse: the Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole Manuscript. Asian Portuguese Creoles once flourished in the coastal towns of India, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, Singapore, and Macao but are a dying race. Mr K.D. Somadasa suggested that I translate the Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole manuscript. My translations (into Standard Portuguese and Eng lish) have been published as two pa pers (1995 and 1997) by the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Sri Lanka. The manuscript which contains 1,049 quatrains is divided into three sections: ‘Portuguese Song Bat ticaloa’, ‘Songs of the Portuguese

Kaffrinha - Portuguese Negro Songs’ and ‘The Story of Orson and Valen tine’. The first two groups were sung by mother tongue Creole speakers: the Burghers (people of Portuguese and Dutch descent) and the Kaffirs (people of African descent brought to the island by the Portuguese, Dutch, and British, the three European colo nial powers). Batticaloa is a district in the Eastern Province of the island; the capital of the district is Bat ticaloa Town. It has become the cul tural homeland for the Burghers and the Creole community. The roots of their songs are preserved in this manuscript. The Kaffirs have formed a cultural homeland near Puttalam in the Northwestern Province. Mod ern Kaffir songs can be traced to this manuscript. The story of Valentine and Oersan is known in Sri Lanka as the Balasanta Nadagama, one of the earliest fully-fledged theatrical per formances in the Sinhala theatre. In English literature, Valentine and Orson are two figures of romance. In Charles Dickens’ A Christmas Carol Scrooge said: ‘And Valentine and his wild brother, Orson, there they go!’. There are French, English, Dutch, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, and Ice landic versions of this story. In Sri Lanka there are variants of this story, in Pali (5th century AD), in Buddhaghoas’s Manorathapurani and in Dharmapala’s Paramatthadipani. The Dutch orthography of this manuscript is particularly interest ing in places. Although the scribes have attempted to maintain the Por tuguese spelling, it is apparent that they knew Dutch. But this is not sur prising as some of the Creole-speak ers did know Dutch. Dutch was used

for official purposes during the Dutch Era (1658-1796) but Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole was the home lan guage even of the Dutch communi ty. During the British Era (17961948), some Burghers opted for Eng lish and today the Portuguese Creole is no longer spoken by all the Burghers in the island. Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole was the successful solution to the inter communication problems that arose when the Portuguese and Sri Lankans came into contact from the sixteenth century. The Creole served as a lingua franca, the language for external communication and trade purposes, for about three and a half centuries, until English took over this role. In the last few decades, linguists have realized the importance of studying contact languages (pidgins and creoles) as they are important testing grounds for linguistic theo ry. In fact, they are to linguists what Drosophila flies and guinea pigs are to biologists. The Portuguese Creole is the oldest creole based on an Euro pean language and are therefore par ticularly interesting. The Nevill manuscript of Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole is, therefore, an invaluable source for linguists. It is also a valu able source for literary, anthropolog ical, and folkloric studies. ■

languages, not to mention providing materials for primary mothertongue education for such minority groups. It was precisely this issue that Professor C.M. Bhandu of Trib huvan University in Kathmandu ad dressed in his keynote speech. Where much is done for biological species on the verge of extinction, moribund languages often die a silent and un lamented death, leaving us with an irretrievable loss of human intellec tual tradition and cultural heritage. Bandhu observed that the age-old need for communication in areas with a variety of linguistic commu nities or areas dominated by speak ers of a different language, as well as the generation gap between the un schooled elderly, who are proficient speakers of their mother-tongue, and the youth who are educated in a regional lingua franca, contribute to the dwindling and ultimate extinc tion of many languages. Among the many interesting top ics discussed at the Symposium, was a paper presented by Mrs Juanita War from Shillong University on a set of grammatical markers in the Khasi language of Meghalaya. She expounded on the use of the third person ‘particles’ i, u, ka, and ki, demonstrating why these markers cannot be considered particles, since they have lost any synchronic con nection with specificity and seem in stead to sub-divide nouns into class es by virtue of their being mutually exclusive and expressing number and gender of modified nominal en tities.

Balthasar Bickel of the University of California came up with some mindprovoking analyses toward a better understanding of syntax in Hi malayan languages. His paper dealt with the way Tibeto-Burman lan guages allow noun phrase features to combine in an appositional, partitional, or even a relational structure with the features marked by the agreement morphology. This con trasts with the principle in Indo-Eu ropean languages where agreement causes features of noun phrases and verbal forms to merge systematically into a unitary referential expression. Bickel proposed the term ‘associative’ to coin the underlying principle in Ti beto-Burman languages. This princi ple manifests itself, not only in agree ment, but also in the structure of grammatical relations, in details of role semantics and in discourse ten dencies. The study of historical relations and people movements in the remote past is undoubtedly one of the more exciting topics of Himalayan linguis tics. Van Driem summed up the state of the art with respect to the extinct language of Zhang-Zhung, and pro pounded his reasons for clinging to the hypothesis that this language is related to the Western Himalayan languages Bunan, Manchad, Kanauri etc. Professor Suhnu Ram Sharma of Deccan College in Pune, India, offered us an insight into the manner in which time and space terms in the Manchad language reflect the practi cal aspects of life for the Manchad people. He also speculated on how the

well-known Whorfian hypothesis of linguistic relativity could be used to explain the influence of geography and culture on the linguistic reality and vice versa. Dr Rudra Laxmi Shreshtha present ed a highly significant description of verbal morphology in the Newari Badikhel Pahari dialect. She expound ed on the various stem classes of the verb, and the related regular and ir regular morphological categories, touching on all different types of modal and non-finite verbal forms. What emerged as a new insight was that, apparently, the morphology of verbs in this dialect constitutes a kind of missing link between Kathmandu Newari, which only has rudimentary pronominalization, and the Newari dialect of Dolakha, which has a much more extensive agreement morpholo gy. Addressing verb pronominaliza tion in a different language, Karnakhar Khatiwada shared his find ings and analyses of the morphology of Dhimal verbs. Even though he ar gued that flexional verb forms in Dhi mal lack the complexity of related languages such as Chepang, Hayu, and the Kiranti languages in general, his illustrative examples demonstrate a typical set of Tibeto-Burman pro nominal verb affixes, proving Dhimal an undoubted member of TibetoBurman pronominalized languages. The forty-eight papers that were presented will hopefully be published this year. ■

Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole Verses The Hugh Nevill Collection in the British Library contains 2,227 manuscripts written in Sinhala, Malayalam Tamil, and Pali. Among the Oriental collection o f Hugh Nevill manu scripts, lies an authentic source o f Portuguese Creole which also represents the largest collection o f Asian Portuguese Cre ole folk verse: the Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole Manuscript. ■ By S H I H A N DE SILVA J AYASURI YA

■y T ugh Nevill (1847I I 1897) was an outJ - JL standing British civil servant who worked in Sri Lanka (formerly Ceylon) from 1865 to 1897. He first served as Private Secretary to the Chief Justice. In 1869, he joined the Civil Service and held many posi tions until 1897, when he resigned as the District Judge of Batticaloa. He then sailed for France with his collec tion of manuscripts but died there soon after. Nevill is, however, better known for his scholarship. His interest in studying the origin and develop ment of Sinhala (the language of in terethnic communication and the mother tongue of74% of the popula tion today) led him to make himself one of the pioneer scholars in the di alects of the Veddhas, Rodiyas, and Vanniyas He founded and edited The Taprobanicm, a journal, in which he published many of his articles.

Nevill wrote on many disciplines: anthropology, archaeology, botany, ethnology, folklore, geography, geol ogy, history, zoology, mythology, palaeography, and philology. He was also instrumental in the formation of the Kandyan Society of Arts (Mahanuvara Kala Sangamaya), an insti tution which still flourishes in con temporary Sri Lanka. The Hugh Nevill Collection con tains 2,227 manuscripts. Nevill pre pared two descriptive sets of his vol umes, one on the prose works and the other on the poetical works. He took his hand-written works to France with the intention of pub lishing them but his untimely death prevented him seeing this through. His works on the poetical manu scripts were subsequently edited by P.E.P. Deraniyagala and published as Sinhala Kavi (Sinhalese Verse). After his death, Nevill’s manuscripts were brought to the British Library from France by a Sri Lankan scholar, Don Martino de Zilva Wickremasinghe. The Hugh Nevill Collection (1904), now in the British Library, contains

1999 KATHMANDU,

NEPAL

Himalayan Languages For the first time in the Symposium’s short existence the an nual meeting was held in Nepal, in the heart o f the Himalayas. More than ever, this year’s conference offered an opportunity to scholars from many o f the Himalayan regions in particular to share their knowledge and present their findings and views to an international audience. ■ By R O L A N D R UT G E R S

r r - l he Himalayan Lan[ guages Symposium JL is an open interna tional forum at which scholars can exchange the results of their research with others working on related issues in the same geographical area. The term ‘Himalayan’ is used in its broad sense to include north-western and north-eastern India, where languages of Indo-Aryan, Dravidian, TibetoBurman, and Austro-Asiatic linguis tic stocks are spoken; plus embracing the languages of Nuristan, Bhutan, Baltistan, and the Burushaski-speak| ing area in the west. ‘Languages’ is used as opposed to ‘Linguistics’ to broaden the scope of the symposium beyond linguistics proper, so as to allow those scholars working in the

related disciplines such as archaeolo gy, philology, and anthropology to present their research wherever this is directly relevant to the understand ing of Himalayan languages and lan guage communities. This year, the symposium was a wonderful event in the heart of the mountain resort Kathmandu, capital of Nepal. The conference was hosted by Tribhuvan University. Scholars from Nepal, Tibet, India, several Western countries, and Australia pre sented their papers. Below is a brief report on a few of the many interest ing topics addressed. A continuous matter of concern in the Himalayas, as elsewhere in the world, is the endangerment of mi nority languages. Although forces may be mustering to tackle this problem, it remains a vast commis sion even ‘merely’ to document these

manuscripts written in Sinhala, Ma layalam Tamil, and Pali. Mr K.D. Somadasa of the British Library, London (formerly librarian at the University of Sri Lanka) has gone through the Nevill manu scripts afresh and has described them in detail. His works run into seven volumes and have been pub lished by the British Library and the Pali Text Society.

The Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole Manuscript

February

Mrs Shihan de Silva Jayasuriya, MSc, is attached to the University College London. E-mail: S.Jayasuriya@ion.ucl.ac.uk

Dr Roland Rutgers can be contacted a t E-mail: rrutgers@compuserve.com 2000

•

has n e w s l e t t e r

NS21 • 1

SOUTH

The Rebirth of Tagore in Latvia The first book o f Rabindranath Tagore’s works translated from Bengali into Latvian by the University o f Latvia professor Viktors Ivbulis was among the best sold books four months after being published. By LIGA MITENBERGA

Ü 2 T H I T

i k t o r s I v b u l i s ’ ‘ R a -,

bindranath Tagore’ is the first and the only large book in the Baltic States that in cludes so many transla tions ofTagore’s works directly from Bengali. It offers the Latvian reader rich material on the Bengali writer: scrupulous analysis of Tagore’s life and creative writing, the first com plete translation of the novel ‘The Home and the World’ into Latvian, the plays ‘Nature’s Revenge’ and ‘Post Office’, a part of Tagore’s theo retical essays - ‘The Beautiful and Literature’, his speech of 1917 ‘The Master’s Will be Done’, and fifty poems. In fact this is not the first time the Latvian readership has been intro duced to the Bengali writer. We have had a very serious interest in India since the mid-19th century stem ming from the postulated related

ness of Latvian to Sanskrit. This was actually a reason for contemporane ous intellectuals and the press at that time to consider Indians our brothers. The spiritual attraction to wards India inspired Karlis Egle and Rihards Rudzitis - the predecessors of Viktors Ivbulis in Latvia - to trans late Tagore from English and as early as 1928-1939. As nowhere in the world, Tagore's ‘Collected Works’ were published in Latvia in nine vol umes. Viktors Ivbulis himself claims that Tagore was the most translated belles-lettres author into Latvian in 1930s as well as the most widely read poet in the world in early 1920s. There is no doubt that Tagore’s novel ‘The Home and the World’, which is imbued with extremely sober nationalism, may touch the heart of any nation that has been op pressed. Latvians have suffered un der various foreign rulers; our sec ond independence is only nine years old - it may be just a coincidence the situation was also very similar

ASI A

when ‘The Home and the World’ was published in Latvian for the first time, too. However, there is another important aspect why the novel is important today that cannot be overlooked. Namely - the fine repre sentation of the relationship be tween a husband, a wife, and the ‘third one’. The doubts, hopes, in tentions, sufferings, and actions of Bimala resemble those of any woman; and because of these human qualities the novel is equally impor tant to a European as it is to an Indi an. It seems that Bimala’s mono logues include some part of any woman’s confessions and it only re mains to admire the amazing self evidence of Indian woman’s emo tional experience as presented by the writer. The times of political, eco nomic thus accordingly - personal relationship changes in Latvia in many cases have left people without any terms of reference to judge true or false values. Tagore's fine repre sentation of Bimala, Nikhilesh, and Sandip by such unusual literary means as continuous monologues and no direct description whatsoever - that actually starts the mechanism of opinion forming already as one reads - suggests a new set of values to the reader’s mind, thereby also proving the quality of the literary work. For this particular reason not only the idea itself plays the role the form of expression is important, and the comprehensibility and at traction towards the whole setting of the novel are indispensable. Of

Professor Chakraborty Visits the Netherlands By VICTOR A. VAN BIJLERT

rofessor S.K. Chak raborty, convener of the Management Centre for Human Val ues, Institute of Manage ment, Calcutta, visited the Netherlands in May 1999 on invi tation from Leiden University and Nijenrode University. At Nijenrode, prof Chakraborty did part of a longer workshop on ‘Meaning of Values for Leaders'. Among the participants were managers of some major Dutch banks (ING, ABN-AMRO, VSB), po lice-organisations, and the automo bile industry (Mercedes-Benz). To bring the notion of values in sharper focus Chakraborty made a distinction between values and skills. Values are concerned with be coming, for instance becoming a good human being. Skills deal with doing, the way we perform action, but skills do not address any moral issues unlike values. It is important in leadership roles to find the right balance between values and skills. Another important distinction to which Chakraborty drew attention was that between problem-prevent ing and problem-solving. Values are problem-preventing, skills problem solving. According to Chakraborty, the keynote of leadership-develop ment is ‘purity of heart, and foster Z O ■has

newsletter

ing noble emotions’. Leadership should invite emulation by those that are being led. Real human val ues in a leader inspire followers to emulate. Among human values Chakraborty counts gratitude, con tentment, honour, humility. Ac cording to him they can be fostered through meditational practice. In Leiden, Chakraborty spoke at the Indological Department of the Leiden Faculty of Arts. The topic was adapted to the assumed interest of the audience, namely ‘Consciousness Ethics, the Vedantic Approach’. Ac cording to Chakraborty since the last two hundred years the emphasis in modern culture has been on the in tellect to the detriment of the emo tions. Vedanta as an Indian psychol ogy has a lot to contribute to the cul tivation of positive emotions. Posi tive emotions help us to develop good ethics. Ethical behaviour is not limited to behaviour between human beings but includes human behaviour vis-a-vis nature. Vedanta teaches a feeling of oneness. This closes the gap between human be ings and between humans and na ture. Positive emotions help to lift up our consciousness to greater heights. It helps silencing out ego which is a barrier to ethical behav iour. A simple method to elevate the emotions is a form of meditation in which one is drawing in the positive

NS21 • February 2000

emotions while breathing in and is expelling the negative ones while breathing out. Asked why we should have ethics at all, Chakraborty an swered he wished to have sound sleep because of a clear conscience. Morality may be a heavy word and oneness unappealing, therefore it was suggested that ‘feeling’ is a good starting-point. The term ‘responsi bility’ could be preferable to morali tyEthics from a Vedantic perspective can be further learned about in the Annual International Workshops on Human Values held every year at the Indian Institute of Management, Calcutta. ■

For information one can contact Professor C hakraborty at: Management Centre for Human Values, Indian Institute o f Management Calcutta Diamond Harbour Road.joka P.O.Box 16757, Calcutta 700027 Tel.: +91-33-467 8300 04 / 8306 / 8313 Fax:+91-33-46 7 830 7 / 46 7 7851 http:llwww.iimcal.ac.in

course, it is just as well to recall that the changing point of view tech nique was then also very much used in European literature.

W hite lace Even though the Balt languages and Sanskrit may have some com mon roots, the very practical differ ences between Bengali and Latvian hinder the maximum representa tion of important details, let alone talking about the impossibility of translating the rich, culture-bound material. Viktors Ivbulis’ transla tion from Bengali proves to be su perior to the first Latvian version of ‘The Home and the World’ in both the rendering of the characteristics of Indian culture into Latvian and in providing fluent and readerfriendly target text. There are even some paradoxical ‘findings’ com paring his translation and the first Latvian translation of ‘The Home and the World’. Even though Ivbu lis often has used modern words (in some cases even overdoing this) and has rendered all terms that are re lated to Indian religion and culture as transliterations - which was not a case in the first translation (many terms were explained, not translit erated) - the novel in his interpre tation is far easier to read than the first translation. The translation from Bengali could be compared to a white, carefully knitted lace, while the translation from English is like a red silk ribbon. The quality of the first lies in the necessity to possess the particular ability to knit and the attention and the pa tience required to keep the pattern, while the second is nice and a good thing to have, even though practi cally it has less use and value than the first. Obviously Ivbulis’ Indian Studies experience plays a role in his having this ability to represent the details of the country’s culture, as do the long years of scrupulous work while the book was being completed (he started working with the first translations in 1972). In fact, Professor Ivbulis has de voted more than thirty-five years of his academic career to Indian Stud ies and to the research on that great heir of Indian culture - Ra bindranath Tagore. The current book is Professor Ivbulis’ seventh book on India and the fourth on Tagore, including two works that consist of both critical introduc tions and translations. The 137page introduction, that is a mono graph in itself, reflects Viktors Ivbulis’ writings in other lan guages, and his teaching experience in several universities in America and Europe. For his life-long work mainly on India, he has been elect ed corresponding member of Lat vian Academy of Sciences. The distinctive feature of Ivbulis’ monograph on Tagore is the fact that the author presents Tagore’s creativity from the perspective of Indian-European literary relation ship. There is a discussion not only of the merit of Tagore’s works, but also a representation and exposi tion of India's development and its growing importance in the global historical context. Ivbulis also dis cusses the role of Tagore on the world’s political and creative stage from a literary historical perspec-

C ontributions to this Bengal Studies page as well as letters with suggestions are very m uch welcome. Please send to:

V.A. VAN BIJLERT B urg. P atijn la an 1062 2585 CE D en H aag T he N etherlands F a x : +31-71*527 2615 E-mail: B ijlert@ ru llet.leid enu niv .nl

five (the author is the only person publishing books on literary theory in Latvian at present). The monograph regarding the formation of Tagore’s personality and his creative manifestations is largely theoretical; but it also has a rich factual background. Thus the conclusions and evaluations Ivbulis suggests in the book are highly ob jective. It should also be noted that because of the particular selection of works for translation, Tagore be comes a stronger and a more mascu line personality than he was previ ously known in Latvia. It also seems that Ivbulis will succeed in proving that Tagore was above all a romanti cist and thus close to the document ed literary climate in Latvia in 19201930s. I am happy to hear that an other Ivbulis book, ‘Rabindranath Tagore and East-West Cultural Unity’, has ju st been published in Calcutta. In conclusion, I would like to say that the timing of the publication of the Latvian ‘Rabindranath Ta gore’ has been perfect. The political and economic situation is fairly sta ble in Latvia; it is time to start thinking about a new system of val ues. The global significance of Ta gore’s ideas, the profundity of Ivbu lis’ work are the reasons for taking public interest unawares. It is also a proof to the quality of contempo raneity of their work. ■

Liga M itenberga, Latvia, E-mail: strazds@hotmail.com

REGIONAL

Southeast Asia Global Flop, Local Mess: Indonesia betrayed by E astT im oran d the West ‘We are being slandered’, ‘Indonesia is wrecked’ (‘Kita dihujat’, ‘Indonesia terpuruk’), these were the words that were heard again and again at the time o f the East Timor crisis in Septem ber 1999. Public opinion vented its frustration and anger both at the rejection o f integration by the East Timorese in the 30 August referendum and at the international outrage that fol lowed the violence by the pro-Jakarta militias. While such a re action was deeply emotional, and easily dismissed by foreign observers, little has been said o f the Indonesian view o f the East Timor affair. This imbalance has impaired the interaction between the actors involved in the crisis. The Western press, governments, and public opinion were out o f sync with In donesia’s officials, military, and politicians, and vice versa. By F R A N C O I S R A I L L O N

o grasp Indone sia’s overreac tion, it should be borne in mind that the country was in a very se rious condition when the crisis broke out: it was barely re covering from an unprecedented economic and social meltdown, it was led by a weak, transitional gov ernment, and although a successful general election had just been held in June, the political future was fraught with uncertainty. More specifically, the relationship to the outside world was characterized by suspicion and distrust. Beyond local bad governance, hostile global forces were regarded as a major factor in the Indonesian crisis. Seen as a com pound of erratic capital flows, IMF blind dictates, and US hardly-hidden agendas, globalization was consid ered a Western attempt to under mine Asian values and miracles. When the UN Mission in East Timor (UNAMET) proclaimed the results of the referendum indicating a very clear rejection of Indonesia’s rule (by 78.5%), the Jakarta press was indignant: while East Timorese in gratitude was no doubt blamed, the fairness of the poll itself was ques tioned. UNAMET was accused of being biased, even of cheating on a large scale. As new, scrupulous prac titioners of democracy, the Indone sians complained that the UN had disclosed results ahead of the sched ule, without sufficient time for checking, that it had mixed together all returns from the various districts, while scrutineers lacked objectivity since ‘they were all independentistas’. Such a ‘rigged’ outcome was the

reason for the ‘desperate’ response of pro-integration Timorese: they burned down their own houses in Dili before fleeing, while the militias went on a terrible rampage with the assistance of Timorese deserters from the Indonesian army. The 15,000 troops stationed in the terri tory included some 6,000 Timorese recruits. When President Habibie and General Wiranto acknowledged the victory of the independentistas, they felt betrayed and joined the pro-integration militias in the sack of Dili. So, according to Jakarta’s ra tionale, post-referendum excesses were a ‘civil war’ among Timorese. Answering the Indonesian Com mission on Human Right Violations concerning army involvement, Gen eral Wiranto denied any part in the violence: ‘Morally we wanted the pro-integration side to win, but we did not do anything to help them win (-] Of course, the militias were organically under the army; in some cases we armed them. But they had existed long before the referendum’ (‘Doa di Ruang Pemeriksaan’, Gatra 1 January 2000). Mass killings were also denied. The number of victims admitted by the military ran in the hundreds, as compared to the 10,000 claimed by Bishop Belo. So far and based on findings on the field, the number of actual victims of the September dev astation remains relatively low (less than two hundred). However, it is difficult to make a proper assess ment, as some 200,000 East Timorese fled or were deported. Unsurprising ly, Jakarta officials object to the term ‘deportation’ to characterize this massive migration. They label it as the ‘evacuation of refugees’ with military assistance, as was done in

For new publications in Asian Studies, please refer to pp. 34-42

NE WS BRUNEI

• MYANMAR • CAMBODI A

I N D O N E S I A • LAOS • MAL AYS I A

ïrA ,

THE

PHILIPPINES • SINGAPORE

THAILAND

the cases of the Ambon or Pontianak conflicts earlier in the same year. In their view, people fled ‘spontaneous ly’, either to West Timor (those who had sided with Indonesia), or to the hills south of Dili to seek the protec tion of the Falintil independence forces. Negative reports or ‘disinforma tion’ were attributed to ‘propaganda’ from the ‘Republic’s foes’, led by Por tugal and Western NGOs. It was ad mitted that they had successfully given credence to the idea of a geno cide perpetrated by the military in the early period of Indonesian rule in East Timor. Jakarta rejects both the accusation of genocide and the 200,000 figure regularly mentioned by Fretilin and Portuguese sources. The actual figure, says Jakarta, is much less than too,000 casualties (which is still a very high figure), and is not due to military atrocities but to various circumstances: the civil war in East Timor before the December 1975 Indonesian assault, the invasion proper, and especially the large-scale famine that was caused by the failed harvest in 1978 when tens of thousands died (for de tails, see my ‘Timor oriental, vu d’lndonésie’, in Lettre de 1’AFRASE #49, Paris, November 2999). A last grudge was the fact that Habibie had to give in to irresistible

• VIETNAM

Western pressure and accept an in ternational force in East Timor (INTERFET), in order to restore peace and order. It was humiliating, since Indonesia was proven to be unable to do the job, while it was not longer able to defy the UN as it had done at the time of Konfrontasi. To make matters worse, Jakarta had to accept Australia as the backbone of the force. Australia, which had formerly recognized Timor's annexation by Indonesia, was no longer to be counted among friendly countries: it was now the spearhead of the West’s unrelenting crusade against Indone sia. The whole affair then was seen as an incomprehensible mess: Indone sia had taken over East Timor with America’s blessings in 1975, and now under the pressure of Western pow ers it had to release the territory. A few days after the East Timor deba cle, Aceh’s independence movement demanded a referendum, starting a process of what could be Indonesia’s unravelling. Considering Kosovo and Chechnya, Indonesians ominously found they had been treated like an other Yugoslavia rather than Russia. Despite the size of the archipelago, they were treated like a second-rate power, and did not receive the rela tive forbearance enjoyed by a former, but still nuclear, superpower.

The Timorese miscarriage was due to a double bind: Indonesia failed to appraise the post-cold war era and her own dependency on the outside world, while the international com munity failed to read Jakarta’s sensi tivities and to assess the conse quences of East Timor’s divorce on other provinces in Indonesia. By the close of 1999, with mixed feelings Indonesians witnessed the return of another former Portuguese colony to an Asian non-democracy: Macau was taken over by the PRC. However, Beijing never forcibly in vaded Macau, and was smart enough to negotiate its peaceful handover. Yet nationalism is still running high in Indonesia. Commenting on Indonesia’s own, pre-emptive, inves tigation on human right abuses in East Timor, Alwi Shihab, President Wahid’s foreign minister, reiterated: ‘We don’t want outsiders to sentence or even try our people’ ■

Dr Francois Raillon, CNRS/EHESS, can be reached at: E-mail: francois.raillon@wanadoo.fr

2 > 3 MARC H 2 0 0 0 LISBON, PORUGAL

The Role of Timor Lorosae Sponsored by the United Nations Centre in Lisbon, the LusoAsian Forum is organizing a conference on East Timor entitled ‘The Shifting Challenges o f the Pacific South and the Issue o f Timor Lorosae’. he creation of East Timor as a new JL country separated from Indonesia has led to high expectations re garding the develop ment and the deepening of the de mocratic transition process in Asia. For the time being East Timor is under International Community ad ministration, through the United Nations, but shall develop into a new and independent nation in the Pacific South. Although a small country with scarce resources, its creation has already generated a large impact on the geo-strategic balance in the Region. The new role assumed by Australia in security terms has given rise to in creasing concerns from Asian na-

Short News

tions that Australia wants to fill the pointer position until now assumed by the United States. This could form a threat to the power equilibri um in the Region and to the gather ing of the Muslim world, that re views itself in the destiny of Indone sia. This poses new questions about the role of religious confrontations that recently occurred in the Region between Muslims and Christians in the international Order, the Pacific strategy defined by the United States to the new Millennium and the role of the United Nations to assure Peace in the World. The conference on March 2-3 will cover subjects as ‘Timor Lorosae as a democratic and free nation and its impact on the future of Indonesia’, ‘the role of the Islam and the February

Catholic Church’, ‘the new responsi bilities of Australia in the Pacific re gion’ and ‘the future of the United Nations in a multilateral and cen trifugal world’. Participants include policy makers, academics, and jour nalists and such names as Dr Ramos Horta, vice-president of the East Timor National Resistance Council and Head of the Interest Section of Indonesia in Portugal, Ambassador Fernando Neves, Portuguese Foreign Office, Father Victor Melicias, High Commissioner for Timor, General Lemos Pires, last Portuguese Gover nor of Timor, Representant of the United States Embassy in Lisbon, Dr Jaime Gama, Minister of Foreign Af fairs of Portugal, and Professor Adri ano Moreira, ISCSP jubilated profes sor, former Portuguese Minister. ■

2000

•

has n e w s l e t t e r

• 2 1

SOUTHEAST 2 5 >• 2 6 CENTER

SEPTEMBER FOR

ASIA Academic ,gaps

1998

PACIFIC

ASIA

STUDIES,

STOCKHOLM

UNIVERSITY,

SWEDEN

The Democracy Movement in Burma Since 1962 In the wake o f the unhappy post-8-8-88 and post-9-9-99 moods, and the regime’s lack o f initiative in undertaking con structive political reform, few conferences have been as incon gruous in their location as this one. The sumptuous luxury o f the Högberga Gard Conference Centre, located so peacefully high above one o f the most scenic spots in Stockholm, was the venue for assessing the political situation in what is by all ac counts one o f the poorest, and also one o f the least peaceful nations in South-east Asia. ■ By G U S T A A F H O U T M A N

I l f he organizers are 1 to be applauded J L for holding a con ference on such chal lenging theme at the in vitation of the Swedish government. However, scholarship in this field is only in its infancy and, for various reasons, it is difficult to find speakers who can give academic weight and coherence to such a slip pery topic as Burmese democracy. In all, seventeen speakers ranged from academic approaches (politics, eco nomics, history, anthropology), human rights (Amnesty Interna tional), policy issues (EEC, Swedish Government), ethnic perspectives (Burmese Buddhist, Chin, Karen, Shan), to activism (the Free Burma boycott campaign). A few papers sought to place the suffering once again before us in graphic detail. Though well-inten-

Report

5 > 6

AUGUST

CANBERRA,

tioned, I felt these contributed little to any intellectual coming-to-terms with Burma’s long-standing political problems. Academic papers included Seekins (Okinawa) on the transforma tion of Rangoon, Hudson-Rodd (Perth) on land rights, and Matthews (Nova Scotia) on Burma’s future. Hoadley (Stockholm) gave a compara tive perspective on economic syn cretism in Burma, Vietnam, and In donesia. Paul Lim (Brussels) gave us an insight into the complexities of policy making on Burma within the EEC and the problems in relation to normalization of relations with ASEAN. Lundberg (Goteborg) gave a paper on the anthropology of the Burmese student movements in Burma and abroad. Zöllner (Ham burg) presented a portrait of Aung San. Mojeiko (Moscow) drew a witty parallel between Russian and Bur mese ideas of democracy and social ism, warning us that not all is what it seems.

In my view, the high points were papers by up-and-coming Burmese scholars who have so far given much academic credit. I very much regret ted Chao-Tzang Yawnghwe’s lastminute absence, for his work deserves wider circulation; his paper argues against a Balkan model for Burma and favours treating Burma as a political rather than - as has been done by the Burmese army and accepted by many a foreign scholar - an ethnic problem. He favours improving links between the state and society, not necessarily between the army and ethnic groups. Zaw Oo’s (American University) paper sought to come to terms with inter national perspectives on the democra tic struggle. Lian Sakhong's paper on the Chin perspective (later filled out by Aung Lwin (Berlin) from the Karen point of view) on the role of the Unit ed Nationalities League for Democra cy stood out; not only was he himself involved in negotiations to set up this cross-ethnic alliance, but he was able to present a coherent picture of what federalism means to the Chin and other minority groups. Lian Uk, elect ed member of parliament from the Chin State, gave us a flavour of what it is like to be a Chin parliamentarian without a functioning parliament. Ying Sita reflected on the significance of ‘ethnic nations’, and in particular the Shan.

1 999

AUSTRALIA

Burma Update Conference On August 5 and 6, 1999, the first Burma Update conference was held at the Australian National University in Canberra. For many years Australia has had a significant interest in Burma through activist and advocacy activities. As far as I know, how ever, this is first time an academic conference on contemporary Burmese politics has been held in Australia. We had anticipat ed a low-key conference, but the interest and enthusiasm was such that it grew into a major event, with over 140 people at tending from academic, government, private sector, and com munity groups. By E M I L Y R U D L A N D

cademic gather ings such as this are important be cause Burma has a rather low academic profile in most of the world. The possibilities for conducting research in Burma are extremely limited. As a result, Burma has been largely over looked both in academic and govern ment circles, except as a democracy cause. The eight speakers each gave seminar-length presentations in their areas of expertise. Dr Mary P. Callahan spoke on military-society relations in Burma in 1988, dismiss 22 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

ing the simplistic perception of the military as a monolithic institution. This in-depth analysis of internal military politics did not underesti mate the strength of the institution, but characterized the years since 1988 as an attempt to repair ‘Cracks in the Edifice’. Andrew Selth spoke on the military from another angle, by pro jecting a number of scenarios for the future armed forces both under mili tary and democratic rule. In this, he raised the pragmatic consideration that a democratic government in Burma will face many problems, in cluding some of the same ones the current regime cannot deal with suc cessfully.

N?2 1 • F ebruary 2000

The military is central to Burmese politics, mainly as a result of its at tempts to destroy alternate power centres. Both Dr David I. Steinberg and Dr Craig Reynolds, however, indi cated that, great though the coercive power of the Burmese military may be, it is less than absolute. Steinberg examined this issue by revisiting a po litical culture approach that shows power, legitimacy, and social space as being grounded in a historical and cultural context. Although he con cluded that the current political im passe is rooted in this legacy and un likely to be resolved easily, he is opti mistic that an eventual change is in evitable. Reynolds’ account of a per sonal dilemma and his experience of the intellectual elite in Burma was complementary to this conclusion, by indicating that there are avenues of pluralism that remain slightly open. The second day of the conference built upon the examination of the do mestic political scene by expanding the level of analysis beyond Burma’s borders. Dr Mya Than assessed the Burmese economy in light both of

There is no template for a confer ence such as this. Burma is only just opening up to foreign scholars. Un like, for example, Thailand, where in digenous scholars and intellectuals have exercised a significant influence on international academic opinion long-term, Burma unfortunately has suppressed its own intellect, while some pioneer foreign scholars some times say supercilious things about this country. Few scholars have lived in the country for any length of time, and fewer still read or speak any of the Burmese languages. Internationally, academic approaches to Burma are not co-ordinated and, without indepth studies of the country, oppor tunism sometimes wins the upperhand in plugging academic gaps. This sometimes also goes hand-inhand with politically conservative, some call it 'pragmatic’, scholarship that avoids questions that might alienate the regime. To keep Burma’s doors open, some academics even play to the regime by doing the sort of research that accords best with its propaganda. Were one to trace Burma’s profile from international academic re search, the result is not only outdat ed and impoverished, but in some areas also often a misleading view of what is and what has been going on in the country. Drawing attention to Khin Nyunt’s propaganda that hu mankind and civilization began in Burma, in my paper I grappled with the role of foreign archaeological and palaeo-anthropological scholarship in the regime’s attempt at ‘Myanmafication’ (replacing Aung San in forging national unity with an im personal and intangible ‘Myanmar culture’); here - as the regime’s vi sion of the superiority of ‘Myanmar

ASEAN membership since July t997, and of the Asian financial crisis that preoccupied Burma’s main allies soon afterward. His conclusion was that these events have not had a major im pact on the Burmese economy, with the Asian crisis causing no more than a setback to the slow processes of de velopment. Bertil Lintner also exam ined the Burmese economy, but fo cused instead on those exports that are not accounted for in the GDP cal culation, namely narcotics. He de tailed the extent to which the drug trade is inextricable linked to the po litical problems facing Burma, and how proceeds from the drug trade are the main prop that holds up the econ omy, and through that, the rule of the military regime. The last two papers turned the focus more to the perspective of out siders. Morten B. Pedersen gave a comprehensive analysis of interna tional policy toward Burma over the last decade, specifically focusing on attempts to promote political reform. He looked at the three different ap proaches to relations with Burma and systematically deconstructed the rhe toric within them using an examina tion of the military mind and the dy namics of Burmese politics. The final presentation, by Dr Mohan Malik, placed the issue of international poli cy towards Burma in a realist context of regional security. He made it obvi ous that Burma’s domestic politics are I

culture’ takes shape - fossils are be ginning to take over from relics, and museums from pagodas. Improved access to Burma would help, but it cannot solve this problem. Again, a major factor in maturing in ternational scholarship on Burma must be participation by well-in formed and trained Burmese acade mics and intellectuals. Unfortunate ly, repression of university life means the next generation of Burmese acad emics have to be trained outside the country. If the international commu nity is indeed serious about helping Burma find its feet, it must nourish this transplanted intellect. Hopefully, when the time comes, these scholars will inform international opinion and contribute constructively to their country’s future. Future politics must orient and adapt to reality. The military charac teristically fields international ques tions about the country by ‘correct ing misunderstandings’. It does so with great confidence, but without demonstrating even a semblance of having done any serious research to find out what is really happening. I wonder, unless the regime liberal izes Burma’s university life, who will have the ability to engage in such ‘international misunderstandings’ over Myanmar? ■

G u staaf Houtman, Royal Anthropological Institute, E-mail: ghoutman@ tesco.net, is author o f ‘Mental Culture in Burmese Crisis Politics: Aung San Suu Kyi and the National League for Democracy’. Study o f Languages and Cultures o f Asia and Africa Monograph Series No. 33. Tokyo University o f Foreign Studies, Institute for the Study o f Languages and Cultures o f Asia and Africa, 1999, 4 00 pp. ISBN 4-87297-748-3. This is accessible via the Internet at: http://go.to/Mental_Culture

highly relevant to regional politics, mainly due to the efforts of the coun try’s two large neighbours - China and India - to gain influence over Burma. Malik takes a controversial position that sees Burma’s indepen dence, security and stability compro mised as it is pressured to fall in line with China’s grand strategy for the twenty-first century. The Burma Update developed as a growing interest in Burma studies at the ANU which has been promoted by Professor Desmond Ball (author of Burma’s M ilitary Secrets: Signals In telligence (SIGINT) jrom 1941 to Cyber Warfare (1998), Andrew Selth (author of Transforming the Tatm adaw: The Burmese Armed Forces Since 1988 (1996), and a few post-graduate students writing on Burmese politics. The success of the Burma Update has given a boost to aims within the ANU to establish a Burma Studies Centre. The eight papers are current ly being edited into a book, Burma/M yanm ar: Strong Regime, Weak State? which will be published in October 1999 by Crawford House and their associates. ■

Emily Rudland. PhD Candidate, D epartm ent o f Political and Social Change, Research School o f Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University.

For an in te rv ie w w ith Prof. B. J. T erw iel, HAS E x tra o rd in a ry C h a ir 'C u ltu re s o f M a in la n d S o u th e a s t A s ia ', see p. 52

S O U T H E A S T ASI A I

'Hinduism ' in Modern Indonesia On 16 and 17 September 1999 the HAS seminar ‘Hinduism’ in modem Indonesia’ was held in Leiden. The seminar was con vened by Martin Ramstedt, who is at present attached to the Leiden branch o f the International Institute o f Asian Studies in the Netherlands as a research fellow. ■ By N I C O J . G. K AP T E I N

f r i he seminar was I opened by the IIAS J - Director, Wim Stokhof, who stressed that the study of Hinduism in In donesia has lagged far be hind compared to that of Islam, for example. In the first presentation, from a general theoretical perspec tive Peter van der Veer (Universiteit van Amsterdam] raised a number of conceptual issues, relevant to the topic of the seminar: the concept of ‘Hinduism’ (between quotation marks!) itself (and the concept o f‘re ligion’); the relationship between (colonial and post-colonial) state and religion. Martin Ramstedt gave a more geo graphically oriented introduction to the topic, outlining one important parameter o f ‘Hinduism’ in modern Indonesia: Indonesianization. He showed that the after the integration of Bali into the state of Indonesia in 1950, representatives of Balinese Hin duism reconstructed various tenets and practices within their tradition to ensure these fell within the cate gory of agama (religion), as this was stipulated by the Indonesian state ideology (the Pancasila), which was

coloured to a large extent by Christ ian and Muslim concepts. As a result of this reconstruction (e.g. with re gard to monotheism, sacred lan guage, pilgrimage, holy books, prayers, standardized religious cal endar and the like) between 1958 and 1961 these ‘Hindus’ succeeded in achieving recognition of their variety of'Hinduism’ as religion by the Min istry of Religious Affairs, and conse quently were no longer a target of Christian and Muslim missionaries. The first session of the seminar dealt with ‘Ethnicity, Religion and Nation-Building in Indonesia’. The first paper was given by Karel Steenbrink (Utrecht University) who high lighted the affinity between the thoughts of a number of prominent Indonesian Christians, like Sadrach and Reksosusilo, and certain ele ments of the Hindu tradition in Ja vanese culture. Next, in a fascinating presentation, Robert Hefner (Boston University) compared conversion to Hinduism in two close and cultural ly similar regions, to wit the Yogyakarta region, where only sporadic conversions to Hinduism had taken place, and the Klaten region, which has witnessed the highest percentage of Hindu converts in Java. It was ar gued that this dissimilarity was re

lated to the difference in the percep tion of Islam among the Javanese population in each region. Since the mass killings of 1965-1966 in Klaten had been far more awful than those in Yogyakarta, in Klaten the political landscape had been far more politi cized than in Yogyakarta. Because the killers in Klaten were to a large ex tent identified with Islam, the people in this region did not convert to Islam, but preferred Hinduism (and Christianity). The next session was entitled ‘The Development of ‘Indonesian Hin duism’ (Hindu Dharma Indonesia)’. Michel Picard (CNRS, Paris) outlined the debates held among Balinese in telligentsia after 1917 when the first modern organization was founded up to 1958, when Balinese religion was recognized by the state as Agama Hindu Bah. These debates focused on the relationship between ‘religion’ (iagama) and ‘tradition’ (adat), and the relationship between Balinese Hin duism and Indian Hinduism. I Gusti Ngurah Bagus (Udayana University, Den Pasar), dealt with the attempts of the state-sanctioned variety of Hindu reform, the Parisada Hindu Dharma Indonesia, to free itself from government interference, especially in the 1990s. Professor Bagus con cluded that the voice of the Hindu religion in Bah, and in Indonesia at large, had become much more prominent recently. Ngurah Nala (Hindu University, Denpasar) out lined some elements of formal and

'Hinduism' in Modern Indonesia (2} As a supplement to Nico Kaptein’s report, the following article presents some conclusions from and responses to the Interna tional Seminar on Hinduism in Modem Indonesia which was convened on the id1*1 and 17th September, 1999 , at the HAS in Leiden with the additional financial support from the NWO (‘Nederlandse Organisatie voor Wetenschappelijk Onderzoek’ or Dutch Organisation for Scientific Research). By MA R T I N R A M S T E D T

he purpose of the seminar was to elu cidate the concep tual as well as actual ten sion between local tradi tion (adat) and global re ligion (‘agama’) in the modern In donesian nation state by focusing on the development of modern ‘Indone sian Hinduism’ in various parts of the archipelago. The international convention of seventeen scholars working on the topic of religion and the nation state in the context of present-day South and Southeast Asia was considered timely for the following reasons: 1. was the first conference which concerned itself solely with the de velopment of modern Indonesian Hinduism (Hindu Dharma Indone sia);

2. it addressed the precarious situa tion of Indonesian Hindus at a time of increasing Islamization and Christianization after the fall of Soeharto’s ‘new order’ regime; 3. it raised awareness of the possible link between Hindu activism in present-day Indonesia and India. Major conclusions of the seminar can be summed up as follows: 1. Conversion to Hinduism by nonBalinese Indonesians during the last four decades can generally be viewed as an attempt to circum vent state prescribed conversion to the ‘new order’ version of moder nity; 2. lack of funding, inadequate ad ministrative penetration, as well as bureaucratisation of ‘religion’ has impeded the official represen tatives of Indonesian Hinduism to successfully promote Hinduism as an attractive alternative to the

‘modern’ religions Christianity and Islam outside of Bah; 3. both the religious practice, which is predominantly based on adat, and the socio-cultural background of the majority of the Hindu com munity, who belongs to the edu cationally and economically mar ginalized rural population, has fostered Islamic and Christian prejudice against Hinduism as being primitive, polytheistic, ani mistic superstition. This in turn has given rise to the rather precar ious situation of Hindus in pre sent-day Indonesia; '4. its modest success notwithstand ing, official Indonesian Hinduism has tried to gradually transform adat into a^ama; 5. the negative image of Hinduism reflects to a certain extent the neg ative image oflocal tradition (adat) in modern Indonesia. However, it has received a boost by ‘cultural tourism’. Hence, a folklorized ver sion of local tradition called budaya has been acknowledged as valuable cultural capital by the In donesian government; 6. Indonesian Hindus belonging to the affluent, urbanized middleclass and mostly living in Bah or

non-formal Hindu education in Bah, while Leo Howe (University of Cam bridge) concluded the first day of the seminar with a presentation which showed how onwards the religious landscape in Bah has been diversified since the early 1980s by the introduc tion of the Sai Baba movement, and how this devotional movement over laps, and is in dynamic tension with, forms of Hinduism.

U niversalism The second day of the seminar started with the session ‘Neo-Indianization of Local Discourses in In donesia’. Silvia Vignato (CNRS, Paris) dealt with two ethnic groups of Hin dus in North Sumatra, the immi grant Tamils and the native Bataks. It was argued that, unlike the Tamils, the Karo Bataks were not able to fulfil their need for intellectual change within Hinduism. The next presentation was by Somvir (Dehli University; Udayana University, Den Pasar), read by Peter van der Veer. The paper stressed the idea of the universalism of Hinduism (and the com mon ancestry of India and Indone sia), and highlighted a number of contacts between Indonesia and India in the post-colonial era. The third paper in this session, by Juara Ginting (University Leiden), dealt with some organizational aspects of Karo Hinduism, and Martin Ramst edt concluded this session by pre senting some preliminary conclu sions, based on his fieldwork in

in Javanese cities have turned to India for intellectual and spiritual support. Hence, various new Indi an Hindu sects have gained ground in Bah and Java where they have contributed to the in creasing heterogeneity of Indone sian Hinduism, simultaneously weakening local tradition in favour of a globalized form of reli gion. The seminar received valuable feedback from colleagues, journal ists, and Hindus in the Netherlands, Indonesia, and India. A journalist of the Indonesian newspaper Bah Post (issue of 27th September, 1999) en thusiastically linked the major con clusions of the seminar with the struggle of Indonesian Hindus under the present socio-political conditions. A similar enthusiasm was expressed by Indian Hindus. The forthcoming publication of the sem inar proceedings, which will be pub lished jointly by Curzon Press and the IIAS under the title ‘Religion and the Nation State: Hinduism in Mod ern Indonesia’, will, therefore, have to take into account the range of re sponses it might stimulate or pro voke, taking a clear stance for reli gious tolerance and pluralism. ■

South Sulawesi, about how Hindu Dharma Indonesia might be able protect the local traditions in this area, where the centralization, ratio nalization, and bureaucratization of ‘religion’ is taking place on the ini tiative of state-sponsored and state controlled institutions. In the final session, "Hinduism’ and Local Identity vis-a-vis Islam and Christianity’, Gerard Persoon (Uni versiteit Leiden) discussed the local religion of a small ethnic group on the island of Siberut (West Sumatra). He had evidence to show that this local religion had not disappeared despite various concerted efforts by the government and Christian or Muslim missionaries achieve this, because this religion had never orga nized itself which made it impossi ble to come to grips with it. More over, more recently, a more positive attitude towards this indigenous re ligion has developed as a result of the great appreciation for this shown by tourists, while the efforts to preserve the natural environment of the is land also implies a greater respect for the indigenous culture. Dik Roth (Wageningen Agricultur al University) dealt with a number of socio-political and demographic pro cesses in Luwu and Tana Toraja (South Sulawesi] in the Dutch colo nial and the post-colonial period, and argued that the political-admin istrative categories used by those in power did not coincide with Toraja identity. The next paper was by Tanja Hohe (Münster University) and dealt with the concept of pela in Ambon, which constitutes a form of alliance between two or more villages. This is even able transcend the border be tween Christianity and Islam. In the paper it was optimistically argued that this concept could play a role in avoiding interreligious conflicts. The final contribution to the seminar was by jan Houben (University Lei den) who showed part of a film about a the performance of a Vedic ritual which he shot in Dehli in 1996. All in all, the seminar brought to gether a wealth of relevant expertise on the very original topic of ‘Hin duism’ in modern Indonesia. The focus of the seminar was very well chosen, since an up-to-date, compre hensive publication about this topic is a great lack. The choice of this topic was also very timely, because of the many social and political changes which are taking place in Indonesia at the present time. Unfortunately, in my opinion, a few of the presenta tions were not sufficiently in line with the central topic of the seminar. This was a pity because the busy schedule of presentations did not allow for a closing session, in which some general conclusions might have been drawn. It is envisaged that the proceed ings will appear at the end of 2000 at the Curzon Press. I trust that the just mentioned lack of a concluding ses sion will be made up in this - un doubtedly valuable - forthcoming publication. ■

Dr Nico J.G. K aptein is the co-ordinator of

Dr M artin R am stedt is an ESF / Alliance fellow and

the Indonesian-Netherlands Cooperation in

is stationed at the IIAS in Leiden.

Islamic Studies, and secretary o f the Islamic

He can be reached at:

Studies Programme at Universiteit Leiden.

mramstedt@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

E-mail: NKaptein@rulletleidenuniv.nl

February 2000 •

i i a s n e w s l e t t e r n ?2I

•23

SOUTHEAST

ASI A

Photographic prints a t the Kern Institute Leiden

Collecting Alms as a Character of Burmese Life Contained within our South and Southeast Asian photo collec tion there are 18 prints by the commercial photographer P.A. Klier (ca. 1845-1911). In a collection dominated by art and ar chaeology, these so-called ‘characters o f life’ taken in studios tend to catch the eye. They are proof o f the specific contribution by photography to the process o f imagining a society, in this case Burmese society by the end o f the nineteenth century. Why were outdoors ritual observances transported into the studio? By GERDA THEUNS-DE BOER

hilip Adolphe Klier was an outstand ing photographer. Nevertheless, he under took various professional activities. They all seem to have contributed to his skill. Klier was of German origin. He began his active life as a professional photogra pher in 1871, starting in Moulmein, one of the bigger cities of ‘Lower Burma’. Although Klier can be re garded as an early photographer, photography as such was no longer experimental. Making a living from photogra phy at that time was still difficult. From the directories which mention Klier, we learn that he tried to mini mize his business risk by taking work as an optician, watchmaker, and jeweller as well running the firm known as Murken & Klier, with Heinrich Murken being his business associate. Klier worked his way up and was described in the Illustrated London News of March 1877 as a ‘local artist of considerable repute’. Around 1880 Klier moved to Ran goon, Burma’s biggest and fastest growing city. In the wake of the con quest of the Irrawaddy Delta by the British in 1852, Rangoon had become the centre of Indo-British power. For Klier, Rangoon presented a heaven sent chance to extend his profession al activities. In the beginning Klier worked on his own. The desire to have a studio was what most proba bly prompted him to look for a part ner and so he worked together with J. Jackson in the period 1885-90 but then, for the rest of his life, he car ried on independently. From advertisements in the Ran goon Gazette, the Rangoon Times, and the Weekly Budget, we may con clude that Klier succeeded admirably in commercializing his photo graphs. The texts are always embell ished with slogans such as: Awarded prize medals; New Series and New Designs; Pictures finished in the highest style of art; Photographs in all the latest processes; Pictorial postcards in colour and black and white etc. The core of his work is ex pressed best in an advertisement in the Rangoon Gazette of March 2, 1887: ‘Portraits taken from 8 am to 3 pm. Views of Upper and Lower Burma, Maulmain and the Andaman Islands, also Burmese celebrities and characters of Burmese life’. Besides this, he was a specialist in art pho tography. Quite a few of his pho tographs were published in art books as photogravures. He focused on silverware, glass mosaics, wood 24 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

carving, iron and steel work, and panel art. Here we can see how his photography and other professional activities were related to each other, as from later advertisement it is known that Klier took up trade again as a dealer in objects d'art, silverwork, and furniture! It is my belief that all of his additional undertakings in Moulmein and Rangoon con tributed to his photographic skill. Let us take a look on photo 578 enti tled ‘Burmese Hpongyees Collecting Alms’.

Collecting alms In the centre o f the photograph we see two novice monks, (Pon-gyi in Burmese, meaning Great Glory) en gaged on their daily ritual of beg ging, which is still common in Theravada Buddhist countries. Every morning the younger monks and novices go out in a silent procession to beg their food. The monks stop when anyone comes out to put an of fering of rice, cake, fruit, fish, or veg etables in the earthen or lacquer ware begging-bowl. No word will be spo ken, either of request or thanks, for the monks are doing the laity a favour by allowing them to acquire merit. The monk’s eyes must be downcast, for the monk should not look upon a woman. Hands must be clasped beneath the begging-bowl. After about an hour, the monks go back to the monastery. A portion of the alms will be offered to the Bud dha. Tradition says that the food should be reheated and eaten before noon, but it is the practice to give this eclectic mixture of food to the smaller boys, wanderers, and dogs, while better food, donated by wealthier supporters, is eaten by the monks themselves. On the photograph we see that all the rules of correct behaviour are being strictly followed. Klier uses a so-called backdrop, a painting that could be fixed to give the scene the necessary realistic background. Pos sibly Klier made it himself as he also made hand-painted Christmas and New Year cards. The backdrop gives the photograph a soft, romantic tone. Although space in the studio is limited, he deftly succeeds in sug gesting depth. We can look into the hut, while on the left we take stock of the luxuriant nature. It is almost im possible to see where the backdrop touches the floor. Klier rendered the whole scene very cleverly: the grass on the floor, the position of the main figures, the boy sitting on a real wooden verandah in front of the painted hut, the jars, a broom... Al though we know that everyone is posing, it is done naturally. The boy

>C21 • February 2000

the Lieutenant-Governor of Burma’. Europeans were very much interest ed in ‘Views of Burma’, ranging from the Shwe Dagon Pagoda in Rangoon to ‘Burmese girls’. The photographs were intended to be a souvenir of their Burma days or for ‘friends at home’. Klier took hundreds of these views and sometimes compiled them into albums. Thanks to their quality, they show little deterioration. The Klier print shown can be dated as end of the 1880s. It is a albumen print made from a gelatin dry plate. By the way, the total costs for all these 18 prints were 14 rupees-only! ■

Rangoon, Monks collecting alms, Albumen print ca. 1890

has been clearly told to sit still (look at the stiff position of his left arm). But, by not allowing him to look at the act of alms-giving, Klier stresses the everyday character of the ritual thereby creating a character of daily life’. Why did Klier move this ritual into the studio? Within our collection we also have an outdoor photograph by Klier of the same ritual. What is the difference? In the outdoor photo graph Klier merely acts as a witness to the scene. In the studio, where all

technical and theatrical aspects are under ‘control’, he is able to create a perfect exotic emblem of virtue and nothing is more certain than that his clients will prefer this photograph! For whom did he take his pho tographs? Besides a small group of local Burmese elite who wanted their portraits taken, most of his cus tomers were Europeans, with some connection with the colonial system. In a Rangoon Times advertisement of 1905 he calls himself ‘Photographic artist by appointment to his Honour

1 6 >■ 1 8 SEP TEMBER 1 9 9 9 P A S S A U , GER MA N Y

EUROVIET IV In the middle o f September last year, a sunny Bavarian late sum mer saw a number o f experts convene in Passau for three days in order to discuss current developments in Vietnam. Under the title ‘The Economic Crisis and Vietnam’s Integration into Southeast Asia’ over twenty papers were discussed. These com prised not only a survey o f the economic indicators o f the impact o f the Asian crisis in Vietnam but also focused on social conse quences and government policies to alleviate the situation. ■ By MARTIN GROBHEIM AND VINCENT HOUBEN

he consequences of the crisis for the process o f the increasing integration of Vietnam into the region, partly through its mem bership of ASEAN, and the security situation in the South China Sea were also the subjects of debate. The participants in the conference were a balanced mixture of representatives of Vietnam itself and of countries where Vietnam Studies take a promi nent place among Southeast Asian Studies in general. Among the nine Vietnamese representatives were academic staff from Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh Universities, but also offi cials from the Foreign Ministry and the Ministry of Labour, Invalids, and Social Affairs. The Deputy-Ambas sador of Vietnam in Germany, Mr Tran Ngoc Quyen, attended the con ference as a special guest. Besides

these Vietnamese guests there were European researchers from Ger many, the Netherlands, the Nordic countries, Russia, and France, as well as several Americans.

I want to express m y thanks to John Falconerfo r providing me with some interesting biographical notes on P.A. Klier.

Drs Gerda Theuns-de Boer Photographic Project manager Kern Institute Leiden University E-mail: theuns@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

The keynote speech was delivered by Prof Carlyle Thayer, who clearly illustrated how the impact of the cri sis necessitates a clear-cut domestic policy response from Vietnam, which seems to be poised between a stepped-up doi irtoi-2 and a wait-andsee policy. After an analysis of recent macro-economic trends in the coun try by two Vietnamese economists (Phan Thanh Ha and Le Hong Truong), the implication of the Asian financial crisis on Vietnam’s relations with the region were analysed by Khu Thi Tuyet Mai and Ramses Amer. Tran Thi Anh Dao showed how the recent growth of trade linkages and intra-regional production units has exacerbated the nation's vulnerability to a crisis. In the historical section, two French researchers focused on regional inte-

The participants o f the conference.

SOUTHEAST

ASI A

Popular Culture and Decolonization: Mimicry or Counter-Discourse? Today’s best-known patterns o f popular literature were set by a small number o f so-called classics o f adventure and crime lit erature. Its most famous heroes, such as Robinson Crusoe, the Count o f Monte Christo, and Sherlock Holmes, have long since devel oped into emblematic characters. They represent crucial facets o f Western bourgeois history and illustrate the imagined de velopment o f a reflecting, responsible subject from the early eighteenth century onwards. Surprisingly, the specific histori cal context o f these texts does not seem to have hindered their transfer to non-Westem - and colonized - cultures, for in stance to colonial Indonesia. The question arises o f what could possibly account for the appeal o f these European examples o f adventure and crime fic tion to audiences with entirely different historical and cultur al backgrounds. Unfortunately, the role o f popular literature in the process o f cultural adaptation and transference has as yet not attracted much scholarly attention. My research pro ject, funded by the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (DFG), is a contribution to this field o f Intercultural and Literary Studies. ■ By DORI S J E D A MS K I

apid and immense |- c changes took place V . in the Netherland East Indies during the last decades under colo nial rule. Modernization and nationalism are only two key words, the discovery of individual ism is another. Whenever major changes occur in a society, when

►

gration of an earlier kind (Sophie Reig on Cochinchina’s integration into Indochina and Southeast Asia] and on current account balances of the 1940s to the 1970s (Hugues Tertrais). There were two contributions on the ways in which Vietnam should model its future financial ar chitecture (Gottwald/Klump, Galina Birina). One group of papers interpreted the consequences of the economic problems for both the domestic economy, especially employment (Vu Van Toan, Irene Norlund, Nguyen Thi Hoa) and big industrial estate projects (Laurence Nguyen). Long-term patterns of urbanization (Ton Nu Quynh Tran) and entrepre neurial culture (Mutz/Meyer-Tran/Wolff) were highlighted as well. The final group of contributions aimed to put Vietnamese foreign policy and growing integration into the region into the perspective of the implica tions of the crisis. Le Linh Lan gave a survey of Vietnam’s relations with ASEAN, Ngo Dang Tri discussed the basic tenets of the Vietnamese Com munist Party’s view of foreign rela tions. The issue of the contested is lands in the South China Sea was ex plained by Stein Tonnesson, and Nguyen Van Lich described the for eign orientation of Ho Chi Minh City. Finally, possible future devel opment paradigms were discussed by Tim Goydke (referring to Japan) and Pascal Bergeret, putting forward the hypothesis that maintaining the socialist market economy model might lead to a development strate gy promoting agriculture rather than industry. Daniel Hoang, from

life-styles, social classes, and social structures are being modified or dis solving, the subject needs to be rede fined and repositioned too. Litera ture in its broadest sense is a medi um to constitute the subject most effectively. The genre of the novel offered the colonized new forms of reflection. It was the perfect means to express newly developing ideas, wishes, demands, doubts, and vi sions.

the international committee for the defence of workers' rights in Viet nam, made a critical statement on the social situation after twelve years of reform. The level of the discussions, held mainly in English but also in French and sometimes Vietnamese, was high and showed how a current theme with a clear focus allows a fruitful cross-disciplinary exchange of thoughts in which the Viet namese guests participated with guests. During the conference a new book on rural Vietnam was present ed: Bernhard Dahm & Vincent Houben (eds.), Vietnamese Villages in Transition. Background and Con sequences of Reform Policies in Rural Vietnam. Passau: Lehrstuhl ftir Siidostasienkunde 1999, 224 pages. A publication of a selection of the con ference papers by the organizers of EUROVIETIV is envisaged. ■

Prof. Vincent Houben holds the Lehrstuhl fuer Suedostosienkunde at Passau University, At the time o f the conference Dr Martin

GroDheim was working as Associate Professor (Wissenschaftlicher Assistent) at the same Dept. Since I October 1999, he has been affiliated as a Postdoctoral Fellow with the Center for East and Southeast Asian Studies at Lund University/Sweden. E-mail for both professors: seastudies@ uni-passau.de

rtöR A LA

t ja

K fUirfDCSA&i •-

■-

/a il,

Translation + Adaptation = Imitation? Western popular fiction was intro duced to Indonesia by way of trans lations and adaptations. Initially, these publications were produced by ‘cultural gate-keepers’, Eurasians and Chinese Malays, who very often combined the roles of translators or authors, publishers, and distribu tors. They could draw on a well-es tablished element in Malay literary traditions in which the copying of foreign models has always been a crucial and highly regarded form of literary endeavour. This ‘copying’ was the unavoidable first step which had to be taken to allow a broader audience access to forms and ideas coming in from other cultures. If re garded relevant, these new elements would then be taken up by other au thors to be developed more inten sively and subsequently be ‘assimi lated’ into the indigenous culture. Consequently, the leading criteria would not be the Western notions of originality and genius, but useful ness within cultural, social, and po litical discourses.

M im icry and counter discourse The literary niche of translations and adaptations in particular invited Indonesians to develop a counter discourse - undisturbed and right under the colonizer’s gaze. Heroes such as The Count ofMonte Christo and Sherlock Holmes played a decisive role in the emerging discourse on moder nity and identity among Indonesian authors and readers. Monte Christo, for example, provided a model of power relations which could be re interpreted in various ways, includ ing in favour of the colonized and against the colonizers. Most of all he offered a fantasy of how to defeat the threatening capitalistic structures by turning its prime weapon against it: money. Sherlock Holmes, the epito me of Occidental rationalism, on the other hand, apparently impressed with his demonstrations of how to read the signs of modernity. He was the hero able to put back in order what had been disintegrating, to

structure the world anew. However, Conan Doyle’s famous detective was soon replaced by various indigenous, master minds' - often journalists who provided a perfect foil for the projection of Indonesian ideas of the new society. During the late 1920s, it was timidly anticipated that colonial rule might actually come to an end or, at least, would undergo drastic changes. The issue ofrevenge’, ruth lessly pursued by Monte Christo, but also dealt with in crime fiction and Chinese silat stories, entailed a flood of novels about pembalosan (vengeance). These novels represent a diversity of positions, depending on the authors’ ethnicity and reli gion. Western-oriented Eurasians, Sumatran Muslims, or Javanese Chi nese Malays (some of them again Muslim converts) all contributed to this discourse.

The colonial power forced to ‘w rite back’ There is thus no suggestion that this ‘imitation’ of Western classics by indigenous writers represented some form of imposition of colonial culture, such as is usually seen to be the case with the teaching of Euro pean literature in the colonial class room. The opposite is true. For a long time the colonial power seemed concerned only with the indigenous press and failed to ascribe any great social or political potential to popu lar literature - or to any kind of liter ature. This situation only changed in the last decades of colonial rule. In fact, it was the colonial power itself that was forced to ‘write back’ - in the languages of the colonized. The emergence of the colonial govern ment’s publishing house, Balai Poestaka, can also be seen as an attempt to control the process o f ‘imitation’ that was gaining ground in indige nous society of the time. Balai Poestaka set about developing and estab lishing a modified type of the West ern psychological novel in the In dies. Only when the Dutch officials realized that they could not expect any early success in ‘counterbalanc ing’ the newly developing forms of indigenous literature by establish ing the affirmative model of an in digenous ‘psychological’ novel - the DfBRAtA

KSTJUIOOE&H I

mimic Bildun^sroman - they compro mised and began to put out their own translations and adaptations of the most popular novels.

The (colonial) subject

re-defined Campe’s Robinson Crusoe - likely to be the first novel in Western style in colonial Indonesia to be available in Malay translation - was used as text book in schools for many decades from 1875. Still, the subject model in troduced by this novel was not picked up by Indonesians and subjected to the indigenous discourse. It should be added here that modified forms of the Robinson model, such as Mou/gli and Tarzan, did not prove any greater suc cess when dissiminated in Malay translation by Balai Poestaka during the 1920s and 1930s. One possible ex planation is that the restricted and al most autobiographical focus on a sin gle protagonist is likely to have made the novel too alien to appeal to the general Malay-reading public in colo-

. 1V' .

««■

nial Indonesia. Furthermore, Robinson Crusoe embodies the notion of the in dividual as unified and sovereign sub ject who, through introspection and self-reflection, acquires self-mastery. As a consequence, (Western) civiliza tion is seen to establish itself in the face of solitude and disorder. This Western-bourgeois philosophy is un known to Malay thinking. Instead, the Indonesian/Malay subject is de termined and defined by its place in the community and its relation to others. Descartes’ famous statement Je pense doncje suis would, as Tickell nicely pinpoints, probably evoke the question - and where areyou? However, Robinson Crusoe seems to have provid ed ‘counter-discoursive inspiration’ to the Malay re-interpretations of Madame Butterfly: the white male pro tagonist makes his appearance as a shipwrecked and stranded man on one of the white beaches of the Malay archipelago. ■

Dr Doris Jedamski (Hamburg) is working on her Habilitation and can be reached at: Doris.Jedamski@t-online.de She was an HAS research fellow (DFG) between Septem ber 7, / 999 and January 14,

2000 .

F ebruary 2 0 0 0 • has n e w s l e t t e r N ? 2 i • 2 5

SOUTHEAST

ASI A

Riau in the Reformation Era Every Indonesian province or region seem s to be goin g its own way in the present ‘reform ation’ era. The people in the east Sumatran province o f Riau see the reform ation as an opportu nity to make new claims to old natural resources. These chang in g socio-political conditions im pinge not only on the lives o f Indonesians, but also on the fieldwork done by foreign an thropologists. By FREEK C O L O M B I J N

F ieldw ork conditions The local attempts to gain more autonomy from Jakarta entail cer tain consequences for the fieldworker. In my latest experience, from April this year, research per mits from the Indonesian Academy of Science (LIPI) and the Minister of Internal Affairs in Jakarta are no longer indispensable. High-ranking civil servants in Riau’s provincial and Pekanbaru’s municipal admin istration now decided themselves whether or not they supported my research. Happily, in the reformist era the civil servants have quickly learned to be more open and respon sive toward civilians, including for eign anthropologists. The other side of the coin of in creased local autonomy is that nowadays local civil servants can more easily show an unwelcome re searcher the door. In practice, how ever, this potentially negative side of the local autonomy did not befall me. In fact, I found the local civil ser vants extraordinarily helpful. Apart from the new, general openness mentioned above, Riau people are pleased to have foreign attention. The saying that every village has its own anthropologist may apply to Minangkabau and Balinese regions, but certainly not to Riau. Perhaps more important was that I visited Professor Tabrani at an early stage, accompanied by a letter of introduc

a a d tfiS ? *

-«****£>*~.

Farmers protesting at the Governor’s office

tion from a fellow researcher who studies the Sakai. Tabrani is one of the foremost informal leaders of the province, who openly speculates about full independence for Riau. He has also sued President B.J. Habibie, and some others, alleging that the president had already promised to return 10%of the oil revenues to Riau the previous year. Tabrani, in his turn, introduced me to the governor of Riau and asked his blessing for my undertaking. Despite his obstinate behaviour, Tabrani has remained on good terms with the local govern ment and is admired by the general public. Networks count in Indone sia, and my connection with the gov ernor and Tabrani proved to be help ful again and again. Tabrani himself is well aware of the importance of (international) contacts. Since my return to the Netherlands he has supplied me with a wealth of valuable documen tation via e-mail. Of course, he is using me for his cause as much as I am using him for my purpose. It is interesting to note that extended fieldwork developed since Mali nowski’s times has been replaced by a series of short fieldwork trips, sup plemented with e-mail contact with one’s interlocutors and the reading of local newspapers on the web.

Contested claim s To the ordinary people, land, not oil, is the most important issue. Plantation companies have in the past trespassed on the land used by

M iS S IS i k - .~tv *

Demanding ten percent 20 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

NS21 • February 2000

IsSSBSS*

villagers. When a dispute erupted between villagers and plantations during the New Order of former President Soeharto, the local govern ment usually backed the planta tions. Nowadays, the local govern ment takes a more impartial stance when it investigates the rights to a plot of land, and sometimes con cludes that a plantation company must return land to villagers or pay them compensation. It has therefore become a common sight to see a group of villagers waiting on the

’

i i i si IO IO D

I he coastal area of mainland Riau is rich in forest prod ucts and mineral oil. For centuries access to these goods was restricted by the virtually impassable soil, which was either swampy or simply inun dated. In the past the rivers formed the only convenient axes of trans port. A new road from the inland capital of Riau, Pekanbaru, to the seaport of Dumai had a revolution ary impact. This road was construct ed by the oil company Caltex in 1959 to facilitate the construction and maintenance of an oil-pipeline. The road opened up the area to successive waves of newcomers: first Caltex, then logging companies, who liter ally cleared the ground for subse quent rubber and oil-palm planta tions, and transmigration projects. The booming economy also attracted many spontaneous migrants. This process of exploiting new oil fields, constructing and upgrading roads, and opening new land has continued until today. The aim of my research is to un derstand how and why various eco nomic actors have gained access, both in the geographical and the ju ridical sense, to the natural resources of Riau. The most important issue this year has been the Riau claim to ten percent of the net oil revenues presented to the national govern ment in Jakarta. Strictly speaking, this ten percent claim falls outside my research interest, because it is

Research Project

about the revenues of oil and not about the resource itself (which, everybody agrees, should safely be left in the expert hands of Caltex).

V 1

her trade, it squeezed the whole vil lage economy. Another example of contested ac cess (now in the juridical sense) con cerns a village of tribal people called Sakai. The village, Penaso, was first abandoned when the road from Pekanbaru to Dumai was built, but later the inhabitants reoccupied the site. The Sakai village, which used to lie in forest land, is now half encir cled by PT ADEI, a big rubber planta tion in Malaysian hands. Last June labourers from PT ADEI intentional ly destroyed four places considered sacred by the Penaso Sakai. Some of these places are old and have a unique religious and historical value. The Sakai sued PT ADEI for the damage done. In their suit they were counselled by the above-men tioned Tabrani, who has taken a sympathetic interest in them for years. After having submitted their complaint to the court ofjustice, the Sakai marched in protest to the Malaysian consulate in Pekanbaru, the office of the governor, the forestry department, the land reg istry, and the office of PT ADEI itself The whole action is exemplary of the common wish in Riau to obtain jus tice, but also to refrain from mass vi

■ ■ ëSÉ ■ I — : v | : <■ , ■ ___________. 1--M

_____ The Riau road

square in front of the governor’s of fice to hand over a petition to the governor. It has become worth the effort for the villagers to oppose a plantation company. The ‘reformasi’ has therefore led to more intensive conflicts between smallholders on the one hand and plantation and logging companies on the other. It is notable that in these and many sim ilar cases, ethnicity does not seem to play a role. The dividing line be tween the parties is a socio-political one: villagers versus estates. A good example of contested access (in the geographical sense) to natur al resources is a dispute between the inhabitants of one particular village and a logging company. In 1998 the village handed over a road to the company without financial compen sation, on the condition that the company would maintain it. The road was their only connection with the outside world and pivotal to the village economy. A year later the company drew the conclusion that the villagers used the road to export, among other commodities, timber. The company considered this wood its own, and defined the villagers’ trade as theft of its standing stock of timber. To baulk this ‘theft’, the company dug a five by seven metre wide hole in the road. The hole not only stopped the alleged illegal tim-

olence, as has happened so tragically in other provinces. I read about the protest march on line in a Riau journal, but the very first information about it was sent to me by Professor Tabrani and a Sakai head via e-mail. I interpreted this email not only as a notification, but also as a request to support the struggle of the Sakai people. The event embodies the fact that it is no longer easy to keep aloof from social and political tensions. One is urged to take sides, the Indonesian citizen as much as the foreign anthropolo gist. ■

Dr Freek C olo m b ijn is research fellow at the HAS. He can be contacted at the HAS, or by e-mail: colombijn@rulleLleidenuniv.nl See also: http://iias.leidenuniv.nl/iias/research/colombijn/

For further reading on Riau, please see

Chou, Cynthia and Will Derks (eds) Riau in Transition, Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde, Journal of the Royal Institute of Linguistics and Anthropology, issue 153, 1997.

SOUTHEAST

Repossessing a Shrine in Riau On June 1999 , I received an e-mail from a well-known Riau Malay, notifying me that the workers o f a sharehold company have destroyed a Sakai shrine and other locally meaningful sites. In the past few years, the shrine o f Grandfather Whitehlood had emerged in associations with landright claims. A dispossessed group o f Sakai had re-entered the woods to reap propriate an ancestral shrine and landscape. The political ar ticulation with the sharehold company has not only caused a revitalization o f some Sakai customary practices relating to the shrine. It has also introduced novel ways in relating to the shrine. Landscapes are never fixed but recreated, remodified and always renegotiable. By reappropriating the shrine and the surrounding land, Sakai not only retell the legends o f the landscaped to visitors. They rework the stories as a cultural ar gument to accompany their legal attempts at repossession. Talking about landscape is not simply talking about culture, but about both customary and legal rights. ■

By N A T H A N

PORATH

he Sakai are a Malay-speaking indiJL genous people of Riau (Sumatra) who for mally called themselves Orang Batin. In the past they lived in administrative territori al units called pebatin headed by a Batin headman appointed by the sul tan of Siak. There were thirteen pebatms that flanked the rivers o f the area. Today, the pebatin system, which was the product of the Siak kingdom, has been smashed. The Sakai now live in Indonesian territor ial villages (desa). Many have settled by the side o f the highway which cuts through their traditional territory. I

2 6 > 2 8 JULY

They form pocket settlements be tween a majority m igrant population and are surrounded by oil-fields and rubber and palm oil plantations. Re gional developments in the name and ideology o f Development have dis possessed them of much of their tra ditional land area. During the mid-1990s a well-re spected, blind Sakai shaman, who was the Batin headman o f the area before the change in village organi zation, had a dream. Grandfather White-blood called him to re-enter the woods and protect his shrine. The old shaman organized his m ar ried children and grandchildren into a group, and re-entered the woods. They formed a settlement beside the shrine. Before moving to live by the

ASIA

shrine, the group o f about fifteen families lived on a small area of land by the highway. They lived in a set tlement with a high concentration of Sakai families all squatting on anoth er’s land. Surrounding them was a settlement of ethnically mixed m i grants and the notorious brothel of the area. To look at, the shrine is ju st a small burial mound surrounded by trees. However, this tum ulus is considered magical ground possessing very strong powers although there are no pilgrimages or cults surrounding it. The shrine is merely part of the local landscape. People visit the shrine re questing aid in healing or for other endeavours. (Recently, some people also ask Grandfather White-blood for a winning lottery number.) The Sakai belief in the power of the ancestral shrine is part o f a wider Malay belief in the power of graves of legendary people. These people were believed to have had saint-like qualities when they were alive. For Sakai the white blood running through Grandfather White-blood's veins was evidence of his uniqueness. Legends retell his ex ploits. For example, somewhere fur ther upriver is the estuary of the Drunkard Waters. According to Sakai, once a year, the fish swimming through this estuary rise to the sur face as though they were drunk, mak ing it easy for people to catch them. According to legend, this was the place Grandfather White-blood re sisted a Dutch attem pt at capturing him. The colonials sent a ship of sol diers to search for the magic man. They reached the river-opening, and seven men hauled a rowing-boat and paddled up the river. As they were rowing, they came across a local man (of the pebatin) sitting on the edge of

1999

YOGYAKARTA,

INDONESIA

Continuity and Crisis in the Indonesian Economy This is an exceptionally exciting time in Indonesia, caught in the toils o f both sudden political change and mastering the current economic crisis. A link was forged between experiences from Indonesian economic history and today’s predicaments and challenges during an international conference hosted by the Department o f History at Gadjah Mada University in Yogyakarta in late July 1999 . The conference testified to the re cent revival o f the field o f economic history in Indonesia. The revival has been reinforced by intensified international co-op eration and increasing contacts between historians and econo mists within Indonesia. By J. T H O M A S L I N D B L A D

I he Yogyakarta con ference was in fact the second inter national conference held in Indonesia specifically devoted to Indonesian economic history (the first one took place in Jakarta in 1991). The meeting at Yogyakarta formed the conclusion of a four-year project o f co-operation between Dutch and Indonesian eco nomic historians sponsored by the Royal Netherlands Academy of Sci

ences. Other sponsors of the confer ence included the Toyota Foundation and the Yayasan Pendidikan Kebangsaan in Jakarta. The three-day conference, from 26 to 28 July, attracted participants from not only Indonesia and the Nether lands but also from Australia and Japan. The keynote address was deliv ered by Emil Salim, one-time Minis ter for Environmental Affairs and a former economics professor at the University o f Indonesia in Jakarta. The general theme of the confer ence was ‘Crisis and Continuity: the

Indonesian Economy in the Twenti eth Century’. This theme was dis cussed in twelve papers, one half about the late colonial period and the other half concerning the Soekamo and Soeharto periods. The level of analysis included both global ap proaches and detailed case studies. A few examples may suffice. Cees Fasseur (Leiden) analysed the failure of the Dutch colonial Government to implement an effective industrializa tion policy before the Pacific War, whereas Arjan Taselaar (PhD from Leiden) invited comparisons with the present day with his description of in stitutionalized links between private business and the colonial administra tion. At the level of case studies, Roger Knight (Adelaide) and Arthur van Schaik (Amsterdam) drew attention to the complexities of land and labour arrangements on Java sugar estates, while Y. Uemura (Hiroshima) offered insights into how government inter ference in local rice markets in 1918-20 actually worked out. Jamie Mackie

the river. The Dutchmen asked the local man if he could take them to Grandfather White-blood. He agreed and accompanied the visitors in their boat. The Batin man led the Dutch men to the estuary and then re proached the Europeans. He told them that the man they were after was a magic man and therefore they were wasting their time in trying to catch him. The disbelieving Dutch man passed this off as local supersti tion. To prove his point, the Batin man, told them that with magic he could tu rn the waters into alcohol. The Dutchmen took his bait, and asked him to prove this. The Batin man put his finger in the water, and then offered the Europeans to drink it. They did, and immediately fell drunk, so drunk that they forgot their mission. The man then helped row the merry crew of Drunken Dutchmen back to their boat. Little did the colonials know that this man was Grandfather White-blood. If legends o f the shrine reveal how Grandfather White-blood helped transform the landscape, today Sakai are also transform ing the landscape through their attem pt at resisting further dispossession o f land and reappropriating the shrine. When the group o f Sakai families moved into the shrine area, they chopped some wood and built a fence and a gate around the shrine. They locked the gate and the shaman kept the key. They also emphasized the shrine’s presence by erecting a sign post declaring th at this was the shrine of Grandfather White-blood. Underneath the name they wrote a date +, -, 250 years, thus transform ing the legendary reality o f Grandfa ther White-blood into a historical fact.

(formerly ANU, Canberra) urged for a reappraisal of Soekarno’s achieve ments with respect to nation-build ing in Indonesia. Two Yogyakarta economists, Laksono Trisnantoro and Budhi Soesetyo, introduced a histori cal dimension into the young field of health economics in Indonesia link ing disparities in treatment and qual ity to political choices. Proceedings based on a selection of all these contri butions will be published as one or two special issues of the Yogyakarta history journal Lembaran Sejarah. At the Yogyakarta conference the conventional setup of individual pre sentations was supplemented by three separate panel discussions. One concerned a new comprehensive text book on Indonesian economic history that is being prepared at the present by a team o f authors consisting of Thee Kian Wie (Jakarta), Howard Dick (Melbourne), Vincent Houben (Passau), and J. Thomas Lindblad (Leiden). The penultimate manuscript o f the book was presented to the conference participants and subjected to a critical examination. The book is scheduled to appear in the year 2000. A second separate panel inevitably focused on the current Asian crisis. Anne Booth (SOAS, London) placed the decline in income and employment since 1997 in a historical perspective and discussed the agenda for econom ic reform, whereas Sri Adinigsith (Gadjah Mada) offered an overview of the liberalization in Indonesian bank ing that preceded the crisis.

Sakai have also been active in peti tioning for the shrine and the sur rounding land. On the 17th Decem ber, 1998, a large group o f Sakai visit ed the newly appointed Provincial Governor as his official guests. One hundred and sixty-four individuals from four settlements were present and in the new spirit o f reformasi could air their problems. One o f the settlements represented were the people living by the shrine. Answer ing their request for schooling, the governor granted the four settle ments a large sum of money for building schools. A m onth later, the headman o f one settlem ent received audience w ith the Governor and pe titioned for the land surrounding the ancestral shrine o f Grandfather White-Blood. The Governor respond ed positively, and authorized a grant of 2000 hectares o f land surrounding the shrine to the settlement. Until then, the Sakai group had been re sisting the sharehold company’s at tem pt at taking over the land. Re grettably, it seems then, that Sakai attem pts at protecting the shrine were not fully successful. At this stage it is difficult for me to assess the am ount of damage done to the site. Nevertheless, whatever the fu ture outcome, the Sakai attem pt at protecting the shrine presents an historical m om ent in the biography o f Grandfather White-blood’s shrine and the surrounding land. It is with regret that I received the news from Prof. Tabrani about the destruction of the shrine. ■

N athan Porath, CNWS, Leiden University, E-mail: Porath@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

The final day of the conference was largely devoted to yet another sepa rate panel containing presentations by so-called ‘young’ Indonesian re search in economic history, i.e. re ports on research in progress in preparation of MA or PhD theses. Topics ranged from legal arrange ments in the feudal economy of the Central Javanese sultanates in the nineteenth century to labour rela tions in contemporary North Suma tra or the successive technological up grading in Indonesian textile m anu facturing. Two presentations origi nated in a larger project on the histo ry o f the Jva Sea region between 1870 and 1970 based at the Diponegoro University in Semarang and one indi vidual project explored regional eco nomic development in Besuki in East Java. The three panels during the con ference underscored the strong inter national dimension in current syn thesis in Indonesian economic history as well as the immediate link with today’s urgent issues. Last but not least, they made clear that a young generation of Indonesian historians, devoted to their country’s economic history, is taking shape and prepared to carry on the work of previous gen erations. ■

Dr ]. Thomas Lindblad, Department o f Southeast Asian Studies, Universiteit Leiden. E-mail: j.th.lindblad@worldonline.nl

F e b r u a r y 2 0 0 0 • HAS N E W S L E T T E R

19? 2 1

•

2 7

SOUTHEAST

Biak in Nijmegen For tw o sem esters th e am azin g language o f Biak has been b ein g stu d ied at th e C atholic U niversity o f N ijm eg en in a lin g u istic fieldw ork course con d u cted w ith th e aid o f a native speaker. The langu age is typ ologically extraordinary in th at it has gram m ati cal gender, h u t on ly in th e plural, n o t in th e oth er num bers (singular, dual, trial). B ut th is is n o t all th at is am azing. ■ By HEIN S T EI NHAUER

iak is an Austronesian language which J l J vs spoken in various dialects in the Schouten Is lands, in parts of the Raja Ampat archipelago, and in settlements along the north coast of the Bird’s Head Peninsula of West New Guinea. The estimated number of speakers m ust be well over 50,000, which makes it one of the biggest lan guages in that part of Asia. Yet it is under pressure from the language of school, church, government, and tele vision, Indonesian. As a result a clear shift towards Indonesian (or rather a local variety thereof) can be observed in the more urban environments: out side the market in the district capital of Biak on the island of the same name, it is rare to hear this language spoken. The first reports on the Biak lan guage date from the middle of the 19th century. The missionary Van Hasselt published a grammatical sketch in 1905. A short dictionary ap peared posthumously (1947). The mis sionary-anthropologist Kamma pub lished quite a lot about Biak customs and the messianistic movements which were prevailent among the people, but nothing about the lan guage. He did collect heaps of Biak

ASI A

‘house’ the following noun phrases can be formed:

- in i ‘the (one) fish’, rum i ‘the house' - in sui ‘the two fish’, rum sui ‘the two houses’ - in sk oi ‘the three fish’, rum skoi ‘the three houses’, but

- in s i ‘the (many) fish’, rum na ‘the (many) houses’.

stories, typewritten by Biak infor mants and/or by himself, single spaced and without margins (paper That Biak had a gender opposition wasn’t easy to get in the field in those at all was unusual: grammatical gen days), all dated prior to the mid-1950s. der is not a feature of Austronesian His - unordered - archives were in languages so far west. herited by the Dutch anthropologist Most unusual, however, was the cu Jelle Miedema and are kept on the rious distribution of the opposition, premises of the HAS. which was a counter-example to the Van Hasselt was still the most re cent source for the language when the Indonesian lexicographer Soeparno, working with students from Biak in Yogyakarta, wrote a Biak-Indonesian dictionary (1975). It was his findings which put me on the track o f the gen der phenomenon. In the early 1980s several Indone sian anthropologists studied in Lei den in one o f the sandwich pro grammes which were still in full swing at that time. With one of them, Johsz Mansoben, a native speaker of Biak, I started to work out Soeparno’s Hein Steinhauer (centre) during findings. However, both he and I had to meet deadlines. His resulted in a alledged (and indeed plausible) lan dissertation on the traditional politi guage ‘universal’ that a language cal systems in Irian Jaya. Mine in a m ust have at least as many gender op paper on number in Biak, which left positions in the singular as it has in many problems undecided, but the non-singular. Since then more which made one thing clear: Biak did counter-evidence has been reported, have a gender opposition in the plural much of it derived from Berber lan whereas in the singular, dual and trial | guages, but the Biak pattern seems to it had none. be parallelled only by one other Aus One illustration may suffice. From tronesian language, Marshallese. Fur the nominal bases in ‘fish’ and rum ther research into the question

whether this is a case of parallel devel opment or of common origin (less likely) is needed. More research was needed for Biak into the meaning of the grammatical gender, into the extremely complicat ed deictic system, and into the struc ture of noun phrases in relation to that deictic system. Only when I was asked to do a linguistic fieldwork class at the Catholic University of Nijmegen did the opportunity present itself With five dedicated students and the help of the unsurpassed Zacharias Sawor as a native speaker, we have been studying the language since January last year. Several of the texts from the Kamma archive were analysed. With the aid of discovery tools, developed by the Ni jmegen-based Max Planck Institute for Psycholinguistics, we have been trying

the course on Biak in Nijmegen to tackle the problem of the deictic sys tem. Many problems remain. One ex ample will illustrate the nominal phrase structure and definiteness marking. The phrase ‘the fish which swims under the house’ (traditional houses are built off-shore) is: in ve-bur ro rum-ya vavn-di ni (fish which-swim in/at house-the space.below-the/its the), whereas ‘the (many) fish which

Traditional Malay Literature T rad ition al M alay literatu re - o n e o f th e m ajor literatures o f S o u th ea st Asia, w h ich co m b in ed eth n ic and in te r -e th n ic fu n c tio n s, represents an im p o rta n t part o f th e cu ltu ral h eritage o f th e p eo p les o f M alaysia, In d on esia, B runei, and Singapore. In its m u ltifa rio u s aspects and m a n ifesta tio n s th is h eritage co n tin u es to in flu en ce and in sp ire th e literary process in all th ese co u n tries. In recent decades, thanks to th e efforts o f a n u m b er o f scholars, first and fo rem ost E uropean, M alaysian, In d o n e sian, and A ustralian, k n ow led ge o f tra d itio n a l M alay literature has b road en ed and d eep en ed considerably. By VLADI MIR I. B R A G I N S K Y

any new publi cations of tra ditional works and new stimulating studies o f a general and a particular nature, in cluding those devoted to its literary history, have appeared.1 Be that as it may, ever since the well-known His tory ofClassical Malay Literature by R. Winstedt - first published in 1939, after that only slightly revised and by now very much antiquated both in the facts it contains and in its theoret ical background - no other compre hensive history of traditional Malay literature, written in any European language, has seen the light of day. It is to fill in this gap that is the task of the project ‘The Heritage of Tradi tional Malay Literature’.

Research Project

28 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

The project is designed to meet the needs of both scholarship and educa tion. As it has been carried out by Prof V. Braginsky (SOAS) - the organizer and the author o f the bulk of the book - Dr N. Phillips (SOAS) and Dr G. Koster (Universiti Sains, Malaysia), fi nanced jointly by the British Academy and the ILAS, and planned to be pub lished by KITLV Press, it therefore rep resents the result o f British-Dutch co operation. The project includes a description o f the oral traditional literature of the Malays, a reconstruction of Old Malay literature (7^-14* c.), a de tailed analysis o f the early Islamic (x4th-i6th) and the classical (i6th-i9 th c.) periods o f the literary evolution, as well as a study o f the principal changes characteristic o f the early stage of the transition to modern lit erature.

NS21 • February 2000

The history of traditional Malay literature is viewed as a dynamic process - as the development o f inte gral literary systems, replacing each other in the course of social, cultural, and religious changes in the region, subject especially to the process of Islamization. These developments are analysed both externally - from the point o f view o f a modern scholar and, for the first time, from the view point o f the traditional Malay con ception of literary creativity. It is pre cisely the reconstruction o f this con ception and of the functions o f litera ture that made it possible to discern an integral hierarchical system in the totality o f traditional Malay works, particularly those o f the classical pe riod. In that period, in spite of the heterogeneity o f the constituent ele ments o f the literary system, its unity was based on the Islamic liter ary self-awareness which permeated Malay culture. The Islamic doctrine o f M uhammad as the Logos - the support o f everything created - stip ulated this unity. The hierarchical structure of the system was ensured by the fact that every group o f liter ary genres corresponded to a definite level in the hierarchy of the Universe and o f its counterpart - hum an psy chic-somatic hierarchy. The fantastic

adventure romances (hikayat) and ro mantic poems (syctir), endowed with beauty (indah), were intended to har monize the soul and to instruct in courteous behaviour. The intellect was strengthened by the ‘benefits’ (faedah) o f the didactic works (‘m ir rors’ - hidayat, 'framed tales’) and ‘chronicles’ (sejarah, salasilah), .more historiosophic than historiographic in their nature. The ‘spiritual heart’ the organ of mystical intuition - was prepared for the divine illumination by the hagiographic works, Sufi alle gories and the religious-mystical ‘lit erature of kitab (treatises)’. The development o f literary selfawareness in the theoretical sphere was coupled with the emergence of literary synthesis in the sphere of cre ative practice. The basis for this syn thesis was prepared in the Early Is lamic period, when the works belong ing to Hindu-Javanese and ArabicPersian literary circles, after passing through the ‘filter’ o f the Malay tradi tion, came into contact with each other within the confines of the Malay literary system as an integral whole. In the classical period the process of Malayization, transforma tion, and synthesis of the heteroge neous elements gained in intensity and, proceeding from the principles

swim below the two houses’ becomes:

in ve-bur ro rum-su-ya vavn-su si (fish which-swim in/at house-DUALthe space. below-the.DUAL the.PLUR). The semantic difference between the ‘si’ and the ‘na’ class of nouns is not yet clear. What are obviously animals (including human beings) belong to the ‘si’ class, but so do things which in the common European perception are ‘inanimate’, such as spoons, plates, stars, drums, bananas, and oranges, whereas comparable objects such as knives, cups, trees, and fruit belong to the ‘na’ class. One more finding is worth men tioning. Biak presents one of the rare examples of a sound change in progress. It distinguishes a voiced bil abial stop [b] and a voiced bilabial fricative [v]. To the Dutch ears of the Protestant missionaries this could not be true, and they wrote b for both sounds and pronounced them as [b] in their sermons. Today it is for native speakers a sign of cultivated language use if one does not make the differ ence. Biak shows features of Austrone sian languages further to the west, but it also has characteristics of Oceanic languages. It is highly likely that there have been mutual influ ences between Biak on the one hand and the various Non-Austronesian languages of the Bird’s Head and North Halmahera. The future of most of these languages is bleak. (Further) research is urgent. ■ Professor Hein Steinhauer is affiliated with the Catholic University Nijmegen for Ethnolinguistics o f Southeast Asia and Universiteit Leiden for Austronesian linguistics. He holds the HAS Extraordinary Chair for ‘Ethnolinguistics with a focus on Southeast Asia’. He can be reached at: E-mail: steinhauer@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

o f Islamic literary self-awareness, these elements were fused within the confines o f a new unity - an individ ual literary work, be it a chronicle, a fantastic adventure romance, or a poem of love, whether historical or al legorical content. Finally, beginning from the second half of the 18th centu ry, the dissolution of the synthesis started as a result o f the deepening Islamization, and Malay literature has gradually approximated the model of late-medieval Arabic literature. W ithin the framework o f the liter ary developments outlined, the ori gin and evolution o f all genres of traditional Malay literature are studied and the most im portant and characteristic pieces o f literature be longing to these genres are analysed with a special reference to their po etics, meaning, structure, and func tion. ■ Liaw Yock Fang, Sejarah Kesusastraan Melayu Klasik, Jil. 1-2. Jakarta: Erlangga, 1991-1993; - T. Iskandar, Kesusasteraan Klasik Melayu Sejianjang Abad, Brunei: Jabatan Kesusasteraan Melayu, Universiti Brunei Darussalam, 1995; - V.I. Braginsky, Yon# Indah, Beflaedah dan Kamal, Sejarah Sastra Melayu Dalam A bad/-19, Jakarta: INIS, 1998.

Vladimir I. Braginsky, SOAS. University o f London, E-mail:VB I @ soas.ac.uk

REGI ONAL

N E WS P. R. C H I N A JAPAN KOREA

MACAO TAI WAN

The Myth of Labour Relations in Overseas Chinese Enterprises The scenario o f idyllic labour relations in overseas Chinese-in vested enterprises can be viewed as a myth. When overseas Chi nese entrepreneurs claimed that they shared the same cultural values as the mainland Chinese, and could therefore take ad vantage o f the cheap labour and favourable investment condi tions in South China, none o f them could have expected to en counter a ‘cultural shock’ in their hometown business opera tions. Although both overseas Chinese employers and migrant workers represent ‘sojourner’ populations with a similar pur pose, namely to make money in South China, the conflicts be tween them reflect more than just labour-management dis agreements; they also illuminate disparate cultural back grounds and experiences. These factors have contributed to the complicated labour relations in the enterprises. ■ By CEN H U A N G

f a 1 his paper intends to I explore the causes of the conflicts and problems between mi grant workers and their ‘foreign’ employers in a broader social and cultural context. The objective of the paper is not to deny the existence of abusive, unfair, | and inhuman treatment of migrant workers in some East Asian foreigninvested enterprises. Nor is its inten tion to defend the management of these enterprises. The author argues that the incidence of labour abuse, and subsequent unrest, is much more complicated than a simplistic, ortho dox Marxist interpretation of the ex ploitation of migrant workers by for eign owners and managers. Researchers have hypothesized that different socio-economic and educa tional backgrounds result in different | attitudes and expectations towards work. Their work brought to light that there were various contrasting characteristics between overseas Chi nese employers and migrant workers, which may help understand why and how some problems and conflicts were created in these enterprises. Mobility was a fundamental con trasting characteristic between the two groups involved. Most migrants we interviewed came to South China with an unambivalent purpose, | namely to earn money and then go back home within a matter of a few years. They were extremely mobile. In contrast to their own flexibility, the employers wanted their workers to | remain in long-term employment and worried about the high turnover of the labour force. Loyalty versus trust the second con trasting feature. All employers deI manded their workers be loyal. Some

even claimed that they created a fam ily-type atmosphere in the workplace in order to build up a base for work ers’ loyalty. Migrant workers saw matters otherwise, considering that trust comes before loyalty, an atti tude which stemmed from the uncer tainty of their lives. This conflict has played a thorny role in labour rela tions. Both the employers and em ployees interviewed complained about the other side for being either not loyal or distrustful. Commitments versus alternatives have played another important role. All employers demanded their work ers be totally committed to the facto ry, while most migrant workers we interviewed intended to make use of alternative choices for their employ ment. A common complaint ex pressed by employers about migrants was that ‘very few of them have a sense of belonging to the workplace, therefore, they rarely made commit ments to work and they don’t take re sponsibility for what they are doing.’ In contrast, the migrant workers said that ‘how can we have a sense of be longing to the enterprise when we work on a non-contract basis. The employers are too demanding in the workplace and leave no space in our lives.'

Conflicts The most common complaint made by entrepreneurs was that mi grant workers had poor work habits and lacked a sense of responsibility. They often failed to follow instruc tions and were unwilling to co-oper ate. An entrepreneur told us his favourite story, beginning ‘you ex pected them [the workers] to be very well informed about the correct pro cedures for putting things together after so many demonstrations and so much training. Yet, as soon as they

For new p u b lic a tio n s in A s ia n S tudies, please re fe r to pp. 3 4 -4 2

were left unsupervised, they started putting things together in their own way.’ Others complained about the poor hygiene habits of the rural mi grants. A manager said, ‘Ifyou do not have heavy fines on spitting and lit tering, you will have a very dirty workplace.’ The empirical data demonstrated that socio-economic status was an important determinant in the amount of human capital in vestment and subsequent economic success. Work attitudes were related to a person’s personal habits and edu cational level. Many employers indi cated that the best way to train the poorly educated rural youth in labour-intensive factories is by im plementing highly restrictive rule and military exercises. As was to be expected, the migrant workers told a different tale. Many were particularly angered by the ex cessive and extreme restrictions im posed on them. They accused the em ployers of never showing any respect and trust towards workers. One worker told us, ‘What is really unfair is that the managers do not believe us when we are really sick. They treat us as though we are all liars even when some of us almost fainted at work.’ Another worker said, ‘The supervisors are always rude and bad tempered. Their only concern is about the pro ductivity and they never care about what we want.’ The workers made no bones about the fact that the most difficult thing about working in the enterprise was the detailed and un fair rules, regulations and fines, which were construed as being to make them feel inferior and subordi nate. When confronted by the criticisms about their despotic management approaches, most employers felt that they had been misunderstood. One of them stated, ‘It was not fair that the press also attacked us for exploiting workers in China. We are not ex ploiters, but producers. We are ex ploited by the international markets, these are the real exploiters.’ Many employers interviewed shared this view. They tended to defend them selves by pointing out that discipli nary measures were always counter balanced by an appropriate use of in centive programmes to induce work ers to be compliant towards rules and increased productivity. They argued that contrary to the bad press they frequently received, they had imple

mented ‘good, sensible systems of re wards and fringe benefits’ that in cluded insurance, subsidized accom modation and meals, organized recreation and social activities, and medical benefits. Some felt that au thoritarianism often went hand in hand with paternalism and could not see anything wrong with it, particu larly when dealing with workers in a Chinese cultural milieu in which such practices should be regarded as goodwill. Despite what the scholarly literature says about ‘trust’ as a factor in the management of Chinese enter prises, it is clear from this study that many employers need to work more on this dimension by providing more benefits, and by displaying more re spect and creating a more friendly

'Becoming ‘Other’ is an experience known to tens

o f millions o f overseas Chinese around the globe and over the centuries’

work environment. They also need to acknowledge the rural, ‘cultural’, background of their workers. The employers complained about the above difficulties, but they never theless admitted that most of the mi grants were bright, kind-hearted, and not always malicious. They also appreciated the way workers really put their backs to the wheel. The problems were blamed on two points. One was to the failure of education in rural China, which completely ig nores moral education (such as the inculcation of honesty, respect, and hard work) and the lack of basic voca tional skill training in the curricu lum. The narrowly defined national curriculum which is designed only to qualify pupils for university entrance examinations had left the majority of rural youth with little preparation to be able to adjust to working and liv ing independently. The second cul prit was a misunderstanding about the issue of cultural affinity current among the employers. What sur prised the overseas Chinese employ ers most was that such an assump tion of cultural affinity in many cases was no longer valid in their South China operations. Many also admit ted they were surprised by the nu merous problems that had emerged in industrial relations. Despite their dislike of the authori tarian and regimented nature of their enterprises, the migrant workers we interviewed admitted the merits of

the strict workplace discipline. One of them said that she felt she had learned more, while another suggest ed she came to appreciate good work practices only when she found herself working in a less ordered environ ment. Yet another decided that disci pline had helped her to develop bet ter skills and her colleague noted that discipline actually provided her with a better work routine.

Conclusions In many ways massive rural labour migration in China since the 1980s has become part and parcel of an an cient saga. The departure of millions and ‘becoming ‘Other’ is an experi ence known to tens of millions of overseas Chinese around the globe and over the centuries’ who have stepped across the borders that de fined their identities to brave a life in an unknown realm. Back in the late 19th century when many young peas ant boys migrated to Southeast Asia from their home villages in Guang dong and Fujian, they probably had the habits and the mentality of peas ants, very similar to the migrant workers today. And yet a century later, the descendants of the early im migrants have become capitalist en trepreneurs coming back to South China to operate export-oriented fac tories. The phenomenon of massive migrant rural youth in overseas Chi nese enterprises has made this an cient saga more mythical, not only because the two groups are identified as emigrants in an unknown land, but also because they both claim to share a similar culture and linguistic background, which were assumed to be an advantage to them both in real izing their dreams of economic profit in South China. The conflicts and misunderstandings created on this basis of their ‘shared’ cultural affinity and different expectations have con tributed to many managementlabour problems in the enterprises. This paper has explored some of the basic fabric of the complicated rela tionships between migrant workers and overseas Chinese employers. The study was unable to verify systemati cally whether or not these were com mon occurrences, but at least it has managed to represent the stories from the sides of both employers and workers. It is hoped that through the balanced analysis of the perception and experiences of the both parties involved, labour relations in overseas Chinese enterprises will be able to be better understood. ■

Dr Cen H uang was a research fellow at the HAS between November 1997 and January 2000. She is currently the Director o f the International Programs and Partnerships, International Center at the University o f Calgary. E-mail: cenhuang@hotmail.com

February 2 0 0 0 • has n e w s l e t t e r n ? 2 1 • I p

EAST 1 9>- 2 1

AUGUST,

BUFFALO,

ASIA

1999

UNITED

STATES

AMERICA

Turning Points in Historical Thinking ‘In recent years,’ Georg Iggers, an internationally recognized authority on the study o f historiography, remarked in his keynote speech at the conference on ‘Turning Points in His torical Thinking: A Comparative Perspective’, ‘there have been increasing attempts at comparative history and hardly any at comparative historiography.’ But a sound approach to com parative history, Iggers stated, required ‘a reorientation in the ways in which historians approached history.’ His comments were agreed with by most participants at the conference, held in August 1999 at State University o f New York at Buffalo, where Iggers served over twenty years as both professor and distinguished professor o f history. ■ By Q. E D WA R D W A N G

he theme of the conference, as stated JL by its organizers, ‘is to identify turning points in historical thinking in world cultures, with a focus on Chinese and Euro/American historical traditions.’ As a working concept, the so-called ‘turning point’ is defined as ‘a fundamental change in one’s perception of the past that oc curs in a historical time and has a farreaching influence in the later period.’ Such ‘turning points’ should lead to the rise of new schools in historical writing and new philosophies of his tory, hence contributing to a new form of historical thinking that (re)shapcs one's vision of the past, the present, and the future. This new his torical thinking can exert its influence within its own culture, or without, having an international, cross-cultur al impact. Centring on its theme, the confer ence was designed to tackle three tasks: t) describing turning points in historical events in different cultures; I

2) comparing and contrasting the oc currences of the turning points in var ious cultures from a global perspec tive; and 3) identifying cross-cultural influences in making changes of his toriography and historical thinking. In Chinese historical culture, for ex ample, there were three readily identi fiable ‘turning points’ that occurred during the Qin-Han period (3rd centu ry BCE - 3rd century CE), the Song Dy nasty (to* and 13th centuries), and the 19th and the 20th centuries, respective ly. These ‘turning points’ divided Chi nese history, at least in regard to its cultural development, into three major periods, comparable to the well-known tripartite scheme [an cient, medieval, and modern) in Euro pean history. It is also possible to draw a similar conclusion by looking at other cultures, in which ‘turning points’ of the similar magnitude could also be identified in the course o f historical movement. But prior to the worldwide expansion of capital ism, these ‘turning points’ were gen erated for different reasons, and the differences make comparative study a worthwhile endeavour. In modem

times, by contrast, ideologies such as nationalism, Marxism, and liberalism have often had a cross-cultural im pact, resulting in a more complicated and hence a more colourful outcome of the change of historical thinking. As the conference was aimed at ad dressing major changes in historical writing and thinking from a crosscultural perspective, experts on both Chinese and Western historiographi cal traditions attended. To enrich the mixture even more, the organizers also invited scholars specializing on historiographies of other cultures to join the discussion. This cross-cultur al intention, was also manifested in its programme which was divided into six panels according to chronology and each panel mixed historians from different fields, enabling them to ex change ideas among themselves and with the chair and the commentator, who, coming from yet another field, could add spice to the variety of the panel. Such international co-operation was demonstrated on all the panels. When Benjamin Elman (UCLA), for in stance, posited a ‘fourth turning point’ in the development of Chinese historical thinking that occured dur ing the 27* and the 18th centuries, Achim Mittag, a German China schol ar and a former HAS fellow, modified Elman’s thesis by offering a broader, hence a global view of the change. In commenting on their papers, ]örn Rüsen, a noted historical theorist of Kulturwissenschaftes Institut of Essen, Germany, shared his thoughts on 'multiple modernities,’ using East Asia as a prime example.

SEPTEMBER PRAGUE,

International exchange, of course, does not mean that everyone shares the same view. In discussing the post modern challenge to history, Keith Windschuttle, an Australian author of the well-circulated book The Kill mg of History, attacked, as was only to be expected, the theoretical underpin ning of post-modernism. His criti cism was shared by Zhilian Zhang of Peking University, who basically viewed the post-modern phenomena as products of an ‘unhealthy’ develop ment of Western capitalism. But Richard Vann, a long-time editor of the History and Theory and Arif Dirlik (Duke University) defended the oppo site point of view. As Vann cited many examples from recent developments in Euro-American historical writings to support his sympathetic view, Dir lik, an expert on modem China, dis cussed possible alternatives to ap proaching the relationship between post-modernism and history. While it generated more questions than answers, the conference offered an ‘excellent opportunity,’ as one par ticipant put it for scholars of different cultural and intellectual backgrounds to exchange and discuss ideas con cerning the issues of historical study. This kind of exchange, as summarized by Ying-shih Yu, an acclaimed Chi nese intellectual historian from Princeton University, would help the work of the scholars in the Chinese study field most directly. Echoing Ig gers’ observation in his keynote speech, Yu, who gave the concluding remarks at the end o f the conference, stated that there was an urgent need to overcome a ‘self-imposed Oriental

ism’ that pitted China against the West in a dichotomy, failing to ac knowledge the specificities o f both traditions, let alone adopting a broad, cross-cultural approach to compara tive historiography. Realizing the need for changing the ways historians study history, therefore, may well be one of most important outcomes the conference has reached. Funded mainly through the Chiang Ching-kuo Foundation in Tai wan, the conference was co-sponsored by the International Project on Chi nese and Comparative Historiogra phy based at City University o f New York (cf HAS Newsletter No. 16, p. 30) the International Commission for the History and Theory of Historiography (of which Iggers is president), and the East Asian Studies Program at SUNY Buffalo. ■

The papers given at the conference are now being revised for publication. Anyone interested should contact: Q. Edward Wang wangq@rowan.edu, Georg Iggers iggers@acsu.buffalo.edu, o r Thomas Lee

thomashcl@hotmail.com for more information. Q. Edward Wang. The author is one o f the

organizers o f the conference and chair o f the History Department at Rowan University, New Jersey, United States. He would like to thank Dr Thomas Burkman, the director of East Asian Studies Program at SUNY Buffalo, for helping organize the conference.

1999

CZECH

REPUBLIC

Fifth CHIME Conference Music in

cites,music in villages

In the study o f Chinese and East Asian music, urban genres are more widely promoted and more thoroughly studied than their rural counterparts. The fifth annual CHIME conference, which took place in September 1999 at the Academy o f Music in Prague, focused on musical contrasts between villages and cities in China and East Asia. ■

Liu Fang played the pipasolo tnTan D un’s 'Ghost Opera’ at the recent CHIME meeting in Prague 3 O • h a s n e w s l e t t e r n s 2 1 • February zooo

By F R A N K K O U W E N H O V E N

1" udging from the many I paper presentations, it ) is in the very interac tion between urban and rural society that Asia’s musical culture is - and has always been - at its most vibrant. A major concern is that rural genres consistently receive too little atten tion from scholars. One reason is that travelling and research in Asian rural areas can be a rather demanding expe rience. Another reason is that, for a long time the existence o f numerous

rural music traditions has simply es caped the attention o f most (Western) scholars. Many kinds o f music genres in China (notably ritual music) have been revived only in recent years. So far they have barely been described or explored. In this respect, every new CHIME meeting has led to surprises and new discoveries. CHIME, the European Foundation for Chinese Music Research, now in its ninth year o f existence, has rapidly established its position as an essential platform for scholars and students o f Chinese and East Asian music and musical ritual. The eighty-odd partic

ipants who met from 15 to 19 Septem ber in Prague for the Fifth CHIME conference came not only from obvi ous backgrounds like musicology, sinology, and anthropology, but also included art historians, archaeolo gists, and journalists. Speakers exam ined a wide range o f genres, from Buddhist ritual to forms of Asian local opera, story-telling, folk songs, and pop. Clearly, the lines between ‘rural’ and ‘urban’ cannot and should not be drawn too sharply. Many new hybrid forms of music began life in cities, from Peking Opera to pop and sym phonic music, but the ongoing ur banization of rural areas in Asia is anything but a one-way process. There is a continuous interplay be tween rural and urban music tradi tions. Pop musicians borrow elements from Buddhist chants or folk music

For a re p o rt o f th e ESF A s ia C o m m itte e W o rk s h o p 'C h in e s e T ra n s n a tio n a l E nterprises a nd E n tre p re n e u rs h ip ' see p. 58

E AS T A S I A sultant social fluidity and cultural hybridity. The Chinese immigration into the city was always strong (for mally allowed since 1793), and fre quent social and marriage relations between the various population groups were notable. There has emerged a specific group of ‘Maca nese people’, with a unique style, At midnight on 19 December 1999, the old Portuguese-Chi- identity and a local Creole language nese city o f Macau has reverted to Chinese sovereignty, 44.Z (Batalha 1974), and they have been years after its founding. Except for some o f its inhabitants (no the mainstay of Macau society. This situation of contact and min tably the five percent Portuguese, other Europeans and nonChinese), no one seemed to be overly concerned with this gling, brought about by economic change o f status. There was no public debate either in the local interests, did not mean that Macau press or in the international media about the implications o f was always a peaceful place, or was this change-over. This was in marked contrast to the clamour without a strong social hierarchy of and anxiety in Hong Kong in the last few years preceding its classes and ethnic groups and great hand-over a few years ago. Macau, one o f the oldest and most differences in power, wealth, and intriguing ‘colonial territories’ o f the West therefore raises privilege. The contrary was true. several questions. Why is it different? How has it prepared for There was no question about the the return to China, and what will be its legacy and future as a Portuguese and later Macanese elite being the masters. But comparative specific urban culture? ly speaking, Macanese history has been marked neither by great rebel Ama, at the southern end, and there By J. A B B I N K lions and violent struggles among were fishermen active in the bay its inhabitants, nor by acrimonious, area. Since that date, Macau saw a re s an industrial implacable conflict with the Chinese markable development into a fastand trading cenon the mainland. The sovereignty growing entrepot city, with great , tre, Macau (at pre question was not pushed to a con ups and downs in its fortunes. There sent a city of some frontation either - the Chinese never is also a unique urban quality that 460,000 people) has, at ceded to the Portuguese in this mat has enveloped it in the course of cen least in the past century, ter, and the Portuguese did not insist turies, confirmed by its proud resi always stood in the shadow of Hong on a full and unambiguous legal sta dents and experienced by many visi Kong, located opposite Macau on the tus in terms of a treaty. The history tors as an elusive combination of other side of the Pearl River Delta. of Macau has also been characterized faded colonialism, isolation or inde Macau’s history, however, is more by a strong sense of independence pendence, (past) grandeur and eco ancient and diverse. The fact that its towards both China and Portugal. nomic wealth, and a specific identity status as a Portuguese territory was constructed from the mixture of not forced upon China after a mili Interm ediary Portuguese-European, Asian, and tary defeat (as was Hong Kong in the Historically, Macau can be consid Chinese elements. (The best evoca treaty after the Opium Wars), may ered one of those urban precursors of tion of this is given in Porter 1996, have contributed to a pattern of m u the ‘global economy’ as we now who writes a sensitive, historically tual tolerance and of gradual rap know it. Alongside Goa and Malacca, grounded portrait of Macau’s prochement with China. it was a pioneer mercantile settle uniqueness). Indeed, while geogra Macau (in Chinese: Aomen) was ment of the Portuguese on the trade phically and culturally a meeting founded in 1557 by Portuguese sea route from Europe to the East and place o f‘two different worlds’, sym farers, traders, and soldiers, with the Far East (some of the main items bolized by the ‘Barrier Gate’ with permission of the local Chinese gov were silk, silver, cloth, brocades, which the Chinese had sealed off the ernor in Xiangshan. The rocky pearls, amber, porcelain, spices, and city from the mainland, Macau has peninsula was virtually uninhabit agricultural products) and became a been just as much characterized by a ed, but there was a Chinese temple very important entrepot in the peri mingling of those worlds, and by a re dedicated to the goddess Mazu, or od from the 1560s to the 1640s, after which a decline set in (Boxer 1974). The wealth it acquired then has been ing contributions. Hopefully, con fer their commercial songs, but these the basis for its expansion and its at tacts with Central European scholar songs then often find their way back traction ever since. The city experi ship can be extended at future CHIME to the countryside, where they are im enced periods of boom and severe de meetings. The hosting organization, mediately ‘recycled’ in folk music cline, accompanied by a certain sense the CCK International Sinological repertoires, a point raised by Adam of social and cultural isolation, but it Center at Charles University, put on a Yuet Chau in his paper on folk music never went out of business. It re programme of a number of fine con in Shaanbei. The interaction is rich tained a vital function in the emerg certs to bolster participants’ spirits. and complex and cannot be captured ing global economy, opening up new in simple models, as was also clearly The Moravian Philharmonic, led by vistas for personal advancement, and illustrated in contributions by Daniel Wang Jin, played new music from stimulating production and indus China, and there were concerts by the Ferguson (Cantonese opera), Tantry in China and Japan. In an eco Beijing Buddhists, Han Tang Yuefu Hwee San and Tian Qing (Buddhist nomic sense, Macau always kept a (Taiwan), and numerous fine solo music), Mercedes Dujunco (Viet role as an intermediary between East players from Mongolia, Korea, Japan namese opera), Nathan Hesselink and West, and between the main and China. Dr Lucie Olivova and her (Korean percussion music) to men land and the coast. colleagues in Prague are to be con tion only some. In the 18th and 19th centuries, gratulated on their wonderful work In Asia, music is travelling ever Macau revived its role and capitalized in making this meeting possible. ■ more easily thanks to an increased so on the emerging trade with the Chi cial mobility and because of new nese hinterland, which induced many modes of communication. The regional Southern Chinese traders to greater mobility does not depend on choose Macau as their headquarters. economic factors alone, but also on Throughout its history, the city creat Frank Kouwenhoven, Secretary o f such aspects as natural disasters ed new opportunities for the main the Board o f the CHIME Foundation, (floods, droughts, famines), which land Chinese, as witnessed by the and independent scholar o f Chinese music. drive thousands of people away from steady immigration to the town. (In CHIME, European Foundation for Chinese their native areas. The ebb and flow of the late 19th century this was driven Music Research musical cross-fertilization in Third largely by rural poverty and destitu P.O. Box 11092, World regions may well be partly re tion in China.) The city also expanded lated to the fluctuating water levels of 2301 EB Leiden, its role in the trade of new products The Netherlands. the big rivers. Preconceived ideas like tea, (illegal) opium, and contract Visiting address Chime library: about contrasts between urban literalabourers or ‘coolies’ (see below). In Gerecht I, 2 3 1 1 TC Leiden cy/education and rural illiteracy were the late 19th century, nevertheless, Phone: +31-71-5133.974 / 5133.123 called into question by Kathy Lowry Hong Kong grew in importance at the and other presenters. Czech and Pol Fax:+ 31-7 1-5 123.183 expense of Macau. E-mail: chime@wxs.nl ish scholars offered various interest

The Legacy of Macau

In a cultural sense also, Macau was also a precursor of a global society, a microcosm of globalized culture be fore its time. For instance, it was a focal point of early religious, technoscientific, and cultural contact and exchange between the West and China (and Japan). The Jesuits set tled in and around Macau (from 1561) to prepare for the Christianiza tion of China (largely unsuccessful), and in the early nineteenth-century Protestants did the same. When we as late 20th-century so cial researchers and historians are more than ever interested in the in terface of the local and the global, Macau is an intriguing early example to explore this juxtaposition: a place of an admixture of peoples, lan guages, and ethno-cultural styles. This mix is also evident in the fasci nating design and architecture of the city, with is plethora of churches, monasteries, forts, Chinese temples, and gardens. It is in the interstices between the different styles - which, however, do not exactly resemble any of those found in the Portuguese or Chinese ‘motherland’ - that the space for imagination and romantic imagery of Macau, as urban experi ence and lifestyle, could emerge.

‘C oolies’ But an inextricable aspect of‘glob alization’, especially in its early ex pansionist forms, is force, violence, contestation: the seamy side of his tory. Here, Macau was no exception: the Portuguese were not particularly benevolent masters to their Chinese and other subjects; most of the city was built on African slave labour, and after the decline of the com modities trade and the rise of Hong Kong in the second half of the 19th century, it became a centre for the trade in human labour, in ‘coolies’, virtual slaves, who were recruited by, or offered themselves unknow ingly to, Macau traders for inden ture. They came mostly from the mainland. Many girls were also sent to Macau and other places by Chi nese families and became domestic workers and prostitutes. In the early decades of the 20th century, Macau was one of the ‘cities of sin’ (De Leeuw 1934), a seamy place rife with gambling, drags, crime, prostitu tion, contraband, and racketeering. Macau gambling syndicates enjoyed the proverbial bad reputation. Many literary evocations of this dark side of Macau exist (Kessel 1957). Gam bling still exists as one of the central pillars of the Macanese economy the city does not and cannot deny its past. There are eight big casinos, fre quented by hundreds of thousands of mostly Asian visitors, but they are now ‘orderly businesses’. In the t99os Macau entered anoth er new phase in its history. While still a mercantile and industrial city, more strongly than ever connected to the modernizing Chinese hinter land, it is now concentrating on en tertainment and tourism, which at present generates about 45% of its GDP. In 1996, a new international airport was opened on the nearby is land ofTaipa, connected to Macau by a large new bridge. As a result of the successful reori entation of its economy, the social life and character of the city is changing significantly. The old, elu

For on in te rvie w w ith Prof. V in c e n t Shen, fo rm e r h o ld e r o f th e E uropeon C h o ir o f C hin ese S tud ie s, see p. 53

sive urban atmosphere - including the architecture of the past - is greatly threatened. Indeed, the image of Macau’s past as a unique city - not Chinese, not Portuguese, not classically ‘colonial’, but all these together - is cultivated in the new tourist discourse; but paradoxically, in this period of social change and of frantic construction of a new, hard urban landscape (high-rise hotels, gambling palaces, and office blocks), its material signs are being endan gered by demolition and decay. This is one of the challenges that the new Macau has to deal with under Chi nese sovereignty. In his book Jonathan Porter cites a Macanese an tique dealer, who, shortly after the 1985 announcement that China would regain sovereignty over Macau, started packing his things to go to Portugal, saying that Macau would hardly survive two years. This may be too pessimistic; but question marks do indeed remain. Will Macau recede into its Chinese background? Is a Macanese identity - culture, social structure, language - viable in the long run? Will the Euro-Portuguese heritage vanish or be absorbed into a broader Chinese urban culture? Research into many aspects of this fascinating and dan gerous place remains to be done. In light of the above questions, it would be highly satisfying to see in quiries into: the social structure and identity of the Macanese elite; possi ble conflicts between the different groups that form Macau society; the changing Chinese views of Macau throughout history; Macanese folk religion and the changing role of the many public festivals of the city as markers of identity and community. Whatever changes will occur now that the Barrier Gate has been de molished on 20 December 1999, Macau’s mysteries will not disappear from one day to the next. ■

References - Batalha, G.N. Lingua de Macau M acau: Im prensa N acional, 1974 - Boxer, C.R. Macao as a Religious and Commercial Entrepdt in the 16th and 17th Centuries In Acta Asiatica 26: 64-90,1974 - Kessel, J. Hong Kong et Macao Paris: G allim ard, 1957 - Leeuw, H. de Cities o f Sin London: D ouglas, 1934 - Porter, J. Macau: The imaginary city Boulder: W estview Press, 1996

Dr J.Abbink is an anthropologist and a senior researcher at the African Studies Centre, at Leiden University. E-mail: abbink@fsw.leidenuniv.nl

F e b ru a ry 2000 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r

?21 •

EAST

ASIA

Written Sources on Yao Religion in the Bavarian State Library

Two passes g u a n , obstructing a ch ild ’s fa te because o f a n unfa vo u ra b le birth horoscope, fr o m a Yao divination m a n u a l (Bavarian State Library, Cod.sin. 346)

Over the last few years, the Department for Rare Manuscripts o f the Bavarian State Library has acquired a collection o f more than io o o manuscripts pertaining to the Yao, an ethnic group living in China and the states on its southern border. To make the manuscripts known to the public and available for further research, a Yao Project was launched in 1995 by the depart ments for Chinese Studies o f the Universities o f Munich and Hamburg and the Bavarian State Library. The project is sup ported by the German Research Association (Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft) and the Foundation o f Friends and Patrons o f Munich University (Miinchener Universitatsgesellschaft. An exhibition o f selected manuscripts rounded off the project in November 1999. SHING MÜLLER, LUCIA OBI, A N D UTA WEIGELT

■ By

f a Y he Yao collection I of the State LiJ L brary consists of more than 1000 m anu scripts. The earliest date back to the beginning of the 18th century, the latest to the 1980s. They originate from Thailand, Laos, Vietnam, Myanmar, and the southern provinces o f China Guang dong, Guangxi, Guizhou, and Yun nan. The manuscripts are w ritten in Chinese characters, most o f them being religious manuals. Canonical and liturgical texts for initiations, communal sacrifices, and funerals show clear relations to Chinese Daoism. Looked at along w ith textbooks for children, mythical-epical songs, manuals for divination and thera peutical treatm ent by exorcism as well as various other documents they give an insight into the social and re ligious life of the different Yao groups. The research team of the Yao Pro ject, headed by Prof M. Friedrich (University of Hamburg) and Prof Th. O. Höllmann, consists o f X. Götzfried, S. Müller, and L. Obi (all Munich University). One of the main aims o f the project is to make the Yao manuscripts accessible and to con tribute to a methodological approach of using w ritten sources as a basis for research into Yao religion. A database noting date, regional origin, and per sons mentioned has been produced in order to classify and analyse the manuscripts. The results will be published in Germany as a catalogue in the series Index to Oriental Manu scripts (Verzeichnis der Orientalischen Handschriften in Deutschland). As the manuscripts cover a period o f over 260 years and a wide geo graphical range, it is not only possi ble to find information on related families, clans, and ethnic groups but also on the relationship o f Yao religious culture to Chinese local popular cults and Daoism. The histo ry o f Chinese Daoist schools among different Yao groups and the devel opm ent of their liturgies and local cults can be revealed using exem plary manuscripts which were exam ined and annotated, and which will be published.

Priests Manuscripts o f the Pan-Yao (Iumian-speaking) and the LandianYao (Jingmen-speaking) are the two largest groups in the collection. While the Pan-Yao seem to have only one w ritten tradition main tained by so-called Shigong priests, the Landian-Yao have an additional textual tradition under the auspices o f Daogong priests. Usually Landian Daogong and Shigong priests operate in the same communities. Daogong are responsible for communal sacri fices and funeral rites, and have a higher social status. They are also higher-ranking w ithin the Daoist hierarchy than the Shigong who are responsible for m inor rites (xiaofa ), such as exorcisms and the healing of individuals. The D aogong texts, con sisting o f scriptures jin g , liturgical texts keyi for Jiao and Zhai rituals, and esoteric instructions (miyu), are more orthodox and more similar to the Chinese tradition as represented in the Daoist Canon Daozang. The famous ‘Scripture of the Salva tion of M ankind’, Durenjing, the first text in the Daozang, of which the col lection contains several copies, was obviously used in most o f the Daogong rituals, as it often is mentioned in other liturgical texts. The tradi tional Chinese Jiao liturgy is repre sented in ‘Jiao for Morning, Noon, and Evening’, Sanshi ke, and ‘Notifi cation ritual to the Big Dipper’, Gaodou ke. There are rituals similar to classical Chinese Zhai such as ‘Three Grottoes Retreat’, Sandongzhai ke, and the ‘Notification Liturgy’, Guan’gao ke, but also versions not known from the Chinese context like ‘Calling the Soul Liturgy’, Nanling ke Miyu, like the ‘Instructions to Puri fying Jiao Rituals’, Qingjiao miyu, to be used exclusively by ordained priests contain instructions on how to conduct special rituals and how to communicate with the other world. Shigong texts, sometimes trans m itted orally and in seven-syllable rhym ing verses, are more related to local popular traditions. The ‘Demon Foot Liturgy', Guijiao ke, is a major text sung in thanksgiving rit uals to the mythical ancestor, King Pan, while the ‘Flowing Radiance Liturgy’, Chuan’guang ke, is used during initiations.

3 2 • iias newsletter T9S21 • February

2000

The Pan-Yao Shigong texts are differ ent again from Landian-Yao Shigong texts. They are concerned with com munal as well as xiaofa rituals for indi vidual purposes and are a mixture of prose and rhyming passages. They comprise charms, incantations, and choreographies as well as parts of tra ditional Chinese liturgies. They are called ‘The Book of Hell’, Diyu shu, ‘The Book of Calling Heaven’, Jiaotian shu, and ‘The Book for Dealing with Demons’, Shegui shu. The ‘Book for Opening the Sacred Area’, Kaitan shu, is a liturgy used especially in Pan-Yao initiations. Elaborate epic songs in honour of King Pan, Tanwang ge, are used in the thanksgiving rituals of Iumian-speaking groups. The ‘Charter of King Ping’, Pinghuang quandie, and ‘The Placard for Crossing the Mountains’, Guoshan bang, tell of the origin of mankind, the Yao, and their history up to the pre sent. These highly esteemed docu ments are said to have been bestowed on the Yao by the Song emperor in the year of 1260, when they were granted an exemption from forced labour and taxes and permitted to move freely in the mountain regions.

O T ,>rr ? *T

%i u k :-J

•X A- £ *

£ %è i *f ■t u’r ^

f l 3 'I* 5

Ethnic exchange Besides these texts used exclusively by one or the other, there are others used by both as well as by other ethnic groups. These include liturgies for fe male deities like ‘The Meeting in Hon our of Goddess Dowager’, Dimu dahui ke, ‘The Liturgy of the Southern Hall’, Nantang ke, and ‘The Liturgy of the Red Tower’, Honglou banzuo ke. Texts for divination with using coins, Qjangua sbu, geomantical methods, dili, and divination to find suitable mar riage partners, Hepen shu, are also found among various other ethnic groups in southern China. ‘The Book of Nine Classics’,Jiujing shu, ‘Wise Lit erature Enhances Knowledge’, Zengguang xianwen, and ‘Various Charac ters’, Zazi, are textbooks for teaching children Chinese characters and in culcating Confiician ethics. This huge variety of manuscripts in the State Li brary provides a better insight into Yao culture and religion and the im pact of Chinese Daoism and popular cults on these for the first time. The most outstanding manuscripts of this collection along with other ob jects concerning their religious back ground were on display in an exhibi

ft- •“* :>

■' ;s T;

tion in the Bavarian State Library from 4 November to 23 December 1999. The catalogue covering the exhibition con tains short essays describing facets of daily life of this ethnic group. ■ - Thomas O. Höllmann, Michael Friedrich (eds) Botscha/ten an die Goner. Religiose Handschriften der Yao. (AsiatischeForschungen; 138)

Wiesbaden 1999, Harrassowitz. ISBN 3-447-04203-6)’. (Religiose Schriften der Yao, Harrassowitz, DM 78,-). For more information please contact:

Yao-Projekt Institut fur Ostasienkunde Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitat Kaulbachstr. 5 1a D-80539 München, Germany Tel.: +49-89-2180 3633 Fax: +49-89-342 666 E-mail: yao@lrz.uni-muenchen.de Http:\\www.fak 12.unimuenchen.de/sinlprojektelyaoproj.htm or:

Bayerische Staatsbibliothek Ludwigstr. 16 80539 München Http.Wwww.bsb.badw-muenchen.de

2 3 > 2 5 J UNE

1999 L O N D O N , UNI TED KINGDOM

•

Literature & Theory, China & Japan Last June fourteen scholars o f Chinese and Japanese literature came together in London for a workshop to discuss the uses (and possible misuses) o f literary theory in the study o f East Asian literature. The workshop, organized by Michel Hockx o f SOAS and Ivo Smits o f Leiden University, was the first joint venture o f the School for Oriental and African Studies (SOAS) o f London University and the International Institute for Asian Studies (HAS) in Leiden. MICHEL HOCKX A N D IVO SMITS

■ By

T arious new theories have emerged during the past two decades, uprooting traditional forms o f un derstanding literary texts, their function, their readership, and their interpretation. It has often been argued that the majority o f these the ories are but o f limited use to the study of non-Western literatures, as they are based on Western norms and views of literature. Even those theo ries which attem pt to criticize or eradicate Western biases have them selves often been formulated by Western scholars or in Western acad emic contexts. Nevertheless, scholars

throughout the world have been using and discussing these theories. They often do so within the confines o f a specific country or ‘area’. This workshop was set up to provide an opportunity for scholars o f two close ly related, yet often independently studied cultures, China and Japan, to compare their views o f specific theo ries of literature, to discuss the ad vantages and shortcomings o f those theories, and to consider specific dif ficulties related to the East-West di mension. In view o f the growing awareness that a substantial body of contemporary criticism was devel oped on the basis of Western texts, at tention also was paid to East Asian literary concepts and the question of how these may contribute to our thinking about literary theory.

Speakers were asked to focus specifically on their understanding and application o f theories and to il lustrate this with examples from their research. In their preparation, speakers had been asked to consider such questions as: How does a par ticular theory understand the con cept o f ‘literature’? For which litera tures, literary styles, or literary gen res was the theory originally formu lated? Which elements or compo nents o f the theory can be considered the most useful, and which the most useless, for the study o f your sub ject? In what way does your work contribute to the further develop m ent o f the theory? How do (tradi tional) East Asian concepts o f litera ture influence your views o f literary theory? However, if the organizers had started out with the idea o f ‘sam pling’ the workings o f different, crit icism-based approaches to East Asian literatures, then the partici pants were quick to point out that the whole notion of'theory' is Euro centric and m odernist in origin and as a source o f ideas it is often diffi-

For more information on institutes of East Asian Studies, please refer to the Pink Pages

►

E AS T A S I A

The Korean Model of Coup Two coups that took place in Korea centuries apart are com pared here; Tnjo panjong’o f March 13, 1623, and the ‘May 16 Military Revolution’ in 1961. KarpChon Kim demonstrates that there are three meaningful similarities to be found. By DR K A R P C H O N K I M

cult to apply to East Asian texts just like that. It is good to remember that Europe is just as tradition-specific as East Asia. In fact, some of the presen tations showed how sometimes case studies of such theoretical applica tions can become studies in cultural behaviour, admirably demonstrated in the contribution on Julia Kristeva’s Des chinoises. In short, the workshop, bom partly out of a prag matic interest, quickly moved on to cover fundamental questions. The question of whether there is such a thing as ‘theory’ in the study of literature and, if there is, whether it is at all objective (can one speak of meta-theory?), has been asked be fore, but is especially pertinent to those who study Asian literatures from the position of a scholar rooted in Western academic traditions. One of the speakers suggested that the main question should be: Do texts have an intrinsic value? Seen in that light, it would be a mistake to think that there is only one approach: in terdisciplinarity is the answer. Yet, it is possible to suggest that literary texts are specific to a cultural gram mar, which can be a large grammar of several cultures. Texts with in trinsic values function within the larger grammar; or, as someone sug gested, might work in other gram mars or even challenge the grammar (as opposed to be merely boring or not understood). The age of devoted adherence to a single theoretical approach does in deed seem over. Critical frameworks presented at the workshop were as wide-ranging as the topics ad-

njo panjong or ‘King Injo’s Restor ing Things to Right eousness’, staged on March 13, 1623, during the Chosun Dynasty (1392-1910) was mentioned officially three times by the army officers who had a genuine connection with coup plans in which Park Chung Hee was involved. The first such mention oc curred during an abortive coup which took place when President Syngman Rhee was still in office. In this case, the coup plan was code-named 'panjong from Tnjo panjong’ by Colonel Chong Lae-hyok. It was also referred to twice during the ‘May 16 Military Revolution’ in 1961. Colonel Yu Won-shik had been planning a military coup with Park Chung Hee since the last stage of the Syngman Rhee Government and right after the coup as a member of the Supreme Council’s finance and economic committee was responsi ble for forming a special committee to draw up a five-year plan for eco nomic development. He referred to Tnjo panjong’ twice in the presence

Research Project

of Park Chung Hee, and once even said in front of President Yun Poson: ‘We regard this revolution as Injo panjong.’ This teaches us that Korean army officers, who were members of the most modernized organization in South Korea around that time, had a very precise knowledge of at least some parts of the history of their country and also were conscious of it. We can confirm this point by pointing out several similarities be tween the two coups. Three such similarities are the most meaning ful. First, both King Injo, or as he was then Prince Nungyanggun, and Park Chung Hee assumed the responsibil ity of coup leader right from the early stage of the conspiracies. In the neo-Confucian world view of the Chosun Korean political ac tors, kingship was dependent on the Mandate of Heaven (chontnyong) which was based on the contract be tween a king or emperor and Heav en. Heaven created the universe and the people and gave Its mandate to a king or emperor on condition that he should protect ‘the whole duty of man’ [kangsang), ‘the discipline of the nation’ (kikang), and ‘the liveli hood of the people’ [mtnsaeng)’. To be more precise, ‘kangsang’ means the universal moral principles of Confu cianism and ‘kikang’ is a system of legal order governing a society. If the king failed to comply with the contract, at first Heaven warned him of his mistakes through por tents such as lightening, storms, earthquakes, phenomena related to Mars, comets, and the like. And then,

Participants of the workshop. dressed: canon formation in Japan ese literature, the writings of Lao She, the literary field in modern China and medieval Japan, Julia Kristeva and China, new historicism and Chinese literature, the ‘native place’ ideal in modern Japanese liter ature, the digitization of letter- and character-based systems of inscrip tion, cultural and structural me chanics of classical Japanese litera ture, deconstruction and China, au tobiography and notions of the novel in modern Japanese literature, readings of the Analects, and me dieval Japanese poetic theories. Apart from the organizers, partici pants included the two keynote speakers, Rey Chow (University of California, Irvine and Haruo Shirane (Columbia University), Reiko Abe Auestad (University of Oslo), Daria Berg (University of Durham), Hilary Chung (University of Auckland),

John Cayley (independent scholar), Stephen Dodd (SOAS), Bernard Fuehrer (SOAS), Rein Raud (Univer sity of Helsinki), Haun Saussy (Stan ford University), Michel VieillardBaron (University of Grenoble, Stendhal-3), and Henry Zhao (SOAS). All this diversity nothwithstanding, the workshop generated gratify ing surprise at finding that there were no real boundaries between what was initially perceived as a pos sible dichotomy; China and, rather than versus, Japan, and modern and, rather than versus, pre-modern. Plans are underway to publish the results of the workshop in a book. ■

Dr M ichel Hockx is lecturer at SOAS, E-mail: mh I 7@soas.ac.uk.

Dr Ivo Sm its is lecturer at the Centre for Japanese and Korean Studies, Universiteit Leiden, E-mail: ibsmits@rulletleidenuniv.nl

colonels from the eighth class led by if the king persisted in being blind Kim Chong-pil, however, had no real to the error of his ways, Heaven means by which to take over the gov withdrew Its mandate and bestowed ernment. it on another person (hyokmyong) in Second, the two coups have three his own family or from another fam pillars ofjustification. ily. The former alternative is ‘restor The Confucian cause that was used ing things to righteousness’ (panto justify King Injo’s coup was jong) and the latter is ‘change of sur ‘restoring things to righteousness’ name’ (yoksong). (panjong). This consisted of the three Theoretically, a pre-Confucian components referred to earlier: (1) measure of panjong or ‘restoring restoration of ‘the whole duty of things to righteousness’ is resorted man’ [kangsang), (2) recovery o f ‘the to only by subjects who are widely discipline of the nation’ (kikang), and recognized as authentically moral (3) the stabilization of‘the livelihood Confucianists when the ruling king is judged to have lost his Mandate of of the people’ (minsaeng). These pillars are also to be sought Heaven. As a rule, in a legitimate in the causes of the May 16 coup. panjong the would-be king is not al lowed to take part in the coup per Among the six clauses of'the revolu tionary pledge’, the third pertains sonally but can only be invited to be directly to the category of kangsang the new king by the subjects who and kikang, and the fourth directly to have risen against the incumbent that of minsaeng. The first and fifth king in the direct wake of the suc fall indirectly under those of kikang cessful coup. and mtnsaeng. In the terminology of The Chosun dynasty witnessed the coup group’s official announce two rounds of panjong, i.e. ‘Chungment kikang and mtnsaeng were jong panjong’ or ‘King Chungjong’s Restoring Things to Righteousness’ among the most frequently men tioned important words. in 1506 and the Tnjo panjong’. There Later Park Chung Hee summed up is one important difference between the pledge to achieve the two major the two which should be mentioned. objectives of the ‘May 16 revolution’ The first was a copy-book case of panin terms of kangsang, kikang, and jong because the would-be king did mtnsaeng: ‘building morality and the not himself participate in the coup economy’ or ‘rebuilding our human as a chief leader, but was only select ity and industry’. ed as the new king after it had been Third, the coups have the same accomplished. course of legitimation. Prince NungIn contrast to what happened in yanggun’s coup went through two ‘King Chungjong’s Restoring Things stages of legitimation. At first, it was to Righteousness’, Prince Nung endorsed internally by the queen of yanggun illegitimately played a Inmokdaebi and then, externally, by leading personal role in the coup. He the emperor of Ming China which assembled a group of soldiers for the was then the ‘father country’ of coup by spending his money freely Chosun Korea in its neo-Confucian and took command of them on the world view of'worship of the power appointed day. Accordingly, al ful’ or sadae, as well as being the though Prince Nungyanggun was ‘Central Country’ of the East Asian considered by outsiders to have en ‘World’ system. tered upon a somewhat illegitimate Park Chung Hee’s coup passed kingship, he was still thought to be through two stages of legitimation the largest stockholder in the coup I as well. At first it was virtually en project by the coup officials. This participation gave him such a dorsed by then President Yun Po-sun when he said ‘It’s a fait accompli’, in strong foundation for royal authori Park Chung Hee’s presence on May ty in contrast to King Chungjong in 16. Though he did not recognize the that he could take initiative in all military government until the resig the discussions about political refor nation of Chang Myon’s cabinet, he mation and other critical issues and, did not agree with the commander in particular, keep a firm grip on his of the US armed forces in Korea sovereignty even after his surrender about the suppression of the revolt to Ching China. But on the other hand, because of the illegitimacy of either. Next, on May 18 the US, the centre country in the contemporary his participation, he and his court, in world system, finally recognized the turn, could not escape being the ob military government as the situa ject of another attempt at panjong or tion had turned to Park’s advantage. coup. In conclusion, this comparison Kim Chong-pil, Park Chung Hee’s pertinently allows us to glance at a collaborator, once said at a press con Korean way of legitimizing and jus ference directly after the coup that tifying political power. A coup Park Chung Hee had joined the coup which is initially carried out and group in March 1961 as if he were the justified by a small group without coup’s instigator and that Park had the prior consent of the super power been invited to be a leader by him in the world system, and later for and other officers from the eighth mally endorsed by the super power, class of the military academy. This became the model of the coups in version runs contrary to the facts. Korea following the model o f ‘King Park Chung Hee, like King Injo, Chungjong’s Restoring Things to was the largest stockholder in the Righteousness’ in 1506. It repeated 1961 coup right from its earliest in itself in the coup ofChun Doo Hwan ception. This seems to be one of the and Roh Tae Woo on December 12, reasons why he was never confront 1979. m ed by a competitor who directly challenged him in his inner group before his assassination in 1979. In the coup only Park Chung Hee was Dr KarpChon Kim is a Visiting Exchange responsible for all the units which Fellow (Korea Research Foundation) at the entered Seoul, because all of their HAS. He can be reached at: commanders were the colonels from E-mail: kkim@rullet.leidenuniv.nl the fifth class. The lieutenantFebruary 2000 •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r n ?21

•

NEW

PUBLICATIONS

IN A S I A N

New HAS Book Series After having jointly published several books with Curzon over the past few years, the IIAS has now started a new series with this British publisher. At least five books in these series will be brought out in the course o f this year. The first one to appear will be ‘Nomads in the Sedentary World’, edited by Anatoly M. Khazanov and André Wink (both professors at the University o f Wisconsin-Madison). It is the outcome o f an IIAS-NIAS semi nar with the same title that was held in Leiden in July 1998. ■ By CATHELI JNE VEENKAMP

B H l rr-f

he book by Khaz.inov and Wink. JL which is schedA uled to appear in spring 2000 in both hard- and paperback, draws the issue of the nomads in as wide a re gion as Eurasia and North Africa up to a new level. The problem of the re lationship between pastoral nomads and the sedentary world has been ad dressed by numerous scholars in a va riety of ways. But its reverse, the im pact of nomads on this sedentary world, and more particularly their role in it, while not failing to draw general attention, has to a large ex tent been the subject of speculation rather than research. It is the latter question that this book seeks to ad dress by studying this issue within a systematic and comparative frame work. New Research in Asian Studies is the second volume to appear in spring 2000. The volume has been edited by ÊÊSBÊ

Prof Frans Hiisken, (Nijmegen Uni versity, IIAS president] and Dick van der Meij (Leiden University], and pre sents a wide variety of articles in the broad field of Asian Studies. The con tributions stem from research that has been carried out by scholars who are or have been affiliated to the IIAS. As such the book reflects the rich di versity within this area of research, leading the reader along conspicuous topics such as the Central-European Jewish community in Shanghai from 1937 tot 1945 on the one hand and the complex linguistics of the Maithili (Nepal] verb on the other. The series will feature three more books in summer 2000, and more may follow in Autumn or Winter. Southern Africa and Regional Co-operation in the Indian Ocean Rim is the long-expected volume, edited by Gwyn Campbell who is now attached to the Centre for North-South Interaction at the Uni versity of Avignon and who used to be an IIAS senior visiting fellow. The vol ume examines past and present eco nomic links between the countries of

Southern Africa and other regions bordering the Indian Ocean. In par ticular, it traces the historical back ground to and examines the prospects for the IOR, the Indian Ocean Rim As sociation for Regional Co-operation formally established in March 1997. The contributors to the volume outline historical aspects of economic ties across the Indian Ocean and pre vious attempts on a sub-regional basis to promote economic co-opera tion. This forms the context for an analysis of the IOR initiative that has resulted largely from two related fac-

OP MW In t hi s special b oo k section reviewers and acade mic publishers p r e s e n t a n d discuss n e w p u b l i c a t i o n s in Asi an S t u d i e s .

STUDIES

tors: the abortion of Apartheid and the fall of the Soviet empire, coupled with the rapid advance of globaliza tion. The ideological constraints to the establishment of political and economic links across the Indian Ocean were thus removed and the policies of protectionism were dis missed under the pressure of global ization. One major consequence of this has been the promotion, notably by South Africa, India, Mauritius, and Australia, of the concept of a regional economic grouping, establishing the Indian Ocean as a region of potential economic power. Images o f the ‘M odem W oman in Asia: Global Media/Local Meanings also coming out in hardback and paper back, is a volume edited by Shoma Munshi, former IIAS research fellow within the research programme ‘Changing Lifestyles in Asia’. It is the first major study to examine the rela tionships between gender, media and modernity in Asian contexts. In ex amining these links, the contributors analyse some of the relationships be tween gender and the fluctuations of power by concentrating on the reach of global media and its (re]workings in local contexts. The book raises a se ries of questions about the represen tations of ‘modern’ Asian feminini ties in global and local media imagery and their interpretations. It centers on a number of core themes, ques tioning the validity of transposing Euro-American theorizing on these issues. It seeks to right this balance by locating the ‘modern’Asian feminine subject within the framework of so

cial relations - material, economic and interpersonal - which are in a larger perspective historical. Law and Development in East and Southeast Asia is another strongly comparative volume in this series. It results from an IIAS workshop that took place in Leiden in January 1998. This workshop took place shortly after the onset of the Asian crisis. Many analysts have argued that a lack of legal regulation and the ab sence of transparency were major fac tors in triggering off the crisis. As a result, international financial insti tutions have made further financial support for individual Asian econo mies dependent on an improvement of the legal framework in which busi ness operates. Many of the articles allow a conclusion to be drawn about how successful the current reforms will be and which features of the Asian approach to commercial law will be resistant to reform pressures.

For more information about the IIAS publications please contact:

Elzeline van der Hoek, E-mail: evanderhoek@rullet.leidenuniv.nl For the new Curzon Series you may contact:

Curzon Press Ltd. 15 The Quadrant Richmond, Surrey TW9 I BP United Kingdom Tel.:+44-181-948 4660 Fax:+44-181-332 7835 http://www.curzonpress.co.uk

(Advertisement)

MAO ZEDONG, ZHOU ENLAI AND THE EVOLUTION OF THE CHINESE COMMUNIST LEADERSHIP Thomas Kampen This book analyses the power struggles within the leadership of the Chinese Communist Party between 1931, when it left Shanghai for the Jiangxi soviet, and 1945, by which time Mao Zedong and Zhou Enlai had emerged as senior CCP leaders (and thereafter ruled the Party until their deaths in 1976). Based on new Chinese sources, the study challenges long-established views that Mao Zedong became CCP leader during the Long March (1934-35) and that by 1935 the CCP was inde pendent of the Comintern in Moscow. The result is a critique not only of official Chinese historiography but also of Western (esp. US) schol arship that all future histories of the use of the PRC will need to take into account. Contents: Introduction • (1) The CCP Leadership and Re M A O Z E D O N G , Z H O U ENLAI turn of the ‘28 Bolsheviks’ • (2) The A N D T H E E V O L U T I O N OF Evolution of a New Party Leadership I HE CH IN ESE C O M M U N IS I • (3) The Transfer to Jiangxi and L E A D E R S H IP Struggle for Power • (4) Leadership Struggles during the Long March • Thomas K.impen (5) Relations between the CCP and the Comintern • (6) The Yan’an Rec tification Movement and Evolution of a New CCP Leadership • Conclusion • Bibliography • Index.

MONEY AND POWER IN PROVINCIAL THAILAND Ruth McVey (ed.) Most studies of SE Asian economic change have focused on growth in a few big cities with studies of the countryside tending to concern themselves with the social and environmental impact of metropolitan growth. Very few analysts have looked at the middle distance between metropolis and countryside. This is the horizon and focus of this volume, spurred by recent developments in Thai land. In the past decade, the rise of a frequently violent competition for busi ness and political leadership in the Thai provinces - an arena of growing national importance - has drawn attention to how these centres are beine transformed by capitalist development. Promising to be a classic in its field, this volume does much to aid our understanding of this transformation. NIAS, Dec 1999, 288 pp. Hbk • 87-87062-67-4 • £40 Pbk • 87-87062-70-4 • £14.99

NIAS, Oct 1999, 160 pp. Hbk • 87-87062-80-1 • £30.00 Pbk • 87-87062-76-3 • £15.99

NTAS Nordic Institute of Asian Studies Leifsgade 33, 2300 Copenhagen S Denmark: Fax (+45) 3296 2530 E-mail books@mas.ku.dk

3 4 • IIAS

newsletter

N ? 2 i • February

Books for the new millennium! 2000

NEW 30 NOVEMBER 199 9 DELFT UNI VERSI TY

PUBLICATIONS

IN A S I A N

STUDIES (Advertisement)

TECHNOLOGY,

THE

NETHERLANDS

Publishing Models m By RI K H O E K S T R A

n November 30, the library of Delft University of Technology hosted a Workshop on Publishing Models. The problem dis cussed at the workshop was the alter natives the new media, especially the Internet, offers for publishing schol arly literature. The traditional pub lishing of serials is in a crisis, because of a number of factors: - Prices of journals are going up by 15-20% per year, while budgets of research libraries remain the same or are being cut. - The appearance of digital journals and digital distribution technolo gies. At the moment of writing there are somewhere between 1500 and 1700 scholarly journals avail able in full text edition, mostly on the World Wide Web. Their number is increasing by the week. More over, they are integrated into bibli ographic databases like Silverplatter, Ovid and Ebsco, to name the largest, which makes alternative forms of publishing not only possi ble, but already a reality. - In principle, everything published on the Web is instantly available. This makes the old problems of dis tribution (printing, distributing, slowness) obsolete. - In addition, the Web makes other forms of publishing possible: mul timedia, (hyper)linked, various ap pearances of the same information, full-text archiving etcetera. All this has caused the old roles in the chain ofinformation to shift. This used to be split up in various roles: Author >■Publisher > Distributor > Library >■ Reader There may have been more parties involved, but these were the basic roles. The distributor often was the publisher himself, but at times there was also an intermediate journal agency. In the light of the develop

(Advertisement)

UK-China Directory 1999-2000 published by the Great Britain-China Centre lists all British China-related organizations, including government departments, universities, research institutes, and many other organizations. UK orders £17.50 European orders £25 We will invoice you. Email your order, or go to: www.gbcc.org.uk/pubns.htm Great Britain-China Centre 15 Belgrave Square London SW1X8PS email: directory@gbcc.org.uk

ments mentioned above, in the new situation created by electronic pub lishing the old divisions between the parties have shifted, mainly in the role of publishing and distribution, as these are no longer technical issues. In one form or another, this is a chal lenge or a threat to all parties involved in the traditional chain of informa tion, which basically boils down to the following alternatives: - Authors may publish their works directly on the web. They can do so themselves or with the help of a li brary, which then becomes a pub lisher (of university publications) - On the other hand, both publish ers and journal agencies may by pass the library and deliver con tents to readers right away. Pub lishers can do so by making the full-text of their publications available through the World Wide Web (or on CD-ROM, but that is unusual). Intermediaries offer in tegrated searching and full-text re trieving services of all publications in their fund. The threat for all parties, of course, is in the loss of their old position. The challenge is to take on a larger share of the information chain, without losing the old position. At the mo ment no one knows where this will lead us to, let alone where it will end. This has already led to rising insecuri ty, even if much of the information revolution everyone is awaiting still has to begin. In reaction to the threat and challenges, separate responses have evolved among the varios players in the field. All parties try to defend their old positions by pointing to the value they add to the nominal role they fulfil: - Libraries claim added value they ac crue in filtering information from the flood washing over their user group (usually universities) - Publishers state that there is much more to publishing than printing, distributing and marketing. Their most important role is to facilitate the publishing process by (once again) adding a quality filter to the information offered for publica tion. At the moment, the publisher role is under siege, though more in theory than in practice. Libraries are forced to adapt their traditional roles to start acting as information intermediaries, and if they do not their role will be marginalized to ‘undergraduate sup port’. On the other hand, the ongoing rise in the prices of their products by publishers has led to a much fiercer attack and some endeavours of pre senting real alternatives to the tradi tional publishing role. These alterna tive models also featured at the work shop. All participants were involved in one alternative publishing model or another. The immediate inspira tion for the workshop was the foun dation of a Dutch electronic academic publishing, called Roquade, by Delft University of Technology Library and the Library of Utrecht University (at the time of writing the URL was: http://131.211.208.51J/roquade/).

Three issues The workshop was chaired by Joost Kircz, Senior Visiting Scientist, University of Ams terdam and Director of Kircz KRA Publishing Research. Other participants included John W.T. Smith Subject Li brarian, The Templeman Li brary, University of Kent at Canterbury; Tom Wilson Re search Professor in Informa tion Management, University of Sheffield; Michael Keller University Librarian, Stanford University, Publisher of Highwire Press; Julia Blixrud SPARC The Scholarly Publish ing and Academic Resources Coalition; Fytton Rowland Deputy-Director of Under graduate Programmes, Dept. Information Science, Lough borough University; and Bas Savenije Librarian, Utrecht University.

New with John Benjamins Publishing Company

ofAsian Pacific Communication Edited by Herbert D. Pierson

St. John’s University Howard Giles

University o f California

The Journal of Asian Pacific Communication CJAPC) is an international refereed journal whose academic mission is to bring together specialists from diverse scholarly disciplines to discuss and interpret language and communication issues as they pertain to the people of Asian Pacific regions and impact on their Diaspora immigrant communities worldwide. The journal’s academic orientation is generalist, passion ately committed to interdisci plinary approaches to language and communication studies in the Asian Pacific. Thematic issues previously published: Sociolinguistics in

China; Japan Communication Issues; Mass Media in the Asian Pacific. The Teachings of Writing in the Pacific Basin; Language and Identity in Asia; The Economics of Language in the Asian Pacific. Forthcoming special issues will be about language management (planning) in the Asian Pacific and language in Taiwan. As from Volume xo, 2000 JAPC continues publication with John Benjamins Publishing Company.

Their presentations and Volume 10 (2000) discussions focused on the fol 2 issues ca. 320 pp. lowing three issues: ISSN 0957-6851 1. The cost of first copy, that is, making a publication ready for publication, in cluding peer reviewing and John Benjamins Publishing Company • Amsteldijk44, P.O.Box 75577 (copy) editing. Solutions for 1070 AN Amsterdam, The Netherlands, Fax: +31 20 6739773 ■www.benjamins.nl the first point, costs of first copy, or the actual step from the manuscript to the pub the market that is dominated by ex - Electronic publishing should be in lished work, were the most hotly pensive printed journals. not-for-profit enterprise form. debated. One participant put the The workshop provided some inter This is a good solution as the in general feeling into words by say esting insights, but it showed two volvement of academic institutions ing that there were some points of strong biases. The first was in the vir will keep prices reasonable (two ex consensus, however: tually exclusive science approach. amples: highwire, http://high- New publishing forms can break Many of the problems discussed are wire.stanford.edu/ and SPARC, through the conservatism in acade present in all scientific fields, but the http:/ / www.arl.org/sparc/. mic publishing. This may be hard, natural sciences with their informa 2. Distribution, or getting published because it impinges on vested in tion overload, stress on fast commu information to the readers. The terests, not only on the side of the nication, and near exclusive reliance contributors were all in agreement publishers, but also on the side of on journals in scholarly communica that the distribution of informa the academic community. This is tion are the most greatly affected. The tion is not really an issue: the World currently resulting in inertia; second was a strong bias towards the Wide Web is the medium, it works - Everyone is so much accustomed to Anglo-Saxon view of the question. well and it is efficient. There were the old forms of publishing, and While this is dominant in scholarly some questions about whether al they are so important to the func communication, there are many more ternative models would not better tioning of academia, they will re sides to it. One of these is that com serve the possibilities of the new main important and must be a mercial digital publishing (which for media. The journal as a gateway to point of departure. On the other that matter also extends to biblio information, subject-based pub hand, the academies already pay for graphic databases) is focusing nearly lishing or a cross-journal approach, most of the costs involved in get exclusively on Anglo-Saxon literature. http://www.stke.org/. In this, the ting journals published, so it In addition to what was said about issue at stake was less the actual should not be too difficult to divert the role of Academia in digital pub distribution, but rather the merger these efforts from the commercial lishing as a counterpoint to commer of access, filtering, and publishing. publishers to not-for-profit pub cial interests is even more true of the 3 Archiving, or keeping digital infor lishing; role of digital academic publishing in mation available over time. Some - The image of a journal is very im the fields in which commercial pub ideas about solutions for archiving portant. Electronic publishing is lishing is not showing an interest. electronic information were dis not considered the equal to pub This includes many of the social sci cussed, including distributed and lishing in a traditional journal. To ences and nearly all of the humani commercial or semi-commercial, achieve good quality standards ties, as well as practically all nonbut no one had a full-fledged solu with new, electronic journals pub Western or non-Western centred tion nor was there consensus about lished by universities, several solu studies. ■ the best way in which archiving tions were proposed: could be achieved. - Publish everything on the web and let the readers be the judge of qual Dr Rik H oekstra is currently affiliated with The workshop was about publish ity. For most this was no option, be the Instituut voor Nederlandse Geschiedenis ing models, and did not come to con cause they considered quality filter ing to be the principal function of clusions. There have been a number of (Institute for Netherlands History) in The Hague, Netherlands. He is occupied with initiatives from the side of academia, the publishers. These problems are publishing source materials concerning Dutch but these are still in their infancy. most acute in the natural science History in an electronic form. However, when they take off, they fields and less in smaller fields, E-mail: RikHoekstra@inghist.nl will pose an interesting alternative to with less vested interests; F ebruary 2000 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r N ? 2 i • 3 5

NEW P U B L I C A T I O N S

IN A S I A N

STUDI ES

Precious Metals in Early Southeast Asia It took a long time, but it did happen: nowadays ancient In donesian gold is a collector’s item. While easily transportable bronze figurines and ceremonial objects had been collected ever since the rediscovery and re-estimation o f the HinduBuddhist culture o f Indonesia in the nineteenth century, and even heavy, hard to move stone sculptures were dragged away from their ruined shrines to decorate the gardens o f colonial Dutch and Javanese inhabitants, gold objects were collected only sparingly. The Royal Tropical Institute published a book entitled ’Precious Metals in Early Southeast Asia: Proceedings o f the second seminar on Gold Studies’ ■ By P A U L I N E L U N S I N G H SCHEURLEER

o of the treasure of Plosokuning in Central Java in 19510 ush ered in a definitive change and stimulated the interest of an international pub lic. This hoard contained a larger number of golden objects in a wider variety of shapes and of a higher de gree of craftsmanship than had ever before been found in Indonesia. It is also called the ‘Wonoboyo treasure’ after the village in the vicinity of the hamlet Plosokuning where it was found. The objects in the hoard are now generally accepted as having originated from the early tenth cen tury. The main part of the hoard is ac commodated in the National Muse um in Jakarta (see for instance Les Ors de [’Archipel Indonésien, exhibition cata logue Musée National des Arts Asiatiques-Guimet, Paris 1995, pp. 58-61, nos. 18, 20-35 and Wahyono Martowikrido ‘Der Goldschatz von Ploso kuning’ in: Vcrsunkene Könichmche Indonesiens, exhibition catalogue Ró'merund Pelizdus-Museum, Hildesheim, Mainz 1995, pp. 257-261 and nos. 34-

47)As collecting art objects raises ques tions, it calls for research. The insti tute leading the way in research into classical Indonesian gold objects is the Tropenmuseum in Amsterdam, the Netherlands. During the exhibi tion of the gold collection of the Suvarnadvipa Foundation in 1993, a first seminar on the subject was organized. The contributors to this seminar ap proached the theme from various an gles: archaeology, art history, and ar chaeometry. The results are published in Bulletin 334 of the Royal Tropical Institute in Amsterdam: OId Javanese Gold (4th- i5 th century). An archaeological approach, edited by W.H. Kal, 1994. However, the activities of the Tropen museum did not stop here. A second seminar was organized. This time on the opposite side of the world, where in Jakarta the National Museum of Indonesia played host. Apart from representatives of the three disciplines present at the first seminar, here experts in anthropolo gy, conservation, registration, and epigraphy attended, and there was even one paper on Philippine gold. In all there were fifteen papers. Space does not allow me to deal with every one of them, but instead, I shall de scribe some instances that roused my interest. John N. Miksic talked about the problem of Indonesian gold always being found in hoards, which does not tell us much about the cultural

•

has

newsletter

context of the find. He then presents a rare case of eight gold objects found in 1992 near a large group of fourteenthdoubt, the find century archaeological objects in the village of Kemasan at Trowulan, East Java. The most beautiful object, no. 8, is a triangular pendant set with stones and with its chain still at tached (pi. ij. The famous, huge (height 38.5 cm.) repousse gold plate consisting of three parts, one above the other, connected by eylets, the upper part being decorated with a fly ing Garuda holding the pot contain ing the elixer of life stolen from the gods, kept in the Museum Mpu Tantular in Surabaya [p88], has been pub lished by Sri Sujatmi Satari. She classi fies this masterpiece of craftmanship as a modesty plate, comparable with decorations worn by goddesses on the statues of Durga Mahishasuramardini from Candi Singosari and Candi Jawi and of Bhrkuti from Candi Jago. Jaap Polak, on the other hand, by dint of keen observation, classifies a re pousse plaque in the National Muse um in Jakarta (ill. p. 102), which had always been identified as a modesty plate, with decorative plates of the same kind as the one discussed by Sa tari. He identifies it as the central part ofsuchapiece. Cecilia Levin discussed the stylistic and narrative features of the bowl decorated with Ramayana scenes, one of the masterpieces from the Plosokuning hoard. Composing a chronology of Ramayana representa tions based on the narrative reliefs of Candi Prambanan of AD 856, the Jolotundo reliefs of AD 977, the putatively ixth century relief in the Boston Musum of Fine Arts Q. Fontein, The Sculpture o f Indonesia, The National Gallery Washington / Abrams New York 1990, no. 19), she assigns it to a place between Prambanan and Jolotundo, contemporary with the bronze figurine of Sri Dewi in the Museum Sono Budoyo, Yokyakarta (Fontein, Idem, no. 48). She also postulates a reason for the selection of the Ra mayana scenes depicted on the bowl: each scene represents various forms of loyalty between the protagonists. The theme may also indicate the reason for the commissioning of the bowl as a royal present marking a particular occasion.

teresting to see that there are many terms for gold and that all are derived from Sanskrit, the classical language of India. Does that imply that the importance of the material was also derived from Indian culture? Surprisingly many appliances are found in literary passages for gold. The techniques men - * v, tioned are the same as the ones - - . so far met with in the investiga tions of Professor Riederer and ■l from the observations of others. The question of applying an -r thropological data as a source of knowledge for the classical peri od was raised by Wilhelmina Kal by providing examples from Eastern Indonesia. This ques tion would be an interesting Gold p e n d a n tfro m the villa g e o f K em asan issue for further discussion. at Trowulan, H ast Ja v a , Indonesia. A Central Javanese metal group of three figurines represents always assist the outward appearance. the triad of the Buddha flanked by The report of the conservation of this Wajrapani and Padmapani, a compo metal group, as an exception, shows sition well-known from Candi Menthe spectacular result of the slim bod dut and other metal groups from ies stripped of the crust of corrosion Central Java (Divine Bronze: Ancient In and other extraneous additions that donesian bronzes from AD 600 to 1600. these had acquired during the cen Rijksmuseum, Amsterdam / Brill, Lei turies it had been in the earth. den 1988, no. 12), but here the fig A point of agreement of many of the urines are in standing position. Each authors is the necessity to advance the figurine is placed on a lotus base and study of Indonesian gold by involving the three lotuses are themselves set on as many different disciplines as possi a common rectangular base. The ble. As mentioned already, the editor three metals used for the group are of this publication has succeeded in applied hierarchically: gold for the bringing together a whole bunch of Buddha, silver for the Bodhisattwas, them. But as multidisciplinity in and bronze for the bases. The essential volves many specialists, not only of conservation of works of art does not disciplines, but also of languages, so

•V'1 I

does the editing of the papers, and this brings me to one main point of criticism. By appoint ing one editor only a range of se rious mistakes could not be avoided and these, regrettably, marr an otherwise well-pre sented publication. My second point of criticism concerns the illustrations. The publication is sparsely illustrat ed and most illustrations in cluded have clearly not been provided by the authors. This makes some of the papers, the 1 ones to which the illustrations z are central, less valuable. All the £ trouble to find specialists and to 2 bring them together from all ^ over the world is wasted if more attention is not paid to the sub sequent publication. It is to be hoped that these seminars will be organized on a regular basis, but with more care for the subsequent fate of the proceedings. ■

Reference - Kal, Wilhelmina H. (ed.)

Precious Metals in Early Southeast Asia: Proceedings o f the second seminar on Gold Studies Amsterdam: Royal Tropical Institute, Tropenmuseum, 1999, ISBN 90 68 32 292 3

Pauline Scheurleer is guest curator at the Rijksmuseum voor Volkenkunde, Leiden, the Netherlands. E-mail: pauline@rmv.nl

(Advertisement)

RESEARCH SCHOOL OF ASIAN, AFRICAN, AND AMERINDIAN STUDIES ( C N W S ) U n iv ersiteit Leiden CNWS PUBLICATIONS

CNWS Publications is the publishing branch of the Research School CNWS. Since 1991, more than 100 books have been published in the field of Non-Western studies. Recent publications in the field of Asian studies include: Ro l a n d Ru g e r s ,

Sa n jia o W

Yamphu. Grammar, Texts & Lexicon.

M atériaux pour 1’étude de la religion ch in oise.

ISBN 90-5789-012-7. 1998. Hardcover. 632 pp. Price: DF1. 105. George

van

D r ie m ,

D zongkha. ISBN 90-5789-002-X. 1998. Hardcover, xvi + 489 pp. w ith three co m p a ct disks. Price: DF1. 115

e n x ia n ,

Vol. 1 (1997); Vol. 2 (1998). Price: DFl. 35 and DF1. 45 resp. Yu a n Bin g l in g ,

C hinese D em ocracies. A Study of the Kong sis of West Borneo (1776-1884). ISBN 90-5789-031-3. 2000 . 354 pp. Price: DFl. 60.

Gold language A previously unexplored aspect of ancient Indonesian gold is language. Hedy Hinzler collected terms for gold, and anything connected with gold, tools to work gold, gold smiths, the shapes of gold before tooling, the techniques applied to gold, etc. etc. from Old Javanese inscriptions and literary texts from the East Javanese Period (10th - 16th centuries). It is in

N ? 2 i • F eb ru ary 2000

N icole N i e s s e n ,

M unicipal G overnm ent in Indonesia. Policy, Law, and Practice of Decentralization and Urban Spatial Planning. ISBN 90-5789-028-3. 1999. 416 pp. Price: DF1. 70.

Books can be ordered directly via th e CNWS, PO Box 9515, 2300 RA Leiden, th e N e th e rlan d s, or via e-mail: cnw s@ rullet.leidenuniv.nl For th e full catalogue, please c o n su lt th e hom epage: w w w .le id e n u n iv .n l/in te rfa c/c n w s/p u b

NEW NOW

PUBLICATIONS

IN A S I A N

Studies in Central and East Asian Religion

AVAI LABLE

Encyclopaedia of Islam CD-ROM Edition

EDITED BY IAN ASTLEY, BAREND TER HAAR, TERRY KLEEMAN, PER K. SORENSEN AND DR. HENRIK H. SORENSEN

VOLUMES 1-9 (A-S) OF ULTIMATELY 11 VOLUMES

'An indispensable reference tool for ancient, medieval and modern Islamic Studies' D A V ID H IR SC H , MIDDLE EAST BIB LIO G R APH ER , UCLA.

Features: • First CD-ROM (volume 1-9); first update (volume 1-10); second update (volume 1-11) • Including Index of Proper Names, Index of Subjects, Glossary and Index of Terms • Extensive, fully searchable, bibliographies • Ability to annotate: bookmarks, notes and cross-referencing hyperlinks • Searches possible in both Arabic transcription and in English • Designed for optimal performance under Windows 95/98/NT E U R 341.-

U S $ 375.-

N L G 751.47

E U R

1135.- 1250.-

•INCLUDING T W O UPDATES

U S $

O ne issue a year (October) V olume 12, 2000 ISSN 0904-2431 EUR 22.50 / US$ 28.- / DGL 49.85

Brill’s Inner Asian Library

N L G ^

Peer-reviewed series dedicated to the history, literature, religion, arts, economy and politics of Inner Asian cultures and societies • the series aims at furthering our understanding of Inner Asia and enabling us to better cope with the problems of the past, present and future connected with this region • ISSN 1566-7162

2501.21

BRILL’S ASIAN STUDIES JOURNALS PROGRAM Don’t miss your discount! 25% for a I-year subscription and 40% for a 2-year subscription on all five journals

T’oung Pao

i f T tH J N G PAO

EDITED BY P.E. WILL AND E. ZÜRCHER (AD INTERIM).

T w o issues per year (March, September) Volume 36,2000

ISSN 0082-5433 EUR 136.- / US$ 167. - 1 d g l 299.70

Multi-cultural, multidisciplinal journal with scholarly contributions that cast light on religious phenomena in the area encom passing Tibet and Central Asia, Mongolia, China, Korea and Japan • Covering ail aspects of religious life in the specified area

N EW SERIES: SUBSCRIBE NOW !

PRICES INSTITUTIONS 6-10 USERS AND I 1-25 USERS AVAILABLE O N REQUEST

INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF CHINESE STUDIES

Studies in Central &East-Asian Religions

MANAGING EDITOR: NICOLA Dl COSMO

I n s t i t u t i o n s 1-5

Individuals

List price*

STUDIES

The leading journal on Sinology, established in 1890 • Scholarly translations of Chinese historical texts • . . . ,. Covering history, literature, art ; in fact almost anything , . that concerns China

F irst volume expected in September 2000

10% PRE PUBLICATION DISCOUNT! List price approx .

EUR 50.- / US$ 62.- / DGL 110.19 P rice for subscribers to T H E SERIES A P P R O X .

EUR 46.- / US$ 57.- / DGL 101.37 ISBN 90 04 11777 6

A Documentary History of Manchu-Mongol Relations ( 1627-1644) NICOLA Dl COSMO, DALIJABU BIAO

In the 17 th century the Manchu conquered the whole of China within only a few years, replacing the Ming dynasty. This unique volume for the first time shows in detail how the Manchu built the state and the military machine which enabled them to achieve their goal. W ith 130 original documents translated and amply annotated.

RELIGIONS IN CHINA O rd e r now an d receiv e 10% pre-p u b licatio n d isco u n t on th e 3 books below

NAN NU

MEN, WOMEN AND GENDER IN EARLY AND IMPERIAL CHINA

Men .Women and Genriet In Early and Im perial China

EDITED BY HARRIET T. ZURNDORFER ET AL.

In the series Handbook of Oriental Studies, Section 4, China • the first 3 volumes of a series of reference works covering Religions in China • ultimately 8 volumes

Daoism Handbook LIVIA KOHN (ED.)

Two

ISS U E S A YEAR

(March, September) V olume 2, 2000

ISSN 1387-6805 I nstitutions :

EUR 72.- / US$ 89.- / DGL 158.67 I ndividuals : EUR 63.- / US$ 78.-/DGL 138.83

Interdisciplinary, interna tional, peer-reviewed journal • Original studies related to men, women and gender • Beginning of the Chinese civilization to the early 20th century

Expected in J uly 2000 List price approx .

EUR 200.- / US$ 245.- / DGL 440.74

MMJ»»•*« i«mi™

P rice for subscribers to

EUR 182.- / US$ 223.- / DGL 401.08

T H E SERIES

Journal of the Economic and Social I i H istory of the Orient

Handbook of Christianity in China VOLUME ONE: 635 - 1800 N. STANDAERT

JOL'RNM sHr

EDITED BY HARRIET T. ZURNDORFER ET AL.

Ü5CONOMTG

AND Q uarterly publication (F ebruary, May, A ugust , N ovember) Volume 43, 2000

ISSN 0022-4995 I nstitutions EUR 168.- / US$ 206.- / DGL 370.22 I ndividuals EUR 86.- / US$ 106.- / DGL 189.52

The essential resource for both scholars and students, providing key information on the Daoist tradition in an easily accessible yet highly readable format. A coherent collection of thirty articles by major scholars in the field, presenting the latest level of research available today

ISBN 90 04 11208 1

Social Hisn.wv ptME

Specialized studies furthering the knowledge of the economic and social history of Asia and North Africa from the earliest time to the beginning of the 19th century

OftJKKï

As a true reference guide to the reception of Christianity in pre-1800 China, Standaert’s volume gives an answer to questions such as: Who were the actors of Christianity in China? Where were the communities located? What were the discussions? W ith ample and systematic introductions to sources, bibliographies and archives.

ISBN 90 04 11431 9 Expected in September 2000 List price approx .

EUR 134.- / US$ 165.-/ DGL 295.30 P rice for subscribers to T H E SERIES A P P R O X .

EUR 122.-/US$ 150.-/ DGL 268.85

Handbook of Christianity in China VOLUME TWO: 1800 - PRESENT

Journal of East Asian Archaeology

Two ISS U E S

A Y EA R

(March , September) V olume 2, 2000

ISSN 1387-6813 I nstitutions :

EUR 100.- / US$ 123.- / DGL 220.37 I ndividuals :

EUR 63.- / US$ 78.- / DGL 138.83

This second volume on Christianity in China covers the period from 1800 onwards up to the present, divided into four main periods, and dealing with the complexities of both Catholic and Protestant aspects. Also in this volume the reader will be guided to and through the Western and Chinese primary and secondary sources by a careful selection of major scholars in the field.

ISBN 90 04 11430 o

EDITED BY L. VON FALKENHAUSEN, R.E. MUROWCHICK. CHENG-HWA TSANG AND R.D.S. YATES.

Published in cooperation with the Society for East Asian Archaeology • Peer-reviewed journal covering the beginnings of civilization in China to the early 20th century • Scholarship on the archaeology of East Asia, both in its home countries and in the West • The first scholarly journal devoted exclusively to the field

R.G. TIEDEMANN

journal of East Asian Archaeology

Expected in September 2000 List price approx .

EUR 134.- /US$ 165.-/ DGL 295.30 P rice for subscribers to T H E SERIES A P P R O X .

EUR 122.-/US$ 150.-/ DGL 268.85

Academic

S£/

Publishers

L L

P.O . B ox 9000 2300 PA L e i d e n

112 W a ter St r e e t , Su it e 400 Bo st o n MA 0 2 109

T h e N etherlands

USA

53 5^6 Fax +31 (0)71 53 17 532

T e l i 80 0 962 4406

E - m a il c s @ b r il l .n l

E - m a il c s @ b r il l u s a .c o m

T e l +31 (0)71 53

Fax (6 1 7 )2 6 3 23 24

www.brill.nl February 2000 •

has n e w s lette r

N?2i •

NEW P U B L I C A T I O N S

Early Chinese Medical Literature Donald Harper in his impressive monograph ‘Early Chinese Medical Literature. The Mawangdui Medical Manuscripts Translation and Study’ analyses the silk manuscripts that were found in a tomb at Mawangdui in 1973. Anyone with an inter est in the origins o f Chinese medicine, science, magic, and cul ture will not want to miss it. By W O L F G A N G BEHR

,i 1 .■MSyjk.

L i

ccording t0 a recent survev of tin

\ World Health Or ganization (WHO], there are few countries in the world where Traditional Chinese Medicine (TCM] has not been enjoying a massive growth spurt dur ing the last two decades. TCM herbal preparations are currently sold to at least 130 countries, including many developing regions in Southeast Asia and Africa, and reached an export vol ume of some 500 million US $ in 1998. They account for 30-50 % of the total medical consumption in China, but the per capita consumption in ab solute figures is even higher in Japan. Increased Western interest in TCM is reflected by the fact that the WHO has now set up seven TCM co-opera tion centres in China, and that the num ber of foreign students o f TCM at Chinese universities outranks those in all other subjects within the natural sciences. Wherever TCM is sold, references to the venerability of a seemingly mono lithic medical ‘tradition’, reaching back ‘several millennia’ into China’s dim and distant prehistory, are sure to fill the marketing blurbs. Athough there have been a few brave attempts by Chinese paleographers to cull the references to ailments, drug-names, and shamanistic treatments scattered throughout oracle bone and pre-Qin bronze inscriptions, the customary starting point for any standard histo ry of Chinese medicine is still the

Inner Canon o f the Yellow Emperor (Huangdi Neijing], the oldest layers of which probably stem from the late second or first century BC. Until very recently, this fairly heterogenous cor pus o f texts, which survived in three divergent medieval recensions, was considered to be the sum and sub stance of the earliest Chinese medical system. It is primarily concerned with an elaborate theory of physiology and pathology, focusing on the interplay between ‘vapour’ (qi), blood (xue) and the vessels (mat), as well as the healing o f ‘disruptions’ between these units by means of acupuncture, moxibustion, herbal prescriptions, and other treatments. Yet the late Bronze Age origins of this already quite complex system, still considered to underlie all later practices o f TCM, are rather poorly understood, as are the early history of its transmission and socio cultural backgrounds. While most modern practitioners o f Chinese medicine are perfectly happy to live with such lurking uncertainties, the ‘sudden’ appearance of the Huangdi Neijing was always a sort of an episte mological nuisance to historians of science in China. This disquieting situation was dra matically changed by the famous dis covery o f thirty silk manuscripts in a lacquer box in 1973. They were found in a tomb at Mawangdui (Changsha, Hunan province), and only three of them (Laozi, Zhouyi, Xici zhuan) have counterparts in the received litera ture. Some eighteen percent of the forty-five texts included in the man uscripts were found to have medical

(Advertisement)

Xianling Li

Chinese-Dutch Business Negotiations Insights from Discourse Amsterdam/Atlanta. GA 1999. UI.372 pp. (Utrecht Studies in Language and Communication 14) ISBN: 90-420-0734-6

Hll. 70.-/US-S 38.50

The Chinese are known as an inscrutable people in the West. With the rapid globalisation of world business, China, with its booming economy and as one of the world’s largest emerging markets, is attracting increasing numbers of international traders and investors. Various sources have shown that language and culture are, among other factors, two of the major obstacles to successful business collaborations between the Chinese and Westerners. This book aims to help remove these obstacles by offering some insights into the intricate mechanisms of business negotiation between the Chinese and the Dutch.

Rodopi USA/Canada: 2015 South Park Place, Atlanta, GA 30339, Tel. (770) 933-0027, Call to llfree (U.S.only) 1-800-225-3998. Fax (770) 933-9644 All Other Countries: Tijnmuiden 7, 1046 AK Amsterdam. The Netherlands. Tel. ++31 (0)20 6114821, Fax ++ 31 (0)20 4472979 E-mail: orders-queries@rodopi.ni

www.rodopi.nl 3 8 •

ha s n e w s l e t t e r

Tsi?2i • F eb ru ary 2000

IN AS I AN

contents, predating the Inner Canon by at least a century. Supplemented by several other Warring States’ man uscripts excavated during the last few decades (Zhangjiashan, Fuyang, Yunmeng, Wuwei, Baoshan), which are more or less directly related to med ical issues and subsumed under the conveniently broad-meshed header of fang or ‘recipe-literature’, these texts and their intellectual back grounds form the topic of Donald Harper’s impressive monograph. The study is roughly divided into two halves, one including an exten sive prolegomena (pp. 1-183), the other a copiously annotated complete translation of all fourteen m anu scripts (185-438). Three subject index es o f materia medica, physiological terms, and names of ailment, as well as a short general index, round off the book, unfortunately mixing entries of English translation equivalents and their underlying Chinese origi nals without any clearcut organiza tional principle. The translation of original manuscripts, unlikely to be related in a linear fashion to the Huangdi Neijing-tradition, and which clearly predate the emergence of acupuncture and moxibustion which yet do not apply duo-pentaistic [yinyang wuxmg) agent theories to physiology and generally favour re condite ontological notions of illness to more sober functional explana tions, is certainly an extraordinarily daunting task. The author's under taking aims at no less than recreating a whole world of medical practices that had been totally eclipsed by later rationalizing developments and therefore inevitably leads back into the realm of magic, occult practices, macrobiotic hygiene, natural philos ophy, and a ‘culture of secrecy’ per meating much, if not all, of the War ring States’ medical discourse. Faced with a lack of any positively guiding exegetical tradition, a translator struggling to find his way through the thickets of pre-Qin medical knowledge, is virtually required to re vive pre-modern exigencies of acade mic pansophy, since the varied con tents o f the texts call for a thorough familiarity with pre-Qin history, ar chaeology, paleography, philosophy, botany, mythology, and macrobi otics, to name but a few o f the disci plines involved. While one m ight quibble over some of the translations, especially of plant/drug names, Harper has in general succeeded ad mirably in producing a translation that is highly reliable and thoroughly readable, in many respects clearly su perior to Modern Chinese and Japan ese renderings o f the texts. One can feel the awe-inspiring am ount of work which m ust have gone into the book since Harper’s first treatm ent of one o f the Mawangdui medical man uscript in his dissertation almost two decades ago. I am sure that this book will be of lasting importance to any one with an interest in the origins of Chinese medicine and pharmacology, but, perhaps more importantly, also for those working on the history of science, philosophy, society, and cul ture during the fourth to second cen turies BC and beyond. These backgrounds are amply dealt with in the excellent prolegomena, which I will not even try to summa rize here. Much to his credit, Harper has been careful to refrain from ex

STUDI ES (Advertisement)

Thousands of books on Asia Old and New Join our mailing list http://www.QldBookroom.com

WEI T O Protector of Books.

The Old Bookroom Weedon Close Belconnen ACT 2617 Australia Books@OldBookroom.com Ph 61 (0)2 62515191 Fax 61 (0)2 6251 5536

tensive comparisons with later sys tems of TCM or contemporaneous Western medical traditions. More often than not, comparisons of this type have proved to be problematic in the sense that they inevitably intro duce subliminal theoretical presup positions into a subject best ap proached from a deliberately selfcontained ‘internal’ perspective. Typ ical examples o f retrospective mis conceptions discussed by Harper, which have arisen from rash compar isons with later texts and traditions, include the mechanical association of macrobiotics and sexual techniques with a proto-Daoist background, the overreliance on Huangdi Neijing eti ology in the translation of arcane ail m ent names in the manuscripts, the misinterpretation of lancing as acupuncture, of cauterization as moxibustion, or the anachronistic as signment of different texts to formal medical or philosophical ‘schools’. To be sure, Harper’s reconstruction of the world of medicine before the ‘Yel low Thearch’ texts makes ample use of an impressive range oflater (as well as contemporaneous) edited sources for the identification of difficult terms and concepts, and, indeed, it

(Advertisement)

OLD A N D RARE

documents a surprising degree of cross-fertilization between medicine and other branches o f natural philos ophy during the late Warring States and Early Han periods. But the book is a groundbreaking work, in the best sense of the word, in that it always gives preference to a close scrutiny of the textual relationships within the manuscript corpus itself One o f the most exciting chapters in the prolegomena deals with the transmission and copying of the manuscript texts, and the astonish ing value of books as ‘objects of power’ for their elite owner and read erships during the last centuries BC. In a sense, it is this culture that was indirectly responsible for the preser vation of the medical ‘texts in tombs’ to the present day. The Warring State elites formed a fairly sophisticated readership, engaged in an informed dialogue with the physician-practi tioners, and as the texts show, a clien tele already m uch plagued by ‘civilizational diseases’ like haemorrhoids and the inability to sleep. Yet they were also a readership still inextrica bly involved with the magic and ex orcism of earlier periods, for whom a haemorrhoid-cure like ‘hot-pressing with vapour o f a male rat boiled in urine’ (MSI.E.154) presumably sound ed perfectly reasonable. Prescriptions like this make the book an exhilarat ing read, and Harper is to be congrat ulated for making them accessible in a well-argued and beautifully pro duced volume. Anyone with an inter est in Ancient Chinese medicine, sci ence, magic, and culture will not want to miss it. ■

- Donald Harper

Bought & sold ASI AN

RARE

BOOKS

175 W. 93rd Street (Suite 16-D)

Early Chinese Medical Literature: The Mawangdui Medical Manuscripts translation and study London & New York: Kegan Paul International (Sir H enry Wellcome Asian Series), 1998, ISBN o 7103 0582-6 (hard cover), UK £75.00 / US $127.50

New York, N.Y. 10025 USA http://www.erols.com/arbs/ Fax: +1-212-316 3408 Business by appointment

Dr Wolfgang Behr, Department o f East Asian Studies, Ruhr Universitat Bochum, Germany. E-mail: Wolfgang. Behr@ruhr.uni-bochum.de

NEW

PUBLICATIONS

IN AS I AN

STUDIES

(Advertisement)

M ONUM ENTA SERICA Subscription notice http://www.steyler.de/monumenta.serica

Founded in 1934 at the Catholic Fu-Jen University in Peking by Fr. Franz X. Biallas, S.V.D. (1878-1936), M o n u m e n ta S e ric a is an international journal devoted primarily to traditional China, covering all important aspects of sinology. 47 vols. averaging 500 pages each have been published up to 1999.

Please enter my subscription to M o n u m e n t a S e r ic a and send me vol. 47 (1999) Price per copy:

Ways to pay:

DM 170.00 + postage: ([ ] surface: DM 9.00; [ ] air: DM 46.00) [ ] Check (payable to Institut Monumenta Serica) [ ] Credit card ([ ] VISA; [ ] MasterCard)

Account No

Expires

Signature

Date

Contents of Monumenta Serica, vol. 47 (1999), 620 pp. ARTICLES: S ophia-K arin Psarras : U pper Xiajiadian • Chen Z hi: A Study of the Bird Cult of the Shang People • Y uet K eung L o : T o U se o f Not to Use: the Idea o f ming in the Zhuangzi • C hen Jue : “Shooting Sand at People’s Shadow .” Yingshe as a Mode o f Representation in Medieval Chinese Literature • JlA JlNHUA: A Study o f the Jinglong w enguanji. • S pecial S ection : Selected Papers of the International Laozt-Symposium: Die Laozt-Forschung nach der Auffindung der Mawangdui-Seidentexte“, Marienthal/ Westerwald (Germany), 17.-21. Mai 1993: L utz G eldsetzer : D ao als metaphysisches Prinzip bei Lao Z i. Einige Gedanken zur Logik der metaphysischen Begriffsbildung • W olfgang B auer (1930-1997): Ich und Nicht-Ich in Laozis D aodejing • Rolf T rauzettel : V on Laozi 6 zu Laozi 42. M ythologischer, literarischer Oder philosophischer Diskurs? • H ans -G eorg M öller : Verschiedene Versionen des Laozi. Ein Vergleich mit besonderer Berücksichtigung des 19. Kapitels • Robert G. H enricks: Chapter 50 in the Laozi'. Is it “Three out o f T en” or “T hirteen”? • Konrad W egmann : Laozi-Textversionen im Vergleich. Das Problem der historischen und inhaltsbezogenen, computergestiitzten strukturellen Darstellung • H enrik Jager : Ein Beispiel buddhistischer Exegese. Das Daodejing jie von Groflmeister Hanshan Deqing (1546-1623) • F lorian C. Reiter: Z ur Bedeutung und Funktion Lao-tzus im religiösen Taoismus. REVIEW ARTICLES: M ichael Q uirin : M acht und Gegenmacht von H errschern und H istorikern in der Tang-Zeit • Joseph D ehergne, S.J. (1903-1990) et a l.: Catéchismes et catéchèse des Jésuites de Chine de 1584-1800 • Jean -C laude M artzloff: Euclid in China • D aniel J. B auer , s . v .d : Fiction from M odern China • OBITUARIES: M arek M ejor: Janusz Chmielewski (1916-1998) • W . S outh Coblin : Paul L-M . Serruys, c . i . c . m . (1912-1999) •

Name (please print)

Address

The journal will be mailed to you from our distributor, the Steyler Verlag in Nettetal, Germany. Non-European customers are kindly asked for prepayment.

REVIEWS • PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED

Please send this order form and your prepayment to: Institut Monumenta Serica, Arnold-Janssen-Str. 20, D-53757 Sankt Augustin, Germany Fax: +49-2241-20 67 70 • e-mail: monumenta.serica@t-online.de

(Advertisement)

South Asia: General Catalogue

The Carl Whiting Bishop Collection

IDC’s outstanding collection of titles on microform on South Asia contains hundreds of titles, among which selected monographs, periodicals, series, government documents, catalogues of Indian manuscripts, missionary archives, newspapers and photograph collections.

Freer Gallery of Art and Arthur M. Sackler Gallery Archives / Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. Carl Whiting Bishop (1881-1942) was an archaeologist and anthropologist, specializing in the field of East Asian studies. He traveled extensively in China during 1923-1927 and 1929-1934. His collection of professional papers, photographs and official records was retained at the Freer Gallery of Art after his death.

•

Available now

East Asia: General Catalogue Chinese and Japanese serials and monographs, serials and monographs in Western languages, serials and monographs on natural sciences, herbaria, missionary archives, Taiwan’s oppositional magazines. Bibliotheca Asiatica, etc. • Available now

Missionary Archives on Asia IDC Publishers have now very usefully arranged the fiche of nine major missionary archives according to area and subject specifications. These selections are significantly enriched by making them accessible, via extensive indexes, by missionary name, author, and title of printed material. •

Available now

Historical Statistics on China Central Bureau of Statistics, the Netherlands This collection offers a diverse, but appealing, mix of statistical source information on various chapters in China's | economic history. The information is mainly of a historical nature, the oldest statistics date from 1868, the most recent statistics date from 1993. • Scope: 50 titles • Approx. 2,800 microfiche • Available: First half 2000

Selections from Despatches to the Government of India Secretary of State for India in Council, 1858-1936 After the abolition of the East India Company, a ministerial office administering the colony was instituted on September 1, 1858, known as the Secretary of State for India in Council. The despatches in this microfiche collection are from that date. They cover the ‘high noon’ of British rule in India as well as the start of its decline.

• 1 manuscript and c. 4,000 photographs • 42 microfiche • Available now

• Years 1858-1936 • 3,380 microfiche • Available now

Colonial-Period Korea

Excerpta Indonesica on CD-ROM

Rare Sources from the C.V. Starr East Asian Library, Columbia University, New York This collection brings together three distinct groups of publications from the colonial period. It includes Japanese publications on Korea, Western (mostly English) early impressions of Korea, and Korean colonial-period literature. All are highly valuable (primary) sources for scholars of Korea and things Korean. • Scope: 304 titles • Number o f fiche: Approx. 1,000 microfiche • Available: Mid 2000

Indian Political Intelligence (IPI) Files, c. 1916-1947

IDC Publishers is proud to announce it is releasing (in co-operation with KITLV and HAS) the cumulative abstracts journal Excerpta Indonesica, issues 1 to 60, on CD-ROM. This extensive and easy to use database will provide access to selected abstracts of monographs, chapters in general works on Southeast Asia, and periodical articles dealing with Indonesia published between 1970 and 1999. • •

15,000 titles Available: Mid 2000

- .

,■

|J |i -m

Catalogues and brochures are available free of charge, on request.

British Library, Oriental and India Office Collections These only recently declassified files provide unique primary sources for the study of “subversive” movements in the British colonial situation during an especially volatile period in Indian history. • 774 IPI files • Approx. 1,500 microfiche • Available: First half 2000

HI DC P U B L I S H E R S

Taking History into the Future For North American customers only

H The Netherlands IDC Publishers P.O.Box 11205 2301 EE Leiden

I Phone +31 (0)71 514 27 00 Fax +31(0)71513 17 21 E-mail info@idc.nl I Internet http://www.idc.nl

B North America IDC Publishers Inc. 350 Fifth Avenue, Suite 1801 New York, NY 10118

February

2000

Phone Toll free Fax E-mail

212 271 5945 800 757 7441 212 271 5930 info@idcpublishers.com

• i i a s n e w s l e t t e r N? 2 i • 3 9

NEW P U B L I C A T I O N S

IN AS I AN

Sri Lanka Studies Series The international series ‘Sri Lanka Studies in the H um anities and Social Sciences’, published by VU University Press Amster dam was established to provide a quick avenue for p ub lishin g the results o f theoretically inform ed and empirically wellgrounded research on Sri Lanka. A board o f editors guarantees the quality o f the series (on this board are Leslie Gunawardena, Peradeniya; Peter Kloos, Amsterdam; Eric Meyer, Paris; Gananath Obeyesekera, Princeton; Jonathan Spencer, Edin burgh). The series is in English but all volum es contain sum maries in Sinhala as well as in Tamil. ■ By P E T E R K L O O S

f he first volume, published in 1993, J L is by a Sri Lankan economist, Sirimal Abeyratne. His book, Anti-ex port bias in the ‘export-ori ented’ economy of Sri Lanka, deals w ith the fact th at despite the political rhetoric, the m anufacturing sec tor in Sri Lanka is far from being ex port-oriented. In reality the export sector is effectively ‘disprotected’. The frequent trade liberalization at tempts have been based on either exaggerated or biased policy recom mendations, and have not elim inat ed anti-export bias in the manufac turing trade. Abeyratne argues for a fair level o f protection, between im port substitution and export promo tion, which eliminates policy dis crimination against potential tradeables.

Publication

f |

The second volume is a Dutch PhD thesis by Josine van der Horst: Who is he, what is he dairy? Religious Rhetoric and Performances during R. Premadasa's Presidency, 1989-1993 (1995). The title is taken from a cartoon depicting the late Premadasa, blindfolded, bearing a flower-laden tray in his right hand and a burning tyre in his left. Pre madasa became president in 1988, when Sri Lanka was mired in a deep political and moral crisis. While re sponsible for a ruthless policy to reach his own ends, Premadasa also sought inspiration in the peaceful policies of the ancient Indian king, Asoka, who, after a long series of bloody wars, re pented and turned his efforts towards creating a righteous society. Likewise, Premadasa announced the dawning of a new era of righteousness and peace in Sri Lanka. The study offers an analy sis of Premadasa’s self-presentation, as well as the religious rhetoric and per formances he engaged in, and the

manner in which these presentations were received by the public. Volume 3 of the series is by a Danish scholar, Birgitte Sorensen. This book too is based on a PhD thesis, defended at the University of Copenhagen: Relo cated Lives: Displacement and Resettle ment within the Mahaweli Project, Sri Lanka (1996). The Mahaweli River De velopment Project is the largest river basin irrigation project in Asia. Among other things it has resulted in the large-scale displacement of people. The study examines the social and cul tural impact of displacement. It de scribes how members of a settler com munity and the neighbouring village experienced the relocation process and analyses the creative strategies that different groups and individuals em ployed in order to create new or restore existing identities. Sorensen argues that previous approaches to relocation have largely failed to grasp this cre ative and constructive aspect because of the conceptualization of relocation as a liminal phase and the predomi nant use of stress models. Volume 4 is again by a Sri Lankan scholar, Jagath Senaratne: Political Vio lence in Sri Lanka, 1977-1990. Riots, Insur rections, Counter Insurgencies, Foreign In vention (1997). The book deals with the period of the rapid escalation of vio lence in Sri Lanka after the election of the UNP government in 1977. These

A Nepali Language Feast

STUDI ES

years saw massive numbers of victims and large-scale destruction of proper ty. Violence peaked in the years 19871990. In this book the overall temporal pattern of the escalation of political vi olence is carefully analysed. Volume 5 is by an Austrian scholar, Marianne Niirnberger: Dance is the Language of the Gods. The Chitrasena school and the tradition roots of Sri Lankan stage dance (1998). It deals with what in Sri Lanka is called ‘Kandean dancing’. Dance in Sri Lanka was placed right at the heart of the rituals performed for the welfare of the kingdom. In tradi tional Sinhala society the occupational group of dancers was integrated into a feudal system in which services to the king and to the Buddhist temples were rewarded by giving rights to cultivate land. In the 20th century, however, modern stage dancing emerged: the Chitrasena school. This school broke away from caste barriers and gender roles, and accomplished the transfor mation of traditional dancing to a modern indigenous form of art. Volume 6 is by a Swiss psychothera pist, Beatrice Vogt: Skill and Trust. The Tovil healing ntual ofSri Lanka as culturespecific psychotherapy (1998). Tovil is an indigenous healing ritual among the Sinhala of Sri Lanka, where it is used as a treatment for mental illness. During the ritual, which takes place at night, the patient embodies the demons who are the cause of his or her psychic problems. The ritual is a psychodrama, accompanied and induced by drum ming, dancing, and singing. The em phasis of this study is not on the pa

i*:

v o u

s i>: i . i*

a complete course In understanding speaking and writing

There is good reason to believe that the long-awaited and m ost recent addition to the Hodder & Stoughton ‘Teach Yourself se ries will soon occupy an im portant place in the pedagogical liter ature available to the ever-growing com m unity o f Nepal schol ars from all disciplines. Entitled ‘A Complete Course in Under standing, Speaking, and W riting N epali’, it was conceived, de vised, written, and even recorded (there are accompanying cas settes) by two o f the m ost prom inent scholars o f the N epali lan guage and its literature: Abhi Subedi and Michael Hutt. By M A R K T U R I N

IHHilH—

n p

he Nepali language is more widely spoJ L ken than is often imagined. Apart from being the national lan guage within the King dom of Nepal itself, it functions as a linguafranca for vast reaches of the cen tral and eastern Himalaya, most no tably throughout Sikkim and Darjeel ing in India and even in many parts of Bhutan. The niche that the Nepali lan guage has come to occupy is even more intriguing given the socio-linguistic composition of the country whence it came. Home to over eighty languages hailing from four different language families, Nepal has more need of a common tongue than many other countries twice its size. The success of the Nepali language in uniting an oth erwise ethnically and linguistically heterogeneous country over the past two hundred years must not be under estimated, even if the result has been at the expense of many of the minority languages. Abhi Subedi is professor of English at the Kirtipur campus ofNepal’s Trib■ H H

■ has

huvan University as well as a promi nent intellectual and poet. Michael Hutt, based at the School of Oriental and African Studies in London, is Britain’s most prolific writer on the literature ofNepal and the language in general. The success of the book by Subedi and H utt may well be attribut able to two major factors, the first being the joint nature of the enter prise. In being a collaboration between an English scholar who is a non-na tive, but fluent Nepali speaker and a Nepali writer famed for his approach able verse and prose, this book cap tures the flavour of the language which is sadly absent from other phrasebooks and primers. The results of this co-authoring provide the sec ond strength of the book as a whole. Teach YourselfNepali has a human edge, from the user-friendly grammatical explanations to the real-life conversa tions and dialogues that the reader en counters in each chapter of the book. The danger of such an approach is, of course, that what is gained in terms of simplicity of explanation is met with a concomitant loss in precision. It is a tribute to the authors that they care fully avoid this trap, and in the process

n e w s l e t t e r N ? 2 i • F eb ru ary 2000

have produced an excellent pedagogi cal work which fills a genuine gap in the market. Teach Yourself Nepali will be read, studied, and used by acade mics, development workers, moun taineers, tourists, and linguists alike as it is simply the best book for learning modern Nepali. The book is divided into 24 chap ters, each containing one or more true-to-life Nepali conversations. Whether it be a little gossip about the wealth of Jyoti’s father, the pros and cons o f village versus urban life, or bartering with a shopkeeper at the market, H utt and Subedi manage to capture and crystallize the essence of an archetypal Nepali discussion. On occasion, the authors include a sidebar on some social or cultural feature of Nepali life, such as an explanation of the concept o f pollution (page 110), an aside on Nepali poets (page 133) and even an insightful overview of re ligion in Nepal (page 205). These cul tural observations are invariably in teresting and well-written, and per haps there could even have been a few more of them on topics such as caste or nationalism. Whilst the introduction to the Devanagan script and Nepali phonology is concise and to the point, it is some what surprisingly concluded with three samples of quite terrible Nepali handwriting. On account of the low literacy rate in Nepal, it is undoubted ly the case that many people do not have the most manicured handwrit ing styles, but to present three equally awful variations in a row does some-

e p a li th is pack 320-page caufsebook 2xB0.nii«ate

cassettes

rwgal.1 far *v y

how give the impression that no Nepali can master penmanship. The single greatest shortcoming of Teach YourselfNepali is one which sadly affects the book from start to finish. Whilst every care has been taken to present the grammar of the language both simply and clearly, and with ex cellent examples, one gets the impres sion that the proof-reader and copyeditor were on holiday when the book finally went to press. It is literally rid dled with simple misspellings, mistransliterations, and typographical hiccoughs. The ‘English-Nepali Glos sary’, occupying the final seven pages, is a case in point. In a little over five hundred entries, I counted five mis takes of transliteration: the entries for ‘bangle’, ‘cow’, ‘distant’, ‘sweets’, and ‘woman’. There were also two further inconsistencies when spellings were offered in the main body of the text at variance with the one in the glossary. Although not wanting to be pedantic about small mistakes, and also fully recognizing that mistransliterations slip into even the most learned of books, the sheer number of mistakes is

tient but on the healer. Vogt, a psy chotherapist by training, became a pupil of a tovil healer in the Kandyan Highlands of Sri Lanka, Upasena Gurunnanse, during the years 1985-88 and was taught his skills. Three de tailed cases of tovil healing are used to demonstrate how the therapeutic practice of the healer fits into the Sin hala Buddhist view of the world. Volume 7, by Sirimal Abeyratne, deals with Economic Change and Political Conflict in Developing Countries (1998). Abeyratne argues that economic devel opment generates political conflict and uses Sri Lanka as a case study. Volume 8 is by an American scholar, Mark Whitaker, Amiable Incoherence. Manipulating Histories and Modernities in a Batticaloa Hindu Temple (1999). Making use of Wittgensteinian con cepts, Whitaker describes how the temple elite of Mandur in eastern Sri Lanka invented a temple ideology that engendered a strategic misunder standing (an ‘amiable incoherence’) between temple and state histories and policies in order to survive. Volume 9 (to be published in 2000) is expected to be a study by a Japanese scholar, Machiko Higuchi, about in digenous, or ayurvedic, medical prac tices. ■ The books can be ordered via any bookshop or directly from VU University Press, fax:+31-20-646 27/9. The editor-in-charge of the series is P eter Kloos, fax: +31-20-444 6722, or e-mail p.kloos@scw.vu.nl.

worthy of note, particularly because the book is intended as a pedagogical aid for those hoping to learn Nepali through self-study. Whilst mis transliterations are dotted liberally throughout the whole text, another concentration of errors has afflicted the ‘Key To Exercises’ section towards the end of the book. For example, in ‘Exercise 54’ on page 183, the reader is asked to write Nepali sentences com bining the information from two columns, but when one turns to page 276 to check the sample sentences, the answers are all back to front and have no bearing on the questions asked. For a pedagogical language book, such mistakes, together with their frequen cy, are surprising to say the least. Overall though, Teach YourselfNepali is a thoughtfully-written, carefullyexplained, and all-round excellent lan guage book for anyone wanting to learn the language. One can only hope that in the second edition, which must surely come given its success and pop ularity, the nagging errors, and typo graphical inconsistencies will have been weeded out. Only then will H utt and Subedi’s book be The Complete Course in Nepali that we have been waiting for. ■ - H u tt, M ichael an d Abhi Subedi Nepali: A complete course in understand ing, speaking, and writing London: Hodder & Stoughton,

Teach Yourself Books, 1999, 308 pp. + 2 cassettes,

ISBN 0-340-71130-2 M ark Turin is a member o f the Himalayan Languages Project in Leiden University and is completing his doctoral research on the Thangmi language. E-mail: markturin@compuserve.com.

NEW CATALOGUE OF MALAY, MINANGKABAU, AND SOUTH SUMATRAN MANUSCRIPTS he N etherlands houses im portant collections o f In donesian m anuscripts in a variety o f languages from Batak to Balinese, many o f w hich have been catalogued. We only have to th in k o f the massive four-volume catalogue o f Javanese m anuscripts in the Library o f Leiden

Short News

PUBLICATIONS

University and other collections in the N etherlands, produced by Th.G.Th. Pigeaud (1967-1980), and the catalogue on Malay m anuscripts ac quired by the Leiden University Li brary up to the year 1896, w hich was published in 1998 by Edwin Wieringa. However, despite all the catalogu ing efforts no comprehensive cata logue o f all the Malay m anuscripts in the N etherlands had been available so far. M ost Malay m anuscripts in the N etherlands are kept in the Library of Leiden University, b u t to my surprise there are as m any as fourteen other repositories as well, ranging from the

(Advertisements)

Asample PDF-document may be found at our website

(www.inghist.nl/guide.htm)

by P.j. Drooglever, M.J.B. Schouten and Mona Lohanda 90-5216-110-0,480 p., Dfl 45>~/ ^ 20,42

This publication may be ordered through a bookdealer or directly from the publisher Institute of Netherlands History po

Box90755 • 2509 lt Hague, Netherlands • tel. +3170 3*56400

fax +3170 3854098 • e-mail rgp@inghist.nl • Internet www.inghist.nl/

STUDIES

work which will never be repeated. has been acquired since the m ost re Royal In stitu te o f Linguistics and An Thanks to the endurance o f Teuku cent preceding catalogue descriptions thropology (KITLV) in Leiden to the Iskandar he has persevered in this in 1921 (Van Ronkel), b u t m any o f the Royal House Archives in Den Haag. work and he should duly be applaud mistakes and omissions its predeces After a long tim e and a complicated ed for hard work and enterprise. ■ sors contained have been corrected in history, the Catalogue o f Malay, Mithis catalogue. nangkabau, and South Sumatran Manu - Iskandar, Teuku, This catalogue, in com bination scripts in the Netherlands has finally Catalogue of Malay, Minangkabau, w ith the volume o f the catalogue by seen the light. H aving been started as and South Sumatran Manuscripts Wieringa, will enable scholars of early as 1976 it has taken alm ost a in the Netherlands Malay to work m uch more fruitfully quarter o f a century to be published, Documentatiebureau Islamin their field o f study than was ever and the history o f this complicated Christendom, P.O. Box 9515, possible before. The fact th at the m an and tim e-consum ing project is re 2300 RA Leiden, The Netherlands, uscripts outside the collection o f Lei vealed in the preface to the catalogue. xiii + 1095 pp., 2 Vols, den University Library are included The catalogue lists 2028 m an u ISBN 90-71220-09-5 especially makes this work a standard scripts in Malay, M inangkabau, and other languages in South Sumatra such as Rencong. They are described PHOTOGRAPHY IN THE SERVICE OF THE SULTAN concisely and titles, m easurem ents, num ber o f pages, eligibility, and virons o f Yogyakarta such as the oth in g is more other relevant inform ation such as Borobudur and the Pram banan tem fascinating th an secondary literature and editions are ples. Photos o f the tow n o f Yogyakarta __ pictures o f J - ^1„ seeing S all noted. The catalogue is completed are also included, allowing us to see 1 people and places you by extensive indexes on titles, au w hat a rural sleepy place it used I never th o u g h t ex thors, previous owners and collectors, to be. It also contains a biog isted. Javanese geographical names, and watermarks. raphy o f Cephas and his history is so often buried in As such it is a welcome addition to the son, Sem Cephat (1870scholarly works devoid o f catalogues o f Malay m anuscripts to 1918). M any o f the photos pictures th a t we are well w hich we have had access so far, if not form p art o f the collec inform ed about persons dow nright indispensable to scholars tion o f the Royal Insti w ith o u t having the o f Malay. tu te o f Linguistics and faintest idea o f w hat they Cataloguing has evolved from the Anthropology (KITLV), in looked like. com pilation o f a mere list o f titles and Leiden. It is a welcome ini The book Cephas, Yogcorresponding shelf num bers to ex tiative o f the KITLV to open yakana: Photography in the tensive descriptions o f a variety o f up its collection to a wider service o f the Sultan is a wonder. other features found in the m an u public by publishing this sort o f Full o f photographs o f a world no scripts. This catalogue falls into the books. It is to be hoped th a t it will longer there b u t able to be rediscov category a b it o f an old-fashioned continue to do so in future. ■ (DvdM) ered in photographs m ost o f which product. Even though this is the case, were taken by the Javanese Kassian it is extremely useful if our aim is to - Knaap, Gerrit Cephas (1845-1912). The book offers study the texts o f the m anuscripts, Cephas, Yogyakarta: Photography m any o f his photos, showing royal and n o t m anuscripts as such. The in in the service of the Sultan personages o f the Central Javanese ternational scholarly world o f Malay Leiden: KITLV Press, viii + 136 pp. court ofYogyakarta, theatrical perfor Studies can now finally learn w hat is ISBN 90-6718-142-0 mances and photos taken o f the available in the collections in Hol more than 100 photographs H indu Javanese antiquities in the en land. N o t only do we now know w hat

Short News

In 1996 volume 20 of the documentary edition Officiële bescheiden betreffende de Nederiands-lndonesische betrekkingen i945-3950waspublished. Asequel to this series is currently in preparation with documents covering the years 1950-1963. In these documents the dispute between Indonesia and the Netherlands on the future of Western New Guinea figures prominently. When completed, the core documents in the Dutch archives that focus on the decolonization of Indonesia between 1945 and 1963 will be available in print format and as digital appendices. Aside from this, the archives in the Netherlands and many archival sources outside the Netherlands contain vast amounts of additional information on this subject that are not included in the documentary edition. It is therefore the purpose of the present publication to serve as a guide to all relevant archives, both in the Netherlands and abroad. The Guide is divided into seven chapters, in which the official and semi official archives in the Netherlands, Indonesia, the United Kingdom, Australia, u s a and Belgium and those of the United Nations in New York are discussed.

Guide to the archives on relations between the Netherlands and Indonesia 1945-1963 ISBN

IN A S I A N

PUBLISH@CURZONPRESS.CO.UK INTRODUCING A MAJOR NEW SERIES Col le ct ed Writings of Mo d er n We st er n Schol ar s o n J a p a n Each volume in this important new series contains a substantial cross-section of the writings of an outstanding scholar of Japa nese Studies, thematically structured around essays, published and unpublished confer ence papers, journal contributions, chapters from multi-author volumes, translations and book reviews, as well as newspaper and general-interest articles and commentaries.

C a r m e n Blacker Co lle cte d Writings Special areas: religion, myth and folklore; and biographies. Collected Writings of Modern Western Scholars on l s iw ' l V873410 92 I

480 pp

Nov 1999

£95 00

Hugh Cortazzi Colle cted Writings Special areas: biographies; history; cultural exchange; arts; and business and foreign affairs.

Collected Writings o f M odem Western Scholars on Japan, volume 2 ISBN 1 873410 93 X 4% pp Nov 1999 £95.00

Ben-Ami Shillony Colle cted Writings Collected W ritings o f M odem Western Scholars on 432 pp

Feb 2000 £95.00

Set of first 3 volu me s of Co lle cte d Writings ISBN 1 873410 96 4

Feb 2000 : £250.00

Early E u r o p e a n Writings on Ainu Culture Travel o g u e s a n d Descriptions Edited by Kirsten Refsing, University o f Hong Kong THE AINU LIBRARY, Collection 3 ISBN 0 7007 1155 4 : 5 vols : Feb 2000

We st er n

Studies to 1 85 4 E nc ou nt e r Part

£525.00

Asian Food The G loba l a n d t he Local

Edited by Patrick Beillevaire, Ecole des Haute Etudes en Sciences Sodales, Paris This collection gathers all the primary texts, some hitherto unpublished, on the Ryukyu kingdom by western visitors from the 16th to tne mid-20th century. This first set cov ers the period up to the arrival o f Commo dore Perry in 1854. It is of interest to histo rians and anthropologists, as well as to everyone interested in Okinawa’s persist ent distinctiveness and its complex relations with the Japanese governments. Is&bPn rO O T M ^ 5 5 vols Apr 2000 £495 00

Edited by Katarzyna J. Cwiertka with B C. A. Walraven. Leiden University Transformations in the diets of Asian peo ples over the past century show up the ten sion between homogenisation and cultural heterogenisation which is so characteristic of today’s global interaction. This book demonstrates how local and global forces negotiate hybrid lifestyles, new commodi ties become embedded in new cultures, and new identities are embraced through new forms of consumption. Illustrated.

J a p a n ' s Hidden Christians 1 5 4 9 - 1 9 9 9

Historical Atlas of Indonesia

Edited, with a fu ll Introduction by Stephen Turnbull, University o f Leeds By the author of the landmark study The Kakure Kirishitan o f Japan. These two volumes bring together the most significant contemporary wntings on Japan’s Hidden Christians, encompassing some 450 years of the Christian tradition in Japan. Remark ably, the inheritors of this tradition remain ■hidden’ at the dawn of the new millennium. In the introduction, Turnbull reviews key el ements of the collection and takes the op portunity to bring his own study up to date.

Robert Cribb, University o f Queensland This pioneering volume traces the history of the region which became Indonesia in over 200 specially drawn full-colour maps with a detailed accompanying text, bring ing fresh life to the fascinating and tangled history of this immense archipelago. Con tents: Landscape and Environment; Peo ples; States andPolitics to 1800; The Neth erlands Indies, 1800-1942; War, Revolution and Political Transformation, 1942 to the Present; Commerce and Communications; Sources; Bibliography; Index.

Volume I: Open Christianity in Japan 1549-1639 Volume II: Closed Christianity in Japan 1639-1999

Special areas: modem history; crisis and culture; Japan, the Jews and Israel. IsltN | V873410 99 9

Ryukyu

Japan Library Historic Documents Senes ISBN 1 873410 51 4 2 vols Jan 2000 £200.00

Korea

A Cult ur al a n d Historical D ictionary

Keith Pratt, University o f Durham. & Richard Rutt . This unique reference work provides tac tual information about Korean history, poli tics, culture, and society from ancient times to the present. It shows the uniqueness of Korean culture, and the effect of the Her mit Kingdom’s special relationship with China and Japan over 2000 years. Approx. 1,500 entries, name index,cross-references. Durham East Asia Senes ISBN 0 7007 0464 7 672 pp ISBN 0 7007 0463 9 672 pp

r£n(V, Hard Jun 99 £60 00 Paper Jun 99 £16 99

ConsumAsiaN # 1 4 ISBN 0 7007 13336 258 pp Hard May 2000 £40 00

China's Economic Reform

Ways of t h e Kami

Edited by Christopher Howe, Y Y. Kueh & Robert Ash A collection and analysis of original, trans lated policy documents from a key period of Chinese development, providing both a current and a retrospective analysis of eco nomic reform efforts. Topics dealt with in clude the evolution of economic strategy; economic planning and the spread of mar ket mechanisms; technology transfer in in dustry; evolution of an agricultural system; the development of population policy; and foreign economic relations.

Curzon Studies in Asian Religion ISBN 07007 11708 320 pp Hard Mar 2000 £45.00 ISBN 07007 1172 4 320 pp Paper Mar 2000 £1499

ISBN 0 7007 1355 7 320pp

Hard Mar 2000 £45.00

New Fourth Army C o m m u n i s t Resi st ance a l o n g t h e Yangtse a n d t h e Huai,

1938-1941

Gregor Benton, University o f Leeds Looks at the first three years of the New Fourth Army, its distinctive background in the Three-Year War (1934-1937) of the Communist guerillas left behind in the south, and the unique political, military, and social environment that the army encountered in the lower Yangtze region, where it first joined battle with the Japanese. With illus trations and maps. lSBbfoC7007rl1071 X 960 pp

Hard Jul 99

£75 00

ISBN 0 7007 0985 1 :240 pp Hard May 2000 £75.00

The Secret History of t h e M ongols The Life a n d Times of C hi ngg is Khan Translated & introduced by Urgunge Onon, Universities o f Leeds & Cambridge A scholarly edition of this great 13th cen tury historical epic, the only surviving Mon gol source about the empire - the life, an cestors and rise to power ofChinggis Khan. This fresh translation brings out the excite ment of the epic with its wide:ranging com mentaries on military and social conditions, religion and philosophy. The introduction sets the work in its cultural and historical context Illustrated, with colour frontispiece. ISBN 07007 1335 2 :400 pp Hard . May 2000 £95.00

Shinto in History

A Study with D o c u m e n t s

The Bolsheviks a n d th e C h i n e s e Revolution 1 91 9- 19 27 Alexander Pantsov, Capital University Based mainly on previously unobtainable Russian archival sources, this book analy ses the Bolshevik concepts of the Chinese revolution and their reception in China. Is sues include the role of the three Bolshe vik leaders, Lenin, Stalin, and Trotsky in try ing to lead the Chinese Communists to victory, the real nature of the Trotsky-Stalin split in the Comintern, and a dramatic his tory of the Chinese Oppositioni st movement in Soviet Russia. ISBLk T7007^ US87 2 320 pp

Hard Feb 2000 £45 00

Edited by John Breen, SOAS & Marl Teeuwen, University o f Wales A critical study of Shinto from early times to the modem era. Essays highlight the dynamic nature of Shinto and shrinefristoty through the three-way relationship betweer local shrines, Shinto Agendas and Buddhism Topics include Shinto and Daoism in earl) Japan, Shinto and state ritual in early Japan Shinto and Buddhism in medieval Japan and Shinto and the modem state.

Religious Violence in Contemporary Japan The C a s e of Aum Shinriky Ian Reader, Nordic lnstititute o f Asiar Studies/University o f Stirling Looks at Aunt’s claims about itself and askf why a religious movement ostensibly fo cused on yoga, meditation, asceticism anc the pursuit o f enlightenment became in volved in violent activities. Reader exam ines Aum’s stance as a miilennialist movei prophecies of disaster, and dis cusses why tnis shift to an increasingly criti cal view of the world occurred. ISBN 0 ^ 3 ^ 1 ) 8 2* 200 pp ISBN 0 7007 1109 0 : 200 pp

Muslim

Hard Sep 99 £40« Paper Sep 99 £14 9*

Turkistan

Kazak Religion a n d Collective Me mo ry Bruce G. Privratsky, Yasawi University Reconstructs collective memory theory stripping it of its postmodernist baggage, anc proposing a place for it in a general theory of religion. This ethnography of Muslirr Kazak life describes the sacralisation of lane and ethnic identity, local understanding ol Islamic purity, the ancestor cult and its do mestic spirituality, pilgrimage at the tomb; of Sufi saints, and folk therapies shaped b> traditional Islamic medicine and Inner Asiar shamanism. With illustrations and maps. ISBN 0 7007 1297 6 336pp. Hard Mar 2000 £45.0(

Curzon P re ss Ltd., 15 The Quadrant, Richm ond, Surrey Tw9 1BP, England. Tel +44 (0) 20 8 9 4 8 4 6 6 0 , fax +44 (O) 20 8 3 3 2 6735, e-m ail publish@ curzonpress.co.uk, w eb w w w .cu rzon p ress.co.u k February 2000 •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r

N?2i • 4 1

N E WP UBLICATIONS

Wisdom Leadership

IN A S I A N

STUDIES

'Mission-Doers' in Madagascar

pie and lead to political apathy. The other impact, in Madagascar of the collapse of communism abroad was the shift of priorities of all foreign powers. Madagascar was no longer an interesting asset on the geopoliti cal scene. Neither the West nor the East wanted to invest financially or politically in Malagasy affairs. The on differents aspects of Indian cul Publication Ramambason’s w ell-w ritten and fascinating m onograph ‘M is field was open to marginal political a well-known auture, ethics, politics and quality of siology: Its Subject-M atter and M ethod. A study o f ‘m issionoperators of the Indian Ocean rim, JL thor on manage leadership. Although the book does doers in Madagascar has two sides. The first side is an assess which had never been serious histor ment ethics and values not prescribe quick fixes for in m ent o f m issiology as an academic discipline in a non-W estern ical partners of the Malagasy. The from an Indian perspec creased managerial effectiveness, it context. The second side is a case study o f a still fairly unex only solid partner abroad remains, tive. The author has ar does address managerial practice plored^ period in the history o f Madagascar, nam ely the sonot France, the former colonial gued in many previous books that and behaviour in a most fundamen called ‘Gorbatchev transition’ (1985-15)95). power, but the International Mone the Indian ethos as epitomized in tal manner and does this in a very tary Fund and the World Bank. Ra figures like Swami Vivekananda, Ra readable manner. All points of ethics j What, then, is the subject-matter of mambason laments over these devel m By MARC R. SPI NDLER bindranath Tagore, Sri Aurobindo, are illustrated through examples of missiology? Instead of a theoretical opments which amount to economic and Mahatma Gandhi, can also be an ethical practice or neglect. These ex r Ramambason is definition of «missions», Ramamba strangulation of Madagascar. The as yet little tapped source of ethical amples are taken from real life situa I 1 not unknown at son analyses the reality of what Mala dreams of independence and libera empowerment and good manage tions. The fact that the setting of the I S the HAS: he at gasy Christians are doing in mission. tion are not realized and, says Ra ment. The practical application of book is Indian does not restrict its tended the international They are what he calls ‘missionmambason, must be revived. ‘Mis this ethos, Chakraborty had devel value to Indian readers only. The congress on Madagascar doers’. They are not applying a theory sion-doers’, to use his words, cannot oped in course of numerous training ethics the book sets forth can be ap in Leiden in 1994 and his from above or from abroad. In other stay idle, and indeed may provide workshops held for Indian private plied with success in many other contribution on ‘The Merina/Sakalawords Ramambason develops a missithe country with new incentives and and public sector organizations. The cultural settings. Also this fact, va Encounter in the Region of ology ‘from below’, not a missiology concrete benefits. book entitled W isdom Leadership: D ia Chakraborty illustrates through ex Analalava’ was published in the pro from top down’. His method is ‘in Ramambason’s approach could be logues and Reflections is the latest fruit amples. The book invites the reader ceedings of the congress (Cultures o f ductive’, not ‘deductive’. In this way, defined as a sophisticated kind of‘lib of this endeavour. to reflect seriously on the funda Madagascar. Ebb and Flow o f Influences/ he discovers that the mam ‘mission eration theology’ giving full weight The first part of the book contains mentals of human existence. ■ Civilisations de Madagascar: Flux et re ary’ activities of the Protestant to the contribution of the social sci edited notes which Chakraborty flu x des influences, edited by Sandra Church in Madagascar pertain to de ences to the construction of reality. took during interviews he had con - Chakraborty, S.K. Evers & Marc Spindler. Leiden: IIAS, velopment and healing through spe After all, in spite of his vindication of ducted with CEO’s of major Indian Wisdom Leadership: 1995. Working Papers Series, 2, 193cialized departments which are more an inductive method’, starting from companies and banks. These inter Dialogues and Reflections 219). For several years he has been a or less independent from the clerical below, he cannot escape the methodviews make for fascinating reading. New Delhi: Wheeler Publishing. teacher at the Protestant Theological hierarchy. ological imperative of every scientific They summarise at times quite pri 1999 - pp X+214, Faculty of Antananarivo where he cre The second side of the book is a approach, namely the necessity of vate thoughts of CEO’s and Manag ISBN 81-7544-177-1 ated a Department ofMission Studies. case study of the ‘Gorbatchev transi having a plausible starting point at ing Directors about themselves, Since 1998 he has served as Secretary tion' in Madagascar in the period the top of one’s mind. ■ their working life and the state of for Mission Development and Educa 1985-1995. One wonders why a polit ethical behaviour in their organisa tion with the Council for World Mis ical development abroad, far away - Ramambason, Laurent W. tions. The second part of the book of Dr Victor A. van B ijlert, Universiteit Leiden, sion in London. The enhancement of from Madagascar, is seen as relevant Missiology: Its Subject-Matter and fers a choice of Chakraborty’s essays E-mail: vavanbijlert@hotmail.com mission studies is part of his profes to the study of this country. Is this Method: A study o f ‘mission-doers’ sional duty. not a return to the ‘deductive in Madagascar The present reviewer presumes that method’? Ramambason would an (Advertisement) Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang, readers of the HAS Newsletter will be swer that the collapse of commu Studies in the Intercultural History more at home in the second part of nism in the Soviet Union really had of Christianity, Vol. 116,1999, 208 pp. Ramambason’s book Missiology: Its an impact in Madagascar, because Subject-M atter and M ethod than spe the communist model was at that cialists in the science of missions or time operative in Madagascar, in the missiology. But a one-sided reading of official policy of the government as M a rc R. Spindler, is Emeritus Professor the book would be misleading. The well as or in (part of) the opposition. o f Missiology and Ecumenics, double-track approach of this book is The fading of the model cannot but Universiteit Leiden. precisely what makes the book fasci paralyse the political will of the peoE-mail: marc.spindler@wanadoo.fr nating. Ramambason’s point of departure is the conviction that, even in a nonSCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY & SOCIETY Westem context, the science of mis sions must be a field of research and Short News ~ r aunched in 1996, in science and technology etc. Science, teaching. This is not only because the I this is the first truly Technology and Socieiy is a peer-remissionary factor’ (Roland Oliver) h j international bi-an viewed journal which endeavours to has historically been very important nual journal devoted to combine a scholarly perspective with in many countries, and not the least the developing world in policy relevant issues drawn from the in Madagascar, but because present the emerging interdisci above fields. It is published in March developments cannot be understood plinary fields of Science, Technology, and September. The editors are V.V. without taking into account the per and Society Studies (STSS). The rela Krishna, CSSP/SSS, Jawaharlal Nehru manent reality of this factor. In other tionship between science, technology University, New Delhi and Roland words, ‘missions’ are not (only) a fac and society is a complex one, particu Waast, Institut de recherche pour le tor of the past, and they are definitely larly in developing countries. The development, Paris. Authors should not the affair of expatriates or a for study of this relationship through provide four hard copies of their re eign interference in national matters. scholarly and multidisciplinary in search contribution. Articles should Ramambason takes the case of Mada quiry is necessary if we are to under be between 6000 to 8000 words. ■ gascar very seriously because in this stand the ways in which advances in country missions have been an affair science and technology influence so All contributions should be sent to: of Malagasy people since the estab ciety, and vice versa. Science, Technolo The Editorial Office, STS Journal lishment of Christianity as an official g y and Society invites research articles d o D r V.V. Krishna religion in 1869. This does not imply and reports from scholars in natural Centre for Studies in Science Policy an immaculate record, on the con and social sciences working in one of (Room N0.232), School o f Social Sciences trary. Ramambason is very critical of the STSS areas of sociology of science Jawaharlal Nehru University the nationalist bias of Malagasy and technology, economics of techni New Delhi 11006 7, India ‘home’ missions in the period ofMerical change and innovation studies, so na monarchy in the 19th century. As cial history of science, philosophy of For further information: long as national unity is not realized science, science policy studies, gender w k@ jnuniv.ernetin in depth, as long as ethnicity remains relations in science and technology, a strong factor in peoples's attitudes development studies relating to sci For subscriptions and requests for sample and relations, Malagasy missionaries ence and technology issues, energy copies, contact the publisher at: among other Malagasy should take and environmental studies, research SAGE Publications In d ia Pvt Ltd these factors into account, among & development and technology man 32 M-Block Market, Greater Kailash I many others. agement studies, quantitative studies

New Delhi 1 10048, India

4 2 . • h a s n e w s l e t t e r N ?2i • February 2000

ASI AN

ART

The Collection of Indian Art at the Hermitage The main landmarks of itsformation In May 1966 a group of ancient and medieval works of art - stone sculp tures, from third to tenth centuries, South Indian bronze statuettes, twelfth to fifteenth century, minia tures - was presented to the Her mitage as a gift of the Indian govern ment by the Indian ambassador, Mr. vate collections and the re-organisa By O L G A D E S H P A N D E Triloki Nath Kaul. The permanent tion of museums, Indian items Indian exhibition was thereby con (bronze statuettes, miniatures, ap ndia, a land of mira siderably enriched by some valuable Asian Art plied art) gradually began to trickle cles and fabulous exhibits: a relief of the Mathura into the Hermitage. wealth, long ago at school, mottled red sandstone, third The separation of the Indian art tracted medieval Russia. century AD, showing Durga Mahisobjects into an independent collec India was discovered hasuramandinï, a representation of tion began after World War II and here earlier than in Eu lovers-mithuna, light sandstone, rope: in 1466 Afanasij Nikitin, a Tver’ this marked the beginning of the tenth century, dating from the time proper Indian art collection. As be merchant had already reached India of the Pratihara dynasty; a frieze fore, it still consisted mainly of via the Volga River, the Caspian Sea, from the Hoisalesvara temple in miniatures and applied art, with the Persian, and Arabian Seas and spent Halebide, near Mysore, representing exception of a small group of stucco six years there. His ‘Notes about Ganesa and eight goddesses, con statues from Hadda, the Afganian Roaming beyond Three Seas’ (Niki sorts of the main Indian gods; a gra part of Gandhara. These twenty tin 1948) are considered to be one of cious bronze sculptural composition items in total (mainly fragments of the best sources on medieval India. Uma-Mahesvarimurti - a seated shattered figurines of the Buddha), Notwithstanding the constant at Shiva and his spouse, Uma; a sheet of were discovered by the Delegation tempts to establish trade relations a Jain manuscript with a miniature Archéologique Franchise en Afgha with India (‘foreign guest markets’ of the Western Indian school, four nistan in the late 1920s. They were in Astrakhan and Moscow and the teenth to fifteenth century; a Kangra presented to the Hermitage by seventeenth-century Semion Little school miniature showing ‘Shiva Musée Guimet in 1936 on the occaembassy to Shah Aurangzeb’s court, and his family’, fifteen items in 1695-1702), there were only inciden total. A sculptural group ‘Yaksha Gotal one-to-one Russian-Indian con mukha and his beloved Chakresvari’, tacts during the eighteenth and made of highly polished light sand Bl nineteenth centruries. Although li stone, eighth century, has become a 1 ....... .... — .. Russian indology began to unfold by real adornment of the museum exhi the middle of the nineteenth centu bition (fig. 1) - it is characterized by ry, Russian collectors (nobility and the strength, restraint, and a certain intellectuals) were traditionally far monumentality of the sculpted more interested in Ancient Egypt form. Its consummate modelling re and Antiquity; or the Near or Far veals perfectly pram, one of the main East, ‘omitting’ India. The few ob requirements, of Indian aesthetics, jects brought to Russia were concen reproducing ‘vital breath, filling trated mainly in the Museum of An one’s body. thropology and Ethnography, the During the next few decades, only oldest Russian ethnographic museapplied art objects of the Mughal pe | um. riod were added to the collection. Having been collected according Then in September 1999 a new, high to the tastes and interests of the ly significant gift was made by a pri Russian tsars, the Hermitage collec vate person, Mme Krishna Riboud. Female head. India, 5-6 c. tions had contained practically no Mine Krishna Riboud is widely Red andstone, h. 48 sm. examples of Indian art till the end of known as an eminent public figure I the nineteenth century (with the ex and a scholar, an esteemed author on ception of a group of Mughal ornaFar Eastern textiles, a chevalier of the sion of the International Iranian | ments captured by Nadir-Shah in Legion of Honour, president of Asso congress timed to coincide with the Delhi in 1736 and sent as his person ciation d’Etude et Documentation de millennium of Firdowsi’s birth. al gift to the Empress Anna IoanovTextiles d’Asie (AEDTA) founded by Additions to the ancient and me na. Until the 1960s they were gener herself. Mme Riboud, who is Indian dieval parts of the Indian collection ally registered as ‘Persian’ in the Mu born herself, belongs to a family of only came very slowly - such objects seum inventories. remarkable Indian cultural and pub had been virtually absent from the The first large collection of Indian lic figures of the late nineteenth private Russian collections, and the art objects - silk textiles and Cash early twentieth centuries, being a museum itself was unable to acquire mere shawls, metalwork and ceram close relative of the most prominent things abroad because of the specific ics, miniatures on ivory - came to Indian enlightener of those days position in which of the Soviet m u the Hermitage after the grand tour Rabindranath Tagore. An old friend seums found themselves. In 1957 the of the Orient in 1890-1891 by the heir of the Hermitage, as early as 1966 Oriental Department was enriched to the throne, Nikolaj AleksanMine Riboud had given three rare by a precious gift presented by the drovitch. Later most of them were miniatures (Bihar school, fifteenth Afganian king, Muhammad Zadirtransferred to the aforesaid Museum seventeenth century) representing shah, after he had made the acquain of Anthropology and Ethnography scenes from the ancient ‘Ramayana’ tance of the Hermitage collections, at various times. epic as her personal gift to our Muse especially that of the Oriental De This situation persisted up to the um. partment. He donated a schist head Bolshevik revolution - those sepa Her new gift consists of four beau of a Bodhisattva from Bagram, AD rate items of Indian art (miniatures tiful items of ancient and medieval 200, and a stucco Buddha head from and applied art) that arrived at the Indian art. A female head, (fifth Hadda, AD 500. Hermitage were usually registered sixth century) of exquisite work The most generous gifts to the as ‘Persian’. After the revolution, in manship (fig. 2) is a real gem among Hermitage were then still to come. the course of the confiscation of pri-

Although India had been ‘discovered’ in Russia as early as 1466, there were only individual Russian-Indian contacts for some four centuries. Russian collectors were seldom interested in Indian art and culture. This is why the Hermitage Indian art collection only began to be formed in the 1950s. Since then it has been enriched by various official and private gifts-

Yaksha Gomukha and his beloved chakresvari. India, 8 c. lig h t coloured sandstone, h. 22 cm.

them. In Russia ancient and me dieval Indian art is represented only at the Hermitage; even here classical Gupta art (fourth - sixth century) had been absent so far - thus one can imagine the significance of such a gift, not only for the Hermitage but for the nation as a whole. Besides this masterpiece she has given two heads of Mathura school, Kushan period, a Buddha (?) head, first - second century AD, and a Bod hisattva head, second - third century AD, both of red mottled sandstone, together with a big red sandstone fragment presenting a Shivite teacher or saint from Madhya Pradesh, tenth - twelfth century. Thus during the half a century since its formation, the Hermitage Indian collection has been enriched by several very interesting items each enabling museum visitors to comprehend Indian art and culture in more depth. ■

Nikitin, Afanasiy Khotdtetrie za tri motya Afanasiya Nikitina 1466-1472 (Notes about Walking Beyond Three Seas by Afanasiy Nikitin 1466-1472) Moskow-Leningrad, 1948, Grekov, B.D. and V.P. Adrianiva-Peretz (eds)

D r O lga P. D esh p a n d e, PhD (Art history),

Senior Curator, Indian, Siamese, and Indonesian collections, Head o f the Far Eastern Section, Oriental Department The State Hermitage; art and culture o f Southeast Asia

(A d vert i s ement )

RIJKSAKADEMIE VAN BEELDENDE KUNSTEN

m mm

ions for the period Jan - Dec 2001 before 31 Mar<

A d v is o rs H a n s A arsm an D e r m is A d a m s A n s u y a B lo m M a rie J o s e B u rk i

H o u H an ru

M ic h e la n g e lo P is to le tto

K e e s H in E ls H o e k Jo an Jo n as A n n e - M ie V a n K e r c k h o v e n

H e r m a n n P i tz J a n w i ll e m S c h r o f e r B e r e n d S tr i k

A lain C u e f f R ic h a rd D e a c o n M ic h e l F r a n c o i s J u d ith G o d d a rd D an G rah am S ig u rd u r G u d m u n d s a o n

J a r o s l a w K o z lo w s k i G uy M ees L is a M ilroy M a tt M u liic a n A via N e w m a n E ls v a n O d ijk w a x /p la s te r

m e ta l

g la ss w o o d w o rk

p la s tic s p a in t o ffse t e n g ra v in g lith o g ra p h y

M a n fre d S tu m p f M o n ie k T o e b o e c h Luc T oym ans B a r b a r a V a n d e r li n d e n E m o V e r k e rk R o y V iile v o y e D en y s Z a c h a ro p o u to s c o m p u te r a n d e le c tro n ic te c h n o lo g y sound v id e o /f ilm p h o to g ra p h y

In t h e R i jk s a k a d e m i e 6 0 s t u d i o s a r e a v a i l a b l e f o r y o u n g a r t i s t s f ro m t h e N e t h e r l a n d s a n d a b ro a d . E a c h y e a r 30 a r tis ts a re s e le c te d . b r o c h u r e re q u e s ts b y p o s t, b y fa x o r b y e m a il

T +31 (0)20 5270300 S a rp h a tis tra a t 4 7 0 1 0 1 8 G W A m s te rd a m F +31 (0)20 5270301 info@rijksakademie.nl T h e N e th e rla n d s http://www.rijksakademie.nl

February 2000 •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r

N? 2 i • 4

ASIAN 9 SEPTEMBER

1999

QUEENSLAND

ART

►

JANUARY

GALLERY,

ART

2000

AUSTRALIA

Presaging the Future T he Third Asia-Pacific T riennial o f Contem porary Art op en ed at th e Q ueensland Art Gallery in Brisbane, Australia, on Septem ber 9, 1999. Included in th e exh ib ition were the works o f 77 artists from tw enty countries in Asia and th e Pacific. O n Septem ber 10 a remarkable perform ance by Indonesian artist D adang Christanto served as a sym bol for th e en tire T riennial project. E ntitled ‘Api di bulan M ei 1998’ (Fire in May 1998), C hristanto’s work, com p risin g 47 life-size papier m aché hum an figures, was set aligh t in a m ovin g cerem ony related to th e recent tragedy o f hundreds burned to death in riots and revolution in Indonesia. C hristanto also referred to th e events in East Tim or. The im m e diacy o f th is work reinforces th e T riennial’s purpose o f under sta n d in g th rou gh an inform ed d ialogu e w ith artists in Asia and th e Pacific. It is n o t th at th e Australian, Asian, and Pacific cura tors set o u t to p resent p olitical art, b u t they do seek o u t art that engages w ith issues reflecting th e dynam ic and ch an gin g nature o f art and society in th e Asia-Pacific region today. ■ By C A R O L I N E T U R N E R

here are other equally powerful statements within this Triennial: Hiroshi Sugimoto’s extraordinary photographs of a Japanese temple built to prepare for the Bud dhist m illennium centuries ago chal lenges Western notions of time, Katsushige Nakahashi’s life-size replica of a crashed World War Two Japanese Zero fighter which will be burned at the end of the exhibition in a Bud dhist ceremony reminds us the next century may be as full o f hum an con flict as previous centuries; Cai Guo Qiang’s bridge to the future is about the meeting of cultures and the diffi culties of such engagements - those crossing the bridge m ust pass through a shower of water at its cen tre; Tribal Indian artist Sonabai’s clay sculptures remind the viewer of the continuing, rich folk traditions dat ing back thousands of years contrast ing with Ravinder Reddy’s sculpture of a gilded fibreglass goddess, itself a mixture of ancient tradition and street exotica in today’s India. From the Pacific there are works of spectacular creativity such as the col laboration between Samoan Michel TufFery and Futuna Islander Patrice Kaikilekofe involving communities of Islander Australians in a performance utilizing bulls made of bully (i.e. corned) beef tins - a commentary on how Pacific lifestyles changed with

Asian Art

*7 « * '

Ah Xian, Busts (from ‘China. China’series), 1998, porcelain body-cast with hand painted underglaze blue decoration.

4 4 ‘ IIAS

newsletter

the coming of Europeans since the eighteenth century. Perhaps most im pressive of all are the new works by se nior Australian Aboriginal artist and elder, Michael Nelson Jagamara, which are an explosion of ancient signs on canvas done in ways which recall the force and mastery of Chi nese calligraphy. Representing a new Australia in this exhibition are the works of Australian artists Guan Wei and Ah Xian, both of whom came to this country ten years ago after the events of Tiananmen Square. Ah Xian's ceramic heads are decorated with traditional Ming dynasty de signs and the artist is currently the re cipient of an Australia Council grant to return to China for further study on the decorative motifs of Imperial Chinese porcelain.

Genuine dialogue Inaugurated by the Queensland Art Gallery nearly ten years ago, the Tri ennial project includes exhibitions, publications, and conferences, an ex tensive library research collection of catalogues, and more recently a com m itm ent to forming a collection of the contemporary art o f the region. An innovation for this Third Trienni al is the Virtual Triennial and associ ated website (http://www. apt3.c0m). The Third Triennial also has a chil dren’s event for age groups three to twelve and a strong youth and educa tion emphasis. The educational as pects o f the project underpin its ori gins in a belief that Australians need ed to know more about the region in which we live. An important principle o f the Triennial has been that Aus tralian curators are not attem pting to dominate debates but that Aus tralians should listen very carefully to what our colleagues in the region are saying about art and social and politi cal issues. One major concern of some critics has been the lack o f one overall unified viewpoint. In fact, this diver sity has been the project’s strength, allowing challenges to West-centric methodologies and genuine dialogue based on m utual respect. Contemporary art in this region is the product of centuries of tradition combined with the more recent en gagements with the West as well as the social, political, and technological changes which have pushed the world to a global society. The art in the AsiaPacific Triennials, however, reinforces

N821 • February 2000

knowledge of the survival of cultures, demonstrates how the art emerges from diverse cultural traditions as well as reflecting contemporary is sues, confronts and refutes the notion of a global sameness and opens up real challenges for Western art historians in terms of future directions and de velopments. The theme of the Third Asia-Pacific Triennial was ‘Beyond the Future’ but it is clear that, whatever the future o f art in this region, it will not be dominated by Western per spectives and Western ‘influence’ may well come to seem insignificant to the historians of the future. The 1993 exhibition was the first in the world to bring together contem porary Asian and Pacific art. This raw mixture has also given the project some unique features and allowed the exploration of complex questions regarding the continuation of tradi tions, the significance o f folk art and popular culture to contemporary ex pression, and the contemporaneous nature of indigenous art from the Pa

Mellajaarsma, Hi Inlander (Hello Native), performance 9 September 1999.

cific. This entire project has had a re markable impact in Australia with audiences at the three exhibitions held this decade reaching 350,000 close to two per cent o f Australia’s population. In the process the Trien nial has gained an international pro file, not only within the Asia-Pacific region, where it is now accepted as one o f the major forums for the dis cussion of contemporary art, but with increasing interest from North America and Europe. After the 1996 Triennial Judith Stein wrote in Art in America that ‘... it is clear th at the Queensland Art Gallery’s Asia-Pacific Triennial series is affecting the global discourse of contemporary art.’ If this is the case it is because the until re cently neglected contemporary art of the Asia-Pacific region has an impor tant message for artists and audi ences internationally.

■ : *

f i l l

conference was organized by the Queensland Art Gallery, Griffith Uni versity, and the Australian National University. Speakers stressed the ne cessity o f exploring the contexts in which the art is produced and the need for a more sophisticated under standing of diverse cultural tradi tions, the renewal and evolution of those traditions, the long histories in the region of cultural engagement over the centuries, and the complexi ty of the intermarriage of ancient tra dition with more recent encounters with the West. The relevance of the concepts of post-colonialism and post-modernism to this region were challenged as was the idea of an expe rience o f modernity giving way to post-modernism, especially in Asia as well as the idea of ownership o f these concepts by the West. Speakers agreed on the need for a new language o f art criticism but rejected the concept o f a meganarrative. The globally mobile nature of art today has raised new questions. Eco nomic and political crises have con tinued to affect the work of artists in the region, many of whom are direct ly involved with their communities in raising awareness of issues such as poverty, civil war (as in Sri Lanka), the place o f women within Asian and Pa cific societies, ethnicity, rapid urban development, environmental degra dation, and social dislocation. Speak ers pointed to the need for ethnic and cultural understanding, and to the continuing importance o f communi ty, family, religion, and spirituality. Paris-based Chinese artist Chen Zhen, for example, in his dramatic work ‘Invocation of Washing Fire’ seeks to confront the ‘fever’ o f Asian capitalism and economic ‘greed’ iron ically by evoking ancient spiritual

cleansing through a medical-alchem ical fire in a furnace constructed of thousands of abacus beads, Chinese wooden chamber pots, and broken computers. Dutch-born Indonesian artist Mella Jaarsma asked audiences to consider racial and ethnic ques tions through a work where one could imagine wearing another’s ‘skin’. Her costumes in the exhibition are constructed from chickens, frogs, fish, and kangaroo. Several artists dealt with communication through language, including Xu Bing’s new English calligraphy, (English written in Chinese characters), Shigeaki Iwai’s dialogue project where partici pants speaking different languages give the illusion of understanding one another, and Vong Phaophanit’s fragmented Laotian script construct ed in neon which defies translation in its focus on materials and light rather than the meaning o f language. Sessions on screen culture, new technology, and web art were held in conjunction with MAAP99 (Multime dia Art Asia Pacific). Sessions were also held in Chinese, Bahasa Indone sia, and Japanese. An indigenous wel come was delivered to the conference by Aboriginal artist and elder, Lilia Watson, representing the traditional owners o f the land, and there were a number of sessions devoted to in digenous issues in Australia and the Pacific. Delegates also called for sup port for the people of East Timor. The conference unfolded against the tur moil and bloodshed o f the referen dum aftermath, reminding all who attended of the volatile and unpre dictable contexts in which the art in the exhibition is produced. ■

Caroline Turner, Deputy Director

The Conference Coinciding with the Third Asia-Pa cific Triennial o f Contemporary Art an international conference was held in Brisbane, Australia, from 10 to 12 September 1999. Seven hundred dele gates attended from every continent, making this the largest art confer ence ever held in Australia. Ninety speakers, many of them artists, looked at developments in art in Asia and the Pacific over the decade. The

Queensland Art Gallery, Brisbane, Australia, and Project Director for the Asia-Pacific Triennial series, 1993, 1996, 1999, wrote this report while the APT3 was taking place.

Asia-Pacific Triennial o f Contemporary Art, Queensland Art Gallery P.0. Box 3686

South Brisbane QLD 4 10 1, Australia

Michael Nelsonjagamara, Wildyam, 1998.

Tel.:+ 6 1-7-3840 7298 Fax:+61-7-3844 8865 Http:llwww.apt3.net

ASIAN

ART THE GATE FOUNDATION

THE GATE F O U N D A T I O N ' S AN I N T E R N A T I O N A L ART F O U N D A T I O N DEVOTED TO P R O M O T I N G I N T E R C U L T UR A L E X C H A N G E OF C O N T E M P O R A R Y ART. THE GATE F O U N D A T I O N AI MS TO STI MUL AT E KNO WL E DG E AND U N D E R S T A N D I N G OF

Keizersgracht 613 1017 DS Amsterdam The Netherlands

gI e

P.O. Box 814 xooo AVAmsterdam Tel: +31-20-620 80 57 Fax: +31-20-6390762 E-mail: info@gatefoundation.nl Website: http://www.gatefoundation.nl

Foundation

C O N T E M P O R A R Y ART AND A R T I S T S , E M P H A S I Z I N G N O N - WE S T E R N A ND MI G R A N T CULTURES.

Creating Spaces or Freedom 9P rince Claus Award

On 8 Decem ber 1999 the Prince Claus Fund for Culture and D evelopm ent announced the winners o f the 1999 Prince Claus Awards. Since r997 the Prince Claus Awards have been present ed to people and organizations in recognition o f and to en courage their exceptional achievem ents in the field o f culture and developm ent in Africa, Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean. Am ong the ten laureates who received the Awards were Tsai Chih Chung, cartoonist (1948. Taiwan) and Kenneth Yeang, architect (1948, Malaysia). The journalist and author Ku Pi-lin g (Taiwan) and the architect Charles Yencks (1939» U n it ed States) have each written an en ligh ten in g piece on the works o f Tsai Chih Chung and K enneth Yeang respectively.

Ken Yeang: The Reinvention o f the Skyscraper By CHARLES JENCKS

en Yeang (1948, Asian Art T1^ T Penang, Malaysia) came onto the ,— ] scene of international arX-_X I chitecture with the RoofRoof House, constructed or himself in 1984. This curious;ounding structure, built as an envionmen,tal experiment in the hot and tum id climate o f Kuala Lumpur, does ndeed feature the roof. It has a gigan:ic sunshade, a curved white pergola the most assertive of urban forms, it is :hat leaps over the roof below in the going to continue to dominate cities Elat arc of a projectile, a white comet and therefore it will have to be tearing down through the blue sky in rethought environmentally and in 1 staccato burst oflight and shadow. A other ways. porous sunshade on top of a covering One should also mention the cul for the rain; that is, a Roof+Roof, a po tural nature of this research, for that etic and pop architecture created by is also a rarity, both in this building climatic necessities. In Malaysia the type and this part of the world, where prevailing temperature is 30 degrees, resources are directed elsewhere. As the humidity 70 per cent, and foreign Ken Yeang has written: ‘The fight for ers who fly in never forget the first Independence (in Malaysia) m ust be impression of this equatorial sauna. matched by a fight for an indepen Since constructing this tour deforce in dent architecture based on indepen sparkling white concrete (now a bit dent thought.’ Most architectural green with moss), Yeang has devel cultures remain provincial backwa oped an ecological architecture for ters and to open them up they need larger building types and it is this, the inspiration and free thinking of a which has made him one of the forces creative leader. Regional architecture to be reckoned with internationally. can challenge the global forces of Actually, he first developed the ap commerce and culture only where proach while studying in the early new knowledge is being produced by 1970s: at the Architectural Association individuals who can translate it into a in London and at Cambridge Univer creative art. sity, where he wrote his thesis in 1972 It no longer grows from within entitled ‘Design with Nature: The eco local practice and local materials. logical basis/or design. Here, he also did Globalization is much too powerful a thesis on ersatz culture and the sim for the old determinants of form. Ba ulacrum, under my direction. Ab sically, in the last hundred years, stract thinking and research are es there have been three types of tall sential to his work. By the year 2000 he building: the flat slab or ‘sky-scraper’, will have eight books to his credit and the point tower or ‘sky-pricker’, and several key papers that analyse the tall the spread-out cluster or ‘sky city’. building, climatically considered. If I Ken Yeang has challenged the boring am right in predicting his impor homogeneity with what he has chris tance, then Yeang will have about the tened the Bioclimatic Skyscraper. The same century of influence, for, how ecological imperative has made his ever questionable the skyscraper is as

structures lively not dull, muscular instead of flat-chested and with an inviting, gregarious face rather than the blank stare of a Mafioso behind dark glasses.

Sty courts Yeang’s concoctions are cheerful; they open out a different face on every side partly because the climate is dif ferent on every side. Beyond these considerable aesthetic and symbolic qualities, they have provided several environmental innovations that are equivalent to traditional and modern techniques. For instance, whereas low buildings had such climatic filters as verandas, trelliswork, and louvres, he puts them high above ground; where Le Corbusier introduced the roof gar den and concrete brise soleil, he com bines these elements with atria to produce ‘sky courts’ shaded by reflec tive aluminium louvres, without Le Corbusier’s problem of re-radiating the blocked heat back into the house every night. Yeang’s work is empirically driven and systematic in addressing ecologi cal concerns. While its main points can be gleaned from his ‘The Sky scraper Bioclimatically Considered’ (1996), its most striking embodiment is the fifteen-storey tower near Kuala Lumpur Airport. Instead of an au thoritarian and introverted state ment of a multinational corporation, the IBM Tower is a robust and pic turesque expression of an emerging technology. Most notable of his ener gy-saving devices are the two spirals of green sky courts that twist up the building and provide shade and visu al contrast with the steel and alu m inium surfaces, The reinforced con crete frame is further punctuated by two types of sun screens and a glass and steel curtain wall, which, along with the sloping base and metal crown, make the essentially high-tech image much more organic - what could be called ‘organitech’, a synthe sis of opposites. I see the IBM Tower and his ideal version of the eco-skyscraper the Tokyo Nara Tower (1992) as essential ly post-modern. They play the double coding in a dramatic way: the vertical columns are strongly opposed by the sliding horizontal sunshades, the spi ral of gardens and planting are juxta posed with the flat glazing. A green hill leaps over a car park nature overcoming the machine while solid fights against void, the rooftop spikes,

meant to hold solar cells, play off against curves and a sensuous pool. Ken Yeang can enter a field, a specu lative development, in an exploding civilisation, and still think environ mentally. Contemplate the contradic tions. It has led to many tall buildings that are flashy, to be sure, and in the larger sense unecological, because they are huge and high tech. But each one is a pragmatic testing of a green idea, however small, and a step in his construction of a new paradigm. As a result we are beginning to see the new skyscraper emerge with what he calls ‘valves’, movable parts (including windows that open!), filters such as exterior louvres, lift and service cores located on the sides where it is hot, sky courts and vegetation used to cool, contrasts between sunshades and clearglass. All this leads to a new, articulate, and dynamic body. It leads to a new theory that, like Le Cor

busier’s Five Points, has been summa rized and replicated around the world. If the skyscraper becomes as re sponsive to its environment as ani mals and plants have to theirs, then we can look forward to its having the variety of the natural world. Every face, and every individual, slightly different. If it does evolve towards this ecological diversity, then Ken Yeang is to be thanked. The result would be an alternative to the reigning mode of corporate architecture and a new syn thesis responding to the climate of a particular place, finding inspiration for a new architectural language in forces that are ultimately cosmic. ■

Charles Jencks is the author of the best selling The Language o f Post-Modern Architecture’, ‘Architecture Today’, and ‘The Architecture o f the Jumping Universe’.

m lOURTESY OF THE ARCHITECT

The 1

Ken Yeaiig, Menara Mesinia^a, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia 1989-92 February 2000 •

i i as n e w s l e t t e r

N?2i • 4 5

ASIAN PLEASE REFER TO THE HAS NEWSLETTER WEBSITE ( h tt p : // w w w . n a s . n l/ )

FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT MUSEUMS WITH ASIAN ART COLLECTIONS.

AGENDA FEBRUARY

2 0 0 0

MAY

2 0 0 0

GERMANY

AUST RAL I A

M useum fü r K u nsthan d w erk

A r t G a lle ry o f N e w South W a le s

Schaumainkai I 7 60594 Frankfurt am Main Tel.:+49-69-212 34037 Fax:+49-69-212 30703

Art Gallery Road The Domain Sydney 2000 Tel.:+ 6 1-2-9225 1744 Fax:+61-2-9221 6226

I 7 Feb ru ary >■ 24 A p ril 2000 Monsters, Monks and Maidens:Japanese Paintings, Illustrated manuscripts and Woodblock Prints from the 16th to the 18th Century Forming the basis o f the collection are 25 Nara ehon (coloured illustrated manuscripts) recounting popular legends and stories relating to courtly life, episodes from the w orld of craftsmen and merchants, temple myths, and tales of spirits and demons.

6 May 2000 >- 2 July 2000 Chinese Bird and Flower Painting Flowers and birds are ubiquitous motifs in Chinese art.The endurance and resonance o f these motifs arise not only from th e ir natural beauty, but also th e ir cultural associations.This exhibition comprises over 100 o f these superb paintings, dating from the 15th to early 20th centuries.

H e rz o g A u gu st B ib lio th ek W o lfe n b iitte l

I I N o v e m b e r 2000 ► 30 January 2 0 0 1 Masks o f Mystery: Chinese bronzes from the sacrificial pits o f Sanxingdui The remarkable 1986 discovery in Sichuan province in southwest China o f tw o large pits containing bronzes in the shape o f human heads, fragments o f gold, jades, and a large number of elephant tuskes, revealed a sophisticat ed society previously unrecorded.The bronzes represent the rich creativity o f the peoples living in southwest China in the second millennium BCE. A standing figure measuring 262cm and weighing 180 kg is regarded as the sin gle most remarkable Chinese archaeo

Lessingplatz I 38304 Wolfenbüttel Tel.:+49-5331-808 0213 7 ► 28 May 2000 East Asian manuscripts from St. Petersburg Manuscripts from the Silk Road, the Lotus Sutra and its world.

22 Feb ru ary > 9 A p ril 2000 Japanese-style Printing:Works by artists from the Setagaya city

Tummelplatz 10, A 4020 Linz Tel.: +43-732-7744 19 Fax:+43-732-7744 8266

T h e W a t a r i M useum o f C o n te m p o ra ry A r t 3-7-6 Jingumae Shiuya-ku Tokyo 150-0001 Tel.:+ 8 1-3-3402 3001 Fax:+81-3-3405 7714

U n til 27 Feb ru ary 2000 Indonesia, Art pictures o f the world world views The exhibition shows a selection of classical bronzes, figures o f wayang puppets from Java, wrought iron and m etalwork and impressive textiles from South Sumatra.The more than 500 objects come mainly from the collection o f the Viennese Ethnological Museum and from private collectors.

U n til end M arch 2000 Game Over

Kyoto N a tio n a l M useum 527 Chayamachi Higashiyama-ku

5 U n til 26 M arch 2000 Japanese Dolls

j J 10 ^

THE NETHERLANDS R ijksm useum Hobbemastraat 19 PO Box 74888 1070 DN Amsterdam Tel.:+31-20-673 2121 Fax:+31-20-679 8146

■

HAS

new sletter

Fokke Simonszstraat 10 I0 I7 T G Amsterdam Tel./ Fax:+31-20-623 1547 U n til 16 M arch 2000 Indian paintings and drawings from the collection o f Albert Heyn

R ijksm useum van O u d h ed e n Rapenburg 28 P.0 Box 11114 2301 EC Leiden Tel.:+31-71-516 3163 Fax:+31-71-514 9941

Silver drinking horn with gilding with the protome of a desert lynx catching afowl, Iran or Central Asia, znA- i st c. BC, Ritual and Splendour, Museum van Oudheden.

The south wing o f the museum pre sents a new permanent exhibition of Asiatic art. The choice has been made not to categorize according geo graphical area - China, Japan, India, In donesia but to divide the collection into sculpture, paintings, and decorative art.

ISh

U n til I I A p ril 2000 Miniature Paintings from India The Rijksmuseum has a notable collec

N921 • February

2000

U n til 19 M arch 2000 Ritual and Splendour, Masterpieces of ancient a rt from the Miho Museum, Japan

R ijksm useum v o o r V o lkenku n de Steenstraat I, Leiden Tel.:+31-71-516 8800 Fax:+ 3 1-7 1- 5 12 8437 Http:/lwww.rmv.nl U n til 24 A p ril 2000 Cephas.Yogyakarta, Photography in the service o f the Sultan 1845-1912 During the nineteenth century, photo graphy in Indonesia was chiefly a European pastime. However, the Indonesians also began taking th e ir own photographs.The Javanese Kassian Cephas (1845-1912) was a pioneer in this field. From 1870. Cephas, appointed royal photographer to the co u rt of the Sultan in Yogyakarta, was responsible fo r taking portraits o f members of the royal family, especially during the reign o f Sultan Hamengkubuwono VII. Cephas also photographed performances and ceremonies at the court, and HinduJavanese monuments in the Yogyakarta region, such as the Prambanan and the Candi Borobudur. U n til 30 A p ril 2000 Bhutan: Land o f the Roaring Dragon Bhutan has the magical sound o f a faraway land, but few people know much about the country. Its other name, Shangri-La (meaning Paradise), has reinforced this fairytale image. ‘Bhutan: Land o f the Roaring Dragon'

- ...

' *

\ ' »««.

’

E u

jê h

mm In sight o f the monster, Sayohime sings the Lotus Sutra, Monsters, Monks and Maidens, Museum fü r Kunsthandwerk is the largest exhibition about the country ever to be shown outside of Bhutan itself.The exhibition visited Austria, Switzerland, and Spain before coming to the Netherlands. It explores the fascinating history o f the country, its religion, its monarchy, and the everyday life o f its people. Beautiful objects will be on display, including the famous Raven Crown, intricately painted thankas (religious scroll paintings), statues o f Buddha, and artistically embroidered pieces o f clothing. 16 June >- 17 S e p te m b e r 2000 Holland, Japan, and Love To commemorate the 400 years of Dutch-Japanese relations a special exhibition features a wide spectrum of Japanese a rt from around 1600, ranging from ceramics and lacquerware to folding screens, landscape paintings, and calligraphy. Like the Netherlands, Japan experienced a Golden Century in the 17th century. During this period, the foundation was laid fo r a sense of beauty, composition, and sense o f space now recognized as being typically Japanese.The tea ceremony assumed its form and tea masters formulated the rules of aesthetics. Dutch presence on Deshima had an im portant effect on Japanese culture. It eventually led to the introduction of the concept o f being true to nature and the application of Western perspective in painting.

SINGAPORE

Kyoto 605 U n til 5 M arch 2000 Chinese Painting and Calligraphy from the Ueno Collection

F o u nd ation fo r Indian A rtis ts

1-2, Kinuta-koen Setagaya-ku Tokyo 157 Tel.:+81-3-3415 6O il Fax:+81-3-3415 6413

SchloB m useum

U n til I I M arch 2000 Royer's Chinese Cabinet Despite the flourishing trade w ith China in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, little was known about the country and its people at this period.The Hague lawyer Jean Theodore Royer (1737-1807) was to change all that. He assembled a large collection o f popular and unfamiliar Chinese artefacts: porcelain, lacquerware, everyday objects, clothing, gouaches, and books. Selected items from the Royer collection w ill be on display, presenting a fascinating picture o f this many-sided amateur scholar.

S e ta g a y a A rt M useum

A US T RI A

Goldgoblct decorated with bulls, Northwest Iran, i2 th- n clt c. BC, R itual and Splendour, Rtjksmuseum van Oudheden.

tion of Indian miniatures which can rarely be shown to the public because of th e ir sensitivity to light.This small exhibition w ill show fifty examples of miniatures produced at the co u rt of the famous Great Mogul, Akbar. in the late sixteenth century, miniatures paint ed later and elsewhere in India under strong Mogul influence and miniatures made specially fo r the Dutch market in the seventeenth century.

J APAN

logical find o f the last decade.

•* ....

ART

G e n e ra l in fo rm a tio n National Heritage Board 93 Stamford Road, Singapore 178897 Tel.: +65-332 3573 Fax: +65-334 3054

S ingapore A r t M useum 7 1 Bras Basah Road Singapore 189555 Tel.:+65-332 3215 Fax:+65-224 7919

work. Among the artists are Tang Da Wu, Matthew Ngui, and Vincent Leow. 8 June 2000 >• 29 A ugust 2000 Southeast Asian Paintings Part o f the millennium celebration, the Singapore A r t Museum is collaborating w ith C hristie’s Singapore to present an exhibition o f rare paintings, featuring im portant examples o f artw orks from the 19th and 20th centuries, from In donesia, the Philippines, Singapore, Malaysia.Thailand, and Vietnam.The paintings w ill be presented chronologi cally, demonstrating the development of modern a rt in the region.These works have been carefully sourced and select ed from private and institutional collec tions, many o f which have never been publicly exhibited before. For media en quiries, call 332 3215. U n til 29 O c to b e r 2000 Imagining the Century: Singapore Art Museum Collection Exhibition series The exhibition provides a particular view o f colonial rule, war and revolution, independence and social changes in Southeast Asia through the artist’s world. Featuring key pieces from the Museum's permanent collection, this exhibition surveys Southeast Asian modern and contem porary works produced since the 1930s.

S ingapore H is to ry M useum 93 Stamford Road Singapore 178897 U n til 7 M arch 2000 Changing World, Changing Hopes This exhibition presents an insight into the lives o f the children growing up in an ever-changing world. U n til 31 D e c e m b e r 2000 The Dioramas - A Visual History of Singapore Twenty dioramas visually trace the history and development o f Singapore from a fishing village to a modern nation state.

U n til 28 M arch 2000 Rose Crossing An exhibition comprising Australian artists o f both Asian and W estern backgrounds. A rtists in the exhibition include Guan Wei, John Young, Felicia

A sian C ivilisations M useum 39 Armenian Street Singapore 179941 Tel :+65-332 3015 Fax:+65-883 0732

Kan, John Wolseley. I 7 Feb ru ary 2000 ► 28 May 2000 How to Authenticate Chinese Painting The exhibition shows authentic traditional Chinese ink scrolls and their copies completed during Ming Dynasty and later. Copying is something very peculiar to the Chinese history of art, encouraged and approved as a means o f learning.The paintings on display are drawn from the Liaoning Provincial Museum which includes works in the form er Imperial Collection. For media enquiries, call 332 3215. Images available in December 1999. 8 A p ril 2000 >• 9 July 2000 FEAST! Food in Art Contemporary visual artists employ food in their a rt o r refer to its consump tion and diverse symbolisms in their

U n til 19 M arch 2000 Prized Possessions:Jewellery from Thailand, Malaysia, and Indonesia The exhibition brings together over 300 pieces o f jewellery and related objects fo r personal adornment from the diverse cultures ofThailand, Malaysia, and Indonesia. U n til 31 M arch 2000 The Dating Game - Calendars and Time in Asia The exhibition explores a variety of Asian calendars. U n til 31 D e c e m b e r 2000 Chinese paintings from the Yeo Khee Lim Collection Featuring landscape and bird and flow er paintings from the Ming and Qing dynasties.__________________________

ASIAN UNITED KINGDOM

SWITZERLAND

ART ;i

V ic to ria and A lb e r t M useum Cromwell road

B ritish M useum and M useum o f M ankind

B au r C o lle c tio n 8 Rue Munier-Romilly 1206 Geneva Tel.:+ 4 1-22-346 1729

Great Russelstreet

Fax: + 41-22-789 1845

Tel.: +44-1 71-412 7111 Fax:+44-171-323 8614 1 8480

London WC 18 3DG

T em p o ra ry exhibition Japanese Jewellery and Chinese Costumes

U n til 20 Feb ru ary 2000

s p riy

South Kensington

Itfp?

London SW7 2RL Tel.:+ 4 4 -1 71-938 8264

m m ?

U n til 23 A p ril 2000 Mao: From Icon to Irony, the history o f the cult o f Mao Zedong from the mid-1940s to the 1990s

Gilded Dragons: Buried treasures from China's Golden Ages

T A I WA N T h e N a tio n a l Palace M useum 2 2 1 Chih-shan Rd., Sec.2

A loan exhibition from China focusing on the Tang Dynasty, a cosmopolitan period in Chinese history, rich in precious gold and silver treasures.

Wai-shuang-hsi, Taipei

U N I T E D STATES OF A M E R I C A

A p ril - S e p te m b e r 2000

Fax:+886-2-2882 1440

Japanese Clocks, Zodiac and Calendar

Http://www.npm.gov.tw

Prints

H o n o lu lu A c a d e m y o f A rts 900 S. Beretania Street Honolulu, Hawaii 9 6 8 14-1495

Tel.:+ 8 8 6 -2 -2 8 8 1 2021

L S

Tel.:+ 1-808-532 8700

szm

Fax: + 1-808-532 8787

C o ntinuing exhibition U n til 25 D e c e m b e r 2000 Han Dynasty Narratives in Painting

6 A p ril - 13 August 2000 Visions from the Golden Land: Burma and the A rt o f Lacquer

and Calligraphy

The paintings and calligraphy in this exhibition all draw upon Han dynasty narratives fo r th e ir inspiration.The famous narratives can help lead to a better understanding o f Confucian social ideals, the quest fo r long life, and many of the other features that defined and shaped Han society.

B ru n ei G a lle ry SOAS, University o f London Thornhaugh Street Russell Square London, W C IH 0XG Tel : + 4 4 - 171-323 6230

I 2 A p ril 2000 - I 8 June 2000 Pakistan: Another Vision

A comprehensive survey o f painting in Pakistan during the fifty years of independence. Approximately one hundred works represent every aspect of contem porary painting.

C h e lte n h a m G a lle ry and M useum Clarence Street Cheltenham GL50 3JT Tel.:+ 44-1242-237 431

U n til 10 A p ril 2000 / 999 Collectors’ Exhibition o f Archaic Chinese Jades The jade carvings on display are p ri marily from the ‘classical age’, and in clude several pi disks o f great beauty and significance, that were all probably used in ancient rituals to assist in com munication w ith supernatural forces.

U n til 26 M arch 2000 Chinese Papercuts by Wang Yan Chang

A combination of large and small paper-cuts. Wang Yan Chang was awarded the title o f ‘First-class Folk A rtis t’ by UNESCO and the Chinese Folk A rtis t Association in 1995.

C hinese C o n te m p o ra ry G a lle ry 2 / Dering Street, London W l R 9 AA Tel.:+44-1 71-498 898

M arch 2000 Shen Fan

Yue Minjun

Percival D avid Fo u nd ation o f C hinese A r t

G a lle ry o f Fine arts Silpakorn University

School o f Oriental and African Studies

KIan Gwan House I I , 19th floor

53 Gordon Square

14011 Wireless Road

London W C IH 0PD

Bangkok 10330 Tel.:+66-2-255 9100 ext. 2 0 1

Tel.:+44-1 71-387 3909 Fax:+44-171-383 5163

Fax:+66-2-255 9113 14 O pen ed I F ebruary Alter-Ego

The exhibition aims to develop a closer relationship between Thailand and Eu rope and to enhance cross-cultural dia logues. European artists w ill be working in Thailand as artists in residence.

*2» ’<«•»» * *

period (1912-1926).

T h e M e tro p o lita n M useum of A r t 5th Avenue at 82 nd Street New York NY 10028 Tel.:+ 1-212-879 5500 Fax: + 1-212-570 3879

O pen ed 9 June Arts o f Korea

The installation showcases 100 o f the finest examples of Korean a rt in all major media - ceramics, metalwork, lacquerware, sculpture and paintings — from the N eolithic period through to the eve o f modern times.The selections are drawn from public and private collections in Korea, Japan, and the United States. Continuing exhibition Chinese Galleries Reinstallation

On show in the Douglas Dillon Galleries and the Frances Young Tang gallery w ill be 8th to 20th-century paintings.The H erbert and Florence Irving Galleries fo r Chinese Decorative A rts will house jades, lacquers, textiles, metalwork, and other objects from the 12th to 18th centuries.

The Percival David Foundation houses a fine collection of Chinese ceramics and a library o f East Asian and Western books relating to Chinese a rt and culture.The Foundation exists to prom ote the appreciation, study, and teaching o f the a rt and culture o f China and the surrounding regions.

,, .

Persian adaptation o fa H indu story on the^jod Vishnu, Mughal, Akbar, c. 1586, Body colour andg old on paper, M iniature Paintings from India Rtjksmuseum Amsterdam

U n til 17 A p ril 2000 The Yangzhou Baguai, or The Eccentrics o f Yangzhou

The sixteen scrolls on view were creat ed by a loosely associated group of indi vidualistic artists who found themselves drawn to Yangzhou during the 1700s.

Alienation and Assimilation: Contemporary Images and Installations from the Republic o f Korea

These photography and multimedia art from Korea reflects the dramatic changes that have occurred in recent years in Korea. U n til 7 May 2000 Bamboo Masterworks:Japanese Baskets

New York

from the Lloyd Cotsen Collection

Sheer Realities: Clothing and Power in Nineteenth-Century Philippines

The exhibition displays the nineteenth and early twentieth-century clothing and accessories of the elite Mestizos juxtaposed w ith those o f the people of the archipelago.

This exhibition o f more than 100 works offers an opportunity to view the beauty, craftsmanship, and historic and cultural importance of this a rt form.

1001 Bisson net, TX 77005 Houston Fax: + 1-713-639 75 9 7

Textiles

W itty and fantastic images endowed w ith auspicious meanings are the focus o f this exhibition o f Chinese garments and textiles drawn from the collection o f the Seattle Asian A r t Museum.

popular stories.

U n til 7 May 2000 The Golden Age o f Archaeology: Celebrated Archaeological Finds from the People's

Fax: + 1-818-449 2754

Republic o f China

A sian A r t M useum San Francisco

Using a rt from SAM’s collection, students compared Asian W orks o f art to works from o ther cultures, exploring the ways that artists express similar ideas, such as prayer, wisdom, and fashion, in th e ir different cultures.

The exhibition showcases the distinct regional carving and decorative styles created to portray the heroes, demons and deities in Chinese folk legends and

Tel.:+ 1-818-449 2742

and Qing Dynasties.

Eleven Heads are Better Than One: Sixth-

Puppets

Caroline Wiess Lwa Building

California 91101

An exhibition o f ceramics from the permanent collection, including objects from the Lydman, Snukal and O tto Collections, which includes ceramics from the Han,Tang, Song.Yuna, Ming,

U n til 2 A p ril 2000

Worlds o f Fantasy - Chinese Shadow

46 North Los Robles Avenue Pasadena

Tel.:+ 1-206-654 3100

U n til 2 A p ril 2000

T h e M useum o f Fine A rts H o uston

Tel.:+ 1-713-639 7300

Pacific A sia M useum

1400 £ Prospect,Volunteer Park Seattle, Washington 98122-9700

U n til 2 A p ril 2000 Woven Symbols: Chinese Garments and

100 Washington Square East

23 Feb ru ary - 22 A p ril 2000

S e a ttle A sian A r t M useum

Graders Connect with SAM

U n til 30 A p ril 2000

G re y A r t G a lle ry New York University

A p ril - May 2000

THAILAND

Many o f the early 20th century a rt movements, which originated in the West, such as Impressionism, A r t Nouveau, and A r t Deco, also affected the modern Japanese artist.This exhibition highlights Japanese works of a rt and everyday items, which show modern design elements of the Taisho

Fax:+44-171-323 6010 E-mail: g allery@soas.ac.uk

Pi disc w ith inscription ‘Perpetual Happiness’, Eastern Han Ttynasry, Chm-hua-t'ang Collection, The N ational Palace Museum

Taisho chic

The Asian Art section is

Several hundreds objects gathered from all over China cover the broad chrono logy from the Neolithic Period through to the Han Dynasty.The exhibition pre sents new perspectives on early Chi nese civilization and art, and documents the most recent excavations and ideas in the field o f Chinese archaeology.

produced by The Gate Foundation in Amsterdam, the Netherlands. Please send all information about activities and events relating to Asian art and culture to:

Golden Gate Park San Francisco California 94118 Tel.:+ 1 -4 15-379 8801

THE GATE FOUNDATION K E IZ E R S G R A C H T 613 1017 DS A M S T E R D A M

U n til 19 M arch 2000 Jade: Stone o f Heaven

The huntfo r glow-worms, fragm ent o f a summer scene, Monsters, Monks and Maidens, Museum j i i r Kunsthandwerk

This exhibition explores the technical aspects of jade production and the Chinese love fo r the material from the N eolithic period to the twentieth century.

THE N E TH E R LA N D S T E L .: +3 I -2 0 - 6 2 0 80 57 F A X : + 3 1 - 2 0 - 6 3 9 07 62 E- MAI L: G A T E @ B A S E . N L WWW.BASE.NL/GATE

F e b ru a ry 2 0 0 0 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r N 8 2 1 •

I NDEX

FORUM (General News) - Some Reflections on the Formation o f the Buddha Image

(Special theme: South Asian Literature) - Variations on Modernity: The many faces of South Asian literatures........................... 7 (Southeast Asia) - Global Flop, Local Mess: Indonesia betrayed by East Timor and the West................21

HAS

N E W S L E T T E R 21

(Southeast Asia) - Traditional Malay Literature............ - Riau in the Reformation Era.............. - Repossessing a Shrine in R iau .......... - Popular Culture and Decolonization: Mimicry or counter-discourse?......... I (East Asia) - The Myth of Labour Relations in Overseas Chinese Enterprises - The Korean Model of Coup....... (CLARA News) - The garment industry in Australia, Indonesia and Malaysia..................

28 26 27 25

29 33

(East Asia) - The Legacy of Macau............................................................ 31

(Editorial page) - Co-editor for this issue’s theme ‘South Asian Literature’: Thomas de Bruijn................................................................2 (South Asia) - South Asia Editor Netty Bonouvrié..................................... 16 - Professor Chakraborty Visits the Netherlands................... 20 (IIAS News) - Cultures of Mainland Southeast Asia, IIAS Extraordinary Chair: Interview with Barend jan Terw iel.........................52 - A Philosopher of Leisure: Vincent Shen.............................. 53

INSTITUTIONAL NEWS (Southeast Asia) - Collecting Alms as a Character of Burmese life: Photographic prints at the Kern Institute Leiden

(East Asia) - Written Sources on Yao Religion in the Bavarian State Library..............................

(IIAS News) - Staff and Research at the IIAS.............................. - IIAS Research Partners..........................................

50 50

(ESE Asia Committee News) - ESF Asia Committee N ew s................................... - ESF Asia Committee Fellows................................ - ESF Asia Committee Members.............................. - European Associations for Asian Studies..............

56 56

57 57

(Other institutes) - EU-China Academic N etw ork............................................ 59 - Seminar for Languages and Cultures of Central Asia.........60 - The Institute of International Relations............................ 60 - The North American Taiwan Studies Association (NATSA)................................................................................61

(CLARA News) - Visiting Fellowship: CLARA Programme..............

(Other Vacancies) - Sardami Kuljit Kaur Bindra Chair in Sikh Studies

INTERNET (General News) - The Asia-Pacific-Forum........................................................ 6

REPORTS PEOPLE

VACANCIES

(General News) I - Asian Religion................................................................. - Entrepreneurship and Education in Tourism................ - Evaluating Visual Ethnography..................................... - Between Culture and Religion: Muslim women’s rights

(Special theme: South Asian Literature) - The Internet: A virtual public sphere..................................13 4 4 5 6

AGENDA

(South Asia) - The Madison South Asia Conference 1999...........................16 - Tracing Thoughts through Things: Seventh Gonda Lecture by Professor Janice Stargardt.......18 - Himalayan Languages........................................................ 19

(Asian Art) - Art Agenda........................................................................46-47

(Southeast Asia) - The Democracy Movement in Burma Since 1962............... 22 - Burma Update Conference...................................................22 - ‘Hinduism’ in Modern Indonesia........................................ 23 - ‘Hinduism’ in Modern Indonesia (2)................................... 23 - EUROVIETIV........................................................................ 24 - Biak in N ijm egen................................................................. 28 - Continuity and Crists in the Indonesian Economy............ 27

(ESF Asia Committee News) - ESF Asia Committee Agenda.................................................57

(IIAS News) - IIAS Agenda........................................................................... 51

- International Conference Agenda...................................62-63

SHORT NEWS

(East Asia) - Turning Points in Historical Thinking.............................. 30 - Fifth CHIME Conference: Music in cities, music in villages.......................................... 30 - Literature & Theory, China & Japan.....................................32

(General News) - Towards the Millenium Round: Asia, The European Union, and Larin America

(New Publications on Asian Studies) - Publishing M odels............................................................... 35

(SoutheastAsia) - The Role ofTimor Lorosae................................................... 21

(IIAS News) - Asia and European Union’s Common Foreign and Security Policy: A One-day conference in Brussels at the European Parliament................................................. 49

(New Publications on Asian Studies) - Catalogue of Malay, Minangkabau, and South Sumatran M anuscripts............................................ 41 - Photography in the Service of the S u ltan .......................... 41 - Science, Technology, and Society........................................ 42

(CLARA News) - Labour in Pakistan............................................................... 54 - Subcontract Labour in Asia...................................................55

(IIAS News) - 2nd International Convention of Asia Scholars..................57

(ESF Asia Committee News) - Chinese Transnational Enterprises and Entrepreneurship: South China and Southeast Asia during the Twentieth C entury.......................................... 58

(General News) - Pal Nyfri...

PUBLICATIONS RESEARCH PROJECTS (Special theme: South Asian Literature) ! - New Literary Histories for Nineteenth Century In d ia ....... 8 - ‘Modernity’ in Kannada Literature....................................... 8 - ‘Balanced Action’ in Modern Hindi L iterature................... 9 j - Modern Hindi: Language, nation, and popular cu ltu re__ 9 - Hindi and Urdu Short Stories: Exploring the borders between Hindi and U rd u .............. 10 - Some Unexplored Areas in the History of Urdu Fiction ... 10 - Bengal’s Modernity and Nationalism 1880-19x0: From regional cultural politics to international impact .. 11 - The Role ofTamil Folkore in Modern Literature.............. 11 - Narrative Traditions of R ajasthan..................................... 12 - Modernity in Hindi Poetry................................................. 12 - Hindi, Brajbhasa, and Bengali Poetry of the 19th Century.. 13 (Central Asia) - The Samantabhadra Archives: The Nyingma Tantras Research Project............................ 14 - Political Reforms in Mongolia............................................ 15 (South Asia) j - An Indian Fieldworker in the Netherlands: Reverse anthropology?.......................................................... 17 - Relics or Sacred Burials?........................................................ 18 - Urbanization in Medieval O rissa........................................ 18 - Sri Lanka Portuguese Creole verses.......................................19 4 8

■ h a s n e w s l e t t e r N? 2 1 • February 2000

(Centra! Asia) - A Voice for Tibet.................................................

(South Asia) - The Rebirth of Tagore in Latvia......................... (New Publications on Asian Studies) - New IIAS Book Series......................................... - Precious Metals in Early South East Asia........... - Early Chinese Medical Literature..................... - Sri Lanka Studies Series..................................... - A Nepali Language Feast................................... - Wisdom Leadership............................................ - 'Mission-Doers’ in Madagascar.........................

LIST OF ADVERTISERS 40 40 .2 42

ASIAN ART (Asian Art) - The Collection of Indian Art at the Hermitage: The main landmarks of its form ation............ - Presaging the F u tu re....................................... - Creating Spaces of Freedom: The 1999 Prince Claus aw ard ............ .............

43 44

- The University of Melbourne................................................. 5 - Nordic Institute of Asian Studies........................................ 34 - Great Britain China Centre...................................................35 - John Benjamins Publishing Company................................. 35 - CNWS Publications............................................................... 36 - Brill Academic Publishers.....................................................37 - The Old Bookroom............................................................... 38 - Rodopi...................................................................................38 - Asian Rare Books...................................................................38 - Institut Monumenta Serica................................................. 39 - IDC Publishers...................................................................... 39 - Institute of Netherlands H istory........................................ 41 - Curzon Press..........................................................................41 - Hotei Publishing...................................................................42 - Rijksacademie van Beeldende Kunsten............................... 43 - Hotel Wilhelmina................................................................. 59 - King Hotel............................................................................. 59

45 - Notes and Queries................................................................. 64 - Advertisement Information................................................. 64

MAS

Pink Pci^es

N E W S L E T T E R 21 I N S T I T U T I O N A L HAS

P-49 /

CLARA

P 54 /

NEWS

ESF Asia Committee

P 5^ /

N E WS HAS MAI N OF F I CE LEI DEN

International Visiting address:

for Asian Studies

HAS

P-59/

International Conference Agenda p62/Products & Services P *4

MA S

Institute

Institutes in the Limelight

N onnensteeg 1-3, le id e n Postal Address: P.O. Box 9515

H AS B R A N C H OF F I CE A MS T E R D A M

Telephone: +31-71-527 22 27

Spinhuis, rooms 214, 215, and 216

Telefax: +31-71-527 41 62

Oudezijds Achterburgwal 185

E-mail: HAS@RULLET.LeidenUniv.NL

1012 DK Am sterdam , The N etherlands

Newsletter contributions:

Telephone:+31-20-525 36 57

2300 RA LEIDEN

HASNews@RULLET.LeidenUniv.NL

Telefax: +31-20-525 36 58

THE NETHERLANDS

h ttp ://w w w .iia s.n l

E-mail: HAS@pscw.uva.NL

f o r A5'

he one-day Con 24 NOVEMBER 1999 ference was de BRUSSELS, BELGIUM signed to provide succinct, topical infor mation and analysis to Members of the Euro pean Parliament, their staff, and other interested parties on econom ic, political, social, and security de velopments in Asia and their possi ble significance and implications for the European Union. The meeting reviewed these issues from a multi disciplinary perspective and brought a set of Asia experts and analysts from across the European Union to the European Parliament. Given the relatively large amount of attention paid to CSFP issues, it was seen as a positive signal that contemporary is sues regarding Asia are on the agen da. There were strong hopes that this conference could stimulate research and education within the frame work of the Asia-Europe Meetings A full one-day conference on Asia and for which a special programme the common foreign and security policy [PEARL) has been set up. (CFSP) o f the European Union was held The conference programme con on Wednesday 24 November 1999 at the sisted of three parts, covering the European Parliament in Brussels. More state of the CFSP, an examination of than 150 Members o f the European developments within, Asia and an Parliament, representatives o f foreign analysis of the challenges which There was felt to be a general embassies and missions, as well as South China Sea, Beijing has these may pose for Europe. The first agreement that Europe can various specialists and employees o f acquiesced in the mutually session devoted most of its time to act like a block, or perhaps the European Commission attended. accepted task of making sure ‘Political, Economic, and Security In better, like a co-operation The conference was hosted by the that the sea is not the exclu terests in Asia’. Simon Manley, Head forum, but in Asia ‘blocks’ Strategic Alliance in close co-operation sive arena of one border state. of the Southeast Asia Desk, external are not clearly defined. with the Brussels-based European He concluded that China is relations division, presented the ASEAN has played an impor Institute for Asian Studies. The Strategic involved in an ongoing dia CFSP in general and the perception tant role in the co-operation Alliance consists o f the Institute fur logue with Asian govern of Asia in this policy framework. The between the EU and Asia, but Asienkunde, Hamburg, the International ments, but that the Euro EU has gradually but consistently in the future we shall see that Institute for Asian Studies, Leiden / pean Union should be alert strengthened its CFSP, in particular a common strategy towards Amsterdam and the Nordic Institute to where a new model in in through the Maastricht and Amster China has not yet been de o f Asian Studies, Copenhagen. Its open ternational relations is need dam treaties. vised. structure enabled other European ed. Paul Lim of the EIAS focused on The second part of the institutes to join as was demonstrated Stein Tonneson (University the opportunities and constraints morning was devoted to the by this conference. of Oslo) gave an overview of which the CFSP offers for the future prospects for EU-Asia Trade, co-operation in Asia with a development of relations between Finance, and Investment. It focus on Eastern Asia or Pa Europe and Asia. He asked what the started with a challenging cific Asia. In ten challenging EU has in common, especially in a analysis by Ari Kokko, Abo points he sketched the differ situation in which the national gov By J O H N KLEI NEN Academic University in Fin ent scenarios for multilateral -----ernments of the member countries land, of the signs of economic relations and pointed to a still determine the foreign policy recovery in Southeast Asia with a fence of European social and democ perceived ambivalence in the Euro agenda, while they are inescapably focus on Malaysia, Thailand, and ratic values. pean approach to the region which is influenced by Washington. A com Vietnam, and with an emphasis on During the initial discussion ses linked to the fact that some of its mon CFSP is still in the making. In the importance of Japanese econom sion, a lively exchange of questions goals and interests are difficult to the process the EU should work on ic policies to regenerate growth and answers provided the essential project driven-policies, instead of reconcile. A scenario in which APEC across the region. Kokko’s most im clarifications and pertinent details plays a dominant role is not in Eu issue-driven policies. portant conclusion was that Singa which necessarily had to be omitted rope’s interest. If APEC dominates, Francois Godement of the Institut pore, Thailand, the Philippines, and from the short presentations of the then the EU will need to bolster Francais des Relations Interna Malaysia are reporting a reasonable main speakers. Clarification was es tionales concentrated on the role of ASEM as an Euro-Asian alternative, pecially asked for the role of the US good economic performance after but ASEM will never be able to China in Asia and especially on the the financial crisis of 1997, but each and Russia, both countries which match APEC in importance. Europe role of the Chinese People’s Army in country has achieved this in its own seemed to be underplayed in the pre should formulate a strategy for en territorial conflicts like Taiwan, way. Malaysia e.g. pursued a differ sentations for different reasons. hancing the influence of Asian na where US and Japanese interests are ent crisis management policy to that Other questions asked about the tions in global, multilateral institu involved as well. The over-arching of Thailand, which unwillingly sub level at which regional co-operation tions, while leaving room for in relationship is not between China scribed to the IMF-sponsored re can be reached by Europe in Asia and creased regional co-operation in Asia and the US, as many people think, form. Severe problems, however, re for the specific interests of member itself. Such a strategy must, however, but between China and Japan. In re mained in countries like Indonesia countries in issues regarding Asia. be combined with a principled despect to China’s policy towards the

One-day conference at the European Parliament

Asia and the European Union's Common Foreign and Security Policy

and Vietnam. In both countries not technical, but strategic policies have to be implemented to escape a fur ther slump. In addition to this, Willem van der Geest, Director of the EIAS, drew some lessons from the crisis, especially that which revolves around the issues of transparency, anti-corruption policies, and the ne cessity to espouse in good gover nance. Of particular interest to the EU is that the crisis has accelerated demands for democratization, espe cially in Indonesia. Whether the middle class is the only vehicle for political reform remains to be seen. In the case of Indonesia, the middle class had accepted fast growth with out making concomitant political demands. That is, however, not a general pattern. Several discussants joined in ask ing for further details about e.g. the expected Chinese currency devalua tion and its effects on the crisis; the problems economists face when they want to solve the effects of the crisis at different levels; and the purpose and further effects of the Miyasawa aid package of 80 billion US dollars to the region. Speakers agreed that the money has not had the effect expect ed, but Japan should be commended for having participated in the solu tion of the crisis. Two other sessions followed in the afternoon: the first one was about ‘Political Stability and Social Cohe sion in Asia’, examining in-depth political and social developments in Asia and analysing some of their manifestations (regionalism, na tionalism, and sub-nationalism) as well as their determinants - ethnic, religious, and economic. A second dealt with Asia’s challenges for the European Union. Dr David Camroux, Director of the Asia-Europe Programme at the Insti tut d’Etudes Politiques, reviewed the state of regional co-operation, taking into account the economic crisis in Southeast Asia and the political and security tensions. Doubts were raised about the central position of ASEAN in the future and about ASEAN’s attempt to reconcile the different strands of political regimes of its membership states. Europe could represent a model, or a coun ter-model, for an effective regional construction. Dr Frans Hiisken, Professor at the University of Nijmegen and Chair man of the Board HAS and Dr Riidiger Machetzki, Senior Researcher IFA, Hamburg commented on vari ous demands for succession and na-

February 2000 •

Continued on page 51 jF i i as n e w s l e t t e r

N?2i • 4 9

I I AS

NEWS

STAFF

MAS R E S E A R C H

15 FEBRUARY 2000

15 FEBRUARY 2000 > 15 JUNE 2000

STAFF Prof.W .A.L. Stokhof (Director) Drs S.A.M. Kuypers (Deputy Director) J. Balassis (Database Assistant) M. Boer (Secretary) Drs M.T. te Booij (Staff Member) Drs M.E. Brandt (Staff Member) J. Bruinsma (Secretary) Drs A.J.M. Doek (WWW) E.F.P. Haneveld (Automation Officer) Drs E.A.T. van der Hoek (Editor) I. Hoogenboom (Database Assistant) Drs H.M . van der Minne (Secretary Branch Office Amsterdam) M. Rozing (Trainee) D r M.A.F. Rutten (Co-ordinator Branch Office Amsterdam) J. Strem m elaar (Trainee) Drs C.B.W .Veenkamp (Executive Manager)

BOARD Prof. F.A.M. Hiisken - Chairman (Nijmegen University) Prof. J.L. Blussé van Oud Alblas (Universiteit Leiden) Prof. H.W . Bodewitz (Universiteit Leiden) Prof. J.C. Breman (University of Amsterdam) Prof. A.J.M.W. Hagendoorn (Utrecht University)

ACADEM IC CO M M ITTEE D r E.B.Vermeer - Chairman (Universiteit Leiden) Prof. B. Arps (Universiteit Leiden) D r I.S.A. Baud (Universiteit van Amsterdam) D r G.K. Lieten (Universiteit of Amsterdam) D r P.J.M. Nas (Universiteit Leiden) Prof. C.l. Risseeuw (Universiteit Leiden) Dr R.A. Rutten (Universiteit of Amsterdam) D r E.Touwen-Bouwsma (NIOD, Amsterdam)

MAS EXTRAO RDINARY CHAIRS Prof. Hein Steinhauer (the Netherlands) Extraordinary Chair at Nijmegen University,'Ethnolinguistics with a focus on Southeast Asia' I September 19 98 - I September 2001 Prof. Barend Terwiel (the Netherlands/Cermany) Extraordinary chair at the Universiteit Leiden,‘Cultures of Mainland Southeast Asia’ / September 1999- I September 2002 Prof. Henk Schulte Nordholt (the Netherlands) Extraordinary chair at the Erasmus University Rotterdam,'Asian History’ I October 1999 - I October 2003

IN TER N A TIO N A L REPRESENTATIVES Prof. J.G. Vredenbregt (Jakarta, Indonesia)-, D r W.G.J. Remmelink. Japan-Netherlands Institute (Tokyo, Japan).

RESEARCH PROGRAMMES AN D PROJECTS - CLARA:‘Changing Labour Relations in Asia’ The International Institute of Social History - Amsterdam acts as the executing body; Programme Co-ordinator; Dr R. Saptari - ‘International Social Organisation in East and Southeast Asia: QiaoxiangTies in the Twentieth Century’ (Programme Directors: Dr LM. Douw and Dr EN. Pieke) - PAATI:‘Performing Arts of AsiaTradition and lnnovation:The expression of identity in a changing world’ (Programme Director: Dr W. van Zanten) - ABIA-Project: Key to South and Southeast Asian A rt and Archaeology Index (Project Co-ordinator: Prof. K.R. van Kooij; Editors: Dr E.M. Raven and Drs H.l. Lasschuijt) 5 O •

has n e w s le t t e r

One of the most important policies of the HAS is to share scholarly expertise by offering universities and other research institutes the opportunity to benefit from the knowledge of resident fellows. HAS fellows can be invited to lecture, participate in seminars, co-operate on research projects etc. The HAS is most willing to mediate in establishing contacts. Both national and international integration of Asian Studies are very important objectives. In 2000 the HAS wants to stress this co-op eration between foreign researchers and the Dutch field. With regard to the affiliated fel lowships, the HAS therefore offers to medi ate in fading external Dutch funding, should the scholar have not yet found ways of fi nancing his/her visit to the Netherlands. For more information please see the HAS fellow ship application form. At the moment, HAS fellowship applications can be sent in for affiliated fellowships only (no application deadline). If any other fellow ships will become available, it will be an nounced in the HAS Newsletter and on the Internet. For news about HAS fellowships, please see our website: http://www.iias.nl The HAS distinguishes between nine cate gories o f fellows: 1. RESEARCH FELLOWS (POST PhD) a. Individual b. attached to a programme, i.e. - ‘International Social Organization in East and Southeast Asia: Qiaoxiang Ties in the Twentieth Century’ - ‘Performing Arts of Asia:Tradition and innovation; the expression of identity in a changing world’ (PAATI) - ‘Changing Labour Relations in Asia’ (CLARA), in collaboration with IISH Amsterdam Research fellows are attached to the International Institute for Asian Studies for maximum 3 years, carrying out independent research and fieldwork, and organizing an inter national seminar. 2. SENIOR V IS IT IN G FELLOWS The HAS offers senior scholars the possibility to engage in research work in the Netherlands.The period can vary from I to 3 months. 3. PROFESSORIAL FELLOWS The HAS assists in mediating between universities in the Netherlands and re search institutes in Asia, inviting estab lished scholars (minimum requirement: assistant professor level) to share their expertise with Dutch scholars, by being affiliated to Dutch universi ties for a period of one to two years, 4 . V IS IT IN G EXCH ANG E FELLOWS The HAS has signed several Memoran da of Understanding (MoU) with for eign research institutes, thus providing scholars with an opportunity to par ticipate in international exchanges. The Nordic Institute for Asian Studies (NIAS) in Copenhagen, the Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences (SASS), the Australian National University (ANU), and the Universitat Wien regularly send scholars to the Nether lands to do research for a period from I to 6 months. Contacts with many other institutes promise to develop into a more regular exchange in the near future. 5 . A F FILIA T E D FELLOWS The HAS can offer office facilities to fellows who have found their own fi nancial support and who would like to do research in the Netherlands for a particular period.The HAS also offers to mediate in finding external Dutch funding, should the scholar have not yet found ways of financing his/her visit to the Netherlands. 6 ESF/ALLIANCE FELLOWS Selected by the Asia Committee of the European Science Foundation (ESF-AC), ESF/Alliance fellows are at tached to the HAS, partly within the framework of and financed by the Strategic Alliance (IIAS-NIAS-IFA).

N ?2 1 • February 2000

7 . D U TC H SENIORS Maximum two Dutch seniors per year can apply for this position of maxi mum 6 months each at the HAS. A Dutch senior should have obtained a PhD degree more than five years ago, and be academically very produc tive.The stay at HAS (not abroad!) can be used for further research. Funds are made available to finance the tem porary replacement for teaching activ ities of a senior at his/her home uni versity. 8. NO RD IC -NETHER LANDS RESEARCH FELLOWS Nordic-Netherlands research fellows are selected by the Strategic Alliance. The duration of the fellowship is I or 2 years maximum. 9. G O N D A FELLOWS Gonda fellows are selected by the Stichting J. Gonda Fund and are af filiated to the HAS.The period may vary from 1-3 months. Hereunder you will find, ordered by region of specialty and in alphabetical order, the names and research topics of all fellows working at the Inter national Institute for Asian Studies. Mentioned are further: country of o ri gin, period of affiliation, kind of fellow ship, and, in case of an affiliated fellow ship, funding

GENERAL D r Kamala Ganesh (India) The Impact of a Changing Social Wel fare System on Relations within Mar riage, Family, and Social Networks in the Netherlands and the Public De bate on this Process’, affiliated fellow (IDPAD) / April 1 9 9 9 -1 March 2000 D r Rajni Palriwala (India) ‘The Impact of a Changing Social Wel fare System on Relations within Mar riage, Family, and Social Networks in the Netherlands and the Public De bate on this Process’, affiliated fellow (IDPAD) / May 2000 - I December 2000 D r Yuan Bingling (People’s Republic of China/ the Netherlands) ’Chinese Society in Beijing and in In donesia during the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries: a comparison', affiliated fellow 6 January 2000 - 31 December 2000

D r Prabhu Mohapatra (India), sta tioned in New Delhi 'Industrialisation and W ork Culture: Steel workers in Jamshedpur: 1950-1990s’, research fellow within the framework of the CLARA re search programme I February 1999 - 31 January 2002 D r A. Satyanarayana (India), stationed at the International Institute for Social His tory in Amsterdam ’Emigration of South Indian Labour Communities to South-East Asia: Burma (Myanmar) and Malaysia, 187 1- 1982’, senior visiting fellow within the framework of the CLARA research programme I December I 999 - I March 2000

SO UTHEAST ASIA D r Han-Pi Chang (Taiwan, ROC) ‘Separatism and Reconstructing of the Nation in Indonesia', affiliated fellow 20 December 1999 - I March 2000 D r M atthew Cohen (USA) The Shadow Puppet Theater of Gegesik, North West Java, Indonesia: Memo ry, tradition, and community', research fellow within the framework of the programme ‘Performing Arts of Asia: Tradition and Innovation’ (PAATI) I January 1998 - I January 2001 D r Freek Colom bijn (the Netherlands), stationed in Leiden and at the Amsterdam Branch Office The Road to Development:Access to natural resources along the transport axes of Riau Daratan (Indonesia), 1950-2000', individual research fellow Until I January 2002 D r Michael Ewing (Australia/USA) ’The Clause in Cirebon Javanese Con versation’, affiliated fellow / February 2000 - 30 June 2000 D r Michael Jacobsen (Denmark) ’Ethnic Identity, Nation Building and Human Rights in a Globalizing W orld’, Nordic-Netherlands research fellow I August 1999 - I August 2000 Prof. Dan Lev (USA) ‘Political Organization, Social Change, and Legal Evolution in Southeast Asia’, senior visiting fellow I April 2000 - I July 2000 D r Rajindra Puri (USA) ‘Deadly Dances in the Bornean Rain Forest: learning to hunt with the Penan’, affiliated fellow I February 2000 - I June 2000

Prof. Chen-Kuo Lin (Taiwan, ROC) ‘Chinese Buddhism’, third Chair-holder of the European Chair for Chinese Studies, professorial fellow I September 1999 - I September 2000 D r Evelyne Micollier (France), stationed at the Amsterdam Branch Office ‘Practices and Representations of Health and Illness in the Context of Chinese Culture. Interactions with so cial facts (illness prevention and Human reality of AIDS)’, ESF/Alliance fellow I July 1 9 9 8 - 1 July 2000 D rY uri Sadoi (Japan) The Problems of the Japanese Auto mobile Production System in the Dif ferent Cultural Setting: the case of the Netherlands’, affiliated fellow (Mit subishi Motors Corporation) I September 1 9 9 9 - I September 2000 D r Hae-Kyung Um (Korea/United Kingdom) ‘Performing Arts in Korea and the Ko rean Communities in China, the For mer Soviet Union and Japan’, research fellow within the framework of the programme ‘Performing Arts of Asia: Tradition and Innovation’ (PAATI) I January 1998 - I January 2001 D r Jeroen W iedenhof (the Nether lands) ’A Grammar of Mandarin’, Dutch se nior fellow / February 2000 - I August 2000

MAS R E S E A R C H PARTNERS The HAS signs Memoranda of Understanding (MoUs) with research institutes in the field of Asia Studies all over the world, in order to stimulate further co-operation in this field, and to improve the mobility of scholars through the exchange of research fellows at a post-Ph.D. level.The HAS mediates in establishing contacts with the Institute’s MoU partners. The HAS has signed MoUs with the following institutions: 1. 2. 3.

CENTRAL ASIA D r Henk Blezer (the Netherlands) T h e ’Bon’-Origin of Tibetan Buddhist Speculations Regarding a Post-Mortem State Called 'Reality as It Is” , individual research fellow Until I August 2000 D r Alex Mckay (New Zealand) The History ofTibet and the Indian Himalayas', affiliated fellow 8 June 2000 - 8 September 2000 Prof.Yang Enhong (People’s Republic of China) The study ofTibetology and King Gesar Epic', affiliated fellow (CASS) 15 April 2 0 0 0 - 15 July 2000

D r M artin Ramstedt (Germany) ‘Hindu Dharma Indonesia -T h e Hindu-movement in present-day In donesia and its influence in relation to the development of the indigenous culture of theToraja (AlukTodolo) in South Sulawesi’, ESF/Alliance fellow I December 1997 —30 November 2000

D r Benoït deTréglodé (France), sta tioned at the Amsterdam Branch Ofpce 'New Hero’ and ‘Emulation Fighter’ in the Democratic Republic ofVietnam’, affiliated fellow 1-28 February 2000

7. D r Reed W adley (USA) The Ethnohistory of a Borderland People:The Iban in West Kalimantan, Indonesia’, individual research fellow I August 1998 - I August 2001

SO UTH ASIA D r Thomas de Bruijn (the Netherlands) ’Nayi Kahani: New stories and new positions in the literary field of Hindi literature after 1947’, affiliated fellow (NW O) IS June 1998 - IS June 2001 D r Hanne de Bruin (the Netherlands), stationed in Leiden and at the Amsterdam Branch Office 'Kattaikkuttu and Natakam: South Indi an theatre traditions in regional per spective’, research fellow within the programme’Performing Arts of Asia: Tradition and Innovation’ (PAATI) Until IS July 2001

10. EAST ASIA D r Karpchon Kim (Korea) ‘An Authentic Record of theYi Dy nasty’, visiting exchange fellow (Korea Research Foundation) I August 1999 - I August 2000

I I. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

17.

Nordic Institute for Asian Studies (NIAS), Copenhagen, Denmark East-West Center in Hawai’i (EWC), USA Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies of the Australian National University (RSPAS-ANU), Canberra, Australia Division of Social Sciences and Humanities, Indonesian Institute of Sciences (LIPI), Jakarta, Indonesia Institut für Kultur und Geistesgeschichte Asiens der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna, Austria Institute of Oriental Studies (IOS) of the Russian Academy of Sciences, Moscow, Russia Vietnam National University Hanoi (VNU), Hanoi,Vietnam University Grants Commission (UGC)/Ministry of Education of Pakistan, Islamabad, Pakistan Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences (SASS), Shanghai, P.R. China l’École Francaise d’Extrême-Orient (EFEO), Paris, France Academia Sinica,Taiwan, ROC Korea Research Foundation (KRF), Seoul, Korea National Science Council,Taipei, Taiwan, ROC Mongolian Academy of Sciences, Mongolia Institut de Recherche sur le Sud-Est Asiatique, Aix-en-Provence, France Bureau of International Cultural & Educational Relations, Ministry of Education,Taipei,Taiwan, ROC Centre d'Études et de Recherches Internationales, Paris, France

HAS

N E WS

JANUARY

2000

Agenda

E uropean Parliam ent. Will such de 2 4 - 3 0 J u n e 2000 m ands adequately address th e global Leiden, The Netherlands Continued jrotn page 49 9 - 1 6 Ja n u a r y 2000 security questions w hich arm s pro Ninth Seminar o f the International ASIA AND THE EUROPEAN liferation inevitably poses? Accord Association o/Tibetan Studies (IATS) India UNION'S COMMON ing to Ian A nthony, serious progress Convenor: Henk Blezer (HAS) FOREIGN AND SECURITY Fourth ABIA Workshop w ill be slow in the com ing years, b u t Contact address: POLICY H ttp ://w w w .iias.nl/host/abia/ arm s control objectives and th e p u r John Kleinen International Institute for Asian Studies, su it o f treaties to reduce nuclear P.O. Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, weapons is som ething th a t should The Netherlands MARCH 2000 not be left only to the US and Russia. tion-state status across Asia and Tel.: +31-71-5272227 H e pointed to th e India-Pakistan pointed to a series o f ethnic, reli Fax: +31-71-5274162 confrontation or to a (maybe u n real 9 - 1 1 M a r c h 2000 gious, an d economic determ inants E-mail: iats@rullet.Ieidenuniv.nl istically to a US-China clash on Tai Leiden, The Netherlands o f tensions in Asia. Indonesia was Http://www.iias.nl/iias/agenda/iats/ wan) in w hich th e EU can or could taken as th e m ost vivid example to Workshop play a m ediating role and find a w in dem onstrate how nation-states 'The Indian Character o f Indian literature’ dow o f opportunity. Prof. Francis could be menaced by regionalism JULY 2000 Convenors: Dr Thomas de Bruijn (HAS) Snyder, Law D epartm en t European and ethnic conflict. Here we are and Dr Theo Damsteegt (Kern Institute). U niversity Institu te, Florence, con faced w ith a paradox th a t dem ocrati 6-7 J u l y 2000 Contact address: sidered economic globalization to be zation has a flip-side because it gen Amsterdam, The Netherlands an urge for public policy responses International Institute for Asian Studies, erates less peace and order th a n ex IIAS Seminar ‘Health, Sexuality and across a n um ber o f sectors in the EU, P.O. Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, isted in the past u nder au th o ritarian Civil Society in East Asia’ including a labour m arket policy, a rule. But Indonesia is also an excep The Netherlands Contact Dr Evelyne Micollier for fiscal and m onetary policy, as well as tion, as M achetzki stressed, w hen we Tel.: +31-71-527 2227 scientific contents and Heleen van der a regional and trade policy. U sing look at Asia’s perform ance in gener Fax: +31-71-527 4162 Minne for practical matters, the w ell-know n example as th e Bar al: th e Asian m iracle was n eith er a E-mail:tbruijn@rullet.leidenuniv.nl HAS Branch Office Amsterdam, bie doll w hich its m anufacturer m y th nor a mirage. O ther conflicts or: damsteegt@rullet.leidenuniv.nl Spinhuis, 02. Achterburgwal 185, M atell m anufactures an d m arkets are m ost m arked by a state to state More information about IIAS 1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands around th e globe (in 142 countries), dim ension rath er th a n religious or Seminars and Workshops is available on Tel.: +31-20-525 3657 Snyder posed th e question o f ethnic, as e.g. Kashm ir shows, w hich the Internet: w hether and how labour laws or in Fax: +31-20-525 3658 9 - 1 2 M a r c h 2000 could carry very explosive elem ents http://ww.iias.nl/iias/agenda.html.Also ternational safety standards can con E-mail: Sexsem@pscw.uva.nl for South Asia. San Diego, refer to the Agenda Asia, a database of trol this type o f fragm ented labour A limited number of Dutch speakers A nother case study from South United States o f America Asian Studies conferences, workshops m arkets linked to a huge intra-firm and a limited number of observers Asia was presented by D r C hristophe and seminars: 52ntl MS Annual Meeting trade. Global legal pluralism is are still welcome. jaffrelot, Senior Research Fellow http://www.iias.nl/gateway/ Association for Asian Studies, Inc., prevalent. The second p art o f his talk CERI, Fondation N ationale de Sci newslagasialindex.html. 1021 East Huron Street, concentrated on the cu rren t chal ences Politiques, who dealt w ith the Unless otherwise mentioned, lenge to the present EU legal fram e Ann Arbor, AUGUST 2000 BJP and India’s 13th General Elec the contact address w ork to develop adequate an Michigan 4S104, tions as an example o f religious na for conferences organized tid u m p in g actions in trade w ith tionalism . A short section was devot United States of America i o - i i A u g u s t 2000 by the IIAS is: China, in th e context o f economic ed to th e im plications w hich this Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.: +1-734-665 2490 operations and custom s procedures m ay have for social stability in the HAS Seminar ‘Environmental Change in Fax: +1-734-665 3801 IIAS w hich involve intern atio n al produc South Asian region. Native and Colonial Histories o f Borneo: P . O. B o x 95 I 5 Http://www.aasianst.org/ tio n netw orks and in tra-fo rm trade. Stim ulated by the m any vivid ex Lessons/rom the past, prospectsfor 2 3 0 0 RA L e i d e n D uring th e open discussion w hich am ples the speakers had presented, the/uturc’ The Netherlands concluded the one-day conference, several discussants felt the urge to Convenor: Dr Reed L. Wadley Tel . : +3 1 7 1 5 2 7 2 2 2 7 APRIL 2000 P ro f Stein Tonneson took th e oppor challenge them . The rem ark was Contact address: Fax: + 3 1 - 7 1 - 5 2 7 4 1 6 2 tu n ity to propose a follow -up confer m ade th a t the EU stressed the diver International Institute for Asian Studies, E- mai l : ence on th e legal and environm ental sity o f ASEAN b u t objected to the 7-9 Ap r i l 2000 IIAS@rullet.leidenuniv.nl P.O. Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, aspects o f th e alarm ing develop suggestion th a t the region could be Copenhagen, Denmark The Netherlands m ents in the South China Sea. This viewed as th e Balkans o f Asia. The Seventh Nordic-European Workshop Tel: +31-71-527 2227 conference should be an initiative o f lack o f awareness am ong th e b ureau MAY 2 0 0 0 Fax: +31-71-527 4162 in Advanced Asian Studies (NEWAS) the European Council/U nion, w hich cracies does n o t reflect w hat is felt E-mail: iias@mllet.leidenuniv.nl Convenor: should ask m em ber states around am ong th e various populations in Http://www.iias. nl/lias/ research/wadley/ the Baltic Sea or around th e M editer 1 8 - 2 0 M ay 2000 Prof. Per Ronnas Southeast Asia. Even developm ents ranean Sea to host th eir Asian coun in Indonesia should n o t taken as a Contact address for Nordic PhD students: Avignon, France terparts. Mrs Caroline Lucas, who p resen tim ent o f paraplegic em pires NIAS, att.: NEWAS, Erik Skaaning, I1AS/CERINS/INALCO workshop, 2 3 - 2 8 A u g u s t 2000 m oderated the afternoon session, w hich w ill break up because they Leifsgade 33, DK-2300 Copenhagen S, ‘Slave Systems in Asia and the Indian Ocean; Leiden, The Netherlands called it an ingenious proposal were artificially created by colonial Denmark Their structure and change w hich received a sym pathetic re IIA5/CHIME Conference ist policies. Even in the case o f Aceh, Tel.: +45-32-54 88 44 sponse am ong these attending. Such ‘Audiences, Patrons and Per/ormers in the 19th and 20th centuries’ th e people feel th a t they have partic Fax: +45-32-96 25 30 a conference on the Law o f th e Sea in the Performing Arts o f Asia' ipated in the revolution and they are Convenor: E-mail: etik@nias.ku.dk should, however, take politics into Convenors: n o t w illing to give up th a t dream. Dr Gwyn Campbell, CERINS, consideration. H ere th e European For Dutch PhD students: Dr Wim van Zanten (IIAS-PMTI) O ther reactions dw elt on the exam University d’Avignon, Case N 19, U nion could play a constructive role, ples o f Aceh and Brunei, or asked for and Frank Kouwenhoven (CHIME) IIAS, P.O. Box 9515, 2300 RA Leiden, 74 rue Louis Pasteur, 84029 Avignon, as M r Selvarajah, th e Singaporean clarification about the tru e n atu re o f For more information: The Netherlands Ambassador to the EU underlined. Cedex 1, France Http://www.iias.nl/oideion/general/ the BJP. Tel.:+31-71-527 2227 Im plicitly referring to the opening The T hird Session on ‘Asia’s Chal Tel.: +33-4-90162718 audiences.html, or: Fax:+31-71-5274162 discussion about th e CFSP, he and lenges for the European U nion’ took Http://www.iias.nl/iias/agenda.html Fax: +33-4-9016 2719 E-mail: iias@rullet.leidenuniv.nl others rem arked th a t E uropean poli as its focus the possible EU responses E-mail: gcampb3195@aoI.com cy in Asia is still too general or still to developm ents in Asia, including a You m ay also contact: too reactive. It is ab o u t tim e to start 2 7 - 2 9 A p r i l 2000 discussion o f the in stru m en ts for Dr Wim van Zanten (chair) w ith a pro-active Asian strategy, n o t stru ctu rin g these relations, such as Amsterdam, The Netherlands Institute of Cultural and Social Studies only by the preserve o f groups o f ex JUNE 2000 registration and licensing o f arm s Fourth Euro-Japanese International Leiden University perts, b u t by th e EU as a whole, im exports, regim es for nuclear n on Symposium on Mainland Southeast Asian P.O. Box 9555 p lem enting all comers o f th e in s titu proliferation, codes o f conducts for Histoiy: ‘MainlandSoutheast Asian 2300 RB Leiden 8-9 J u n e 2000 tion and speaking th ro u g h one tran sn atio nal corporations, and Dr The Netherlands Responses to the Stimuli o f Foreign Material Leiden, The Netherlands channel. ■ Ian A nthony, SIPRI, Stockholm, dealt Tel.: +31-71-527 3465 / 74 / 69 Culture and Practical Knowledge HAS seminar ‘Yogacara Buddhism in China’ w ith the nuclear and non-nuclear Fax: +31-71-5273619 (14* - mid 19'*1century)’ arm s proliferation as an EU foreign Convenor: Prof Chen-kuo Lin E-mail: zanten@fsw.leidenuniv.nl Convenor: Dr John Kleinen (HAS) policy challenge. In his contribution, Contact address: or: he reviewed the proposals for the Contact address: International Institute for Asian Studies, Frank Kouwenhoven, CHIME BIAS m o n ito rin g and licensing o f th e ex HAS Branch Office Amsterdam, P.O. Box 11092 P.O. Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, Secretariat o f the European Institute p o rt o f conventional arm s, as well as Spinhuis, Oudezijds Achterburgwal 185, 2301 EB Leiden The Netherlands for Asian Studies at Brussels dem ands m ade on Asian govern 1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands The Netherlands Rue des Deux Eg/ises 35 m en ts (ranging from Iraq to N o rth Tel.: +31-71-527 2227 Tel.: +31-20-525 3657 Tel.: +31-71-513 3974/ 5U 3123 1000 Brussels, Belgium Korea) to sign the C om m on Treaty Fax: +31-71-5274162 Fax:+31-71-5123183 Fax:+31-20-525 3658 Fax: +32 - 2-230 230 5402 on B anning Atomic Tests (CTBT) and E-mail: iias@rullet.leidenuniv.nl E-mail: chime@wxs.nl A conference organised by E-mail: HAS@pscw.uva.nl N on-Proliferation Treaty (NPT),

A gend A

w hich have been advocated by the

EIAS, HAS, IFA and NIAS

February z o o 0 •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r

"NS21 • % 1

I I AS

N E WS

An HAS Extraordinary Chair

Cultures of Mainland Southeast Asia Is it true what Americans say, that the first impression weighs as much as the sum o f subsequent impressions? At least I would say that this was the case in my interview with Barend Jan Terwiel. The first handshake was warm and sincere, the en tire meeting was sympathetic and open. I had e-mailed him three basic questions in advance: the interview would be about his past activities, his motivations, and his plans for the new Chair. As a well-prepared informant, he took the initiative by telling me the story o f his academic life and about his plans, and his dreams. Playing the part o f an ethnographer in the field, I listened and I wrote. Whenever he stopped talking, I simply waited and repeated his last sentence. Then he picked up his story again. The twenty-five supporting questions that I had prepared from reading his biography were nearly all anwered by the sequence o f his story: ■ By ALF RED DANI E LS

-r was returning from

I the Dutch mini-war M. in West New Gui nea,’ he started. ‘I was a recruit and we were being evacuated in 1962. j When they called our names to board the plane there were two young men with the name of Ter wiel who stepped forward, but there was only one seat booked. I chose to wait for the next plane. It took us to Bangkok first and we waited there several days before we could fly home. So I looked around and I met this lovely student girl. When I left, she remained in my thoughts and occasionally I wrote her letters. I went to Utrecht to study and graduated in Cultural Anthropology. I specialized on Thailand by taking minors in the History of Buddhism and in the Pali language. Professor Robert van Gulik gave me a Thai lan guage course: a book together with a collection of vinyl 78 records. I lis tened to them on an old gramophone. After graduation I won a scholarship to the Australian National University (ANU) in Canberra and I was given the opportunity to do fieldwork in Thailand. I met the girl again and I went to live in a village with her aunt (my Thai ‘grandmother’). I could read the Buddhist scriptures in Pali and took up the role of a Buddhist monk: with shaven head and an orange robe. After six months I gave up the monk’s life and I took on that of a peasant. For an other six months I worked the land and continued my fieldwork before returning to Australia. A year later I went back to Thailand for another four months of research. This time I worked with a research as sistent to complete my data and to test my conclusions. In return, I taught him how to take photographs. He became a professional photogra pher. I remained in contact with the Thai girl throughout her life. She died about ten years ago.’ ‘Didn’t you think about settling there permanently?’ I asked him. ‘It was not easy for a ‘farang’, a stranger, to live in Thailand. When

the people knew that .you spoke the language they would keep demand ing your attention consistantly throughout the day. They would fol low you everywhere and shouted questions at you even from a dis tance. No, I went back to Australia. I married an Australian there and eventually we had four children. My first promotor at the ANU was Professor Barnes. He would allow your research to go its own way, with a minimum of steering. But then he left for Cambridge and the department was mainly populated by functionalists. I was interested in a different approach to religion. I think it pervades all aspects of life. Even aspects as ‘rational’ as econom ics have a religious aspect. Ritual and religion is what interested me most at the time, an interest that contin ues. Basham, the famous historian of Indian sophy, then took me under his wing. He aroused a greater his torical awareness in me. After my PhD I went back to the Netherlands, as I had no job yet in Australia. It is not such a good coun try for intellectuals. The people are

‘In the Netherlands there is a certain deficiency in knowledge on Thailand because of the colonial past’

5 2. • h a s n e w s l e t t e r N?2i • February 2000

very practical and don’t respect acad emic intellectuals very much. I found a job in Amsterdam as head of a training programme for volunteers in development projects at the Royal Tropical Institute. One day in the week I would teach Ethnology at Louvain in Belgium, to remain in contact with academic thinking. In 1572 I was appointed to a lec tureship at the ANU and I went back to Canberra. I worked very hard on my first book and it was published three months later: Monks and Magic. In the following years I taught the History of Mainland Southeast Asia, became a senior lecturer, a reader, and eventually associate professor there. In the late 1970s I saw the collec tion of data on Thai culture and pol itics that had been collected by the US intelligence services during the Vietnam War. I nearly lost my inter est in the Thai. They had collected about a hundred thousand entries in their archives. For a time I thought about quitting this topic and focus ing on symbolism in man by study ing the Aboriginals in Australia and about delving into comparative studies. Professor Basham talked me out of that plan and soon a different perspective opened up. During a conference in Orissa in 1979, I met a Buddhist monk who came from a community in Assam, who did not speak a Tai language but claimed to be an ethnic Tai. For one month I walked with him through Assam from village to vil lage to explore the ethnic Tai com munities there. In 1980 I was awarded a grant by the Alexander von Humboldt Stiftung to study the history of the dispersion of ethnic Tai over conti nental Southeast Asia. By comparing the rituals I could easily see the dif ferences and similarities between these communities and the Tai in Thailand. They must have been sep arated 600-700 years ago. It turns out that substantial numbers of ethnic Tai live in Yunnan, Vietnam, Laos, Burma, and Assam. I collected a vast amount of data on this topic and I focused on the dispersion of the Tai over Southeast Asia: their history, even their archaeological record. I work on this topic in close co-opera tion with a group of specialists on Chinese, Burmese, and Vietnamese. Then I went to Munich in t99i to become a Professor in Ethnology. My family remained in Australia and eventually the marriage broke up. By the end of 1992, 1 became a Professor in the Languages and Cultures of Thailand and Laos, at the Faculty of Oriental Studies in Hamburg. Thus my interest developed from religion to history to ethnology to literature, all on the region of continental

Interview with Barendjan Terwiel Southeast Asia and on the Tai in par ticular.’ ‘I counted thirteen books and fiftyfive articles in your biography. Do you write easily? How do you orga nize your writing?’ ‘I write with regularity: one or two hours every day, not less than two pages at a time. Of course, I spend more time pondering, puzzling, and searching.’ ‘For the next five years you have been appointed as Extraordinary Chair at HAS, a 0.2 Professorate. How are you going to plan this?’

'I write one or two hours every day,

but spend more time pondering, puzzling, and searching

‘In Hamburg everything contin ues as it is. So I plan to spend my time at Leiden in the German Uni versity vacations. Those in Germany only partly overlap with those in Holland. In February I shall be in Leiden the whole month. My Inau gural Lecture will be delivered on 15 February. In September-October I hope to be in Leiden again. I have plans at three levels. First, an intensive course of preparations followed by an evaluation. Secondly to help relevant postgraduate stu dents individually. And then I have the option of organizing a sympo sium once every two years. The overall aim is to widen the horizon in Leiden drawing it away

from its focus on Indonesia more to wards continental Southeast Asia. There is a certain deficiency in knowledge on Thailand in this part of Europe because of the colonial past. I shall begin my work by giving a course that should lead to a deepen ing of the understanding of how to treat primary sources. The topic of the first intensive course, from 28 January to i t February is: The Econ omy of Thailand 1800-1850. For this topic we can use sources that were written in English or that have al ready been translated into English. By taking this step we shall make this course accessible to a wider au dience.’ ‘What do you want the students to learn?’ ‘I want them to learn how to read scientifically. That is the strength of properly trained academical people. How to select information from a seemingly overwhelming amount of sources, and how to judge it. I want to teach people how to handle infor mation in a sovereign way.’ When the interview was over, we walked to the railway station togeth er. We strolled along taking long strides. He was wearing black jeans, a sportsjacket, and carried a small rucksack. We chatted casually and he completed some of the gaps in my information. He was going to stay with his brother that weekend. In Hamburg he found a new life com panion, she is a German professor. Would he ever go on a fieldwork again? He says he hasn't thought about it. Would I join his course? Yes, I would like to. Would I send him the concept of this interview for review? That is a promise. ■

Professor Barend jan Terwiel will hold the HAS Special chair ‘Cultures o f Mainland Southeast Asia’ at the Universiteit Leiden between I Septem ber 1999 -

/ Septem ber 2002 Alfred Daniels is an anthropologist. E-mail: culturalanthropology.org@planet.nl

HAS

N E WS

A Philosopher o f Leisure

Professor Vincent Shen The second occupant o f the European Chair o f Chinese Stud ies, Professor Vincent Shen, decided to come to the Nether lands only at the very last moment. His position as President o f the International Association o f Chinese Philosophy initial ly forced him to decline the offer o f the Taiwanese Ministry o f Education and the International Institute for Asian Studies. However, the intelligent approach adopted by the organizers, together with a sense o f obligation towards his cultural back ground finally convinced him o f the chair’s importance: China’s traditional ‘Three Religions’, Confucianism, Bud dhism, and Taoism, would be represented in the persons o f the first three occupants o f the chair (the third occupant being Lin Chen-kuo, an expert in the field o f Buddhism). He ex plained the importance o f individual freedom in Taoism, and illustrated his affinity with Taoism by inviting me for a beer. By M AR K MEUL ENBELD

t is quite unusual for a scholar from Taii wan to hang around in such immoral places as Dutch pubs where al cohol and tobacco are consumed in more than modest quantities. But Shen Tsing-song (his original Chinese name) is no stranger to The European way of life. After finishing his master’s degree (comparative philosophy concerning transcendental values in the phil osophies of China and the West) at Fu Jen Catholic University in Tai wan, he studied philosophy at the Catholic University of Leuven in Bel gium, where he obtained his PhD in 1977. When I asked him what the reasons were behind his choice for Leuven, he assured me that it is nec essary to know more about his overal educational history in Taiwan, and he began to expound on this. T was born in 1949, the year that the communist regime in China was established. I grew up in a village where all the inhabitants bore the surname Shen, and where the sole ancestor temple in Taiwan that was dedicated to the clan of Shen is locat ed. My family has lived on Taiwan for more than three hundred years I might be called an authentic Tai wanese. But by the time I was born, Taiwan had been flooded with na tionalist immigrants from mainland China. They instigated an immedi ate change in the Taiwanese educa tional system, one that was adapted to the needs of the nationalist regime and did not necessarily stress the regional identity of the Tai wanese: the nationalists still hoped to beat the communists on the mainland and make a glorious re turn to Beijing. During my time in primary school, both of my parents were con verted to the Roman Catholic faith, and I was raised with Christian val ues. So, although my excellent grades in high school would have al lowed me to enrol at National Tai wan University where most Tai wanese students hope to go, I chose to study philosophy at Fu Jen Catholic University. It was not only

the Christian background though, the more international orientation of Fu Jen also appealed to me. In the end this actually turned out to be de cisive for my future because my teacher at Fu Jen was a Belgian pro fessor from Leuven, who encouraged me to pursue my academic career in Belgium. And I thought that the most appropriate way to study West ern philosophy would indeed be to study it in Europe, in a place with philosophical traditions going back over six hundred years. He described how it has become a custom for most young Taiwanese scholars to go abroad for study and carry out research on Chinese topics outside of Taiwan. So, he com plained, many Taiwanese study Chi nese philosophy or literature in the United States. This development is not to Shen’s liking at all. ‘They are making a mistake. In my opinion, if you go to a foreign country, you should occupy yourself with indige nous problems, and take advantage

'Never go

againstyour

own nature is a piece

of advice th at sounds as relevant today as it must have been more than

zoooyears ago

of the local traditions. That’s really one of my principles. So when I went to Leuven, it was clear to me that I was going to work in the Husserl archives, and that I would have to study phenomenology and herme neutics. I became acquainted with the ideas of Blondel and Whitehead, philosophers who are hardly read in Asia. And as I occupy myself with the philosophy of science, I belong to an absolute minority in that respect.’ Shen believes that his combina tion of foreign experience together with a Roman Catholic background distinguishes him from most of his colleagues. T think this helps me un derstand the peculiarities of a West ern discourse more easily. Let’s not forget that many aspects of your cul ture are related to Christianity in some way or another. The Roman Catholic church in Taiwan is not the same as that in Holland or Belgium, but it still constitutes a great source of knowledge for me. It just helps, you know.’

ly orientated society. So many of them adopted ideas that may be called Taoist: on the one hand there was a tendency towards naturalism, and the natural order of things that is so crucial to Taoism. On the other, in keeping with classic Taoist tradi tions, more and more voices became heard that were critical of govern mental policies. Lao Zi, the leg endary founder of Taoism, is famed for his critique of rulership. But not only the natural way of the world is rediscovered by modern Taiwanese, Taoism also has well-developed aes thetics. One side effect of a booming

Taoist Environmentalists Upon returning to Taiwan in 1980, he realized that time had come to take up the study of his own philo sophical traditions and he devoted himself to the study of Taoism and Confucianism. ‘There is an obvious continuity between my Belgian studies of Whitehead, and my Tai wanese studies on Chinese thought. There are a lot of striking similari ties between the two. Reflections on creativity, cosmology, and logic can be found in either one of them. Tao ism actually is quite scientifically orientated in that it also takes na ture and natural processes as the point of departure for all reasoning. In Taiwan, we have seen some thing of a Taoist revival. The envi ronmentalists have discovered Tao ism as a solid ideological foundation for their movement, and the way in which they promote the Taoist philosophical heritage almost makes them a kind of neo-Taoists. In that respect, Taiwan is a very fascinating country. I use to regard it as a suc cessful advanced laboratory of tradi tional Chinese culture in a modern context. In contemporary Taiwanese society there are many influences from Taoism. I do not mean reli gious Taoism, because that is obvi ous, but rather philosophical Tao ism. Traditionally, Chinese society is patterned on Confucianist examples. Social intercourse, family relations, and ethical evaluations in general can be called Confucianist. They strongly emphasize social regula tions and moral order, but in a mod ernizing world, this started to be come a burden. And with the tech nological innovations of the 70s and 80s, people felt a strong sense of alienation in their more traditional-

‘ifyou go to aforeign country,you should occupyyourself with indigenous problems,

and take advantage of the local traditions’

in complete accordance with Shen’s own view of the world, as they both advocate a natural course of life. 'Never go against your own nature’ is a piece of advice that sounds as relevant today as it must have been more than two thousand years ago. The first chapter of Zhuang Zi’s book is called ‘Wandering Leisurely and Free’, and according to Shen, a human being can only reach such a blissful state of freedom if he fol lows his own nature. To a man as pragmatic as Vincent Shen, it is clear that his stay in the Netherlands does not mean a Chi nese monologue directed towards the Dutch. ‘The Dutch have made their contributions to Taiwan as well, starting in the period that Tai wan was still called Formosa. They occupied Taiwan for many years, and for their missionary work they needed to study the language in order to translate the Bible in Chi nese. The earliest example of a romanization system for the Chinese language was developed by the Dutch. And at present some features of the Dutch public transport sysI tern have been adopted by the city of I Taipei. I have come to the NetherI lands also to learn from you.’ Shen praises Dutch philosophers I such as the native-born Erasmus I and the adopted Spinoza. The latter especially has interesting ideas on nature, that, according to Shen, have some similarities with Taoism. ‘But in the Netherlands there has never been the need to develop ideas of visionary grandeur. Practitioners of Dutch philosophy and Dutch sci ence have occupied themselves with j meticulous discussions about par ticular details, and they have done that very well. But in Holland everything is very small, even science.

economy is that people are finding the money and the time to attach value to the beauty of things, they demand an aesthetic evaluation of things. Taoism has a lot to offer in that respect, as Chinese art is perme ated with Taoist elements.’

Professor Vincent Shen held the European Chair o f Chinese Studies a t the IIAS between 1 September 1998 and 1 September 1999.

Professor Vincent Shen held the European Chair for Chinese Studies at the IIAS

Freedom and Leisure Among students of sinology in Leiden, Vincent Shen is best known from his lectures on the structures of meaning and logics in the writ ings of the famous Taoist fourthcentury BC philosopher Zhuang Zi. The ideas of Zhuang Zi seem to be

between I September 1998 and I September 1999. Mark Meulenbeld studies religious literature in the vernacular language o f late-Ming China. E-mail: Meulenbeld@hotmail.com

February zooo •

ii as n e w s l e t t e r

>l?2i •

CLARA 26

► 28

DECEMBER

KARACHI,

RESEARCH PROGRAMME

'CHANGING LABOUR RELATI ONS IN ASI A' CLARA Programme Co-ordinator:

DR RATNA SAPTARI

do International Institute of Social History (IISH) Cruquiusweg 3 I 10 19 AT Amsterdam The Netherlands Tel.:+ 3 1-20-668 5866 Fax:+31-20-665 4181 E-mail: chlia@iisg.nl http://www.iisg.nl/asia CLARA EXECUTIVE CO M M ITTEE - Prof.jan Breman (CASA-ASSR) - Prof. Marcel van der Linden (IISH) • Chair - Prof.jan Lucassen (IISH)

- Dr Ratna Saptari (HAS / IISH) • Secretary - Prof. Willem van Schendel (University o f Amsterdam / IISH) - Prof.Thommy Svensson (NIAS)

NE WS

1 999

PAKISTAN

Conference on Labour in Pakistan The conference, the first o f its kind in Pakistan, had the forma tive agenda o f initiating a dialogue and discussion between trade union activists and academics on Pakistani labour histo ry on the changing labour relations in late twentieth century. By K A M R A N A S D A R ALI

I he introductory ses sion was marked by its emphasis on cre ating a central archive of trade union politics. A general appeal was made to the participating trade union lead ers and activist to donate relevant ma terial consisting of reports, meeting memoranda, pamphlets, posters, photographs, newsletters, correspon dence, etc. Participants were also re quested to give an interview either on tape or on camera in order to consoli date, alongside a print archive, a col lection of audio-visual resources at one primary site. The first session, in the shape of the keynote address given by the convenor of the Human Rights Commission of Pakistan, spelled out the other major themes that became the central discussion agenda for the following three days. The speaker stressed how the process of global ization has reduced the number of

factory-based organized workers. A majority of workers are employed as casual or contract labourers and/or in the informal sector with female, home-based production processes and child labour becoming domi nant forms of labour relations. The speaker argued that in light of these changes, Pakistani trade union poli tics cannot be divorced from the larger struggle for democratic norms and social justice in the country. Moreover, there is an urgent need to rethink traditional forms of trade union politics and strategies for or ganizing labour. Hence it is neces sary to link the process of labour rights to the struggle for citizens’ civil rights and the subsequent con struction of a viable civil society. The following three days of pre sentations were divided into sessions on labour history, the construction of class and community, the legal as pects of labour problems, the history of left-wing parties, and the contem porary changes in labour relations. The discussions and responses im-

The garment industry in Australia, Indonesia, and Malaysia Australia, Indonesia, and Malaysia appear to have been ‘as signed’ different roles within the ‘world system’ o f garment production subcontracting. Or, more precisely, as part o f the vicissitudes o f the nature o f world trade, each country has em barked on differing strategies for survival and success in world markets. By J AN E L L I O T T

ndonesia’s role is one of articulation. Niche, export mar ket-focused cottage in dustries are located in Central Java and Bali, while the modern textile and gar ment industry is heavily concentrat ed in Greater Jakarta and the province of West Java. The availability of plen tiful, cheap labour in Bali (and geo graphical proximity) means that Aus tralian entrepreneurs and/or manu facturers prefer that base to subcon tract the making of garments for the Australian domestic market and overseas. In Malaysia, regional differ ences and strategies are the factors driving the mix of factory and home production. In the last two to three years, with the shifting of large facto ries to the less developed states in Malaysia, the traditional manufac turing states of Selangor and Penang

Research Project

5 4

have changed to a process of subcon tracting referred to as ‘backyard in dustry’. These changes in the con temporary Malaysian garment in dustry are part of a global process in garment manufacturing in which the high level of competition means employers seek ways to find a supply of cheap labour. Within Australia, for example, a 1996 Senate Inquiry into the restructuring of the garment in dustry found that outworking and other subcontracting methods had become so prevalent in the industry that the entire industry had been re structured around them. In comparing the garment indus tries in Australia, Indonesia, and Malaysia, this study aims to contex tualize the industry in the three countries within, and of, the ‘world system’ of subcontracting. That is, to produce an ethnography of the inter relationship of the production pro cess between the countries and its ef fect on workers within the industry.

• IIAS n e w s l e t t e r n ?21 • February 2000

Whilst labour price has been a major concern, it is not the only factor in subcontracting. Other factors affect ing production relate to skills and lo calization of speciality. That is, there are values attached to producing cer tain items in specific places. Overall, the industry context is one of a mix ture of high-tech and cheap labour with seemingly no middle ground as countries compete for markets and seek to protect their home industry. The Asia Pacific Economic Co-oper ation (APEC), the primary regional economic body, which includes among its member nations Australia, Indonesia, and Malaysia, espouses the ‘ultimate goal’ of free trade in the Asia Pacific. However, this goal has to be negotiated within a complex web of individual country aims and de mands, and concerns about the effect of the neo-liberal ideology of ‘free trade’ and an ‘equal playing field’ on the economic and social lives of their citizens. Within the overall aim of the pro ject - to produce an ethnography of the industry in the three countries the study will examine whether the WTO (World Trade Organization) rules are as positive for the clothing (garment) industry as the world body

bued the arguments put forward in the opening session with further nu ances and subtleties. Papers, for ex ample, demonstrated the historical ly diverse and fragmented nature of the working class. Presenters em phasized that labour organizational efforts needed to take into account the fundamental role ethnic/cultur al difference and religion play in the creating of working class aspira tions, consciousness, and politics. A major contribution to the con ference was the analysis of non-fac tory based work processes and the level of union formation in these sectors. Detailed examination was presented on the working conditions and plight of mineworkers, of rural labour, of white collar bank employ ees, of bonded labourers in brick manufacturing, of child labour and of home-based, female labour in the garment and other industries. These presentations served to strengthen a set of pivotal papers on the declining numbers of factory-based workers and the expansion of non-formal sector which was increasingly ab sorbing the majority of the working population in Pakistan. Arguments were also presented criticizing the narrowly focused trade union poli-

assumes. It will then analyse the positive/negative impacts on the indus try with regard to workers and labour organizations within the countries. Within this framework the study looks at the global issues and pres sures affecting the industry, how global pressures impact on each of the countries, and current union and worker responses to industry changes within the respective countries. It is hoped a comparative analysis, which cuts across the developed/developing divide, will elicit the issues of most importance for labour policy makers in a constantly changing industry landscape. Research for this project is being funded by the Centre for Asia Pacific Social Transformation Studies (CAPSTRANS) and the Institute of Social Change and Critical Inquiry (ISCCI) of the University of Wollongong, Aus tralia. ■

tics of plant-based unions and col lective bargaining agents, which helps to undermine labour bargain ing power in the ever- shrinking for mal sector. Suggestions were put for ward to organize labour in the infor mal sector and also to pay attention to industry-wide trade unions. Finally legal and political prob lems that would hinder the process of labour organization in the infor mal sector were finally addressed by re-emphasizing the political process itself The discussion crystallized around the issue of how labour poli tics has to address the diverse forms of prevalent working conditions and the experiences lived within work ing-class communities. A larger so cial movement on democratic re form and on a rights based agenda was thought to be the major form in which working men, women, and children in Pakistan would acquire their legitimate place in society. This process would help create a new and inclusive meaning of citizenship within the context of Pakistani poli tics. Workshop participants committed themselves to further co-operation and continuing dialogue. Proposals were made for regional co-operation and sharing of experiences with re searchers from South Asian and Mid dle Eastern countries. In this regard a timetable was tentatively proposed to organize a comparative regional labour workshop at the end of the coming two years. Concrete under takings were also given by all the trade union activists and leaders for providing resource material for the archives. They were persuaded to identify key individuals who could be a part of a proposed oral history project on Pakistani labour history. A consensus also developed on longterm and short-term research agen da which would incorporate histori cal and contemporary situations. Fi nally, a commitment was made to a social action based research enabling a close association among the partic ipating academics and labour ac tivists. ■

Researchers - Associate-Professor Adrian Vickers, ISCCI (History and Politics Program), Co-ordinator Labour Program, CAPSTRANS - Dr Jan Elliott, Research Fellow Labour Program, CAPSTRANS - Ms Vicki Crinis, PhD Candidate, ISCCI (History and Politics Program) - Ms Michele Ford, PhD Candidate, ISCCI (History and Politics Program)

The conference was organized by the Pakistan Institute o f Labour Education and Research (PILER) with partial support from the Changing Labour Relations in Asia (CLARA). Speakers: I.A. Rehman, Khizer Humayun Ansari, KaramatAli and Christopher Candland, Sarah Ansari, Kamran AsdarAli, Usman Baloch, Riffat Hussain, Fasihuddin Salar, Allana Hingoro, Hasan Karrar, Ahmad Saleem, Abdul A ziz Memon, Ehsan Azeem Siddiqi, Saleem Raza.Ali Amjad, Nabi Ahmad,

Contact Person:

M uham m ad W aseem.Jaffar Ahmad, H am za

Dr Jan Elliott

Ali,Yunas Samad, Ifikhar Ahmad, Asad Sayeed,

E-mail: jan_elliott@ uow.edu.au.

Mir ZulfiqarAli, Umer Abbas, Farhat Parveen.

CLARA

N E WS

22> 24 N O V E M B E R 1 9 9 9 BANGKOK,

THAILAND

Subcontract Labour in Asia By RAT NA S APTARI ubcontracting arran gements, where pro duction is decentral ized and conducted out side the formal work place, or labour is ob tained and controlled through inter mediaries, have been familiar fea tures in the history of labour. These arrangements whether driven by labour shortage or by labour surplus situations, by fluctuating consumer markets or by the strengthening de mands of organized labour, are not only characteristic of developing economies in the contemporary peri od but also of the Western industrial ized countries both in the past and present. Therefore one cannot de scribe the development of work orga nization and labour relations as following a linear process starting from

a stage of decentralized labour rela tions to a more centralized one, as various descriptions regarding the industrialization process have tended to do in describing industrialization in the West. The logical question is that, if we cannot use a linear framework to describe the development of work organization in Asia, and if we take into account the diversities of labour arrangements which are em bedded in different institutional frameworks, how can comparative and historical studies help us to ex amine and explain these diversities? And what are the similarities and continuities that can be identified? These broad questions became the terms of reference for the papers of the workshop which covered a di verse range of sectors, different levels of analysis, different historical peri ods, and geographical areas. The gen eral situation of subcontracting

showing the way in which produc tion is organized in a decentralized manner utilizing a combination of family/household labour and wage labour and often deploying ‘tradi tional’ recruiting institutions cover ing the industrial, service and agri cultural sectors was shown in the many case studies from India, Philip pines, Thailand, Korea, Indonesia, Vietnam, Malaysia. In periods of labour shortage extra-economic methods (sanctions, physical punish ment) were used to obtain labour in combination with economic mea sures (bonuses, higher wages, or the creation of dual markets). However, in periods of labour surplus and with the stronger role of capital, the rela tively low cost of labour, the weak role ofunions and the lack of employ ment opportunities such measures were no longer needed. The latter sit uation is reflects the contemporary

The conference ‘Subcontract Labour situation in most parts of Asia, which in Asia’ was jointly organized by one speaker has termed a ‘buyer-dri CLARA (Changing Labour Relations in ven’ situation, which he distinguish Asia) / CUSRI (Chulalongkorn Univer es from a ‘producer-driven situation, sity Social Research Institute) and characterized by a need for special HOMENET, Thailand. ized knowledge rather than cheap Speakers were: Frederic Deyo, Alec labour. The various papers also dis Gordon, Ravi Ahuja, Irene Norlund, cussed the different categories of Jan Lucassen, Sietze Vellema, Napat labour (based on gender, ethnicity, Sirisambhand, Isabelle Vagneron, and age-group) and the different def Insoo Jeong, Roli Talampas, Erwan initions of skill which emerged out of Purwanto, Neetha N. Pillai, Ratna these subcontracting arrangements. Saptari, Indrasari Tjandraningsih and Although most of the empirical stud Ernawati, Rajeev Sharma, Rakawin ies did not look into the consequences Leechanavanichpan, Adrian Vickers, of subcontracting arrangements for and Jan Elliott. ■ local politics and community life, community organizers from Thai land involved with homeworkers in different parts of their country brought up the problems of organiz ing homeworkers particularly in rela tion to trade unions. It was recog nized that in looking at the nature of Applications may be sent to: Search Committee Visiting Fellowship labour relations in subcontracting CLARA (Dr Ratna Saptari I arrangements and the consequences Prof. Marcel v.d. Linden) these have on workers in the work International Institute o f Social History place and outside the workplace, an Cruquiusweg 3 1 understanding of such processes can 1019 AT Amsterdam not be achieved without looking at Tel.:+31-20-668 5866 the broader picture and the historical Fax:+31-20-665 4181 dimension in which these relations E-mail: rsa@iisg.nl are situated.

(Advertisement)

VISITING FELLOWSHIP CLARA PROGRAMME he Changing La bour Relations in Asia (CLARA) Pro gramme, which is a col laboration between the International Institute for Asian Studies (HAS) in Leiden/Amsterdam and the International Institute of Social History (IISH) in Amsterdam, invites applications for a CLARA Visiting Fellowship which will be based at the IISH.

NEW POSITION

Sardarni Kuljit Bindra Chair in Sikk Studies

Requiremenrs/Qualificadons: a. A doctorate (PhD based on research in the humanities or social sciences); b. Already conducting ongoing research, focusing squarely on labour issues in Asia; c. Candidate must be Asia-based; d. The research should be comparatively and historically inclined; e. A high quality and original article must be produced at the end of the fellowship.

HOFSTRA

UNIVERSITY

announces the establishment of

Sardarni Kuljit Kaur Bindra Chair in Sikh Studies. The Department of Philosophy and Religious Studies invites applications for a tenure-track position in the field of Sikh Studies with broad preparation in South Asian Religions. Applicants should have familiarity with classical texts in their original languages, and field experience in South Asia. Demonstrated interdisciplinary interests are desirable. Teaching responsibilities include Introduction to Eastern Religions, upper-level courses in South Asian Religions and Sikh Studies.

The chair holder will also be expected to play a leadership role in the development ofSikh Studies. The endowment of the Chair will include support for scholarly conferences at Hofstra and travel for research purposes. Requirements: Ph.D. or expectation of Ph.D.

Information about thefellowship/application procedures: a. Applications must be submitted before 31 May 2000; b. Applications include a research proposal/topic, a list of publications, and two referees; c. The fellowship must be taken up in 2000; d. Duration of the fellowship is three months; e. The work will be carried out at the IISH in Amsterdam; f. The visiting fellow will be offered housing, an allowance and the international travel expenses.

by August 2000. Some undergraduate teaching experience is preferred. Applications will be received through March 30,2000 or until the position is filled.

Hofstra University is a comprehensive educational institution enrolling 8000 full time undergraduates and 5000 graduate and part time students in all areas of the Liberal Arts and Sciences as well as in Business, Communication, Education, Engineering and Law. Our 238 acre residential campus is located in suburban Long Island, just 25 miles from Manhattan. AA/EO Send complete dossier (including letter of application, writing sample, three letters of reference and evidence of teaching proficiency) to Search Committee A, Department ofPhilosophy and Religious Studies, Hofstra University, Hempstead, NY 11549.

February 2000 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

NS21 •

THE

ESF A S I A C O M M I T T E E

As i a E U R O P E A N

By SABINE A.M . KUYPERS

ESF OFFICE

Commi t t ee S C I E N C E

F O U N D A T I O N

ESF Asia Com m ittee News

Workshops A

rising from the decisions taken a A by the Asia Com mittee in July 1999, a ‘call for workshops to take place in 2001’ was issued in Novem ber 1999. This call was also published in the HAS Newsletter 20. The dead line for the submission of workshop proposals was 1 February 2000; a date atj^hich this Newsletter was already

THE ESF IN A NUTSHELL The European Science Foundation (ESF) acts as a catalyst for the development of science by bringing together leading scientists and funding agencies to debate, plan and implement pan-European scientific and science policy initiatives. The ESF is an association of more than sixty major national funding agencies devoted to basic scientific research in over twenty countries. It represents all scientific disciplines: physical and engineering sciences, life and environmental sciences, medical sciences, humanities and social sciences.The Foundation assists its Member Organisations in two main ways: by bringing scientists together in its scientific programmes, networks and European research conferences, to work on topics of common concern; and through the joint study of issues of strategic importance in European science policy. The ESF maintains close relations with other scientific institutions within and outside Europe. By its activities, the Foundation adds value by co-operation and co-ordination across national frontiers and endeavours, offers expert scientific advice on strategic issues, and provides the European forum for fundamental science. ESF OFFICE Mrs Marianne Yagoubi or Ms Madelise Blumenroeder I quai Lezay-Marnésia 67080 Strasbourg Cedex, France Tel.:+33 388 767151 Fax: +33 388 370532 E-mail: mblumenroeder@esf.org Http://www.esf.org SECRETARIAT OF THE ESF ASIA COMMITTEE International Institute for Asian Studies att. of: Drs Sabine A.M. Kuypers or Drs Marieke te Booij RO.Box 9515,2300 RA Leiden The Netherlands Tel.:+31-71-527 22 27 Fax:+31-71-527 4 1 62 http://www.iias.nl/esfac

■

IIAS N E W S L E T T E R

in print. The proposals will be sent to external referees for evaluation (February/March). On the basis of these evaluators’ reports, the Asia Committee will make a final selec tion during its annual meeting in Madrid in June 2000. Some of the workshops that were selected during the 1999 meeting for Asia Committee’s support have al ready taken place. On 26-27 August 1999, in Hong Kong, PR China, the workshop Chinese Transnational En terprises and Entrepreneurship in Pros perity and Adversity: South China and Southeast Asia during the twentieth Cen tury, took place. The workshop Preser vation of Dunhuang Manuscripts and Central Asian Collections was held on 7-12 September 1999, in St Peters burg, Russia [see report in IIAS Newsletter 20). A third ESF Asia Committee workshop was organized in Copenhagen, Denmark from 28-30 October 1999: Mongolians from Coun try to City: Floating Boundaries, Pastoralism, and City Life in the Mongol Lands during the 20th Century. Reports of the meetings 1 and 3 may be found in this section of the Newsletter.

P ublication G rants & Program m e Development The Asia Committee 1999-2001 de cided not only to support work shops, but also to award small grants for possible publications deriving from the selected workshops. Some organizers have applied for such grants. At the moment, the organiz ers of the workshop Chinese Transna tional Enterprises and Entrepreneurship in Prosperity and Adversity: South China and Southeast Asia during the twentieth Century are preparing a publication based on the workshop’s results. This publication is expected in au tumn 2000. In the framework of ‘Programme development’, it was decided to con tinue support for two research pro grammes that had been set up dur ing the Asia Committee’s first man date period [1994-1997J and that had obtained earlier support from the Asia Committee: ij ‘East-West Envi ronmental Linkages Network’ [EWEL], and 2) ‘Changing Labour Relations in Asia’ (CLARA). Both programmes will receive support for their publica tions planned for 2000. A state of the art of EWEL, partly supported by the Asia Committee, is printed in this

“N? 2 1 • February 2000

■

N E WS

newsletter. For more information on the CLARA programme, please see the CLARA section in this Newslet ter, pp. 54-55. Decisions on supporting the de velopment of new research pro grammes, will be taken by the full Asia Committee, probably only after the workshops that were selected in 1999, have taken place.

Fellows In 1998, on the basis of earlier ex periences and an international re viewers’ report (December 1997), it was decided that the Asia Committee should continue a long-term fellow ship scheme and that this should be supplemented by a short-term grant scheme allowing young researchers to help create institutional co-opera tion such as joint research pro grammes. Because of the limited fi nances that are available, it will not be possible to attract new long-term fellows in the near future. On the basis of workshop results and deci sions to be taken with regard to pro gramme development, in future short-term grants may be awarded within the framework of pro gramme development. In 1997 the ESF Asia Committee was able to select three research fel lows with the assitance of financial aid of the IIAS/Strategic Alliance: Dr Giovanni Vitiello; Dr Martin Ramstedt; and Dr Evelyne Micollier. Dr Ramstedt and Dr Micollier, sta tioned at the HAS in Leiden and Ams terdam respectively, are still con ducting research, working on ‘Hindu Dharma Indonesia - the Hindu-movement in present-day Indonesia and its influence in rela tion to the development of the in digenous culture of the Toraja (Aluk Todolo) in South Sulawesi’ (until 30 November 2000) and on ‘Practices and Representations of Health and Illness in the Context of Chinese

Culture. Interactions with social facts (illness prevention and Human reality of AIDS)’ (until 1 July 2000). Dr Cecilia Milwertz, stationed at the University of Oxford, finished her term as ESF fellowship in August

I quai Lezay-Marnésia 67080 Strasbourg Cedex France Tel.:+33-388 76 71 51 Fax:+33-388 37 05 32 http://www.esf.org

Committee’s Chairman, Vice-Chair man, and Secretary. The Conference will meet annually and will be fund ed and administered by the ESF Asia Committee. Chairmanship will be on a rotating basis.

L999-

Meetings The full Committee, as stated above, will convene in Madrid on 1516 June 2000. In the mean time, an Asia Committee working group, called the ‘Executive Group’ (see IIASN 20), met in Leiden, on 4 No vember 1999. It will hold another meeting in Lisbon in April 2000. The Executive Group meetings serve to discuss the implementation of deci sions taken by the full Committee in more depth, or to prepare its meet ings. Members of the Executive Group are: Prof. Thommy Svensson (Asia Committee’s Chairman); Prof. Jean-Luc Domenach (Vice-Chair man); Prof Wim Stokhof (Secretary); Prof Klaus Antoni; Prof. Terry King; and Prof. Rosa Maria Perez.

E stablishm ent o f the Conference o f the Presidents o fth ee ~European Associations or A sian Studies

On 5 November 1999, Leiden, the Executive Group met the chief exec utives of the six European associa tions for Asian Studies: the Associa tion for Korean Studies in Europe (AKSE); the European Association for Chinese Studies (EACS); the Euro pean Association for Japanese Stud ies (EAJS); the European Association for South Asian Studies (EASAS); the European Society for Central Asian Studies (ESCAS); and the European Association for South East Asian Studies (EUROSEAS). The associa tions were represented by: Dr T. Atabaki (President ESCAS); Dr P. Boomgaard (Secretary EUROSEAS); Prof G. Dudbridge (President EACS); Dr P. Kornicki (President EAJS); Prof D. Kolff (Secretary EASAS); and Prof W. Sasse (President AKSE). During the meeting it was decided to set up a Conference of the Presidents of the European Associations for Asian Studies. The aim of the Conference shall be to provide a forum o f dia logue all about the field of Asian Studies and to make joint efforts to secure and enlarge this field of study and research at a European level. The Conference will consist of the Presidents (or their representatives) of the six European associations for Asian Studies, and of the ESF Asia

International Convention o f Asia Scholars z (I CAS z], Berlin zoo 1 The first International Conven tion of Asia Scholars (ICAS 1) took place in Noordwijkerhout in June 1998. It was organized by the HAS, in conjunction with the Association for Asian Studies (AAS), Ann Arbor, USA, and the European Science Founda tion Asia Committee. Approximately 800 people from the United States, Europe and, to a lesser extent, from Asia and Australia attended. The Eu ropean associations for Asian Studies participated actively in the confer ence. A second ICAS (ICAS 2) is planned for Berlin, Germany, in 2001. ICAS 2 will be organized by the Freie Universitat Berlin, the AAS, and the ESF Asia Committee. Plans are being made for the greater in volvement of Australian and Asian participants c.q. institutions. As for ICAS 1, the Asia Committee will sup port ICAS 2 as ‘patron’ (but no finan cial contribution can be made). Dur ing the November meeting with the European associations for Asian Studies (see above), the organizer of ICAS 2, Prof E. Sandschneider (Freie Universitat Berlin), gave a presenta tion on the plans for ICAS 2. All six European associations consented to co-operate in ICAS 2. They agreed to nominate scholars to become mem bers of the 'programme committee', which is to make a selection of pan els and presentations.

M em bership Prof Jan Breman, member of both the ESF Asia Committee and the Academia Europea, consented to be come an observer of the Academia Europea at the Asia Committee.

BrochurefResearch prospectus The ESF Asia Committee 1999-2001 Research Prospectus is to be printed in February 2000. Copies may be ob tained from the Asia Committee’s Sec retariat at the address below. The text is also available on www.iias.nl/esfac. General data, news about the Asia Committee; workshop and fellowship proposals and reports may be found in this section of each HAS newsletter and on the Internet address as given above. ■

ESF AS I A C O M M I T T E E FELLOWS Dr Evelyne Micollier (Aix-en-Provence) Stationed at: IIAS, Leiden, the Netherlands Topic: ‘Practices and Representations of Health and Illness in the Context of Chinese Culture. Interactions with social facts (Illness prevention and Human reality of AIDS)’

Period: July 1998 - July 2000

Dr Martin Ramstedt (München) Stationed at: IIAS, Leiden, the Netherlands Topic: Hindu Dharma Indonesia -T he Hindu-Movement in Present-Day Indonesia and its Influence in Relation to the De velopment of the Indigenous Culture of the Toraja (Aluk Todolo) in South Sulawesi Period: December 1997 - December 2000

For general ESFAsia Committee information and for information on workshops you may contact the ESFAsia Committee Secretariat or the ESF Office at the addresses mentioned in the side-bar on this page.

ES F A S I A

COMMI TTEE

N E WS 27-29

AUGUST

FEBRUARY

1999

2 6 - 2 7 A U G U S T 1999

Hong Kong, PR China Chinese Transnational Enterprises and Entrepreneurship in Prosperity and Adversity: South China and Southeast Asia during the twentieth century. For more information please visit the conference website: www.iias.nl/iias/research/qiaoxiangor contact Dr Cen Huang or Dr Leo Douw at

19-20

2000

FEBRUARY

2000

Coventry, Great Britain

Agenda

APRIL

2000

JUNE

Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium Building the Social Safety Net for Asian

Migration, Urban Development and Demographic Change in Punjab

Oslo, Norway Human and Regional Security

University catholique de Louvain,

around the South China Sea

Place Montesquieu 3,

Mr Johan Henrik Nossum,

B-1348 Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium

Centre for Development and

Tel:+32-10-47 4146

the Environment, P.0 . Box 1116 Blindern,

Fax: +32-10-473945

N-0317 Oslo, Norway

E-mail: anderson@ires.ucl.ac.be

Tel. +47-22-85 89 00

and Law, Coventry University,

Fax: +47-22-85 89 20

United Kingdom MAY

E-mail: 106432.1724@compuserve.com

2000

E-mail: j.h.nossum@sum.uio.no

E-mail: cenhuang@hotmail.com or douwl@let.vu.nl.

7-12 S E P T E M B E R

http://www.sum.uio.no/southchinasea/ MARCH

1999

SEPTEMBER

1999

2000

Professor Ronald Anderson, IRES,

Studies, School o f International Studies Priory Street, CVi 5FB Coventry,

JUNE

Societies in Transition

1890s-1990s

Dr Ian Talbot, Centre for South Asian

2-4

2000

1-3

8-10

2000

MARCH

MAY

2000

Amsterdam, the Netherlands Brokers o f Capital and Knowledge:

2000

21-23

JUNE

2000

Paris, France

Seoul, Korea

producer services and social mobility

Good Government, Eastern and Western

in Provincial Asia

and social history

Medicine in China. Health techniques

St Petersburg, Russia Preservation o fD m huang and

Perspectives: 4^ EPCReN Workshop

Dr Heidi Dahles, Centre for Asian Studies

Dr Frederic Obringer, Centre d’Etudes

Dr Geir Helgesen, Nordic Institute of

Amsterdam (CASA), Het Spinhuis,

sur la Chine Moderne et Contemporaine,

Central Asian Collections

Asian Studies, Leifsgade 33,

Oudezijds Achterburgwal 185,

54, boulevard Raspail, 75006 Paris France

Professor Yu A Petrosyan,

2300 Copenhagen S, Denmark

1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands

Fax: +33-1-4954 2078

Head of the M anuscript Fund of

Fax: +45-32-96 25 30

Fax: +31-20-444 6722

E-mail: obtinger@ehess.fr

the St. Petersburg Branch o f the Institute

E-maih geir@nias.ku.dk

o f Oriental Study, Russian Academy 1 5 - 17

o f Sciences

m a r c h

London, Great Britain

Supervisor o f the M anuscript Fund

Interpreting Asian Cultures in Museums: displays, activities, strategies Dr Brian Durrans, Departm ent of

orient@thesa.ru

Ethnography, British Museum, OCTOBER

1999

6 Burlington Gardens, London W1X 2EX, Great Britain

28-30 O C T O B E R

1999

Copenhagen, Denmark Mongoliansjrom Country to City:

The Committee selected 15 workshops (from a total o f some 75 applications) which will enjoy itssupport/or 1999/2000. T he fo llo w in g proposals re ceived ESF ACfin a n c in g . For contact ad dresses, please refer to the International Con/erence Agenda.

Tel.: +44-207-323 8027 Fax: +44-207-323 8013 E-mail:

APRIL

bdurrans@ british-m useum .ac.uk

1 6 - 17

m a r c h

2000

Demographic Developments and Value

(contact person) and Dr Ole Bruun

a contemporary concept in India

Change in Contemporary Modem Societies -

E-mail: nara@nias.ku.dk

Dr B. G. Karls son, The Seminar for

East Asian and Western societies in

Development Studies, Uppsala

In the autumn o f zooi, the German Association o f Asian Stud ies (DGA) will organize the Second International Convention o f Asia Scholars (ICAS z) in Berlin,

__ w ith

%3ÊL I

‘A rb eitsstelle

P o litik C h in as u n d Osta s ie n s’ (C enter for C h i

w h ic h to o k place in Ju n e 1998 in N o o rd w ijk e rh o u t, th e N e th e rla n d s, a n d w h ic h w as o rg a n iz e d by th e HAS. It is h o p ed th a t th e P ro g ram m e C o m m itte e o f ICAS 2 w ill have its

tics), Free U n iv ersity o f B erlin, th e A ssociation for A sian Studies (Ann

first m e e tin g in Ju n e 2000 in B erlin. M ore in fo rm a tio n a n d n ew devel o p m e n ts w ith reg ard s to ICAS 2 w ill

A rbor), th e ESF Asia C o m m itte e a n d six E u ro p ean associations for A sian

N ew sle tte r. ■

nese an d E ast A sian Poli

be p u b lish e d in fu tu re issues o f th is

Studies (AKSE, EACS, EAJS, EASAS, ESCAS, a n d EUROSEAS). T he p ro g ra m m e w ill be discussed a n d d e te rm in e d by a p ro g ra m m e c o m m itte e w h ic h consists o f re p re sen tativ es o f all sp o n so rin g a n d s u p

Systems and Cultural Heritagefs) in

Professor Anne Booth, Departm ent of

South and Southeast Asia

Economics, SOAS, University o f London,

Professor S. Leydesdorffor Dr Frances

Russell Square, London WCIHOXG,

Gouda, Belle van Zuylen Instituut,

Great Britain

Universiteit van Amsterdam, Rokin 84-

Fax: +44-171-323 6277

90,1012 KX Amsterdam, The Netherlands

E-mail: abio@soas.ac.uk

Fax:+31-20-525 22 19 fgouda@aol.com

Arbeitsstelle Politik Chinas und Ostasiens, Freie Universitat Berlin

p o rtin g associations. T he p ro ced u re

Ihnestr. 2 2 . D - / 4 I 9 S Berlin, Germany

w ill follow th e experiences o f ICAS 1,

E-mail: sandschn@ zedat.fu-berlin.de

and Asia Dr Pal D. Nyiri at both

Uppsala, Sweden

nyirip@mail.matav.hu and nyirip@yahoo.com.

Fax:+46-18-120832

E-mail: beppe.karlsson@uland.uu.se

ESF AS I A COMMITTEE MEMBERS

EUROPEAN AS S O CI AT I O NS FOR ASI AN STUDI ES ASSOCIATION FOR KOREAN STUDIES IN EUROPE, AKSE Prof. W erner Sasse (President)

EUROPEAN SOCIETY FOR CENTRAL ASIA STUDIES, ESCAS Dr Turaj Atabaki (President)

E-mail:

or5a007@rrz.uni-hamburg.de Secretariat: d o DrYoung-sook Pak E-mail:

Yp@soas.ac.uk http://www.dur.ac.uk/~dmuOrcp/ aksepage.htm

Turaj.Atabaki@let.uu.nl d o Dr Gabriele Rasuly-Paleczek

- Prof. Jan Breman (the Netherlands) - Prof. Jean-L uc D o m e n a c h

E-mail:

gabriele.rasuly@univie.ac.at http://www.let.uu.nl/~escas/

(France)

- Prof. Jan Fagerberg (Norway)

EUROPEAN ASSOCIATION OF CHINESE STUDIES, EACS Prof. Glen Dudbridge (President) E-mail:

E-mail:

glen.dudbridge@orinst.ox.ac.uk Secretariat: d o Prof. Christian Henriot E-mail:

chenriot@ish-lyon.cnrs.fr http://www.soas.ac.uk/eacs

pk 104@hermes.cam.ac.uk Secretariat:

Secretariat:

d o Prof. Peter Boomgaard

E-mail:

EUROSEAS@rullet.leidenuniv.nl http://www.iias.nl/institutes/kitlv/

d o Prof. W erner Pascha E-mail:

eajs@uni-duisburg.de http://www.eajs.org/

EUROPEAN ASSOCIATION FOR SOUTH ASIAN STUDIES, EASAS Prof. Dr Dieter Rothermund (President) E-mail:

agS@vm.urz.uni-heidelberg.de Secretariat: d o Prof. Dirk Kolff E-mail:

Kolff@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

thommy.svensson@smvk.se

euroseas.html

EUROPEAN ASSOCIATION FOR JAPANESE STUDIES, EAJS Dr Peter Kornicki (President)

The Asia C o m m itte e consists of the following m em bers nominated by their respective National Research Councils:

- Prof. Klaus Antoni (Germany) - Prof. Alessandro Avanzini (Italy)

Secretariat:

EUROPEAN ASSOCIATION FOR SOUTHEAST ASIAN STUDIES, EUROSEAS Prof.Thommy Svensson (President)

E-mail:

ICAS 2 organizing unit: Prof. Dr Eberh ard Sandschneider

25 -2 6 may 2000

Budapest, Hungary The Last Decade o f Migrationjrom the People's Republic o f China to Europe

Tel: +46-18-471 6852

0-53113 Bonn

2nd International Convention of Asia Scholars

2000

SOAS, London, Great Britain

University, Övre Slottsgatan i,S-753 10

Modemes japan, Regina-Pacis-Weg 7,

Fax:+49-228-735054

JULY

[p r o v i s i o n a l ]

2000

Centre and Periphery in Southeast Asia

Indigenous People: the trajectory o f

Dr Axel Klein, Forschungsstelle

Tel.: +49-228-737023

m a y

Uppsala, Sweden

Convenors: Dr Li Narangoa

comparative perspective

Amsterdam, the Netherlands

7 - 9 APRI L 2 0 0 0

Bonn, Germany

CAS 2 w ill be o rg a n ized in co -o p eratio n

Gender and the Transmission o f Values

2000

during the 20* century

Short News

7-8 23

E-mail: leydesdorff@pscw.uva.nl or

floating boundaries, pastoralism, and city life in the Mongol lands

E-mail: brokers@pscw.uva.nl

2000

or Dr M.I. Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya, E-mail: orient@ieos.spb.su or

A genda

Prof. Marc Gaborieau (France) Prof. Carl le Grand (Sweden) Prof.Terr y King (Great Britain) Prof. Reijo Luostarinen (Finland) Prof. Wolfgang Marschall (Switzerland) Prof. John Martinussen (Denmark) Prof. Rosa Maria Perez (Portugal) Prof. Nicolas Standaert (Belgium) Prof. Ernst Steinkellner (Austria) Prof. Wim S tokhof (the Netherlands) (secretary) Prof. Thommy Svensson (Sweden) (chairman) Prof. Rudolf Wagner (Germany)

Observers are: - Prof.Taciana Fisac (Spain) - Chiang Ching-kuo Foundation for International Scholarly Exchange (Taiwan ROC) Association for Asian Studies (USA) - Academia Europaea, Prof. Jan Breman (the Netherlands)

February 2000 • has n e w s l e t t e r n ?21 • 5 7

ESF A S I A C O M M I T T E E 26 ► 27 A U G U S T HONG KONG

N E WS

1999

South China

andSoutheast

Chinese Transnational Enterprises and Entrepreneurship The ESF-sponsored conference, en titled ‘Chinese Transnation al Enterprises and Entrepreneurship in Prosperity and Adver sity: South China and Southeast Asia during the Tw entieth Century’ was the final one in the series o f international workshops/conferences organized by the ‘Qiaoxiang Ties’ Pro gramm e o f the HAS. It was also an international collaboration betw een European scientific in stitu tion s and their Asian re search counterparts. ■ By LEO DOUW, CEN H U A N G , A N D ELI ZABETH SI NN

evolved during the conference are expected to make significant contri butions to the field of Chinese transnational business studies, not only on the basis of the empirical findings but also in the building up of a theoretical framework for the in vestigation of Chinese transnational enterprises. Discussions were extremely lively and comprehensively covered on the research themes outlined in the con ference programme. Many issues were raised and discussed among the scholars. The following is a brief summary of the discussions. Over the past century many Chinese transnational enterprises have es tablished a strong presence in South China and Southeast Asia. Many of their successes have become subjects of numerous academic investigatio'ns. Some attribute their successes to the cultural affinity they share with their homeland as well as the elaborate networks of qiaoxiang (Chi nese hometown diaspora] ties they have set up and operated. Others claim that their operation and pres ence is indicative of the gradual emergence of a unique form of dias-

he conference was successfully held at the University of Hong Kong on 26-27 Au gust 1999. Thirty scholars presented twenty-three papers at the two-day conference. The scholars came from 11 different countries and areas. Among them six were from Australia, two from Canada, six from China, three from Germany, four from Hong Kong, one from Japan, one from South Korea, three from the Netherlands, two from Singapore, one from Tai wan, and one from the United King dom. Professor Wong Siu-lun, the VicePresident of the University of Hong Kong, and also a well-known scholar of Chinese family business studies, delivered the opening speech and concluding remarks on behalf of the host institute. He had words of high praise for the conference as an effort to establish academic co-operation between European and Asian schol ars, and spoke out strongly in favour of further collaboration between the University of Hong Kong and the European Science Foundation. ‘Dicuporic appeals The conference was considered a great success. It brought to gether scholars from different are particularly useful a t academic disciplines and from different country and cultural the in itia tin g stage o f backgrounds to document and dissect the central dynamics of Chinese transnational enterpris foreig n investment in es in South China and Southeast Asia. It examined how Chinese countries like C h in a ’ transnational enterprises have been operated and managed across borders, and how transna tional entrepreneurship has af fected industrial relations and management styles in both re gions in the twentieth century It pora Chinese capitalism, network also investigated the relationship capitalism, or entrepreneurial capi between the current Asian crisis and talism which is characterized by Chinese transnational enterprises flexibility, invisibility, and family and their coping strategies. The con orientation. However, such dis ference achieved its goal in bringing courses are not unambiguous and do European and Asian scholars togeth not pass uncontested. It was argued er to exchange research findings on that transnational entrepreneurship the research topic and to plan future involves more than the utilization of research co-operation. The research cultural and constructed social ties findings and discussions which to the homeland. It also requires

•

I I AS N E W S L E T T E R > « 2 1

• February 2000

careful manoeuvering of values, atti tudes, and behaviour across national boundaries and socio-cultural sys tems as well as strategic responses to sudden and unanticipated changing political and economic conditions imposed by national government policies and international constella tions. As South China and Southeast Asia become integrated regionally under the forces of globalization dri ving them through times of both economic prosperity and adversity, as evidenced by the rapid growth in the 1980s and the current persistent financial crisis, an understanding of these ambiguities is both urgent and timely. In addition, the scholars also paid close attention to the concepts, theories, and histories in the dis course on Chinese transnational en terprises, as well as to the documen tation of the recent transformation of Chinese transnational enterprises in terms of business structures, modes of operation, style of manage ment, and crisis management strate gies. The following points and ques tions evolved from presentations and discussions at the conference:

l.The role o f culture in the operation and in stitu tio n alisation o f Chinese trans national firm s: The first major publication of the Qiaoxiang Ties programme mapped out the 20th century history of Chi nese efforts to build up a diaspora which could support transna tional trade and investment, and described and discussed its insti tutionalization and uses for transnational business (Douw, Huang, and Godley 1999). One of the book’s conclusions is that diasporic appeals are particularly useful at the initiating stage of foreign investment in countries like China, where claims of cul tural affinity help bridge the gap between the situation in China and that of the countries where overseas business people of Chi nese descent reside. For many reasons, the institutionalization of the diasporic link appeared to be weak, however, which brought up the question how, if not in the diasporic form, Chi nese transnational business enter prise would otherwise be institu tionalized. Most of the papers at the work shop confirmed that cultural dis tinction is not the main factor influ encing the operational mode of Chi nese firms. For example, the profits made by firms of Hong Kongese, Tai wanese, US, and Canadian back ground in Tianjin’s Special Develop

ment Zone apparently accord with variations in firm size, type of prod uct, and other non-cultural variables (Li and Zong]. The papers on German firms active in China and on German-Sino joint-ventures confirmed this finding, also emphasizing the importance of non-cultural factors in the field of human resource man agement (Munder; Krieg, and Nagels]. The prototypically ‘Chinese’ patterns of family divisiveness were broken through by the Eu Yang Seng pharmaceutics firm, first by a fortu nate co-ordination of ownership and management, and second, in the early 1990s, by the soundly perceived prospect of new market opportuni ties in South China (Yeung]. During the current Asian crisis the Chinese characteristics of transnational firms were apparently beneficial to their survival, but at the same time the incidence of market opportuni ties was probably more decisive, so it was found that Taiwanese high-tech multinationals generally did better than their Hong Kong real estate counterparts (Ip, Tracy, Lever-Tracy].

z.L abour m anagem ent in labour-intensive industries in South China. This issue evoked particularly in tense debate and is important be cause it pertains to the institutional grounding of industrial relations in China. The indictment of Taiwanese managers for imposing harsh regimes on their workers was made in a paper which stressed the inci dence of corporal punishment in the factories concerned by giving de tailed quantitative findings (Chan]; these findings were contradicted and complemented by other statements, which emphasized the irrationality of treating workers badly (SchakJ, or pointed out the workings of the pre sent-day liberalized markets to the benefit or the detriment of both em ployers and workers, the latter usu ally migrants (Huang].

3. M ethodological and theoretical issues. Since this workshop was meant to be a fact-finding exercise, it devoted a fair amount of time and energy to methodological questions, mainly regarding the obtainability and uses of reliable data. As to the more ex plicitly theoretically oriented pa pers, Siu-lun Wong’s discussion of an ideal-typical centre of Chinese power and culture dispersed over the past century as a background to the present-day diffusion of economic policy decision making elicited a strenuous debate, and seemed an eloquent framework of reference for the major themes of the workshop to

most participants. Douw’s paper raised the question of how political power could be directed towards the establishment of just economic in stitutions.

P ublication plans The outcome of the conference is planned to be published as an edited volume in 2000. It will be the second book in the series of the HAS ‘Qiaoxi ang’ Ties Programme. The first book entitled ‘Qiaoxiang Ties Interdisci plinary Approaches to Cultural Capi talism in South China’ was pub lished in August 1999 (Douw, Huang, and Godley 1999, Kegan Paul International).

Proposed contents o f the volume: 1. Clarification of the concepts, theo ries, and work in progress that are currently being contested and car ried out in the discourse on Chi nese transnational enterprises; 2. Illustrations of how overseas Chi nese entrepreneurs historically have restored and used their busi ness ties and networks to organize their capital and labour to create new business opportunities for growth and to restructure their enterprises to adapt to and over come problematic economic and socio-political conditions. 3. Documentation of the recent transformation of Chinese trans national enterprises in terms of business structures, modes of op eration, style of management, and crisis management strategies in the face of increasing internation alization and globalization. 4. Investigation of the relationship between the current Asian crisis and Chinese transnational enter prises and their coping strategies. 5. Contribution to the continued theorizing about Chinese transna tional enterprises. This includes a discourse on the institutionaliza tion of ties, networks, and Chinese transnational enterprises and the exploration of the theory of decen tring - the rise of entrepreneurial networks in Chinese society.

Future research plan A web page for the above confer ence has been set up. It will be used to connect interested scholars for fu ture research co-operation. ■ The web-page address: www.iias.nl/research/qiaoxiang.

Leo Douw, Amsterdam University Cen Huang, International Institute

for Asian Studies Elizabeth Sinn, University o f Hong Kong

INSTITUTES

EU-China Academic Network Relations between China and European Union Member States have expanded rapidly in recent years. The European Commis sion’s announcement in 1995, o f a major policy initiative in the form o f its ‘China Communication’, highlighted tile in creasing significance o f China in Europe’s future external rela tions. The establishment o f the EU-China Academic Network is not unrelated to this initiative and to subsequent related developments that have flowed from it. ■

By ROBERT ASH

immu

s relations be-

ZA tween China and L J t EU Member States expand, so European governments, industries and service sectors are having to confront a wide range of issues relating to China. Although academic and professional research communities in Europe are uniquely placed to address these issues, few formal institutional frameworks have existed in the past to bring such communities together. Through the institution of a programme of meet ings - formal and informal - and

publications, the Network was es tablished in order to provide a framework in which European spe cialists can share their knowledge, discuss on-going research and ex change views with government poli cy-makers and representatives of corporate business mid other profes sional bodies. Such is tile background to the es tablishment, in 1997, of the EUChina Academic Network (ECAN). Its primary purpose is to bring to gether, physically and intellectually, the diverse community of specialists on contemporary China working in EU Member States. Among the broad goals which ECAN seeks to fulfil are

(Advertisements)

U atel Wi£Ae£mina K o n i n g i n n e w e g 167-169 1075 CN AMSTERDAM

The N e t h e r l a n d s tel

.: +31-20-662 54-67 / 664 0594

Fax : +31-20-679 2296

E-m a il :

w i l h l h t l @e u r o n e t . n l

IN THE

LI MELI GHT

the following: to foster a community among EU specialists on contempo rary China in universities and re search institutions; to share research findings on China’s current and fu ture development and to seek ways of stimulating collaborative re search, to promote links between academic experts and European poli cymakers - and to promote links and collaboration between European specialists on contemporary China and their counterparts, in North America, Australia and Asia. ECAN also administers the EUChina Research Fellowship Fund (ECRFF). This Fund offers funding support for European specialists on Contemporary China to visit main land China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan in order to undertake fieldwork or pursue archival research. ECRFF awards are made to outstanding postgraduate students nearing com pletion of their PhD research or to post-doctoral candidates at an early stage in their academic or academicrelated careers. The research propos als of the candidates are expected to reflect work in a social science with special relevance to some aspect of contemporary development in China. ECAN makes available up to twelve awards each year. ECAN is managed from the School of Oriental and African Studies of the University of London. Its co-ordina tor is Professor Robert Ash who over sees the day-to-day work of ECAN with the support of an Executive Committee comprising ‘node’ insti tutions of Chinese Studies s in six other EU Member States. These are: Asien-instituttet (University of Copenhagen, Denmark), Center for Pacific Asia Studies (University of Stockholm, Sweden), Centre d etudes sur la Chinese moderne et contem poraine (Paris, France), Centro de Estudios de Asia Oriental, Universidad Autónoma de Madrid (Spain), Institut für Asienkunde, (Hamburg, Ger many), and Sinological Institute (Universiteit Leiden, The Nether lands). In addition to these founding col laborative institutions, Institutional Membership has recently been ex tended to institutions Belgium, Fin land, Greece, and Portugal. As well as the core institutions mentioned above, in any given country, other institutions may join ECAN as Asso ciate Members.

W orkshops

King, Ucdel Le id se k a d e 8 6 -8 6 1017 P N A m s t e r d a m

The N eth er lan d s TEL.: +31-20-624 9603 / 627 6101 FAX: +31-20-620 7277

In pursuit of its stated goals, ECAN organizes two small-scale Pol icy Workshops each year. Participa tion in these Workshops is by invita tion and comprises academic special ists, as well as policy-makers front individual governments of EU Mem ber States and die European Com mission, and other professional rep resentatives with an active involve ment in China. ‘Me meetings are de signed to establish closer links be tween EU specialists on Contempo rary China, while also making the most recent research and work-inprogress more readily available to European policy makers. The five Workshops that have so far been held have addressed a wide range of political, social, legal, economic, and environmental developments in China. The most recent meeting was held in Stockholm in May 1999. It

ADVERTISE IN THE MAS NEWSLETTER Please ask for our advertisement rates for the possibilities (advertorials, enclosures), deadlines, and copy requirements. See page 64 For further information contact the Editor at the HAS. Telephone: +31-71-527 22 27 E-mail: iiasnews@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

was hosted by Prof Thomas Hart of the Center for Pacific-Asia Studies (University of Stockholm) and its title was Assessing the Interface Between Economics and Politics in China. In ad dition to Thomas Hart, speakers at the Workshop included Dr KjeldErik Brodsgaard (University of Copenhagen), Dr Cyril Lin (St Antho ny’s College, Oxford University), Prof. Thomas Scharping (University of Cologne), Dr Margot Schüller (Institut für Asienkunde) and Prof. Robert Ash (SOAS). ECAN also holds an annual inter national conference, which is hosted by an ECAN Member Institution and field at a different location within the EU. In 1998 and 1999, these meet ings were held in London and Madrid, in each case, they brought together senior academics and other figures from the United States, Hong Kong, China and Taiwan, as well as from within Europe. Speakers from major international organizations, such as the World Bank, Food and Agriculture Organization and Inter national Energy Agency, have also taken part in ECAN Annual Confer ences. At the time of writing, prepa rations are well advanced for ECAN’s Third ECAN Conference, which will be held in Copenhagen during 10-11 February 2000 and co-hosted by the Asien-instituttet (University of Copenhagen) and the Research Insti tute of the Danish Foreign Ministry (DU PI). The Conference will address questions relating to China’s rela tions with bordering countries and regions, as well as its changing glob al role in the context of Post-Kosovo geo-politics. Preparations are also under way for a Policy Workshop on China’s In formation Revolution, with particular Reference to the Telecommunications Industry, which will take place in Helsinki in May and be hosted by the University of Turku. It has been agreed that die pro ceedings of each ECAN Annual Con ference will be published and the

first two conference volumes are cur rently in production with Curzon Press. Where circumstances permit, the proceedings of Policy Workshops will also be made available in book form. To date, one such volume has been published under the title, China’s Economic Security (edited by Werner Draguhn ands Robert Ash) (Curzon Press, 1999). ■

ECAN

is always pleased to receive

suggestions about future meetings and topics for discussion. It also welcomes proposals for collaborative research projects across EU M em ber States, especially those involving a Sino-EU or Sino-European dimensions. These and any other enquiries (for example, relating to membership o f ECAN) should be addressed to Robert Ash or Liselot Hertel at the following address:

ECAN SOAS, University o f London Thornhaugh Street Russell Square London,W C I H OXC United Kingdom Tel.:+44-171-637 6130 Fax:+44-1 7 1 -6 9 13422 / + 44-171-323 6 2 7 7 E-mail: ecan@ soas.ac.uk

February 2000 •

has n e w s l e t t e r

NC2 i • 5 9

INSTITUTES

IN THE

LI MEL I GHT

Seminar for Languages & Cultures of Central Asia It was Otto Spies (1901-81}, holder from 1951 o f the Chair o f the Oriental Seminar in Bonn, with its concentration on re search and teaching in the fields o f Semitic and Islamic Stud ies, who, in the years 1958 and 1959, expanded his seminar by the addition o f a Sinological Department and a Mongolian Department alongside that for Japanology. Professor Walther Heissig (1913-} was invited to come from Gottingen to become Head o fth e Mongolian Department. In 1964 the Mongolian Division was converted into an independent seminar, the Seminar for the Study o f the Languages and Cultures o f Cen tral Asia, with Walther Heissig as director. By V E R O N I K A VEI T

he newly estab lished Seminar for the Study of the Languages and Cultures of Central Asia devoted the first years of its exis tence especially to the formation of a microfilm library, and a xerox li brary drawn from these microfilms. As time went on, this library brought together in facsimile form in one place all the manuscripts from the relevant European libraries (Paris, London, Copenhagen, Stock holm, Helsinki, St. Petersburg, Mos cow, Leiden, Oslo, and so on) and from libraries in Asia, which were of importance to the Seminar. At first it was manuscripts in the Mongolian and Tibetan languages which were made accessible as facsimiles in the Seminar, but soon these were joined by materials in the Manchu lan guage, which were proving ever more indispensable. With its micro film and xerox library, which now facilitated the study in their original form and in a single place of widely scattered manuscript materials, the Seminar laid the foundation-stone for its international relations, which have become increasingly numerous at this library level over the years. As the Central Asian areas which belonged, or which still belong, to the national territories of the USSR and the People’s Republic of China remained to all intents and purposes closed during the sixties and seven ties, the international relations of the Seminar first took the form of re lations with Western, i.e. non-social ist countries: France, Italy, England, the Benelux countries, Scandinavia (Denmark and Sweden in particular), as well as with the USA, Japan, and Taiwan, and their centres for the study of Central Asia (Institutes or Oriental Schools, or Schools of Ori ental and African Studies, for exam ple In Paris, Venice, Rome, London, Copenhagen, Stockholm, Helsinki, Bloomington, Seattle, Tokyo, Kyoto, Taipei). Students from the USA, Japan, and Canada studied at the Bonn Seminar, and scholars from these countries worked by invitation in the Seminar library. Research expeditions to Iran and Afghanistan at the end of the sixties and the beginning of the seventies temporarily led to close academic contacts between the Seminar and, for instance, the University of Kabul and its Anthropological Research Department (these were unfortu

Institutional News

has n e w s l e t t e r

has led to a situation in which the Seminar now counts as the most im portant centre for research into Palaeo-Asiatic languages outside Russia. The achievement of independence by former member republics of the USSR at the beginning of the nineties - the present-day indepen dent Central Asian states of Kaza khstan, Kyrgystan, Uzbekistan, and Turkmenistan - has brought stu dents from these states to Germany. Some of these students have taken their doctorates at the Seminar. Through these students it has be come possible to establish contacts with institutions within various universities in the countries con cerned, and also to plan or to initiate collaboration within their research programmes. The same is true of those republics within Russia, such as the Republic of Buryatia, which today enjoy quasi-independence. Collaboration with university insti tutes with an interest in Mongolistic or Manchu-Tungusic Studies is being embarked upon here.

tal Studies with Special Reference to Central Asia’ in 1969 proved to be of domestic significance. This institu tion was based in the Seminar for fif teen years, and in many respects it influenced the direction in which the Seminar was to develop. The fi nancial resources of the Special Re search Field has made possible the promotion of the expansion of the li braries of the participating Seminars and the considerable intensification of international academic collabora tion and so on within the framework of co-operative work and of sym posia. One of the main focuses of re search within the SFB has been its very diversified Epic Research Pro ject, which led to an equally diversi fied interdisciplinary and interna tional research programme, which is still active producing materials. Prof Walther Heissig retired in 1980 and was succeeded by his pupil, Prof. Klaus Sagaster. Special atten tion was paid to Tibetan lamaism during this stage ofthe development of the Seminar. Prof Michael Weiers took over the leadership of the Semi nar in 1990. The establishment of a diploma course: ‘Regional Studies Central / Middle Asia’ at the Seminar and a sweeping change in the situa tion with regard to sources for Cen tral Asia as many important Archives had become accessible were decisive in making it possible in recent years to come to grips, with support from the Philosophical Faculty, with Cen tral Asian Turkology and ManchuTungusology, which are indispens able to Central Asian studies. The subject of the study of the lan guages and cultures of Central Asia is to be seen, against the background of this fact, both as philology and as directed towards a type of study which depends upon field research. In its methodology the subject adapts itself, according to speciality, to the linguistic, historical, religious and geo-sciences, and also to pre and early history and ethnology, the methods of which are to be modified as aspects of Central Asian Studies may require. Embracing a geograph

nately broken off because of the war situation). Research visits by col leagues and members of the Seminar with Tibetological interests to North India, Nepal, Sikkim, Bhutan, and Ladakh, which began in the sev enties, and which, within the frame work of various research pro grammes and projects, continue up to the present, were reflected and still are reflected in research visits and guest professorships at the Bonn Seminar on the part of Indian col leagues. The slow opening up of the Soviet Union and China, and also the estab lishment of diplomatic relations be tween the then Mongolian People’s Republic and the Federal Republic of D ialect atlas Germany, expanded the contacts of For years now, through the medi the Seminar over the years in a big um of annually organized surveys, way, as it were. Since the middle of the Institute for the Mongolian Lan the eighties Mongolian students guage ofthe Inner Mongolia Univer from China, mostly from the Inner sity in Hohhot has been working Mongolian Autonomous Region, with the Bonn Seminar, on a dialect time and again have studied at the atlas of the Mongolian language of Bonn Seminar, while research visits Inner Mongolia. The dialect material by younger Mongolian colleagues which has so far been recovered, and from the present-day Mongolian Re that within a relatively strict scheme public or from Inner Mongolia, fi of reference, originates from an area nanced through the German Acade which corresponds roughly to the mic Exchange Service (DAAD), the size of Western Europe. Humboldt Foundation or the Ger The establishment of an interdis man Research Council (DFG), are ciplinary Special Research Field (Sonnow likewise commonplace at the derforschungsbereich, SFD) ‘Orien Seminar, and the same is true of the presence of Chinese students from the People’s Republic of China and Taiwan, who pursue their doctoral studies alongside each other in the Bonn Seminar. Through visiting professorships I and research visits on the part of col leagues from Russia, Poland, and | Hungary the opening up of Eastern j Europe has facilitated contacts with ! relevant institutes of universities in | those countries (St. Petersburg, Moscow, Warsaw, Budapest), and has also provided improved possibilities of making use of archives there, The Institute o f International Relations was originally found which are still not easily accessible. ed on April 1, 1953, as the Association for International Rela As far as archives are concerned, in tions. Its chief purpose was to carry out analyses o f Chinese the People’s Republic of China communist and international affairs for submission to the (Peking), colleagues in the Seminar government. have quite recently, and against all expectations, even been accorded the n 1961, the Associa shortened title the Institute of Inter real possibility of filming historical tion’s title was national Relations. On August 1, manuscript material which has long changed to the Insti 1996, the IIR was fully integrated into been hidden away or has remained tute of International Re the university, with academic re unknown up till now, and to develop lations of the Republic of search as the institution’s foremost collaboration with, for instance, the China. Under the new priority. ‘First Historical Archive of China in name, the IIR began to expand and Peking’ or with archives in Shenyang develop contacts and exchange rela O rganization (Mukden, in Manchuria). Signifi tions with other academic institu There are sixty-five full-time Re cantly, collaboration with scholars tions overseas. Since July 1, 1975, the search Fellows at the IIR under the in St Petersburg in the field of re IER has been affiliated with the Na leadership of the Director Ho Szusearch into Palaeo-Asiatic languages tional Chengchi University under the yin and Deputy-Directors Wu Jaush-

N ? 2 i • F e b r ua r y 2000

The Institute of International Relations

ical area from the China Sea as far as regions to the west of the Caspian Sea, and from the high mountain ranges of Inner Asia as far as North Siberia, the subject finds itself con figured internally in the subsections Manchu-Tungusology, Mongolistics, Tibetology, Central Asian Turkology, with Palaeoasiatic Studies as a fringe area. Ideally, all the sub-sections should be dealt with in the light of their historical and modern signifi cance, but this will only be possible with the provision of adequate sup port. In this conception, this subject is represented in the whole of Europe only in Bonn, and it views its centre of gravity, as far as research is con cerned, as residing in basic research, that is, in rendering accessible writ ten and recovered source material and data from the regions of Central Asia which are relevant to the sub ject, and in the exploitation of the same in respect of matters of histori cal, current affairs, geographical, ethnographical, linguistic, literary, and religious scholarship. Within the framework of the various sub sections everywhere there are direct links with complexes o f ' problems in subjects such as Japanology, Sinology, Indology, Uralic Studies, Islamic Studies, Byzantine Studies, Slavistics, East European Studies, Historical Geography, Comparative Religious Studies, and General Lin guistics, the investigation and adap tation of which as teaching material will require close collaboration in each case. ■

Professor Veronika Veit Seminar fur Sprach- und Kulturwissenschaft Zentralasiens Rheinische Friedrich-Wilhelms Universitat Bonn Regina-Pacis-Weg 7 S 3 1 13 Bonn, Germany Tel.: +49-228-73 7465 Fax:+49-228-73 7458 E-mail: upp 700@ uni-bonn.de

ieh Joseph and Lee Kuo-hsiung. The Research Fellows and their research activities are divided into four divi sions, with each division directed by a Chairman. The first division focus es on America and Europe; the sec ond on the Asia-Pacific region; the third on the political, diplomatic, and military affairs of the PRC; and the fourth on social and economic affairs of the PRC.

Publications The Institute regularly publishes periodicals in Chinese, which in clude: M a in la n d C hina Studies (monthly); America and Europe (quar terly); and Issues & Studies (month ly), as well as in English: Issues & Studies (bimonthly). As of 1999, the IIR has also published 127 books in Chinese and 48 in English.

Co-operation and Exchange The IIR has signed formal co-oper ation and exchange agreements with twenty noted academic institutions in the United States and other parts of the world, and has also developed exchanges with counterpart institu tions in the PRC. Through frequent

INSTITUTES

IN THE

LI MEL I GHT

‘Name card’ diplomacy at the UN; reaucratic authoritarian model Taiwan’s sovereignty in interna and the developmental state tional law; economic interdepen model; the state and the profes dence; political confrontation be sional power of medicine; the state tween Taiwan and China. and central-local relations; state- Resources for Taiwan Studies: 3 ar business relations. ticles examine the role of academic - Welfare state and social policies: libraries in Taiwan’s continued 6 articles focus on state transfor development, the need for core mation and the system of national and comprehensive bibliographies health insurance policy; democra of Taiwan Studies; disputes of so tic transition and old-age welfare cial science indigenization. programme; non-profit organiza The NATSA has over 150 active tions and child welfare policy; his members. We keep an up-to-date torical origin and political process Mainlanders, Taiwanese, and over With Taiwan’s rapid political, econom ic, social, and cultural homepage, http://www.natsc.org. We of welfare policies in Taiwan; na seas Formosans; social elites, polit transform ation in recent years, Taiwan Studies have becom e a can be reached through e-mail at tional identity formation and wel ical leadership, and national iden field that is attracting growing academic interest from both board@natsc.org. Current NATSA of fare state making. tity; the 2-28 Incident, collective Taiwanese and Western scholars. Coupled w ith this growing ficers are: MrTze-Luen LIN, President Economy and society: 12 articles memory, and nation-building; so interest was a greater dem and for a substantial scholarly ex (tllin@udel.edu), of the University of are related to transformation of cial classes and ethnic conflicts; change channel that could serve to facilitate the com m unica Delaware, Ms Chien-Juh GU, Vice the export industry; dynamic democratization, stateness, and tion between Taiwanese and Western scholars so as to enrich President (guchienj@pilot.msu.edu), analysis of the industrial struc nationalism; civic nationalism vs. germ inating Taiwan Studies w ith a comparative and interdis of Michigan Sate University, Mr ture; technology, social networks, ethnic nationalism, Taiwanese na ciplinary perspective. It was for this reason that 47 Taiwanese Stephane CORCUFF, Secretary and governance structures; for tionalism vs. Chinese nationalism; graduate students and scholars from 20 US universities in itiat (kaokf@aol.com), of Paris Institute of eign workers and labour practice baseball and national identity; na ed the establishm ent o f a ‘Preparatory Council for the H olding Political Science and Ms Li-Fang in Taiwan; cultural formation of tional imagination in global era. o f the First N orth America Taiwan Studies Conference’ in YANG, treasurer (lyang@ssc.wisc.edu) direct sales in Taiwan; women and Taiwanese Aborigines: 3 articles April 1994. of the University of Wisconsin-Madiindustrial development; economic discuss politics of coalition and son. The NATSA has five executive organizations in global capital confrontation between the Abo e aim to pro committes, and you may want to con ism; population growth, industri By S T E P H A N E C O R C U F F rigines and the Han immigrants; mote Taiwan tact their respective chairpersons di al structure, and economic devel construction and deconstruction Studies, en rectly: human resources (Mr Keelung opment; moral discourse in eco of Aboriginal origins; Presbyterian hance interaction be HONG, keelung@itsa.ucsf.edu, of the nomic restructuring. representations of Taiwanese Abotween the academia of University of California at San Fran - Religion and folklore: 7 articles riginality. Taiwan and the North cisco), publication (Mr Wei-Der SHU, cover the development of Bud Language and culture: 7 articles America (with hopes of increasing ShuWeider@aol.com, ofSyracuse Uni dhism in Taiwan; Yiguan Dao and are related to characteristics of the contacts with Europe) and facilitate versity), funding (Mr Chia-Lung LIN, Taiwan’s capitalism; and For Taiwanese language; the gendercommunication among graduate poll@ccunix.ccu.edu.tw, of Chunmosan Christians and Taiwanese marked pronoun ‘Lang’ in Tai students and scholars concerned by cheng University in Taiwan), elec self-determination; religious ritu wanese; language and national Taiwan Studies. Our primary objec tronic newsletter (Ms Huei-Ying als and social life; social psycholo identity; language policy and po tives are holding an annual North 'NATSA s papers KUO, hueiying@hotmail.com, of the gy of fortune-telling; institution litical control; the influence of American Taiwan Studies Confer State University of New York at Bing alization of the Tzu-Chi Associa Hanji on people’s linguistic per ence and publishing the research pa hamton), and database management focus prim arily tion. ception; Vietnam, Korea, and pers collected from the annual con (Mr Wen-Hua KUO, whkuo@mit.edu - Education: 3 articles focus on Tai Japan’s experience in abolishing ferences. The Constitution of the of the Massachusetts Institute of wan's elementary school text Hanji; indigenization of Tai Preparatory Council of the Annual on contemporary Technology). books; effects of goal setting on wanese culture; the development North America Taiwan Studies Con children’s self-efficacy and skills; of Chinese painting in Taiwan. ference (NATSC) was passed on June The sixth North American Taiwan Taiw an Studies’ task value and self-efficacy on Tai Social structure and social move 4, 1995, and in 1999, the Preparatory Studies Conference will be held at wanese college students’ effort ments: 9 articles are related to Council was reorganized as the Harvard University on June 16 - 19, and achievement. state corporatism and the labour North American Taiwan Studies As 2000. We encourage papers in the fol movement; gender and labour s - Literature and cinema: to articles sociation (NATSA), a non-profit, taxlowing areas: 1. Political and social cover Yeh Shi-tao’s literary dis social history; married women’s exempt organization. changes: democratization, electoral course and Taiwanese conscious working patterns; physicians and The First and Second Annual Con politics, nationalism, state and soci ness; comparison of the works of the civil society; social classes and ferences were held at Yale University ety relations, social movements, Wu Cho-liu and Dong Fang Pai; political liberalization; genera on June 2-4, 1995 and at Michigan class relations, identity, ethnicity anti-Communist literature in the tions of Taiwanese; the operation State University on May 24-26', 1996, and ethnic relations; 2. Literature, 1950s; history of Taiwanese litera of independent unions; environ respectively. The Third and Fourth history, and cultural studies: lan ture in the 1950s; Japanese and mental movements; and activists Annual Conferences were held at guages, literature, collective memo British Motifs in Taiwanese and of overseas Taiwan independence University of California at Berkeley ries, cultural and religious beliefs Quebecois Fiction; contemporary movement. on May 29 - June 1, 1997 and at the academic conferences and other and practices; 3. Economic develop literature of the 1990s; Chang University of Texas, Austin on May - Gender and woman studies: 10 arti scholarly activities in co-operation ment and environmental studies: Hsiao-Feng’s essays; the position cles discuss woman’s place in poli with overseas institutions, the HR 29 - June 1, 1998. The Fifth Annual economic restructuring, global chal ing of Taiwan in contemporary tics; gender in Taiwan’s industrial Conference took place at the Univer has become an internationally-rec lenges, urban and rural develop cinema; films of Lee Ang. ization; married women’s working sity of Wisconsin, Madison on June 4 ognized research institute. The In ment, environmental policy and pol Environmental polices and poli patterns; Taiwan’s women writers; - June 7,1999. So far, 171 papers have stitute has five guestrooms, each itics; 4. Aboriginal studies: Aborigi tics: 6 articles are on environmen gender roles and housing arrange been presented and approximately with its own bathroom, to house ex nal languages and cultural heritage tal movements and environmen ments; critique of Taiwan’s femi 700 people have participated in the change scholars from abroad. The li preservation, public policies toward tal protection; environmental reg nism; the non-obliteration of Tai first five conferences, whose fields of brary of the HR has very rich Chi Aborigines, Aboriginal heritage and ulation; participation of environ wanese women’s names; feminist specialty have included history, socinese, English, and Russian resources, national identity questions; 5. Gen mental interest groups; political urban research and housing stud ology, political science, economics, and has carrels available. ■ der and Sexuality Studies; 6. Educa institutions and environmental ies; the concept of slenderness; the law, public policy, anthropology, tion; 7. International Relations: na policy formation; environmental body images of female students; cultural studies, religious studies, tional security, Taiwan-China rela discourse; environmentalism and study of modernized homosexual literature, education, etc. This inter tions, and Taiwan-U.S. relations. ■ the state. disciplinary forum has featured such ity. Public policies: 8 articles focus on - Political institutions and political prominent speakers as Dr Thomas industrial policy; intercity trans organizations: 11 articles concen Gold, Dr Edward Friedman, and Dr portation system and Taipei trate on electoral systems, party Robert Marsh. Urban Commuters; national nomination, and local factional A content analysis of the 126 se parks; banking policy transforma ism; social cleavages and party lected papers of the first four years of tion; policy and politics of com competition; political elite and de conferences has revealed the follow To follow regular updates on this year’s munity-making; water transfer mocratization; economic develop ing primary focus of contemporary Ho Szy-yln, Director conference at Harvard, please visit our web ring policy. ment and regime change; consti academic interest in Taiwan studies. Jaushieh Joseph Wu, Dep. Dir. page at http://www.natsc.org and should you - Taiwan-China relations and for tutional design and democratic Taiwanese history: 7 articles cover The Institute o f International Relations have any questions, feel free to write to the eign relations: to articles discuss consolidation; equity and democ Taiwan’s political, social, reli National Chengchi University NATSA officers. Taiwan Strait crisis in the 1950s; ratization; founding elections and gious, military and cultural histo 64 Wan Shou Road, W en Shan, 116 Taipei, the three Taiwan Strait crises; Tai party realignment. ry, from the years of the Ching Dy Taiwan, Republic o f China For more information: wan’s defence policy and national Regime, state, and development: 6 nasty, the Japanese colonization, Tel.: +886-2-2939 4 9 2 1 Stephane Corcuff security; Taiwan’s pragmatic di articles cover the nature of the to the post-war period. Fax:+886-2-2938 2 1 3 3 1 2 2 3 4 4914 NATSA Secretary plomacy and China policy; the Tai KMT regime and the authoritari - Ethnicity and nationalism: 22 arti E-mail: iir@nccu.edu.tw E-mail: kaokf@ aol.com wan Relations Act; Taiwan’s an state; applicability of the bu cles focus on ethnic identity of Http:/lwww.nccu.edu.tw

The N orth American Taiwan Studies Association (NATSA}

February 2000 •

i i as n e w s l e t t e r

Tsi?2i •

I NTERNAT! ONAL 8 -

2000 FEBRUARY

2000

Amsterdam, The Netherlands What is to be Done? Global economic disorder and policiesfor a new financial architecture in the m illennium Convenor: Dr Geoffrey R.D. Underhill, Conference secretariat at the ICPEI (Universiteit van Amsterdam), The Netherlands Tel.:+31-20-525 6075 Fax: +31-20-525 2898 E-mail: icpei@bdu.uva.nl H ttp :// www.icpei.uva.nl/witb 18-

FEBRUARY

2000

Bangalore, India The Human Sciences and the Asian Experience Dr Vivek Dhareshwat, Centre for the Study o f Culture and Society, 1192, 35th B Cross, 4th T Block, Jayanagar, Bangalore 560 041, India Fax: +91-080-663 6229 E-mail: admin@cscsban.org Http://www.cscsban.org 19-

FEBRUARY

2000

Coventry, United Kingdom Migration, Urban Development, and D emographic Change in Punjab

Second International Conference on Quality o f Life in Cities - 21st Century QOL (ICQOLC2000) Conference Secretariat (ICQOLC 2000), School o f Building and Real Estate National University ofSingapore, 10 Kent Ridge Crescent, Singapore 119260 Tel.: +65-772 3440 Fax: +65-7755502 E-mail: qolnet@nus.edu.sg Http://www.qolnet.nus.edu.sg/ conf2/main.html 9 -

FEBRUARY

2000

North India Approaching Asia fro m Asia:Joumeys, Displacements, Themes Professor Tessa Morris-Suzuki, Pacific and Asian History, RSPAS, Australian National University Tel.: +61-2-6249 2277 Fax: +61-2-62549050 E-mail: tms@coombs.anu.edu.au

ma rch

1-3

2000

MARCH

2000

MARCH

9-12

MARCH

2000

San Diego, United States o f America 2000 A nnual Meeting o f the M ongolia Soc iety The Mongolia Society Office, 322 Goodbody Hall, Indiana University, Bloomington, IN 47405-7550, United States o f America E-mail: monsoc@indiana.edu Http://www.aasianst.org/

2 -3

m a r c h

2000.

Lisbon, Portugal The Shifting Challenges o f the Pacific South and the Issue o f T im or Lorosae Organisation: Luso-Asian Forum with the sponsorship o f the United Nations Centre in Lisbon Contact address: Rua Alfredo Roque Gameiro, n. 18-1 Esq, 1600-006 Lisbon, Portugal Fax: + 35-1-21797 5445 E-mail: arnaldogoncalves@mail.telepac.pt www.terravista.pt/ilhadomel/23 20 7-9

MA r c H

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands The Indian Character o f Indian Literature Convenors: Dr Thomas de Bruijn (HAS), Dr Theo Damsteegt (Kern Institute) Contact address: International Institute for Asian Studies, P.0 . Box 9515, 2300 RA Leiden, The Netherlands Tel:+31-71-527 2227 Fax: +31-71-5274162 E-mail: tbruijn@rullet.leidenuniv.nl or: damsteegt@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

• h a s n e w s l e t t e r N S21

2000

Turin, Italy Xlth World Sanskrit Conference Oscar Botto, President CESMEO, International Institute for Advanced Asian Studies, Via Cavour 17, 1-10123 Torino, Italy Fax: +39-011-545 031 7-9

APRIL

2000

m a r c h

2000

Association o f Indian Labour Historians,

Second Conference Dr Prabhu P. Mohapatra, Archives o f Indian Labour, W G iri National Labour Institute, Sector24, NOIDA, Gautam Budha Nagar, UttarPradesh, India 201301 Fax: +91-118-532974 E-mail: shram@nd£vsnl.net.in 15-

MARCH

2000

London, United Kingdom Interpreting Asian Cultures in Museums: Displays, activities, strategies Dr Brian Durrans, Departm ent of Ethnography, British Museum, 6 Burlington Gardens, London WiX 2EX, United Kingdom Tel.: +44-207-323 8027 Fax: +44-207-323 8013 E-mail: bdurrans@britishmuseum.ac.uk 16-

m a r c h

2000

Bonn, Germany Demographic Developments and Value Change in Contemporary Modern Societies Fast Asian and Western societies in comparative perspective Dr Axel Klein, Forschungsstelle Modernes japan, Regina-Pacis-Weg7, D-53113 Bonn, Germany Tel.: +49-228-737023 Fax: +49-228-735054 20-21

MARCH

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands Towards the Millenium Round: Asia, The European Union, and Latin America Dr Marianne L. Wiesebron, Faculty o f Arts, Departm ent Languages and Cultures o f Latin America, P.0 . Box 9515, 2300 RA, Leiden, The Netherlands

Seventh Nordic-European Workshop in Advanced Asian Studies (NEWAS] Convenor: Prof Per Ronnas For Nordic PhD students: NIAS, att.: NEWAS, Erik Skaaning, Leifsgade 33, DK-2300 Copenhagen S, Denmark Tel.: +45-32-54 88 44 Fax: +45-32-96 25 30 E-mail: erik@nias.ku.dk For Dutch PhD students: IIAS, P.0 . Box 9515,2300 RA Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.: +31-71-527 2227 Fax:+31-71-5274162 E-mail: iias@rullet.leidenuniv.nl 7-9

APRIL

2000

APRIL

2000

27-29

APRIL

2000

Fourth Euro-Japanese International Symposium on Mainland Southeast Asian History: Mainland Southeast Asian responses to the stimuli o f foreign material culture and practical knowledge (14* - mid 19th century) Dr John Kleinen, HAS Branch Office Amsterdam, Spinhuis, Oudezijds Achterburgwal 185,1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands Tel: +31-20-525 3657 Fax:+31-20-5253658 E-mail: HAS@pscw.uva.nl

MAY 2 0 0 0

4-5

MAY

2000

13- 15 A P R I L 2000

Manoa, Hawai’i Seventh Annual South Asia Spring Symposium Convenor: Sankaran Krishna, Center for South Asian Studies, School o f Hawaiian, Asian and Pacific Studies, University o f Hawai’i, Moore 411, 1890 East-West Road, Honolulu HI 96822, United States o f America Tel.: +1-808-956 2677 Fax: +1-808-956 2682 E-mail: csas@hawaii.edu 13-15

APRIL

2000

Athens, Ohio, United States o f America International Conference o f Institutes and Libraries/or Overseas Chinese Studies Contact persons: Liren Zheng, 122B Alden Library, Ohio University, Athens, Ohio 45701, United States o f America Tel.: +1-740-597 2530 Fax: +1-740-593 0138 E-mail: zheng@ohiou.edu Lian The-Mulliner, 120 B Alden Library, Ohio University, Athens, Ohio 45701, United States ofAmerica Tel.: +1-740-593 2657 Fax: +1-740-593 2959 E-mail: the-muIl@ohiou.edu

• Febr uar y 2000

ASN Fifth Annual World Convention: Identiy and the state, nationalism and sovereignty in a changing world Dominique Arel, ASN Convention Program Chair, Watson Institute, Brown University, Box 1831,130 Hope St., Providence, R I02912, United States o f America Tel: +1-401-863 9296 Fax:+1-401-863 2192 E-mail: dareI@brown.edu

m a y

2000

Avignon, France IIAS/CERINS/INALCO workshop: Slave Systems in Asia and the Indian Ocean: Their structure and change in the 19th and 20th centuries Convenor: Dr Gwyn Campbell, CERINS, Université d’Avignon, Case N 19, 74 rue Louis Pasteur, 84029 Avignon, Cedex 1, France Tel.:+33-4-90162718 Fax: +33-4-90162719 E-mail: gcampb3195@aol.com 18-21

m a y

2000

Tübingen, Germany Poet, Scholar, Patriot: International symposium in honour o f Wen Yiduo’s one-hundredth anniversary Dr Peter Hoffmann, Seminar für Sinolgie und Koreanistik, Universitat Tübingen, Wilhelmstrasse 133,72074 Tübingen, Germany Tel: +49-7071-29 72711 (05) Fax: +49-7071-29 57 33 E-mail: Peter.H0ffmann2@uni-tuebingen.de 23 - 24

m a y

2000

Amsterdam, The Netherlands

Technology Trade and Technology Transfer

Gender and the Transmission o f Values Systems and Cultural Hcritage(s) in South and Southeast Asia

between the EU and Asia Ms Barbara Merigeault, I.A.E., 20 Rue Guillaume VII Le Troubadour, B.P. 639,86022 Poitiers Cedex, France Tel.: +33-5-49454489 Fax: +33-5-4945 4490 E-mail: eurosasie@iae.univ-poitiers.fr or bmerigeault@iae.univ-poitiers.fr 6-8

m a y

2000

Rosslyn, VA, United States o f America Third A nnual Conference o f the National Council o f O rganizations o f Less Commonly Taught Languages Scott McGinnis, Senior Associate for Projects, National Foreign Language Center, 1619 Massachusetts Avenue NW, #400, Washington, DC 20036, United States o f America Tel.: +1-202-667 8100 ext 15 Fax: +1-202-667 6907

Professor S. Leydesdorff or Dr Frances Gouda, Belle van Zuylen Instituut, Universiteit van Amsterdam, Rokin 84-90,1012 KX Amsterdam, The Netherlands Fax: +31-20-5252219 E-mail: leydesdorff@pscw.uva.nl or fgouda@aoI.com 25-26

m a y

2000

Budapest, Hungary The Last Decade o f M igrationfrom the People’s Republic o f China to Europe and Asia Dr Pal D. Nyi'ri at both nyirip@mail.matav.hu and nyirip@yahoo.com. 25-28

m a y

2000

Lund, Sweden Ethnicity, Politics, and Cross-Border

8-10

MAY

2000

Amsterdam, The Netherlands Brokers o f Capital and Knowledge: Producer services and social mobility in provincial Asia Dr Heidi Dahles, Centre for Asian Studies Amsterdam (CASA), H et Spinhuis, Oudezijds Achterburgwal 185, 1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands Fax: +31-20-444 6722 E-mail: brokers@pscw.uva.nl

Columbia University, NY 24-25 M A R C H

18-20

Limerick, Ireland

Uppsala, Sweden Indigenous People: The trajectory o f a contemporary concept in India Dr B. G. Karlsson, The Seminar for Development Studies, Uppsala University, Övre Slottsgatan 1, S-753 10 Uppsala, Sweden Tel.: +46-18-471 6852 Fax: +46-18-12 0832 E-mail: beppe.karlsson@uland.uu.se

2000

Sixth Workshop o f the European Network o f Bangladesh Studies: Bangladesh, changing identities and economic transform ation Mark Ellison, ENBS, Departm ent of Economics and International Development, University o f Bath, Bath BA2 7AY, United Kingdom Fax:+44-1225-323 423 E-mail: m.a.ellison@bath.ac.uk Http://www.bath.ac.uk/Centres/CDS/ enbs.htm

Leiden, The Netherlands 3 -8 A P R I L 2 0 0 0

m a y

Memory o f Catastrophe Dr Kendrick Oliver, Department of History, University ofSouthampton, Highfield, Southampton, SO17 1BJ, United Kingdom Tel.:+44-1703-592 243 Fax:+44-1703-593 458 E-mail: ko@soton.ac.uk

Building the Social Safety N e t fo r Asian Societies in Transition Professor Ronald Anderson, IRES, Université catholique de Louvain, Place Montesquieu 3, B-1348 Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium Tel.: +32-10-47 4146 Fax: +32-10-473945 E-mail: anderson@ires.ucl.ac.be AP RI L

14-16

Oslo, Norway

27-29

Copenhagen. Denmark New Delhi, India

2000

Southampton, United Kingdom

Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium

2000

Seoul, Korea Good Government, Eastern and Western Perspectives: Fourth EPCReN Workshop Dr Geir Helgesen, Nordic Institute of Asian Studies, Leifsgade 33,2300 Copenhagen S, Denmark Fax: +45-32-96 25 30 E-mail: geir@nias.ku.dk

Agenda

52nd AAS A nnual Meeting Association for Asian Studies, Inc., 1021 East Huron Street, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48104, United States o f America Tel.: +1-734-665 2490 Fax: +1-734-665 3801 Http://www.aasianst.org/

16-18

Dr Ian Talbot, Centre for South Asian Studies, School o f International Studies and Law, Coventry University, Priory Street, CVi 5FB Coventry, United Kingdom E-mail: 106432.1724@compuserve.com 21

AGENDA 14 A P R I L

San Diego CA, United States o f America

1890s-1990s

20-

2000

m a r c h

Singapore

FEBRUARY 2000

3-5

CONFERENCE

8-11

m a y

Cultures in Southwest China: Past and present Organizers: Michael Schoenhals (Lund University), Xiaolin Guo (Aarhus University), John E. Herman (Virginia Commonwealth University) Southwest Conference Secretariat, Centre for East and Southeast Asian Studies, Lund University, P. O. Box 792, SE-220 07 Lund, Sweden Fax: +46-46-222 30 41 E-mail: southwest.conference@ace.lu.se

2000

Briihl (Köln), Germany

28 M A Y 2 0 0 0

Zweiten Briihler T agu n g ju n g er OstasienExperten: Globalisierung, Regionalisierung, Eragmentierung. N eue Kontexte/iirPolitik, W irtschaft und Geselbchaft in Ost- und Siidostasien. G udrun Wacker, BlOst, Lindenbornstrasse 22, 50823 Köln, Germany Tel.: + 49-221-5747150 Fax: + 49-221-5747110 E-mail: gudrun. wacker@koeln.netsurfde

Kaohsiung, Taiwan Art, Literature, and Travel Professor Chung Ling, College o f Liberal Arts, National Sun Yat-sen University, Kaohsiung 804, Taiwan ROC Tel.: +886-7-5252000 ext. 3002 E-mail: wenchai@mail.nsysu.edu.tw

INTERNATIONAL

CONFERENCE

AGENDA 14-16 S E P T E M B E R 2 0 0 0

5 A U G U S T 2000 J UNE

JUN E

J UL Y 2 0 0 0

2000

3 -5 J U L Y 2 0 0 0

2000

London, United Kingdom

Berlin, Germany

The Politics and Practice o f Asceticism in Asian Religions (preliminary workshop, full conference in 2001J Organizers: Dr Rupert Cox, Research Fellow, Royal Asiatic Society, 60 Queen’s Gardens, London W2 3AF, United Kingdom Tel.: +44-171-7244741 Fax: +44-171-706 4008 E-mail: 106207.2000@compuserve.c0m Dr Gustaaf Houtman, Editorial Consultant, Anthropology Today, Royal Anthropological Institute Tel.: +44-171-394 6927 E-mail: ghoutman@tesco.net

Conflict and Violence in Indonesia Georgia Wimhoefer or Elisabeth Schulze, Institute o f Southeast Asian Studies, Dept, o f Asian and African Studies, Humboldt-University Luisenstr. 54/55, 10117 Berlin, Germany Tel.: +49-30-2093 6635 / 6630 Fax: +49-30-2093 6666 E-mail:

2-4

JUNE

2000

Oslo, Norway Human and Regional Security around the South China Sea Mr Johan Henrik Nossum, Centre for Development and the Environment, P.0 . Box in6B lin d ern , N-0317 Oslo, Norway Tel. +47-22-85 89 00 Fax: +47-22-85 89 20 E-mail: j .h.nossum@sum.uio.no H ttp://www.sum.uio.no/southchinasea/ 8-9

JUNE

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands HAS seminar Yogacara Buddhism in China Convenor: Pro£ Chen-kuo Lin Contact address: International Institute for Asian Studies, P.0 . Box 9515, 2300 RA Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.:+31-71-527 2227 Fax: +31-71-5274162 E-mail: iias@rullet.leidenuniv.nl 16-19 J U N E

2000

Massachusetts, United States o f America The 2000 North American Taiwan Studies Conference Tze-Luen Lin, NATSA President, Harvard University Stephane CorcufF, NATSA Secretary, ISUGA, Europe-Asia Management Institute, Creac’h gwen, F-29000 Quimper, France Tel: +33-2-9810 1616 Fax: +33-2-98101600 E-mails: tllin@udel.edu, stephane.corcuff@isuga.fr (information), board@natsc.org (abstracts) Http://www.natsc.org Deadline abstracts: 1 December 1999 Deadline papers: 1 March 2000 21- 23 J U N E 2000

Paris, France Medicine in China: Health techniques and social history Dr Frederic Obringer, Centre d'Etudes sur la Chine Moderne et Contemporaine, 54, boulevard Raspail, 75006 Paris France Fax: +33-1-4954 2078 E-mail: obringer@ehess.fr 24-30 J U N E

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands Ninth Seminar o f the International Association ofTibetan Studies (IATS) Convenor: Dr Henk Blezer, International Institute for Asian Studies, P.0 . Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.: +31-71-5272227 Fax: +31-71-527 4162 E-mail: iats@rullet.leidenuniv.nl Http://www.iias.nl/iias/agenda/iats/

Agenda

georgia.wimhoefer@rz.hu-berlin.de elisabeth.schulze@rz.hu-berlin.de

Durban, South Africa

Nishinomiya, Japan

The History o f Religions: Origins and visions 18th Quinquennial Congress o f the International Association/or the History o f Religions Rosalind I.J. Hackett, Program Chair, D ept o f Religious Studies, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, United States of America Tel.: +1-423-974 2466 Fax: +1-423-974 0965 E-mail: rhackett@utk.edu Http://www.udw.ac.za/iahr

Fourth Conference o f the Asia Pacific Sociological Association Asia Pacific Sociological Association (APSA) Prof Kenji Kosaka, APSA President, Kwansei Gakuin University, Nishinomiyashi, Japan 662-8501 E-mail: kkosaka@kwansei.ac.jp or: Dr Pauline Kent, Secretary, Ryukoku University, Shiga, Otsu, Seta, Oecho, Yokotani 1-5, Japan 520-2194 E-mail: pauline@world.ryukoku.ac.jp Deadline abstracts: 31 March 2000 Deadline full papers (3-4000 words): 15 July 2000

10-11

AUGUST

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands 3 -5 JULY 2000

Melbourne, Australia 13th Biennial Asian Studies Association o f Australia Conference: 'Whose Millennium?’ Melbourne Institute o f Asian Languages and Societies (MIALS), Fifth Floor, John Medley Building, East and West Towers, The University of Melbourne, Parkville Victoria 3052, Australia Tel: +61-3-9344 5555 / 5554 / 0160 Fax: +61-3-9349 4870

Http://www.asaa2000.unimelb.edu.au 6-

7 JULY 2000

Amsterdam, The Netherlands HAS Seminar Health, Sexuality, and Civil Society in East Asia Contact Dr Evelyne Micollier for scientific contents and Heleen van der Minne for practical matters, IIAS Branch Office Amsterdam, Spinhuis, O.Z. Achterburgwal 185,1012 DK Amsterdam, The Netherlands Tel: +31-20-525 3657 Fax: +31-20-525 3658 E-mail: Sexsem@pscw.uva.nl A limited num ber o f Dutch speakers and a limited num ber o f observers are still welcome. 7-

8 J U L Y 2000

(p r o v i s i o n a l )

SOAS, London, United Kingdom Centre and Periphery in Southeast Asia Professor Anne Booth, Departm ent of Economics, SOAS, University o f London, Russell Square, London WCIHOXG, United Kingdom Fax: +44-171-323 6277 E-mail: abio@soas.ac.uk

1 0 - 1 4 JULY 2000

Kuching, Sarawak Sixth Biennial Conference o f the Borneo Research Council, Borneo 2000 Professor Michael Leigh, Director, IEAS, UNIMAS, 94300 Kota Samarahan, Sarawak, Malaysia Tel: +60-82-671000 / 672191 Fax: +60-82-672 095 E-mail: michael@ieas.unimas.my Deadline abstracts: 29 February 2000 Deadline full papers: 31 May 2000 1 0 - 1 4 J U L Y 2000

Manila, Philippines Sixth International Philippine Studies Conference ‘Turns o f the Centuries: The Philippines in 1900 and 200o’ Philippine Studies Conference 2000, Technical Services and Information Section, Philippine Social Science Council, P. O. Box 205, UP Post Office, Diliman, Quezon City, Philippines Tel: +63-929-2671, +63-922-9621 local 305 Fax: + 6 ^2 4 -4 8 7 1 E-mail: tsis.section@skyinet.net, pssc@skyinet.net, cidslib@cids.org.ph, cids@cids.upd.edu.ph

1 3 - 1 6 J U L Y 2000

Prague, Czech Republic The Twelfth International Conference on Korean Linguistics ICKL 2000, c/o Prof Nam-Kil Kim, Korean Studies Institute, University of Southern California, THH 226G, Los Angeles, CA 90089-0357, United States o f America E-mail: nkim@usc.edu or: ICKL 2000, c/o Prof Hee-Don Ahn, Department of English, Konkuk University, Seoul 143-701, Korea E-mail: hdahn@kkucc.konkuk.ac.kr

HAS Seminar Environmental Change in Native and Colonial Histories ofBorneo: Lessons fro m the past, prospects/or the fu tu re Convenor: Dr Reed L. Wadley: International Institute for Asian Studies, P.0 . Box 9515,2300 RA, Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.:+31-71-527 2227 Fax: +31-71-5274162 E-mail: iias@rullet.leidenuniv.nl Http://www.iias.nl/iias/research/wadley/ 2 2 - 26

a u g u s t

2000

Lahti, Finland EAJS Conference 2000 Secretariat EAJS, Prof Dr Werner Pascha, Duisberg University, East Asian Economic Studies, 0-47048 Duisburg, Germany Tel./Fax: +49-203-379 2002 E-mail: eajs@uni-duisburg.de

15-17 JULY 2 0 0 0

Lhasa, Tibet, China 2000 International Academic Conference on Tibetan Medicine Yang Su, Dolmacho, China Medical Association of Minorities, No. 11 Bei San Huan Dong Lu, Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100029, P.R. China Tel.: +86-10-6422 0890, +86-10-6428 6597 Fax: +86-10-6428 7404 E-mail: cinmbucm@bj.col.com.cn Deadline papers: 31 December 1999 Deadline registration: 14 July 2000 JULY

1 8 - 2 2 , 2000

Xiamen, P.R. China The International Anthropological Conference on the Existence and Development o f the Human Being in the 21st century Convenor: Deng Xiao Hua, Anthropology Institute ofXiamen University, Xiamen, 361005, Fujian Province, P.R. China Tel: +86-592-218 7473 Fax: +86-592-208 6116 E-mail: anthro@j ingxian.xmu.edu.cn 27- 31 J U L Y 2000

Kota Kinabalu, Sabah, Malaysia The Sixteenth Conference o f the International Association o f Historians ofA sia (IAHA) 16th IAHA Conference Secretariat, Center for the Promotion o f Knowledge and Language Learning, Universiti Malaysia Sabah, Locked Bag 2073,88999 Kota Kinabalu, Sabah, Malaysia Tel.: +60-88-438 440 ext. 5294, +60-88-435706 (DL) Fax: +60-88-435 708 E-mail: pejppib@ums.edu.my or ahmatadm@ums.edu.my

23-

26 A U G U S T

2000

Leuven, Belgium The Eighth Conference on Early Literature in New Indo-Aryan Languages (‘Bhakti Conference’') winand.callewaert@arts.kuleuven.ac.be

OCTOBER

2-6

2000

OCTOBER

Eighth International Conference o f European Association o f Southeast Asian

Archaeologists Patrizia Zolese, Fondazione Ing. C.M. Lerici, Via V. Veneto 108,00187 Roma, Italy Tel.: +39-06-488 0083 Fax: +39-06-482 7085 E-mail: folerici@tin.it 4 OCTOBER 5 N O V E M B E R 2000

Dakar, Senegal Extended Workshop fo r Young Historians Madame Ndéye Sokhna Guéye, Programme Sephis/Codesria, Extended workshop for young historians, CODESRIA, B.P. 3304, Dakar, Senegal Tel: +221-825 98 22 / 23 Fax:+221-824 1289 E-mail: codesria@telecomplus.sn

NOVEMBER

2 3 - 2 8 A U G U S T 2000

2000

Sarteno (Tuscany), Italy

2000

Leiden, The Netherlands Audiences, Patrons, and Performers in the Performing Arts o f Asia Convenors: Dr Wim van Zanten (chair), PAATI (IIAS), and Institute o f Cultural and Social Studies, Leiden University, P.0 . Box 9555,2300 RB Leiden, The Netherlands Tel: +31-71-527 3465 / 74 / 69 Fax: +31-71-5273619 E-mail: zanten@fsw.leidenuniv.nl and Frank Kouwenhoven, CHIME, P.0 . Box 11092,2301 EB Leiden, The Netherlands Tel.:+31-71-513 3974/513 3iz3 Fax:+31-71-5123183 E-mail: chime@wxs.nl Http://www.iias.nl/oideion/general/ audiences.html, or: Http://www.iias.nl/iias/agenda.html Deadline paper proposals: 1 March 2000

S E P TE MBE R

6-8

2000

SEPTEMBER

2000

Fife, United Kingdom History qfTibet Conference John Billington (conference organizer), Brook House, Llandyssil, Montgomery, Powys, SY15 6LN, United Kingdom Tel.: +44-1686-668 619

3 -5 N O V E M B E R 2 0 0 0

Vancouver, BC, Canada ‘Women’s Studies: Asian Connections’ Centre for Research in Women’s Studies and Gender Relations, UBC, 1896 East Mall, Vancouver, B.C. V6T 1Z1 Canada Tel.: +1-604-822-9171 Fax: +1-604-822-9169 E-mail: litton@interchange.ubc.ca Deadline initial response: 30 November 1999 Deadline papers: 29 February 2000

DECEMBER

12-14

2000

DECEMBER

2000

Bangkok, Thailand International Conference Chao Phraya Delta: Historical development, dynamics and challenges o f Thailand’s rice bowl The conference is jointly organised by Kasetsart University, Chulalongkorn University, L’Institut de Recherche pour le Developpemcnt (France) and Kyoto University (Japan) E-mail: odoras@ku.ac.th or cusri@chula.ac.th Http://std.cpc.ku.ac.th/delta/deltacp/eve nts/Conference—CP.htm Deadline abstracts: 15 June 2000

5 -9 S E P T E M B E R 2 0 0 0

Edinburgh, United Kingdom AUGUST

1-4

2000

AUGUST,

2000

Calcutta, India Language, Thought and Reality: Science, religion and philosophy Dr Chandana Chakrabarti, Elon College Campus Box 2336, Elon College, N.C. 27244, United States o f America Tel: +1-336-538 2705 Fax: +1-336-538 2627 E-mail: chakraba@numen.elon.edu Http://www.elon.edu/chakraba

Sixteenth European Conference on Modem South Asian Studies Centre for South Asian Studies, D epartm ent o f Sociology, The University o f Edinburgh, 18 Buccleuch Place, Edinburgh EH8 9LN, United Kingdom E-mail: saconf@afbi.ssc.ed.ac.uk H ttp:// www.ed.ac.uk/ sociol/sas/

2001 AUTUMN

200 1

Berlin, Germany Second International Convention o f Asia Scholars (ICAS 2) ICAS 2 organizing unit: Prof Dr Eberhard Sandschneider, Arbeitsstelle Politik Chinas und Ostasiens, Freie Universitat Berlin, Ihnestr. 22, D-14195 Berlin, Germany E-mail: sandschn@zedat.fu-berlin.de

February 2000 • h a s n e w s l e t t e r W 2 1 •

P R O D U C T S & S E R V I C E S PAGE

We have decided to open ano** “ it w lTes'ind Queries so, rfo u r readers. We “ " L tio n s. or proposals and woul i & S S W e f r e a a e r s , please drop

Pkaducti. 6c tfe A J u ic e A

MMF Publications P.O. Box 287 2 160 AG Lisse

INFORMATION CARRIERS

Notes. uertes

Asian Rare B ooks

Fax: + 1-212-316 3408

S o u th e a st Asian Studies S u m m er Institute (in ten sive su m m er language program ) C en ter for S o u th ea st Asian S tudies

E-mail: arbs@ erols.com

University ofWisconsin-Madison

Http.'//www.erols.com/arbs/

Room 207, 1155 O bservatory

175 W. 93rd Street Suite 16-D New York, NY I002S-9344 Tel.:+ 1-212 -3 16 5334

f° f , a , a

Fax:+31-252-418 658 E-mail: m icroformat@ compuserve.com

United States of America

The Netherlands Tel.:+31-252-432 121

‘

I He'canbecontacted at,,ks® e,olscont_____________ ___________.

Dr Madison W isconsin 53706 USA

f rue ‘Documentatieblad voor de HB t o l l o p. I« t " ° * R? e zending en Overzeese Kerken - the Geschtedems van de Neder a n d ^ J ^ ^ Churcte

I toontal for the History »f Dutch IdT o K lHDMOCl-whichwasfoundedinn»J. S ^ o f founding . ■ - ^ H

£ S L

„ .„«st.gatethe P« dedicated to the W u d i“ê the encounter he-

=as====£%=s

Tel.:+ 1-608-263 1755

C harbo’s A ntiquariaat

Fax: + 1-608-263 3735

Koninginneweg 79

E-mail: mjstuden@facstaff.wisc.edu

1075 CJ Amsterdam

Http://www.wisc.edu/seassi

The Netherlands Tel.:+ 3 1-20-676 1229 Fax:+31-20-676-1726 E-mail: mail@charbo.nl

Tamarind B ooks

Http://www.cha rbo.nl

Books about Southeast Asia P.O.Box 49217 Greensboro

• f

NC 27419

China Inform ation: A Journal on C on tem porary China S tu dies

E-mail: tam arind@ greensboro.com

Please visit our website:

Http://www.abebooks.com/

http://www.let.leidenuniv.nl/tcc/iournal

United States of America Tel.:+33-6-852 1905 Fax: +33-6-852 0750

home/tamarind/

o r contact the Chief Editor: D r W oei Lien Chong Sinological Institute

team for the new journal

guideline of th e j.u t-

bnardwillhavetobesetupAgene nal will have to be establish As you are well-place suggestions,o rev™ a“ l est importance. The succ pend on it. So please, do

P ^ proposal, your advice,

^ q u estio n ab ly of the greatf the intended journal wi , mmd t0 Us. J honnaü.com.

ChnsGT.dejong, e-mail, cgtdejo gc

Leiden University

T he Old B ookroom

Arsenaalstraat I

O u t of print and antiquarian books on

P.O. Box 9515 2300 RA Leiden

Asia Unit 1,54/60 W eedon Close

The Netherlands

Belconnen

Tel.:+3 1-71-527 2516

ACT 2617

Fax:+31-71-527 2526

Australia

E-mail: docchin@rullet.leidenuniv.nl

Tel.:+61-2-6251 5191 (24 hours) Fax:+61-2-6251 5536 E-mail: books@ OldBookroom.com Http://www.OldBookroom.com

Fine B ooks O riental 38 Museum Street London W C IA ILP

INFORMATION ON ADVERTISEMENTS IN THE MAS-NEWSLETTER RATES • Standard A: full page: w. 270 x h. 37S mm: • Standard 8: half page: w. 270 x h. 180 mm: • Standard C: 3 columns: w. 160 x h. 180 mm: • Standard D: 2 columns: w. 105 x h. 180 mm: • Standard E: 2 columns: w. 105 x h. 100 mm:

US$ 1,250 US$ 675 US$ 400 US$ 270 US$

ADVERTISEMENT GUIDELINES • Material: Positive film (emulsion down) or positive on paper. • Photographs and shaded areas must be pre-screened. ■ Not-camera ready:Text on disc, clear logo’s or digital, including print-out. • Screen number 40 l/cm (= 100 l/inch) Minimum point 10% Maximum point 85%

150

CIRCULATION The MAS Newsletter has a circulation of 22,000 copies world-wide and is published 3 times a year.

United Kingdom

Tri JayaTour & Travel

Tel.:+44-171-242 5288

Medan-lndonesia

Fax: +44-171-242 5344

For individual tours all over Indonesia,

Http:// www.finebooks.demon.co.uk

adventure travel, cultural holidays, architectural/historical tours, beach holidays, jungle trekking.

ADVERTORIALS Article of maximum 1,200 words in combination with an advertisement of minimum St. D size. Reservation: 8 weeks prior to release date. Note: Copy subject to approval, advertorial texts will be edited.

Fax: +62-61-786 3324

H otel W ilh elm in a

E-mail: trijaya@ibm.net

Koninginneweg 167-169

Http://www.trijaya-travel.com

1075 CN Amsterdam The Netherlands Tel.: +31-20-662 5467 / 664 0594

VACANCIES For advertising jobs and fellowships in the HAS N ew sletter we offer special rates. Information on request.

INSERTS All addresses, incl. institutes, specialists, and non-specialists, world-wide, or selected countries. Price (including postage): Up to 45 grams: US$ 3000, every 25 grams over 45 grams: US$ 500, MAILING LABEL RENTAL It is possible to order addresses from the HAS Database of Asia specialists for direct mail use. US$ 250 per search; US$ 0.50 per address, on self-adhesive labels. INFORMATION For further information contact Mr S. Sand or the Managing Editor at the HAS.

• has newsletter N?2 i • February 2000

Fax:+31-20-679 2296 E-mail: wilhlhtl@euronet.nl

A d vertise now in th e Prod u cts and Services! 3 placements (I year) for only US$ 100 Please contact the Editor Elzeline van der Hoek

King H otel

P.O. Box 9515

Leidsekade 86-86

2300 RA Leiden

1017 PN Amsterdam

The Netherlands

Tel.:+ 3 1 71 527 2227

Tel.:+ 3 1-20-624 9603 /6 2 7 6101

Fax:+ 3 1-7 1 527 4162

Fax:+31-20-620 7277

E-mail: iiasnews@rullet.leidenuniv.nl